14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual - Desbloqueado

Front Cover
HC5500
TECHNICAL MANUAL
REVISION 2.1
SEPTEMBER 2006
Copyright: 2006 Riso Kagaku Corporation

All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared
and written for the exclusive use of RISO International Group
Certified Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this
material in any form or by any means, including photocopying
or recording of the information is strictly prohibited without the
consent of a member of RISO International Group.
RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN)
RISO, INC. (U.S.A.)
RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.)
RISO HONG KONG LIMITED (HONG KONG)
RISO U.K. (U.K.)
RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND)
RISO KOREA LIMITED (KOREA)
RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)

RISO FRANCE (FRANCE)
RISO IBERICA (SPAIN)
RISO CANADA (CANADA)
ZHUHAI RISO TECHNOLOGY (CHINA)
RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA)
RISOGRAPH ITALIA (ITALY)
manuals4you.com
CONTENTS
Maintenance Notes
1.Precautions.....................................................................................................4
1-1.General precautions ...........................................................................4
1-2.Special precautions for color inkjet printers .......................................4
1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance............................6
1-4.Sensors ..............................................................................................6
2.Tools ...............................................................................................................7
2-1.List of general tools ............................................................................7
2-2.List of special tools for servicing HC5500 ..........................................9
2-3.Periodical Maintenance ....................................................................12
3.Printer setup procedure ................................................................................13
3-1.Confirmations to be performed during printer setup.........................13
4.Other precautions .........................................................................................14
4-1.Precautions for machine setup.........................................................14
4-2.Precautions for use ..........................................................................14
4-3.Printing precautions .........................................................................15
Removal of Covers
Disassembly
1.Removal of covers ..........................................................................................2
Device overview
1.HC5500 Machine Specification.......................................................................2
2.Overview of Mechanisms................................................................................3
2-1.Structural blocks.................................................................................3
2-2.Overview of paper transport ...............................................................4
2-3.Ink flow passages...............................................................................6
First paper feed section

Mechanisms
1.Standard paper feed tray mechanism.............................................................2

1-1.Basic mechanism ...............................................................................2
1-2.Paper size detection mechanism .......................................................3
2.Standard paper feed tray elevating mechanism .............................................4
2-1.Basic mechanism ...............................................................................4
2-2.Feed tray button .................................................................................4
2-3.Standard paper feed tray operation safety mechanism .....................6
manuals4you.com
3.Remaining paper volume detection mechanism ............................................ 7

4.First paper feed mechanism........................................................................... 8
4-1.Paper transport mechanism............................................................... 8
4-2.Paper stripper mechanism ............................................................... 10
4-3.Paper feed pressure adjustment mechanism .................................. 10
Disassembly
11
1.Standard paper feed tray unit....................................................................... 11
1-1.Removal of standard paper feed tray unit........................................ 11
1-2.Removal of paper width VR, paper detection sensor, and paper size
detection sensor............................................................................... 13
2.Pickup roller shaft......................................................................................... 14
2-1.Removal of pickup roller shaft (pickup roller, scraper)..................... 14
2-2.Removal of first paper feed stay assembly ...................................... 15
2-3.Removal of paper feed clutch and paper feed shaft ........................ 16
3.Elevator mechanism & bottom guide plate................................................... 17
3-1.Removal of elevator motor............................................................... 17
3-2.Removal of bottom guide plate ........................................................ 19
3-3.Removal of standard paper feed tray lower limit switch................... 20
Adjustment
21
1.Adjustment of the upper limit sensor position............................................... 21
2.Adjustment of stripper pressure ................................................................... 22
3.Paper width VR correction............................................................................ 22
4.Other adjustments ........................................................................................ 23
4-1.Standard paper feed tray upper limit position .................................. 23
4-2.Standard paper feed tray postfeed .................................................. 23
4-3.Paper feed start from standard paper feed tray ............................... 23
4-4.Assist for standard paper feed tray .................................................. 23
4-5.Multiple feed detection for standard paper feed tray........................ 23
4-6.Gap between the papers.................................................................. 23
Multi-tray paper feed section

Mechanisms
1.Machine configuration .................................................................................... 2

1-1.Basic structure ................................................................................... 2
1-2.Paper transport path .......................................................................... 3
2.Paper transport section in the MTPF Unit ...................................................... 4
2-1.Paper feed tray .................................................................................. 4
2-2.Feed tray elevating mechanism ......................................................... 4
2-3.Paper transport mechanism............................................................... 6
2-4.Vertical transfer unit ........................................................................... 8
Disassembly
10
1.Paper feed trays ........................................................................................... 10
1-1.Removal of paper feed trays............................................................ 10
manuals4you.com
1-2.Removal of paper width VR (potentiometer) ....................................11

2.Paper transport unit in the MTPF Unit. .........................................................12
2-1.Removal of paper transport unit.......................................................12
3.Vertical transfer unit......................................................................................14
3-1.Removal of vertical transfer unit.......................................................14
4.Disassembly of other parts ...........................................................................18
Adjustment
19
1.Adjustment of upper limit sensor position .....................................................19
2.Stripper adjustment.......................................................................................20
3.Paper width VR correction ............................................................................21
4.Multiple feed sensor (feed sensor 3) adjustment..........................................21
5.Other adjustments ........................................................................................21
5-1.Amount of postfeed ..........................................................................21
5-2.Assist................................................................................................21
5-3.Double-feed detection timing. ..........................................................21
Second paper feed section

Mechanisms
1.Mechanism of the second paper feed section ................................................2

1-1.Paper transport path ..........................................................................2
1-2.Drive system for paper transport ......................................................11
Disassembly
13
1.Registration roller upper ...............................................................................13
2.Registration roller lower ................................................................................16
3.Side registration unit .....................................................................................20
4.Transfer unit..................................................................................................23
5.Transfer belt..................................................................................................25
6.Belt encoder..................................................................................................27
7.Transfer belt motor .......................................................................................28
8.Suction fan....................................................................................................29
9.Cleaning roller...............................................................................................30
10.BP Spacer, Gear and BP spacer motor......................................................31
11.Exit unit .......................................................................................................33
11-1.Exit motor unit ................................................................................34
11-2.Wing motor.....................................................................................34
12.Sponge roller ..............................................................................................35
13.Flipper unit ..................................................................................................36
14.Flipper roller upper / Flipper roller lower .....................................................37
15.Duplex entrance roller.................................................................................38
16.Duplex unit..................................................................................................40
17.Duplex belt upper........................................................................................41
18.Duplex belt lower ........................................................................................43
19.Switchback unit upper.................................................................................44
20.Switchback unit lower .................................................................................45
manuals4you.com
21.Switchback drive roller ............................................................................... 47

22.Switchback unit .......................................................................................... 48
23.Main motor ................................................................................................. 49
24.Registration clutch...................................................................................... 50
25.Paper feed clutch ....................................................................................... 52
26.Duplex clutch unit ....................................................................................... 53
27.Multiple feed sensor (receive) .................................................................... 54
28.Lift gear unit................................................................................................ 55
29.Multiple feed sensor (send) ........................................................................ 57
Adjustment
58
1.Adjusting the skew of the transfer unit belt................................................... 59
1-1.< Overview of adjustment > ............................................................. 59
1-2.< Adjustment method >.................................................................... 59
2.Adjustment to position the transfer unit parallel to registration rollers.......... 62
3.Transfer belt speed adjustment.................................................................... 65
4.Initial paper feed motor adjustment .............................................................. 66
5.Adjustment of backup roller position ............................................................ 68
6.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller paper guide ............................ 69
7.Adjustment of the Registration roller upper .................................................. 70
8.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller guide ...................................... 72
9.Adjustment of frame distortion compensation .............................................. 73
10.Adjustment of CCD gain on the side registration unit................................. 74
11.Adjustment of the Flipper Gate position ..................................................... 76
Cleaning method
78
1.Removal of paper dust ................................................................................. 78
2.Cleaning the rollers ...................................................................................... 80
Ink supply passages

Mechanisms
1.Mechanism of ink supply passages................................................................ 2

1-1.Ink supply passages .......................................................................... 2
1-2.Main parts of the ink feed passages .................................................. 5
1-3.Main parts in the waste ink passage................................................ 16
1-4.Mechanisms common to the ink feed and waste ink passages ....... 21
1-5.Operations of ink supply passages .................................................. 22
Disassembly
25
1.Bottle joint (K, C, M, Y)................................................................................. 25
2.Receiver PCB............................................................................................... 29
3.Ink Reservoir K / C / M / Y............................................................................ 31
4.Overflow tank ............................................................................................... 35
5.Pressure pump unit ...................................................................................... 36
6.Pressure chamber ........................................................................................ 37
7.ID unit / ID solenoid valve............................................................................. 38
7-1.ID unit............................................................................................... 38
manuals4you.com
7-2. <Removing ID solenoid valve > ......................................................41

8.Print head .....................................................................................................42
9.Head drive PCB ............................................................................................46
10.Cleaning unit...............................................................................................47
11.Suction head...............................................................................................50
12.Cap (exists on HC5000 only)......................................................................51
13.Suction chamber.........................................................................................52
14.Ink catch pan ..............................................................................................54
15.Waste ink tank ............................................................................................55
16.Waste ink tank holder .................................................................................56
17.Suction pump unit, pump filter, pump sponge ............................................57
Adjustment
59
1.Adjustment after print head replacement......................................................59
1-1.Parameter setting .............................................................................59
1-2.Preparation for the image adjustment ..............................................60
1-3. Connection of USB cable from the HC printer to Laptop PC. .........60
1-4.Installation method of the USB driver...............................................61
1-5.Set up method of auto image adjustment software ..........................61
1-6.Set up method of Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner driver. ...............61
1-7.Set up method of manual image adjustment software .....................61
1-8.Auto image adjustment procedure ...................................................61
1-9.Warm-up operation for the transfer belt ...........................................62
1-10.Setting adjustment patterns on the flatbed scanner .......................62
1-11.Placing the Matte Papers correctly on the feed tray ......................63
1-12.Preparation of the Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner.......................64
1-13.Executing the auto image adjustment. ...........................................67
1-14.Execution of Manual Image Adjustment.........................................89
2.Adjustments on the Cleaning Unit. ...............................................................95
2-1.Cleaning start position......................................................................95
2-2.Cleaning position..............................................................................96
2-3.Cleaning finish position ....................................................................97
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting for printing problems
1.Causes of main printing problems and corrective measures..........................2

1-1.Procedure for responding to printing problems ..................................2
2.Explanation of automatic image adjustment and adjusted image quality .......5
2-1.Overview of automatic image adjustment ..........................................5
2-2.Overview of test patterns for image adjustment .................................5
2-3.Parameters and image quality ...........................................................5
2-4.Image defects caused by erroneous image adjustment performed by
service personnel ...............................................................................6
2-5.Effects of parameters and image characteristics ...............................9
manuals4you.com
Paper receiving section

Mechanisms
1.Basic mechanism ........................................................................................... 2

1-1.Overview of mechanism..................................................................... 2
2. Fence sliding mechanism.............................................................................. 4
2-1.Fence sliding mechanism .................................................................. 4
2-2.Sliding operations at the beginning of the print operation.................. 6
2-3.Other .................................................................................................. 6
Disassembly
7
1.Paper receiving tray ....................................................................................... 7
1-1.Removing the paper receiving tray < disassembly > ......................... 7
2.The parts in the paper receiving tray.............................................................. 8
2-1.Removing of the side fence belt......................................................... 8
2-2.Removing the side fence pulse motor................................................ 9
2-3.Removing the end fence belt ........................................................... 10
2-4.Removing the end fence pulse motor .............................................. 11
Controller & power supply unit

Specification
1.PS7R-9000..................................................................................................... 2
2.HC3R-5000 .................................................................................................... 3
3
Mechanism
4
1.Controller (PS7R-9000 & HC3R-5000) .......................................................... 4
1-1.Front panel of the controller ............................................................... 4
1-2. Back panel of the controller .............................................................. 6
Disassembly
8
1.PS7R for HC5000........................................................................................... 8
2.PS7R-9000, PS7R-9000(G2) & HC3R-5000.................................................. 9
3.Power supply unit ......................................................................................... 10
Test mode
Test mode (SE-Mode)
1.Operation method........................................................................................... 2
1-1.Startup and shutdown of the Test mode ............................................ 2
1-2.Operations in Test mode.................................................................... 2
2.List of menu items .......................................................................................... 3
2-1.Menu items in Normal SE mode ........................................................ 3
2-2.Menu items related to Finisher......................................................... 22
1.List of HS2000 scanner menu items ............................................................ 36
1-1.Getting into and getting out of the Test mode.................................. 36
manuals4you.com
1-2.Test Mode Menu List for HS2000 Scanner ......................................37
Panel messages
Overview of panel messages
1.Overview of panel ...........................................................................................2

2.Basic structure of panel ..................................................................................2
2-1.LED-1 .................................................................................................2
2-2.Power key ..........................................................................................3
2-3.Print mode key ...................................................................................3
3.Error indication by LEDs .................................................................................4
3-1.Outline diagram ..................................................................................4
3-2.Consumable information ....................................................................4
3-3.Error types..........................................................................................4
4.Panel messages .............................................................................................5
4-1.Overview of messages .......................................................................5
5.Types of errors................................................................................................6
5-1.Error type ...........................................................................................6
5-2.Explanation of panel messages .......................................................13
6.Panel messages for FB and AF area............................................................33
6-1.Overview of messages .....................................................................33
6-2.Error type .........................................................................................33
6-3.Error reset method ...........................................................................34
6-4.Explanation of panel messages .......................................................34
PCBs and Schematic diagrams

1.Role of PCB ....................................................................................................2
2.Power Supply Unit ..........................................................................................4
3.Notes at the time of ORIP PCB exchange......................................................5
4.Downloading/Upgrading the machine program firmware................................7
5.Exchange of ORMC (mechanical control) PCB ..............................................8
6.Schematic .....................................................................................................10
Scanner
Mechanism
1.RISO Scanner HS2000...................................................................................2

1-1.Specification.......................................................................................2
2.FB Unit............................................................................................................3
2-1.Original Set Section ...........................................................................3
2-2.Original Scanning ...............................................................................4
2-3.Functional positions of the scanner....................................................5
3.AF Unit............................................................................................................6
manuals4you.com
3-1.Original Set Section ........................................................................... 6

3-2.Original Path ...................................................................................... 7
3-3.Roller Rotations ................................................................................. 9
Disassembly
11
1.FB unit .......................................................................................................... 11
1-1.Covers.............................................................................................. 11
1-2.Stage Glass ..................................................................................... 12
1-3.Original Detection Sensor and Original Size Detection Sensors ..... 12
1-4.Lamp ................................................................................................ 13
1-5.CCD Unit.......................................................................................... 13
1-6.Cooling Fan...................................................................................... 14
1-7.Stage Cover Sensor and Stage Cover Angle Sensor ...................... 14
1-8.Read Motor ...................................................................................... 14
2.AF Unit ......................................................................................................... 15
2-1.Stripper Area.................................................................................... 15
2-2.Parts around the Feed Roller........................................................... 16
2-3. .......................................................Parts on the Original Feed Tray18
2-4. .............................................................. Parts on the AF Drive Area19
3. ..................................................................AF & FB Firmware Downloading22
Adjustment
24
1.Adjustments on the AF Unit.......................................................................... 24
1-1.AF Tray VR Sensor.......................................................................... 24
1-2.AF Original IN Sensor ...................................................................... 24
1-3.Other Adjustments ........................................................................... 24
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
CHAPTER 1: Maintenance Notes

CONTENTS
1-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
CAUTION
[ Handling of Lithium Battery ]
-Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used lithium
battery.
1. Never let the battery short-circuited.
If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery
will be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or
one upon another, the above-mentioned case will occur.
- DANGER If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases
explode into fire.
2. Never heat up the battery.
- DANGER If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into the
fire, it may burn dangerously or explode.
3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.
- DANGER If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt
your throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.
If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of
the sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.
4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.
If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.
Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.
[ Replacement of the Lithium Battery ]

1) The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service
technician.
2) The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
3) Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer instructions.
1-2
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION <Technical Training Section>
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
!! WARNING !!
Important Safety Precautions
(1)
Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.

1) To avoid injuries:
Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling,
or when making adjustments on the machine.
2) Protection of the machine:
Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.
(2)
WARNING:
The back light tube of LCD of the Control Panel on this Model contains mercury
which must be recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste.
(3)
Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

1) To avoid electrical failure:
The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.
Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm
fit.
2) Protection of the electrical components:
The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a
loose connector.
Wire harness connector
FIRST
Press the ends.
THEN
Press the center, firmly.
1-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1.Precautions
1-1.Gen eral precautions
* U n p l u g t h e p o w e r c o r d f r o m t h e A C o u t l e t b e f o r e p e r f o rm i n g m a i n t e n a n c e .
* B e c a r e f u l t o a v o i d g e t t i n g n e c k t i e s , c l ot h i ng , or l on g h a i r t a n gl e d i n
m ov i n g p a rt s .
* I f y o u m u s t p e r f o rm w o r k w h i l e t h e m a c h i n e p o w e r i s o n , e x e r c i s e t he
utmost caution.
* Never perform maintenance while the machine is operating.
* Be caution about the automatic descent operation of the transfer unit.
* After predetermined time, the descent operation of the transfer unit to the standby position and the
sliding operation of the cleaning unit to ink heads position are automatically performed.
* Be caution not to turn ON the machine and be injured by pinching hands or arms when covers are
removed for maintenance work.
* W o r k c a r e f u l l y t o a v o i d i n j u r i n g y o u rs e l f o n t h e s h a r p e d g e s o f m e t a l s h e e t s
or springs.
* When a wrist watch, a ring, etc. become the obstacle of work, work by
removing it.
1-2.Speci al p reca ution s fo r c olor ink jet pri nters

* Maintain the device to keep it free of dust (including paper dust).
Dust and paper dust adhering to the nozzles of the print heads may result in a misfire.
Clean internal paper paths with a vacuum cleaner to remove dust (including paper dust) at periodic intervals - for example, when replacing waste ink tanks (periodic inspections). Clean more
or less frequently, depending on your specific operating conditions. The amount of paper dust
that accumulates in the machine will depend on the type of paper used.
Never use an air duster, since doing so will raise paper dust and causes misfires.
* I n k s t o ra g e
Store ink cartridges in the specified conditions. Follow the [first in, first out] principle when
removing ink cartridges from storage, and use ink promptly.
Do not store ink cartridges in environments that may degrade the ink. Degraded ink is more
likely to cause nozzle misfires and other problems.
* Precautions for use of inks
Do not shake the ink bottles before using.
Shaking the bottle will generate air bubbles and mix sediment into the ink solution, making nozzle misfires more likely.
Do not refill with ink.
Check ink left unused for extended periods after ink cartridges are unsealed to make sure it
remains usable.
Ink left in ink cartridges for extended periods after the cartridges are unsealed will oxidize and
degrade. Try to use up ink as quickly as possible after ink cartridges are unsealed.
Using degraded ink may result in problems that require the replacement of the print heads or
other ink-handling parts (misfiring nozzles).
* P r e c a u t i o n s f o r a n t i c i p a t e d p e r i o d s o f e x t e n d e d d is u s e
Ink in the internal ink passages may degrade or dry out over time, resulting in nozzle misfires
and other problems. In the worst cases, misfiring nozzles will require replacing the print heads.
To avoid these problems, we recommend operating the printer now and then.
* P r e c a u t i o n s f o r u s e o f t h e p ri n t e r a f t e r l o n g s t o ra ge
1-4
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
If print head cleaning is not performed before use, misfiring nozzles or other printing problems
may occur.
Start by checking for any misfiring nozzles.
If the nozzles are misfiring, perform head cleaning.
In some cases, the head cleaning procedure will need to be repeated several times to clear the
print head nozzles.
If the nozzle condition does not improve after the nozzles are checked for misfiring and strong
cleaning (conducted for each color) is repeated several times, the print heads may need to be
replaced.
* Differences between display and print colors
The colors on prints may differ slightly from the colors seen on your display device.
The difference in the colors may be attributable to various factors, including differences between
RGB and CMYK color systems, the RIP color system, display device settings, etc.
* Never touch the surfaces of the print head nozzles.
Scratching the print head nozzle surface or dust adhering to the print head nozzle surface may
cause printing problems. Never wipe the print head nozzle surface.
In the worst cases (misfiring nozzles), such problems may require replacement of the print
heads. To prevent problems, avoid touching print head nozzle surfaces during machine maintenance. Be careful to avoid scratching print head nozzle surfaces with tools or parts when working near the print heads.
* Protect the print heads from any physical shock.
The print heads are extremely fragile. Handle them carefully, and avoid dropping or striking
them.
* Selection of paper type
Use only the specified paper type. Using the wrong paper may result in poor adhesion of ink to
the paper.
If you choose to use a paper product not specifically recommended by the manufacturer, first
perform a printing test. Papers producing paper dust will cause misfires.
Ink that fails to adhere to the paper may be left on the transport roller or transfer belt, smudging
subsequent prints.
Internal parts contaminated by ink may require more frequent maintenance. To avoid these
problems, select your paper carefully.
* M a i n t e n a n c e o f p ro p e r o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s
Ink viscosity affects the ink ejecting performance of inkjet printers.
Ink viscosity increases with lower temperatures, making ejection problems like nozzle misfires
more likely. Use the printer only under the specified operating conditions.
* Cleaning wipe
To wipe off ink from the printer, use the Kimtech or Kimwipe products manufactured by CRECIA
Corp. or similar dust- and fiber-free materials. Never use ordinary tissue paper.
Fibers and paper dust from cleaning materials may cause nozzle misfires and other problems.
Never wipe the print head (the head surface). Let the machine clean the head by itself.
1-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-3.Other precauti ons for insp ectio n an d main tenan ce

Precautions for inspections
If a defect or abnormality is found during inspections, correct the problem and replace parts, if
necessary.
Pr e c a u t i o n s f o r p a r t s r e m o v a l
When ascertaining the location of a problem, also determine the cause of the problem. After
determining whether it is necessary to remove parts or disassemble the machine, perform the
required repairs according to the procedures given in the technical manual.
Watch for ink leaks when disassembling ink-handling components.
Don't apply power beyond necessity with the ink tube junction. Moreover, work, being careful for
the ink tube junction not to disconnect accidentally.
When disassembling a component consisting of many parts, similar parts or symmetrical right
and left parts, organize the removed parts to ensure proper reassembly.
1) Set aside and arrange removed parts.
2) Clearly identify which parts are to be replaced and which parts are to be reused.
3) When replacing screws or other fasteners, use only parts of the specified size.
Precautions for reinstallation and reassembly
To reassemble or reinstall parts, follow the disassembly or removal sequence in reverse, unless otherwise
specified.
If parts have protrusions and indentations for positioning (half pierced), align them carefully to ensure
proper installation.
When you attach the ink tube, attach after wiping off
finely, when the inner side of the ink tube or ink tube
junction is dirty in ink.
half pierced
Precautions for electrical work

If bundled wires have come loose, use a cable tie or
band to hold them together after finishing the work.
When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching or damaging electrical wires.
Replace blown or defective fuses with fuses of the specified capacity rating.
In addition to equipment damage, using a fuse with a rating above the specified value may result
in fire.
Others.
In making the adjustment by SE mode, No.8.5.6.1 must be activated to save the changed data
onto both the NVRAM on the ORIP PCB and FlashMemory. Otherwise the change is downloaded onto the NVRAM only with no backup.
If this process is omitted, restoring the data will take time when a parameter error occurs on the
NVRAM.
If the updated information is always stored in the FlashMemory, No.8.5.6.2 by the SE-mode easily restores the data back onto the NVRAM.
1-4.Senso rs
Be sure to turn off power before disconnecting or connecting sensors.
Ph oto sen so r ty pes
1-6
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
In general, photo sensors can be divided into four types: the interrupt type (U-shaped), the actuator type, the reflection type, and the transmission type.
actuator type
interrupt type (U-shaped)

send
send
receive
receive
reflection type
transmission type
send
send
receive
receive
Magnetic sensor types

Some magnetic sensors use Hall ICs, while others use magnetic reed switches.
Switch types
Microswitches use either N.O. (Normally
Open) contact or N.C. (Normally Closed)
contact.
The N.O. contact closes when the switch
actuator is pressed.
The N.C. contact opens when the switch
actuator is pressed.
N.C.
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
COM
COM
2 . Too l s
Using tools other than those specified may result in damage to screws or other parts, or result in
personal injury. Be sure to have all the necessary tools on hand before beginning work.
2-1. List of general tools

Type
Phillips screwdriver
Flathead screwdriver
Size
Shaft length, etc.
No. 2
250 mm
No. 2
100 to 150 mm
No. 2
Stubby type
No. 1
75 to 100 mm
6 mm
100 to 150 mm
3 mm
100 to 150 mm
1.8 mm
Precision type
1-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Type
Size
Box driver
Shaft length, etc.
8 mm
100 to 150 mm
7 mm
100 to 150 mm
5.5 mm
100 to 159 mm
Spanner
5 mm, 5.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm, 13 mm, adjustable
Allen wrench
6.0mm, 5.0 mm, 4.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 2.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.5 mm
Steel measure
150 mm, 300 mm
Long-nose pliers
Pliers
Snap-ring pliers
Nipper
Penlight
Tester
1-8
Soldering iron
20 to 30 W
File
Flat, rounded
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
2-2. List of speci al to ols for servicin g HC5500
HEAD ANGLE JIG

For adjustment of print head position after replacement.
5.5-mm box driver with adjustment scale (8 equally
spaced marks around the periphery).
Transfer unit support jig

For removal of belt-drive transport unit.
Provided inside the machine.
Interlock switch jig

Jig for temporarily deactivating the interlock switch so
that the right/left front door remain open during operation
checks.
Jig 1 : Top photo (2 pcs) - right hand door removed.
Jig 2 : Center photo (1 pc) - left hand door removed.
Jig 3 & 4 : Bottom photo for - inner cover removed.
Printer unit lifting jig

Used to raise and move the machine for equipment
setup.
Image adjustment utility software:
1-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Notebook PC (commercially available)

Used to run image adjustment utility software and perform
image adjustment and other tasks.
The following are the minimum hardware requirements:
OS: Windows 2000 or XP
CPU: OS-compatible
HDD: Minimum free space of 500 MB
USB 2.0 (2 or more ports)
A4 size flatbed scanner (commercially available)

Used for Image adjustments after print head replacement.
[ CANON CanoScan Lide 35, 40, 50 or 60 ]
REFERENCE CHART
Reference chart used for scanner calibration during
image adjustment.
[When using A4 scanner, the chart must be cut to the A4size line before use if not precut to that size when supplied.]
USB 2.0 cables: 2 types of cables (commercially available)

One normal type USB 2.0 cable and one USB 2.0 extension
cable.
Used for image adjustment
Printer unit - PC [extension USB 2.0 cable]
PC - Scanner [normal USB 2.0 cable]
Cleaning wipes (commercially available)

For cleaning inside the device.
Kimtech, Kimwipe (manufactured by CRECIA Corp.), or
similar product. Use a wiper that leaves no fiber or paper
residue. Never use ordinary tissue paper.
1 - 10
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
Gloves (commercially available)

To be worn when replacing ink-handling parts.
Use powder-free gloves, such as the Cleanoir nitrile
gloves manufactured by [As One Corporation]. Do not
use gloves coated internally with lubricating powder,
since powder from the gloves may enter ink passages
and cause nozzle misfires. Gloves of any type are suitable for handling waste liquid. Use gloves to protect
hands from ink and waste liquid.
Vacuum cleaner (commercially available)

Used to remove paper dust from inside the machine.
Binder clip (commercially available)

Used to clamp tubes containing ink to prevent ink from
leaking out when the tubes are disconnected and
removed. [Not recommended if the clips tend to deform
the ink tubes.]
IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or equivalent

Used for cleaning rollers.
A4-size coated paper

Used in image adjustment.
Loupe (magnifier)
For inspection of printing problems, such as color shifts.
1 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Torque driver
Used to tighten replaced print heads to the specified
torque of 9.0 kfg-cm.
Syringe of about 20 ml in size (commercially available)

For removing ink from the Overflow Tank or from the ID
Unit.
(New unused syringe should be used when removing ink
from the ID Unit.)
Air Filter
Manufacturer: SARTORIUS
Type: Minisart 17594-K 5.0 micrometer
Needed when sending air to the ID Unit using the
Syringe to remove ink from the ID Unit.
(This is to prevent dust from getting into the ID Unit.)
2-3.Periodi cal Mai ntena nce

Parts in which without a periodical maintenance cannot keep the good operation of the machine.
Part Name
1 - 12
Maintenance
Interval
Reference
Pump sponge in Suction Unit

Pump filter in Suction Unit
Waste ink tank
Cleaning roller (HC5000 only)
Replacement
Approx. 300,000
printing.
Transfer unit (Belt & Plate)
Cleaning
Approx. 300,000
printing.
Chapter 6
Switchback roller
Cleaning
Approx. 300,000
printing.
Chapter 6
CCD on Side registration unit
Cleaning
Approx. 300,000
printing.
Chapter 6
Top edge sensors
Cleaning
Approx. 300,000
printing.
Chapter 6
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
3.Printer setup procedure

3-1. Con firmati ons to be performed d uri ng p rin ter setu p
After opening the packages, install and connect the HC5000 main unit, HC control PCB, HC
multi-tray paper feed base, controller, and ink cartridges.
The device will not function correctly if you install an incorrect (incompatible) component in the
HC5500 main unit (MC board), HC control PCB, or ink cartridges, due to a delivery error or other
reason.
If you discover an incompatibility among components, return the incorrect component for an
exchange. A [Temporary Registration Period] is provided to allow temporary use of the printer
during this time.
Notes regarding temporary registration status
After the package is opened and the machine set up, [Temporary Registration Status] becomes
effective when the machine is turned on for the first time. After seven days, the status changes
automatically to [Official Registration Status].
When in temporary registration status, the [Maintenance Call] LED remains lit. Since the
machine can still operate in this condition, exercise all of the precautions normally required.
Therefore, it is necessary to check all the components and consumables for the compatibility
during the installation, or on the 8th day from the installation the error will show.
During the tentative-registration period, No.5.13.1 by the SE mode will turn off the Maintenance
call LED , but it only erases the LED and the tentative-registration still remains.
SE mode No.5.13.2 cancels No.5.13.1 of the above and lights the Maintenance call LED again.
1 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4.Other precautions
4-1.Precauti ons for machi ne se tup
F o r d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n , r e f e r t o t he U s e r s M a n ua l f or t he H C 5 5 0 0 S e r i e s .
Discuss with the user to determine where the product is to be installed upon delivery.
To minimize the possibility of malfunctions, equipment problems, and accidents, do not install in
any of the following locations:
1) Places exposed to direct sunlight, or bright locations by windows.
(If the machine must be installed by a window, install a curtain or shade on the window.)
2) Places subject to significant temperature fluctuations.
3) Places subject to extremes of temperatures or humidity.
Appropriate temperature range: 15 to 30 degrees Celsius
Appropriate humidity range: 40 to 70% (no condensation permitted)
4) Places close to flames or heat sources, close to cold air sources such as air conditioners,
or close to hot air sources such as heaters or direct radiation heat sources.
5) Places without adequate ventilation.
6) Places that are excessively dusty.
7) Places subject to vibrations.
8) Places with uneven or tilting floors.
(Requirements for floor levelness: Max. 10 mm vertical deviation front to back or left to
right)
Connection of power supply
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the cord by the plug. Never pull on the cord itself. Pulling on the cord directly may damage the cord and lead to fire or electric shock. Be sure to hold
the plug when unplugging the power cord.
Use an exclusive AC outlet. Do not share the AC outlet with other electrical devices.
When using an extension cord, limit the cord length to 5 m.
Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not attempt to modify the power cord. Avoid placing heavy
items on the cord, or bending the cord sharply. Damaged cords may result in fire or electric
shock.
Connection of ground wire
To prevent a fire or electric shock in the event of electrical leakage, be sure to connect the
ground wire.
Observe the following when connecting the ground wire:
Ground terminal of AC outlet
Copper rod inserted 65 cm or deeper into the ground
Ground terminal in compliance with grounding standards
Water supply pipe approved for grounding purpose by the waterworks department
Do not connect the ground wire to any of the following locations:
Gas pipes
Ground wires designated exclusively for telephones
Lightning conductors
Water supply pipes or faucets connected to a pipeline consisting even partially of plastic
4 -2 .Pre cau t i o n s f o r u se
Operations
1 - 14
Do not turn off the main power or unplug the power cord while the machine is operating.
Do not open the cover or move the machine while the machine is operating.
Open or close covers gently.
Never place heavy items on the machine. Protect it from sudden and powerful shocks or impact.
manuals4you.com
Maintenance Notes
After the main power is turned off, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it back on.
After an extended period of disuse, perform maintenance (normal cleaning) for the print heads
to guard against degraded or dried ink in the ink passages that could clog the print heads. To
avoid such problems, use the machine at regular intervals.
To safeguard against equipment malfunctions and poor print quality, avoid touching the print
heads.
Make sure that the ink cartridges (4 colors) are installed at all times, even if it will not be used for
a certain period of time.
H a n dl i n g a n d s t o ra g e o f i n k c a r t r i d g e s
Do not shake the ink bottle before use. Shaking the bottle generates air bubbles and can cause
printing problems.
Do not refill with ink.
Ink left in the ink cartridges for an extended period after the cartridges are unsealed may
degrade from exposure to air. In turn, using degraded ink may cause problems with print heads
and ink passages.
The viscosity of the ink directly affects the ink-ejecting performance of inkjet printers. Viscosity
increases with lower temperatures, potentially clogging print heads. Be sure to observe the
specified operating conditions and storage temperatures. Check the manufacturing date of the
ink to ensure that it is fresh and use it as soon as possible.
The permissible operating temperature range is 15 to 30 degrees Celsius. Using the machine
outside this temperature range may result in printing problems (e.g., reduced volume of ink ejection).
Do not dispose of ink from an ink cartridge into municipal sewers.
Keep the side with the opening face-up during storage.
Do not allow ink to freeze. Keep ink out of direct sunlight. Store ink cartridges in areas where the
temperature does not drop below 5 or exceed 35 degrees Celsius. Check the manufacturing
date before use, and use ink as soon as possible.
The ink used in the device is a flammable liquid.
In the event of fire, use a pressurized water and alkali salt mist, foam, powder or carbon dioxide
fire extinguisher.
P a pe r h a n d l i n g a n d s t o ra g e
Do not use warped paper.
Printed images will gradually fade (discolor) due to the effects of various elements in the air and
light. To minimize fading and discoloration during storage, allow prints to dry thoroughly, then
laminate, or place in frames under glass.
If prints are placed in clear folders for storage, use folders made of PET (polyethylene terephthalate).
Printed images will discolor if prints are subjected to any moisture (e.g., water or perspiration).
Do not store prints in areas where water may splash on them.Do not use oil-base marker pens.
Ink from these pens may blotch.
Print density 24 hours after output will differ from the print density immediately after output. Keep
in mind that print density decreases over time.
Do not place prints produced by this machine on top of prints produced by a laser printer or photocopier.The toner-printed section of the other print may stick to the print surface, or the toner
may transfer to the print surface.
Store unused paper by covering with the wrapping sheet.
Do not store paper in areas of high temperatures or humidity. Keep out of direct sunlight. Store
paper on a flat surface. Note that warped paper cannot be used in the machine.
4-3. Printing p reca utio ns

It is illegal to make duplicates of certain printed materials, even for personal use.
Note that possession of duplicates of certain printed materials constitutes a legal violation.
Printing of the following printed materials is illegal:
1 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Bank notes, coins, government securities, government bond certificates, or local bond certificates (Any copying of such material is illegal, even if the printed matter is clearly marked
as SPECIMEN or similar indication.)
Bank notes, coins, bond certificates, etc. circulated in foreign countries.
Unused postal stamps, postcards, etc.
Government-issued revenue stamps, certificate stamps specified in the Liquor Tax Law,
etc.
Do not make copies of the following printed materials:
Privately issued marketable securities (stock certificates, promissory notes, checks, etc.),
commuter passes, commuter tickets, etc. in numbers exceeding the minimum quantities
required for business.
Government-issued passports and licenses, permits, identification cards, admission tickets, meal tickets, etc. issued by public or private organizations
Copyrighted materials such as books, sheet music, paintings, block prints, maps, drawings,
photographs, etc.
Relevant laws
Counterfeit Currency and Securities Control Law
Law Concerning Counterfeiting, Alteration, or Forgery of Coins, Paper Currency, Bank
Notes, or Securities Circulated in Foreign Countries
Law Concerning Forging of Stamps or Other Postal Materials
Revenue Stamp Counterfeit Control Law
Law Concerning Regulation of Securities Resembling Paper Currency
1 - 16
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers
CHAPTER 2: Removal of Covers

CONTENTS
2-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Disassembly
1.Removal of covers
CAUTION : Be careful not to drop washers when removing the screws.
< Top cover >
1) Remove the four M4x12 screws with washers. (HC5000:M4x8 screws)
2) Open the Ink cover and remove the two M4x12 screws with washers.
(HC5000:M4x8 screws)
3) Open the front door and loosen a M4x8 IT screw through the hole.
* Loosen the screw approximately two turns.
* Take care not to drop the screw inside the cover.
4) Lift the top cover to remove.

* Take care not to drop the cover, as injury may result.
* When the Top Cover is removed from the machine, the Ink Cartridge Cover must be kept open, or
otherwise the plastic lock-hook on the Ink Cartridge cover will break off.
* While mounting the Top Cover back on the machine, pay caution not to pinch the wire harness on the
left, right and at the bottom.
2-2
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers

1) Open the ink cover.
2) Remove the two M4x10 tapping screws on each side that are used to mount the opening/
closing mechanisms.
3) Lift the ink cover to remove.
< Rear cover >

1) Remove the five M4x8 screws with washers.
2) Undo the top center hook to the top cover and slide the rear cover toward the back to
remove.
Remove the cover pushing little upside of the cover.
* Pay caution not to pinch the wire harness when mounting the Rear Cover.
2-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< MTPF rear cover >

1) Remove the seven M4x8 binding screws.
2) Slide the MTPF rear cover toward the back to remove.
< MTPF right cover >

1) Remove the five M4x8 binding screws.
2) Remove the MTPF right cover.
< MTPF left cover >

1) Open the MTPF left door and remove the door by taking off two screws on the top.
2) Remove the four M4x8 binding screws from the MTPF left cover
3) Remove the MTPF left cover.
MTPF left door

(This door has to be removed first)
MTPF left cover
2-4
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers
< Right cover / Left cover >
1) Remove the two M4x8 screws with washers.
2) Pull the cover down to remove.
< Fr on t d o o r R / F ro n t d o o r L >
1) Remove the right / left covers.
2) Remove the four M4x8 screws with washers from the hinges.
3) Open and remove the door.
* With the screws removed from the hinges, the cover is held in place only by magnetic catchers. Since
opening the cover will free it from any support, exercise caution while performing the work.
* To operate the machine without the front door R / front door L in place, set the dedicated safety
switch activating jigs at the safety switches (three locations on the inner cover).
* Remove the front door R / front door L. Check to make sure that the duplex unit and vertical transfer
unit are set if duplex print and MTPF paper supply is used. The setting of the two units can be
checked by closing the door (the door will not close if these two units are not correctly set). Hence,
confirmation is not possible without the door.
2-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< Inner cover 1 >

1) Open the front door R / front door L.
2) Remove the three M4x8 screws with washers.
< Inner cover 4 >

3) Lift inner cover 4 to remove. (The bottom portion has hooks.).
< Inner cover 3 >

2) Remove the three M4x8 screws and two M4x12 screws with washers.
(HC5000 : two M4x12 screws and two M4x8 screws with washers.)
3) Remove the two connectors for the interlock switches (located inside the cover). Detach
inner cover 3.
M4x12 screws
2-6
M4x8 screws
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers
< Inner cover 2 >
2) Remove the Inner cover 3.
3) Remove the knob and lever.
4) Remove a M4x8 screw with washer. Detach inner cover 2.
Cautions in installing the inner cover 2 back on the machine.

* In mounting the lever back on the machine, match the D-shaped hole on the lever with the D-shaped
cut on the shaft. If the D-shaped hole is deformed, correct lever position cannot be achieved.
* Set the Lever to the original default position. The center position is the default.
* Pay caution that the wire harness does not come out.
* Pay caution not to pinch the wire harness.
* Depending on how the cover is mounted back on the machine will change the lever position. The
inner cover 2 should be put back by pushing it to the right and to the bottom, as shown on the last
photograph on this page.
*
Watch out for the wire coming out.
Put the cover back in correct position.

(Push to the right and to the bottom.)
2-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< MTPF molding >

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2-8
Open the front door R/front door L.

Detach inner cover 4.
Detach inner cover 1.
Remove the two M4x6 screws with washers.
Remove the MTPF molding.
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers
< Exit unit cover >
1) Remove the paper receiving tray.
3) Lift the exit unit cover to remove. (The bottom portion has hooks.).
< PCB box cover >

1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the rear cover.

Loosen the two M3x6 IT screws.
Remove the five M3x6 IT screws. (HC5000 : 17 pcs of M3x6 IT screws.)
Remove the PCB box cover.
These two screws are

to be loosened only.
2-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< How to set the PCB box to the service position >
1) Remove the right and left screws. Lift the PCB box.
2) Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
Remove screw
Stay
Remove screw
REAR LEFT
Fix the PCB box in raised position by the screw, both on the left and on the right.
* Loosen a screw and position the stays out of the way to keep from striking your head against them.
* The dust fan rotates when a print operation is made. Be careful not to touch it and avoid clothing from
getting tangled in the rotating fan.
* Return the PCB box back to the normal position from the service position before closing the PCB box
cover with the screws. Otherwise the PCB box twists and the screw holes for the stay will not align.
* After returning the PCB box to its original position, be sure to engage the tube to the retaining hooks
(at 2 locations.)
the retaining hook
2 - 10
manuals4you.com
Removal of Covers
< Right carriage cover/left carriage cover >
1) Remove the top cover.
2) Loosen the four IT screws holding the ink cartridge holder unit in place.
3) Slide the entire unit toward the left, looking from the operators side.
(This step is required only when removing the left carriage cover).
4) Remove the control panel together with the bracket.

5) Unhook the Flat cable of the operation panel out from the two flat cable saddles and lift the
Flat cable to access to the holes for the screw driver to go in.
the Flat cable
the operation panel
6) Open the front door R/front door L.

7) Lift the knob on the switchback unit U, secure in place, then pull out the duplex unit.
2 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
8) Loosen the two M4x8 IT screws at the back on each carriage cover.
Remove the two M4x8 IT screws at the center.
The two screws at the front on each carriage cover need not be removed.
* The screws at the front, which need not be removed contains spacers. If these front screws need to
be removed, make sure not to drop the spacers.
M4x8 IT screws
(loosen)
No need to remove the

screws in the front.
M4x8 IT screws
(remove)
9) Remove each carriage cover through the gap in the frame.

* When removing or reinstalling carriage covers, be careful to avoid catching and pulling the ribbon
cables connected to the print heads.
* The ink cartridges do not need to be removed when moving the ink cartridge holder unit to the service
position. However, if you remove the ink cartridges for any reason, take care to keep foreign particles
off the joint sections on which the ink cartridges mount. (Additionally, keep the joint sections of the ink
cartridges clean.)
2 - 12
manuals4you.com
Device overview
CHAPTER 3: Device overview

CONTENTS
3-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1 . H C 5 5 0 0 M a c h i n e Sp e c i f i c a t i o n
HC5500 Main Unit
3-2
manuals4you.com
Device overview
2.Overview of Mechanisms
2-1. Structural bl ocks
The HC5000 consists of the following six main blocks:
1) First paper feed section:
This section feeds a single sheet of paper from paper stacked in the standard paper
feed tray, sending it to the second paper feed section.
2) Multi-tray paper feed section:
This section feeds a single sheet of paper from the paper stacked in the two front
paper feed trays, sending it to the second paper feed section.
3) Second paper feed section:
This section transports the papers toward the exit tray as printing is done at the print
head section.
In the case of duplex printing, paper is sent to the switchback section for printing on
the other side.
4) Exit section:
This section transfers printed paper onto the paper receiving tray.
5) Ink supply section:
This section feeds ink from the ink cartridges to the print heads for printing.
Waste ink generated during cleaning is collected in the waste ink tank.
6) Controller section:
The controller controls operations such as execution of print jobs, touch panel operations, and scanner operations.
* The controller of HC5000 (except PS7R9000) is installed within the multi-tray paper feed section.
* On HC5500, although the row of the ink cartridges is the order of KCMY, the tubes of K and C cross
before arriving to the ink reservoirs, and the row of the print heads is in order of CKMY.
* The row of the print head of HC5000 is in the order of KCMY as with the ink cartridges.
Ink cartridge
Print head
Switchback section
Paper receiving tray
Standard paper feed tray
Paper feed tray (MTPF)

Waste ink tank
Controller
3-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2.Ove rvi ew of p aper transp ort

Paper transport
Paper is supplied from the standard paper feed tray to registration rollers by two rollers: scraper
and pickup roller.
From paper feed tray 1, paper is sent by the scraper and pickup roller to the registration rollers
via paper feed rollers 3 and 4.
In the same way, paper is sent from paper feed tray 2 by the scraper and pickup roller to the registration rollers via paper feed rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4.
With a suction fan keeping the paper firmly on the transfer belt, the registration rollers transport
the paper under the print heads for printing.
After one side of paper is printed, the paper transport direction is selected by the flipper unit flipper gate. For simplex printing, paper is transported to the exit tray via the sponge roller.
For duplex printing, paper is transported to the switchback unit via the flipper unit and duplex
unit.
Paper is then reversed by the switchback unit, and the separation claws send the paper to the
registration rollers once again.
Switchback unit
Duplex unit
Flipper unit
Pickup roller
Separation claw
Flipper gate
Registration roller
Scraper
Paper receiving tray

Paper feed roller 4
Paper feed roller 3
Suction fan
Transfer belt
Sponge roller
Paper feed roller 2

Paper feed tray 1
Paper feed roller 1
Paper feed tray 2
3-4
manuals4you.com
Device overview
P a p e r t r a n s p o rt s e n s o r s
The status of paper transported from the paper feed tray is checked by FL feed sensors 1
through 4.
A multiple feed can result when A3-size paper is fed from paper feed tray 1, with the second
sheet feeding immediately after the first sheet.
To prevent this, paper feed tray 1 is equipped with Multi-tray 1 pickup sensor.
FL feed sensor 3 detects the paper transport status and senses multiple paper feeds from the
paper feed tray.
Multiple paper feeds from the standard paper feed tray are detected by the multiple feed sensor.
The status of the paper transported to the registration rollers is detected by the registration sensor.
The top edge sensor 1 & 2 detect the leading edge of the paper being transported from the registration rollers and adjust the print start position.
* Although HC5500 is equipped with two sensors 1 & 2, HC5000 is equipped with only one top edge
sensor (the location of the top edge sensor on HC5000 is in the same location as the top edge sensor
1 of HC5500).
The CCD detects both side edges of the paper being transported from the registration sensor
and controls the side printing positions.
If paper is transported with its leading edge lifted, it may collide against the print heads, damaging the nozzle surfaces. To prevent this, the paper lift detection sensor detects the lifting of the
paper.
The paper ejection sensor detects the status of the paper transported toward the paper receiving tray.
The flipper sensor detects the status of the paper transported through the flipper unit.
The duplex IN and OUT sensors detect the status of the paper transported through the duplex
unit.
The switchback sensor detects the paper entering or exiting the switchback unit.
Duplex belt IN sensor
Switchback sensor
Duplex belt OUT sensor
Flipper sensor
Registration sensor
Multiple feed sensor
Top edge sensor 1
CCD
Top edge sensor 2
Paper ejection sensor
Paper lift detection sensor

FL feed sensor 4
FL feed sensor 3
FL multi-tray 1 pickup sensor
FL feed sensor 2
FL feed sensor 1
3-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-3.I nk flow pas sages

Overview of ink passages
Ink passages can be categorized into two main types: passages for supplying the ink required
for printing, and a waste ink passage for carrying ink used in print head cleaning.
Ink from the ink cartridges is held temporarily in the reservoirs and supplied to the print heads
via ID units (distributors).
The supply of ink is regulated by the opening/closing of solenoid valves installed in the ink passages, and by the solenoid valves for the air passage on each ink chamber. An air open filter is
installed to prevent paper dust and other particles from entering the ink passages.
During cleaning, a pressure pump forcibly expels ink from the print heads. The discharged
waste ink is drained into the waste ink tank by the suction pump.
If ink overflows from the air open filter, ink cartridges, reservoirs, ID units, or print heads for any
reason, it is sent to the overflow tank and waste ink tank via the ink pan and ink draining tubes.
Air open filter

Print head
ID unit
Ink cartridge
Ink pan
Ink pan
Reservoir
Suction pump
Overflow tank
Waste ink tank
3-6
Pressure pump
manuals4you.com
Device overview
Ink supply passages
Each ink flows from the ink cartridge to the reservoir, to the ID unit (distributor), and then to the
print head.
The tip of each ink cartridge is equipped with a TAG. When an ink cartridge is set in position, the
TAG communicates with the HC unit to determine the suitability of the ink. If the ink is appropriate, the ink fuse solenoid valves are activated to open the ink passage to the reservoirs.
The solenoid valves (ink fuse valves) opens or closes to regulate the flow of ink to the reservoirs.
The ID units and reservoirs must contain certain amounts of ink at all times. Ink sensors are
used to detect ink levels.
If the ink level in the reservoir falls, the ink fuse valve will be opened and ink will be supplied to
the reservoir from the ink cartridge.
Ink is supplied from the reservoirs to the ID units and to the print heads automatically due to differences in the heights of liquid heads. Solenoid valves are not used for this ink supply control.
The ink cartridges are opened to the atmosphere via a filter (to prevent entry of paper dust and
other particles).
Although the ID units and reservoirs are open to the atmosphere via the overflow tank and filter,
open/close control must be provided in certain cases. Air open valves are provided for this purpose.
The ID units are not open to the atmosphere under normal conditions. However, they are
open to the atmosphere while ink is being supplied.
The reservoirs are open to the atmosphere under normal conditions, but close when ink is
supplied to the ID units and during cleaning operations.
During cleaning operations, air pressure inside each reservoir is increased to expel ink from the
print head.
The pressure chamber stores air compressed by the pressure pump. The pressure valves open
to send compressed air to the reservoirs.
* On HC5000, the ink fuse valves are located on each reservoir and control the ink supply to the reservoir
from the ink cartridges.
* On HC5000, one ink fuse solenoid is separately located in the position equivalent to the ink fuse valves on
the HC5500, and when ink suitability is checked by RF-Tag, the ink passages to the reservoirs are opened.
* On HC5000, even if the machine main power is switched OFF, once the ink passages are opened by ink
fuse solenoid, the ink passages stays opened until the black ink cartridge cover on the machine is opened.
Air open filter
Ink Cartridge
Print head
ID unit
Pressure pump
Air open valve
Ink fuse solenoid valve

Ink sensor
Press chamber
Reservoir
Overflow tank
Pressure valve
3-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Waste ink passage

During cleaning, ink forcibly discharged from the print heads is drawn forward by the suction
nozzles for collection in the waste ink tank via the suction chamber. (The suction pump draws
ink, while the suction chamber separates the liquid and the air.)
The waste ink sensor detects the level of waste ink in the waste ink tank.
If ink overflows from an ID unit or reservoir for some reason, it flows to the overflow tank via the
air open valve.
If the waste ink level in the overflow tank exceeds the preset level, the overflow tank sensor
detects this condition and stops the machine operation. Ink overflowing from the overflow tank
flows into the waste ink tank through the waste ink collecting pipe.
Ink that overflows through the air open filter and ink flowing out of ink cartridges and print heads
into the ink pan are also collected in the waste ink tank.
Air open filter

Ink Cartridge
Print head
ID unit
Suction nozzle
Ink pan
Air open valve
Suction pump
Ink pan
Reservoir
Suction chamber
Overflow tank sensor

Waste ink sensor
Overflow tank
Waste ink tank
3-8
manuals4you.com
F i r s t pa p e r f e e d s e c t i o n
CHAPTER 4: First paper feed section

CONTENTS
4-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanisms
1 . Sta n d a r d pa p e r f e e d t r a y m e c h a n i s m
1-1.Basi c mech anism
The paper detection sensor (reflection type) detects the presence/absence of paper in the standard paper feed tray.
Since the last sheet of paper in the standard paper feed tray tends to cause multiple feeds, a
final-sheet multiple feed prevention rubber is provided.
In addition to centering the paper on the tray, the paper guides set on either side of the paper
detects the paper size (paper width).
To adjust paper feed performance to match the paper size, a special mechanism holds the standard paper feed tray at a tilted angle. When the standard paper feed tray is lifted slightly, it
remains tilted. When lifted again, it returns to the horizontal position.
Paper guide
Paper size detection sensor
Final sheet multiple feed prevention rubber
Paper detection sensor
Paper width potentiometer
4-2
manuals4you.com
1-2. Pap er s ize detecti on me chani sm

< Basic information regarding paper size >
The size of paper loaded in the standard paper feed tray is set manually through the menu
screen. The menus are 4.1.1 for standard feed tray, 4.2.1 for Tray 1, and 4.3.1 for Tray 2.
The following paper sizes can be set:
1) Auto (Initial factory setting)
* When [Auto] is selected, the paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor mounted in
the standard paper feed tray automatically detect the size of the paper in the standard paper feed
tray.
2) Standard paper sizes to be registered manually.

3) Custom user paper sizes (up to 5 sizes can be registered) by menu 5.1
* While HC5000 does not support printing of the envelopes, HC5500 does.
< Auto detection of paper size >

The paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor detect the size of paper loaded
on the paper feed trays.
The paper width potentiometer measures the paper width (in practice, it measures the width of
the paper guides set on either side of the paper), while the paper size detection sensor detects
paper length (portrait or landscape orientation).
The detected paper size is categorized as one of the following standard paper sizes in the chart
below:
Detected paper width
(mm)
Paper size
302 - 292
Paper detected
A3
No detection
A4-R
Paper detected
B4
262 - 252
No detection
B5-R
215 - 205
No detection
A4
187 - 177
No detection
B5
105 - 95
No detection
Post Card
* Although HC5500 does support printing on the envelopes, the envelope sizes cannot be detected
automatically by the paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor. Therefore the envelope sizes must be selected manually after registering the envelope sizes (custom paper sizes).
< C u s t om s i z e p a pe r d e t e c t i o n >
In the following condition, the paper size cannot be detected. Therefore, the paper size is displayed as [CUSTOM].
<AUTO> is selected while the paper size is out of above chart.
The paper on the tray does not match with the registered paper size. (The actual paper size
is detected by the paper width potentiometer and paper size sensor.)
The [CUSTOM] papers are divided into following two categories according to the paper length
detected by the paper size sensor.
Customs size L : Long paper.
Custom size S : Short paper.
The location of the paper size sensor is at 320mm position on the Standard feed tray, and
316mm position on the Tray 1 and Tray 2.
4-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2 . Sta n d a r d pa p e r f e e d t r a y e l e v a t i n g m e c h a n i s m
2-1.Basi c mech anism
The standard paper feed tray is raised and lowered by the elevator motor.
The upper limit position (top stop position) of the standard paper feed tray is detected by the
upper limit sensor. The lower limit position (bottom stop position) is detected by the lower limit
sensor.
If the standard paper feed tray is at the lowered position when printing begins, the standard
paper feed tray is raised to the upper limit position. To ensure accurate positioning during this
operation, the standard paper feed tray is lowered after stopping at the upper limit position, then
raised once again to the upper limit position.
If the standard paper feed tray runs out of paper (as detected by the paper detection sensor),
printing halts and the standard paper feed tray descends to the lower limit position.
Since the top sheet of paper on the standard paper feed tray must be kept at the same height,
when the upper limit sensor turns Off as the paper is fed, the standard paper feed tray elevates
until the upper limit sensor activates.
The detecting conditions of the two Upper limit sensors, A and B, gives three upper limit position
selections.
Which one of the three upper limit position is applied depends on the type of the paper on the
tray.
* Use SE Modes 5.9.1.1 - 5.9.13.1 to set the stop position for each paper type.
Upper limit position
To the
lower position
Upper limit sensors A

Upper limit sensors B
High
Middle
Low
2-2.F eed tray button

Use the feed tray button to raise or lower the standard paper feed tray manually.
The tray descends for the period the button is pressed.
When the standard paper feed tray is at the lower limit position, and if paper is present, the LED
for the feed tray button will light. Pressing the feed tray button in this condition will raise the
standard paper feed tray to the upper limit position.
4-4
manuals4you.com
Elevator upper limit sensor B
Elevator upper limit sensor A
Feed tray button
Detection plate
Pressure adjust lever sensor
Elevator lower limit sensor

Elevator motor
4-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-3.Stan dard pap er feed tra y ope ration s afety mecha nism
Safety switches are installed at two locations to prevent fingers or other body parts from being
caught by the moving standard paper feed tray. When the safety switch is triggered, the standard paper feed tray Elevator motor halts the operation and a message is displayed.
Paper feed tray upper safety SW: When the scraper cover is pushed up, the switch is triggered.
Paper feed tray lower safety SW: When the lower limit frame is pushed up, the switch is triggered.
Paper feed tray upper safety SW
Paper feed cover
Scraper cover
Lower limit frame

Paper feed tray lower safety SW
4-6
manuals4you.com
3 . R e m a i n i n g pa p e r v o l u m e d e t e c t i o n m e c h a n i s m
The volume of remaining paper in the standard paper feed tray is determined by the conditions
detected by tray volume sensors A and B, and the remaining paper volume is displayed.
The actual position of the standard paper feed tray at the upper limit position is checked by the
above two sensors, and the remaining paper volume is detected. If the standard paper feed
tray is not at the upper limit position, the [Non-standard Status] indication is displayed.
However, if the paper detection sensor detects [No Paper], the remaining paper volume is determined to be 0%.
When the remaining paper volume drops to 30% or less, the LED on the main unit panel will
light. If monitored from a PC, the paper remaining volume is detected in four levels.
Remaining paper volume indication LED for standard paper feed tray
PC Monitoring screen
Level
Sensor status
Sensor A
Sensor B
Determined
Remaining
paper volume
Level 0
OFF
OFF
100 to 50%
Level 1
ON
OFF
50 to 30%
Level 2
ON
ON
30 to 10%
Level 3
OFF
ON
10% or less
Interrupt type sensor (fixed)

Detection plate (slides up/down)
4-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4 . F i r s t pa p e r f e e d m e c h a n i s m
4 -1 .Paper t r an s p o r t mec han i s m
The first paper feed mechanism supplies the top sheet from paper stacked in the standard paper
feed tray to the second paper feed section using the rotating scraper and pickup roller.
The scraper and pickup roller are driven by the main motor, whose rotation is controlled by the
On/Off of the Paper feed clutch.
To prevent the first paper feed section from holding the paper once the paper is supplied to the
second paper feed section, the scraper and pickup roller contain one way cores to let the paper
travel through freely.
Paper feed clutch On/Off timing
The paper feed clutch activates to rotate the pickup and scraper rollers at a timing determined
by the paper size and simplex/duplex printing selection.
Since actual paper length is measured by the top edge sensor, the feed timing for the first and
second sheets will differ from the feed timing for the subsequent sheets.
When the registration sensor located before the registration rollers detects paper, the paper feed
clutch turns off after a preset time and ends the first paper feed operation.
P i c k u p r o l l e r s h a f t r e v e r s e r o t a t i o n p re v e n t i o n m e c h a n i s m
Paper supplied from the first paper feed section stops after its leading edge is clamped by the
registration rollers (upper and lower) in the second paper feed section, creating a buckle at the
tip of the paper. The reverse rotation prevention mechanism prevents reversal of the pickup
roller shaft from the stiffer papers kicking back after a buckle is made.
The reverse rotation prevention mechanism consists of a one-way core and paper release lever.
The one-way core permits the pickup roller shaft to rotate only in the paper transport direction.
When the reverse rotation prevention mechanism is engaged, jammed paper cannot be pulled
toward the standard paper feed tray side. To release jammed paper, the paper release lever
must be pulled toward the rear side to disengage the teeth of the two ratchets.
One way core
Paper release lever
Scraper
4-8
Pickup roller
manuals4you.com
Registration sensor
Pickup roller
Top edge sensor 1
Paper feed clutch

Scraper
Registration roller Upper

Registration roller Lower
Transfer belt
Paper feed clutch
4-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4-2.Paper stripper mechanism

This mechanism is located under the pickup roller. This mechanism allows only one sheet to
feed at a time from the standard paper feed tray by the first paper feed operation.
Paper transported by the scraper moves between the pickup roller and stripper pad, after which
the rotating pickup roller feeds the paper through the pickup roller and stripper roller. The friction
provided by these parts ensures that only one sheet of paper is fed to the machine.
The stripper pressure adjust knob allows adjustment of pre-stripper pressure to prevent multiple
feeds and paper feed failures.
Stripper roller
Stripper pad
Stripper pressure adjust knob
4-3.Paper feed p ress ure adjus tment mech anism

The pressure adjust lever allows adjustment of the spring pressure applied to the paper by the
scraper to two levels, High (thick paper) or Low (standard) selection.
The lever position is detected by the paper feed pressure sensor.
Pressure adjust lever
Paper feed pressure sensor
4 - 10
Pressure adjust lever spring
manuals4you.com
Disassembly
1 . Sta n d a r d pa p e r f e e d t r a y u n i t
1-1. Rem oval o f standard p aper fee d tray u nit

(1)
(2)
(3)
Lower the standard paper feed tray to the lower limit position and turn off the main power.
Remove the top cover and remove the rear cover.
Raise the PCB box and keep at the raised position.
< Removal >

(1)
(2)
Remove the press chamber. (two M3x6 IT screws)

Cut the band binding the wires from the standard paper feed tray and disconnect the two relay
connectors and the ground wire (attached to the relay PCB on the paper feed side).
Relay connector
Ground wire
Fastened to PCB
Press chamber
4 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(3)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the damper covers (two M4x8 screws with washers) from the right and left sides of
the standard paper feed tray, damper R (front side, white) (two M3x6 IT screws), and damper
L (rear side, black)
(two M3x6 IT screws).
Damper cover
Damper L
(4)
Remove the standard paper feed tray unit along the grooves on the shaft hook section, taking
care to avoid damaging the wires.
<< Precautions for reassembly >>

Route the wires as shown in the diagram. Remember to attach a wire band.
Install the right and left dampers correctly.
When reinstalling the dampers, lift the standard paper feed tray slightly and align the screw positions.
Attach a band here.
4 - 12
manuals4you.com
1-2. Rem oval o f pa per width VR, pa per dete ction sens or, and paper si ze
d etection sensor
(1)
< Removal of paper size detection sensor >

(1)
(2)
Remove the standard paper feed tray face plate. (four M3x6 binding screws)
Disconnect the connector and remove the paper size detection sensor.
Fence cover
Standard paper feed tray face

Paper width sensor
Face plates
Lock lever
Engagement of paper width

sensor gear with rack
< Removal of paper width VR and paper detection sensor >

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remove the paper guides from the right and left sides (two M3x8 screws with washers each).
Remove the lock levers on the right and left fences (one E-ring each).
Remove the fence cover (four M3x6 binding screws).
Remove the paper detection sensor (one connector).
Remove the paper width sensor (VR) together with the mounting plate (one connector, 2 M3x8
P-tight screws).The following paper sizes can be set:4
< >
When reinstalling the paper width sensor (VR) to the plate, keep the red lead wire about 1 mm
from the plate while tightening the nut. (Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor by excessive
tightening.)
4 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
For proper engagement of the paper width sensor gear with the rack during reassembly, minimize the distance of the fences, turn the VR fully in the direction of the arrow shown in the diagram, and then back off one crest from the lock position.
* After installing the paper width sensor, be sure to conduct paper width VR correction (8.4.1) in Test Mode.
2 . P i c k u p r o l l e r s h a ft
2-1.Remo val of pic kup roll er shaft (p ickup rol ler, scraper)
< Pr e - r e m o v a l >
(1)
(2)
Remove the paper feed cover.
< R e m o v a l o f p ic k u p r o l l e r s h a f t >
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Release the lock and remove the stripper unit.

Detach the scraper spring.
Remove the two retaining rings from both ends of the shaft and move the two metal pieces
toward the center of the shaft.
Remove the pickup roller shaft by moving it to the right, making sure that it does not hit the upper
limit sensor.
Stripper unit
Metal
Scraper spring
Pickup roller shaft
Retaining ring
< R e m o v a l o f p ic k u p r o l l e r a n d s c r a p e r >
(1)
(2)
4 - 14
Remove one retaining ring and dismount the pickup roller from the pickup roller shaft.
Remove the E-rings from both ends of the scraper shaft, remove the two metal pieces, and dismount the scraper shaft.
manuals4you.com
(3)
Pay close attention to the collar and pulley when removing the scraper.
< >

Note the rotating direction of the pickup roller and scraper.
When reinstalling the pickup roller shaft, be careful to avoid striking the upper limit sensor with
the detection plate.
2-2. Rem oval o f firs t pap er feed stay assemb ly

(1)
Remove the pickup roller shaft.
< Removal >

(1)
(2)
Remove the first paper feed stay assembly. (three M4x8 RS-tight screws).
(Be careful of bundled wires.)
Disconnect the connectors of the upper limit sensors A/B, standard paper feed tray up/down
switches, paper feed pressure sensor, and standard paper feed tray upper limit switch.Remove
the wire bands, then dismount the first paper feed stay Assy.
Paper feed tray upper safety SW connector
Standard paper feed tray up/down SW
First sheet feed stay assembly
Elevator upper limit sensor B
Elevator upper limit sensor A
4 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-3.Remo val of pap er feed clutc h and pape r feed s haft

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Remove the top cover, then the rear cover.
Raise the PCB box and keep at the raised position.
Remove the pickup roller shaft.
< Removal of paper feed clutch >

(1)
Remove the snap ring, disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch.
Paper feed clutch
Snap ring
Rotation stopper stay
Paper feed clutch
Registration clutch
Registration brake
4 - 16
manuals4you.com
< Removal of paper feed shaft >
* After removing the pickup clutch, remove the paper feed shaft.
(1)
Remove the shaft stay and paper feed shaft from the standard paper feed tray side (two M4x8
RS-tight screws).
(Be careful to avoid dropping the bearing.)
Paper feed shaft
Bearing
3.Elevator mechanism & bottom guide plate

3-1. Rem oval o f el evato r m otor
(1)Raise the standard paper feed tray to the upper limit position
and turn off the main power.
(2)Remove inner cover 1.
< Removal >
(1)Detach the right and left elevator springs.
(Raise the standard paper feed tray to facilitate removal.)
(2)Remove the elevator motor unit fastening screws.
(two M4x8 RS-tight screws)
(3)Remove the elevator motor holder fastening screw.
(one M4x8 RS-tight screw)
(4)Disconnect the motor connector.
(5)Hold the standard paper feed tray with one hand and remove
Inner cover 1
the elevator motor.
(Be careful of the metal pieces and shaft since they will be
detached from their installation positions.)
(Be careful to avoid dropping the standard paper feed tray.)
4 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Elevator spring
Elevator motor holder

Elevator motor
4 - 18
manuals4you.com
3-2. Rem oval o f bo tto m gui de pl ate

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Dismount the elevator motor.

Remove the standard paper feed tray unit.
Remove the pickup roller shaft, pickup clutch, and paper feed shaft.
Remove the first paper feed stay assembly.
< Removal >

(1)
Remove the lower limit frame and lower limit frame holder. (one M3x6 RS-tight screw)
Lower limit frame
Lower limit frame holder
(2)
Remove the spring hook R (metal sheet located on the E side plate) from the R side. (Raise the
shaft position to facilitate removal.)(one E-ring, one M4x8 RS-tight screw)
screw
E-ring
Spring hook R
(3)
Remove the two screws from the E reinforcing plate. (M4x8 RS-tight screws)
screw
Bottom guide plate
E side plate on F side
E side plate on R side

E reinforcing plate
Elevator shaft
4 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(4)
(5)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Lift the R side. Remove the E reinforce plate and the E side plate on the R side.
Remove the bottom guide plate. (six M4x8 RS-tight screws)
<< Precautions in reassembly >>

Confirm that the flange of the bearing on the E side plate is properly positioned in the hole in the
frame.
3-3.Remo val of sta ndard pa per feed tray lo we r l imit switch

(1)
< Re m o v a l >
(1)
(2)
Remove the lower limit frame and lower limit frame holder. (one M3x6 RS-tight screw)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed tray lower safety switch together with the
mounting plate. (two M3x6 RS-tight screws)
Lower limit frame

Lower limit frame holder
Lower limit SW
4 - 20
manuals4you.com
Adjustment
1.Adjustment of the upper limit sensor position
< Adjustment >
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Set the pressure adjust lever to the standard position.

Remove paper from the standard paper feed tray.
Execute Test Mode No. 8.1.1.1 (Elevator motor) to raise and stop the standard paper feed tray
at the [Middle] position. (upper limit sensors 1 and 2 turned on)
After the standard paper feed tray stops, confirm that the gap between the pickup roller and
standard paper feed tray is 1.5 to 2.0 mm.
If the gap lies outside this range, turn the upper limit adjustment screw to move the upper limit
sensor assembly up or down to adjust. (Turning clockwise will lower the upper limit sensor
assembly.)
After the adjustment, confirm that paper feeds correctly with the standard paper feed tray at the
top, middle, and bottom positions.
< Signs of faulty adjustment >

If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, increased paper feed pressure will tend to result
in multiple feeds.
In contrast, if the sensor is positioned too low, the paper feeding process may fail to feed paper.
Upper limit adjustment screw
Pickup roller
Scraper
1.5 to 2.0 mm
Regarding Test Mode No.8.1.1.3 [Servo Action]:

This test mode elevates the paper feed tray to the MIDDLE position (sensors 1 & 2 turned ON),
so this test mode can also be used in adjusting the upper limit sensor position.
Since this test mode always tries to keep the paper feed tray at that position, placing a piece of
paper on the tray and adjusting the tray height from the lower position to higher position will
work. But Test Mode No. 8.1.1.1 needs to be used when lowering the tray down.
4 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2.Adjustment of stripper pressure

< Adjustment >
According to the type of paper used, change the pressure adjustment lever position for printing.
If multiple feeds or paper supply failures occur, adjust the paper stripper pressure.
1) If multiple feeds occur
Turn the stripper pressure adjust knob clockwise to increase stripper pressure.
2) If paper slips and does not feed
Turn the stripper pressure adjust knob counterclockwise to reduce stripper pressure.
Stripper pressure adjust knob
3 . P a p e r w i dt h V R c o r r e c t i o n
< Adjustment >
4 - 22
Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.1 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Standard paper feed tray).
Set the fence width to 297 mm (A3). Enter the 297 mm setting.
After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.2.7 (Paper). Confirm that each paper size is correctly registered.
manuals4you.com
4 . O t h e r a d j u s t m e n ts
The following adjustments and settings can be performed for each type of paper used:
4-1. Sta ndard pa per feed tray up per limi t po siti on

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.1
The [Upper limit sensor position adjustment] sets the top, middle, and bottom stop positions of
the standard paper feed tray. The tray upper limit position from these three can be selected for
each type of paper registered.
4-2. Sta ndard pa per feed tray po stfe ed

This setting varies the pickup clutch Off timing and adjusts the amount of paper buckle produced
before the registration rollers.
Equivalent test mode in different numbers exist for Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.)
4-3. Pap er feed start from stand ard pape r feed tray
This setting varies the pickup clutch On timing.
This test mode feature is not available for the Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.
4-4. Ass ist for stan dard pap er feed tra y

This setting varies the paper transfer assist action on the first paper feed during the transport of
paper by the registration rollers.
Equivalent test mode in different numbers exist for Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.
4-5. Multi ple feed d etection for sta ndard pap er feed tray

This setting is used to enable or disable multiple feed detection.
The sensor sensitivity adjustment is not available.
Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit use different sensor for the multiple feed detection, and that sensor can be adjusted on its sensitivity
4-6. Gap between the pa pers

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.30 varies the gap between the papers for simplex printing.
Test Mode No. 5.9.*.31 varies the gap between the papers for duplex printing.
These two test modes are applied not only for the paper feeding from standard paper feed tray,
but also applies to the paper feeding from the Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.
4 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
4 - 24
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
manuals4you.com
M u l t i - t r a y pa p e r f e e d s e c t i o n
CHAPTER 5: Multi-tray paper feed section

CONTENTS
5-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanisms
1.Machine configuration
1-1.Basi c structure
The multi-tray paper feed section is comprised of the transfer unit installed in the MTPF unit and
the vertical transfer unit in the HC5000 main unit. These are two separate units.
The MTPF unit is provided with two paper feed trays. Paper from these trays is fed by the pickup
roller, scraper, and stripper unit through the path shown in the diagram. The paper reaches the
vertical transfer unit, and is then transported to the registration roller section.
From the registration roller section, paper is fed through the same path as when paper is supplied from the standard paper feed tray.
If paper jam occurs, the printer halts, and an error indication is displayed in accordance with the
location of the paper jam.
Jammed paper can be removed through the feed tray section, MTPF left cover, or vertical transfer unit located at a lower section inside the main unit left door (gray areas shown in the diagram
below).
Registration roller section
Transport of paper from standard
Vertical transfer unit
HC5500 main unit
Paper transport unit
MTPF unit
Paper feed tray No.1
Paper feed tray No.2
Stripper unit
Pickup roller
Scraper
5-2
manuals4you.com
1-2. Pap er tra nsport p ath

The rollers (pickup roller, paper feed rollers 1 through 3) in the paper transport section inside the
base are driven by the FL transfer motor.
The roller (paper feed roller 4) in the vertical transfer unit is driven by the FL multi feed tray
pickup motor.
The rotation timing of each roller is controlled by a clutch. (The rollers indicated by black circles
are driven via a clutch.)
Paper transport status is detected by FL feed sensors 1 through 4.
The multi-tray 1 pickup sensor is provided in the paper transport path immediately after the
pickup roller for feed tray 1 only.
When A3 paper is supplied from the feed tray 1, a minor multiple feed condition may result in the
overlapping of the end section of a sheet with the leading edge of the following sheet. The multitray 1 pickup sensor detects this condition. (Sensor detection is made regardless of paper size.)
Feed sensor 3 detects the presence/absence of paper at its position and also detects multiple
feeds. (The sensor used for the detection of multiple feeds from the standard paper feed tray differs from this sensor.)
FL feed sensor 4
Paper feed roller 4
FL multi feed tray pickup motor
FL feed sensor 3
Paper feed roller 3
FL multi-tray 1 pickup sensor
FL transfer motor
FL feed sensor 2
Paper feed roller 2
FL feed sensor 1
Paper feed roller 1
FL feed sensor 3
Paper feed roller 3

FL feed sensor 2
Paper feed roller 2
FL feed sensor 1
Paper feed roller 1
5-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2.Paper transport section in the MTPF Unit

2-1.Paper feed tray
The upper tray (paper feed tray 1) can hold 1,000 sheets of paper. The lower tray (paper feed
tray 2) can hold 500 sheets.
The two feed trays have identical structures, but different paper capacities.
The right and left paper guides on each feed tray are moved simultaneously by a connecting
belt, and also have a lock mechanism.
The paper stopper is set manually according to the paper size.
As with the standard paper feed tray, each feed tray is equipped with a paper width potentiometer and a paper size detection sensor for automatic detection of paper size.
Similarly with the standard paper feed tray, each feed tray uses a paper detection sensor and a
paper volume sensor for detection.
2-2.F eed tray elev ating mecha nism

The paper feed tray features a double plate structure. Only the bottom plate is raised by the elevator motor.
Each feed tray is equipped with one upper limit sensor. The upper limit position cannot be
adjusted as in the case of the standard paper feed tray system.
As soon as the feed tray with paper is set in the machine, the corresponding FL elevator motor
activates, and its rotary force is transmitted to the joint and to the pulley shaft to wind a wire. As
a result, the bottom plate in the feed tray rises.
The detection of the upper limit sensor halts the rising operation, thereby maintaining a constant
height during printing.
When the feed tray is pulled out, the joint disengages. The bottom plate of the feed tray drops
due to its own weight.
The tray set detection is made by the electrical connection and by the Safety switch.
Insert the paper stopper here.
Paper guide

Paper guide lock mechanism
5-4
manuals4you.com
Paper volume sensor

Wire winding pulley
Engaged with motor joint
FL safety switch
FL feed tray Elevator motor
5-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2 -3 .Paper t r an s p o r t mec han i s m

The transport unit is driven by the FL transfer motor via a belt.
FL transfer motor
The transport unit has two pickup clutches that transmit drive power to the upper and lower
pickup roller shafts, and three transfer clutches that transmit drive power to paper feed rollers 1
through 3.
Clutch for paper feed roller 3

Clutch for Tray 1 pickup roller
Clutch for Tray 2 pickup roller
5-6
manuals4you.com
Paper feed roller 3 are operated by two nip release solenoids on the R and L sides to prevent
back tension on paper during printing.
The height of the upper limit sensor can be adjusted by turning the dial on the front side of the
main unit.
The angle and pressure of the stripper pad can be adjusted from the front of the machine.
The stripper pad retracts when the feed tray is pulled out, thereby preventing crumpling of paper
clamped by the stripper pad and pickup roller.
Paper feed roller 3
Nip release solenoid
Upper limit sensor height adjustment dial

(The color and the shape of the dial may differ)
Upper limit sensor
Stripper pad retracting mechanism
Stripper pad angle adjustment mechanism
Stripper pad pressure adjustment mechanism
5-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-4.Vertical transfer unit

The knob can be used to open the paper transport path and clear jammed paper.
The paper transport path is provided with a unit comprising paper feed roller 4 and feed sensor
4 as well as two nip release solenoids.
Paper feed roller 4 transmits the rotary force of the multi-feed tray pickup motor to transfer clutch
4.
In addition to transport completion and nip release operation, the vertical transfer unit also operates with the registration rollers and BP to assist paper transport operations during printing.
Paper transport path open/close lever
Multi feed tray pickup motor
5-8
manuals4you.com
Transfer clutch 4
Paper feed roller 4

Feed sensor 4
5-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Disassembly
1.Paper feed trays
1-1.Remo val of pap er feed tra ys
* The disassembly procedure is the same for the upper tray (paper feed tray 1) and the lower tray (paper
feed tray 2).
< Re m o v a l >
(1)
Remove the cover (two M4x8 RS-Tight screws on the right side) (two P-Tight M4x8 screws on
the left side).
(2)
Remove the paper feed tray from the rail (two M4x6 binding screws on the right, and three on
the left).
<< Precautions for reassembly

While holding the feed tray on the rail to keep it from falling, lift it slightly and align the projections with the indentations.
Do not over tighten the tapping screws on the cover.
5 - 10
manuals4you.com
1-2. Rem oval o f pa per width VR (p otentiometer)



(1)
Remove the four wire hanging fixtures from the bottom plate of the feed tray (two M4x6 binding
screws each).
Tray volume sensor
(2)
(3)
Wire hanging fixture
Disconnect the connector and remove the paper volume sensor.

Lift the bottom plate and remove the plate.
Bottom plate
VR cover
(4)
(5)
Remove the VR cover (one RS-Tight M4x8 screw).

Remove the Paper width VR (potentiometer).
5 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

When attaching the belt, secure the right and left fences with the 6mm jig. Set the VR to the narrowest width.
The VR correction must be performed using Test Mode in the final stage of reassembly.
Make sure that the fence cover for the bottom plate slides smoothly.
2 . P a p e r t r a n s p o r t u n i t i n t he MT P F U ni t .
2-1.Remo val of pap er tra nsport u nit
(1)
(2)
(3)
Remove the MTPF rear cover.

Remove the door cover from the paper transport section.
Remove the MTPF left cover.
< Re m o v a l >
(1)
(2)
Pull out the upper and lower paper feed trays.

Remove the four stripper adjustment knobs (one binding screw M3x8 each).
Knob cover plate
Stripper adjustment knob
(3)
5 - 12
Remove the upper and lower knob cover plates (three binding screws M4x6 for upper plate, two
binding screws M4x6 for lower plate).
manuals4you.com
(4)
Pull out the four adjustment shafts (identical parts).
Adjustment shafts
(5)
Disconnect the two connectors and remove the transfer motor (five M4x8 RS-tight screws).
FL transfer motor
Wires
(6)
Disconnect the six connectors for the wires from the paper transport unit. Arrange the wires
neatly to avoid tangles.
5 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(7)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the paper transport unit (four M4x8 RS-tight screws). (Be careful to avoid damaging the
Mylar sheets on the paper transport section.)
Paper transport unit mounting screw

Insert the stripper adjustment shaft, confirming that the knob aligns with the scale.
When detaching or attaching the paper transport unit, slightly tilt the bottom section first and
then tilt the top section to avoid damaging the upper Mylar sheet.
3 . Ve r t i c a l t r a n s f e r u n i t
3-1.Remo val of vertic al trans fer unit
(1)
(2)

Remove the bottom paper guide plate.
< Re m o v a l >
(1)
5 - 14
Disconnect the connector and remove the Multi feed tray pickup motor (four M4x8 RS-tight
screws). (Handle the hook on the metal plate with care.)
When installing the Multi feed tray pickup motor back on the machine, adjust its position so
that adequate backlash is given between the gears.
manuals4you.com
(2)
Disconnect the three connectors for the wires from the rear side to the Vertical Transfer Unit.
Multi feed tray pickup motor
(3)
Disconnect the release lever shaft from the joint (two IT M3x6 screws). (Be careful not to misplace the metal.)
Mounting screws on the shaft joint
5 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(4)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the swing plate by unscrewing the shoulder screw.
Swing plate mounting screw
(5)
(6)
Remove the two vertical transfer unit retaining pins on the front side (one M4x8 RS-tight screw
each).
Remove the two screws from the vertical transfer unit support shaft on the rear side (M4x8 RStight screws).
Vertical transfer unit retaining pins
Remove these two screws.
5 - 16
manuals4you.com
(7)
Remove the two vertical transfer guide plate fastening screws on the left (M4x8 RS-tight
screws).
Remove the two screws
(8)
Remove the screw (M4x8 RS-tight screw) from the front, then remove the Vertical transfer unit
by sliding it out of the machine through the opening from which the Standard paper feed tray
was removed.
Remove this screw.
<< Precautions for work >

Keep in mind that once all the screws from either the Front or the Rear of the machine are
removed, the unit is supported only by the screws on the other side, potentially resulting in distortion of the unit shape.
Since the vertical transfer guide plate is located in the paper transport path, work carefully to
avoid distorting its shape.
The Swing plate must open when removing jammed paper. Make sure to install it in a position
where it can swing smoothly (it should hang freely).
Do not pinch and lock the Swing plate by the special shoulder screw.
Slide plate
The Swing plate
5 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4 . D i s a s s e m b l y o f o t h e r pa r ts
Removal of transfer clutches
To remove transfer clutches 1 through 3, remove the MTPF paper transfer unit first. (During
reassembly, pay close attention to the connectors, since they are identical in the size andshape.)
To remove transfer clutch 4, remove the chamber while the vertical transfer unit is still installed
on the machine.
Removal of feed sensors and multi-tray 1 pickup sensor
To remove feed sensors 1 through 3 and the multi-tray 1 pickup sensor, remove the MTPF
paper transport unit.
To remove feed sensor 2 and the multi-tray 1 pickup sensor, the paper transport path must be
removed from the detached MTPF paper transport unit.
When feed sensor 3 is replaced, the sensor sensitivity must be adjusted.
To remove feed sensor 4, remove the vertical transfer unit from the main unit first.
R e m o v a l o f M T P F e le v a t o r m o t o r
Remove the MTPF rear cover, and remove the three mounting screws from each elevator motor
unit to dismount motor unit.
5 - 18
manuals4you.com
Adjustment
1.Adjustment of upper limit sensor position
< Adjustment >
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Open the applicable feed tray and remove the feed tray cover.
Place one sheet of paper on the feed tray. With the machine power ON, close the feed tray. (The
table will rise to the upper limit position.)
Check that the gap between the pickup roller and table is 0 to 1 mm.
If the gap falls beyond the specified range, turn the upper limit sensor height adjustment dial to
adjust the upper limit position.

If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, increased paper feed pressure will tend to result
in multiple feeds.
In contrast, if the sensor is positioned too low, the paper feeding process may fail to feed paper.
Scraper
Pickup roller
0 to 1 mm gap.
Table
Upper limit sensor height adjustment dial

(The color and the shape of the dial may differ)
Upper limit sensor
5 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2 . St r i p p e r a d j u s t m e n t
< Adjustment >
(1)
Turn the adjustment lever to make the adjustment.
Stripper pad angle adjustment mechanism
Stripper pad pressure adjustment mechanism
5 - 20
manuals4you.com
3 . P a p e r w i dt h V R c o r r e c t i o n
< Adjustment method - Feed tray 1 >
Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.2 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Feed tray 1).
After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.3.11 (Paper width) and check to confirm that the
width of each paper size is correctly registered.
< Adjustment method - Feed tray 2 >
Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.3 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Feed tray 1).
After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.3.18 (Paper width) and check to confirm that the
width of each paper size is correctly registered.
4.Multiple feed sensor (feed sensor 3) adjustment

< Adjustment >
Check the adjustment method.
Perform Test Mode No. 8.8.2 (Multiple feeds light intensity setting).
(The test mode automatically feeds the specified paper over the sensor. Then remove the
paper manually by hand and then press the key on the right to register the setting.)
5 . O t h e r a d j u s t m e n ts
The following adjustments and settings can be performed for each paper type:
5-1. Amo unt of p ostfeed

Test Mode No. 5.9.1.10 (Feed tray 1), No. 5.9.1.20 (Feed tray 2)
Adjustment of paper buckle amount in front of the registration rollers.
5-2. Ass ist

Test Mode No. 5.9.1.11 (Feed tray 1), No. 5.9.1.21 (Feed tray 2)
This test mode activates or deactivates the paper feed assisting action by the first paper feed
mechanism when the tip of the paper is already gripped and being transported by the Registration rollers.
5-3. Dou ble-feed detec tion timi ng.

Double-feed detection timing can be adjusted by Test Mode No.4.2.4 (Tray-1) and No.4.3.4
(Tray-2).
Selection of the detection method for the Double-Feed, either from the 1st paper (comparison of the light militance value through the paper against the data pre-registered in the
machine) or from the 2nd paper (use the light militance value taken from the first sheet of
paper fed through as the data to compare the value against the succeeding papers).
The Dragged-Feed check is selected by SE mode No.4.2.5 (Tray-1) and No.4.3.5 (Tray-2).
The Dragged-Feed is a type of double-feed in which the top-end of the succeeding paper
overlaps with the tail-end of the preceding paper while in feeding.
5 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Normally, double-feed and dragged-feed detections are selected ON/OFF in combination

by User Mode, but a selection from the operation panel using above Test Mode can be
made to activate only the dragged-feed detection when the double-feed detection is turned
OFF by the User Mode.
5 - 22
manuals4you.com
S e c o n d pa p e r f e e d s e c t i o n
CHAPTER 6: Second paper feed section

CONTENTS
6-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanisms
1 . M e c h a n i s m o f t h e s e c o n d pa p e r f e e d s e c t i o n
1 -1 .Paper t r an s p o r t p a t h
This section briefly halts paper sent from the first paper feed section and from the multi-tray paper
feed section at the registration rollers, then feeds it to the transfer belt unit at the appropriate time for
printing. Then either discharges the paper immediately or after duplex printing. This section is called
the second paper feed section.
The second paper feed section has the following functions:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
Mechanism for multiple feed detection for paper fed from the standard paper feed tray (Multiple
Feed sensor ; transmission type sensor)
Sensor for detecting paper supplied to the registration rollers (Registration sensor ; reflective
sensor)
Registration rollers
Sensor to detect the leading edge of the paper (Top edge sensor 1 ; transmission type senso
Top edge sensor 2 (Reflective sensor. HC5000 is not quipped with this sensor.)
Side registration unit to center the image on each paper (CCD unit)
Transfer unit for moving paper under the heads.
Sensor for detecting paper moved toward the exit (Exit sensor ; reflective sensor, wider detection range than other reflective sensors)
Exit unit for transport of paper for discharge
Flipper unit used to move paper for duplex printing
Sensor for detecting paper entering the flipper unit (Flipper sensor ; reflective sensor)
Sensor for detecting paper arriving at the entrance to the duplex unit (Duplex belt IN sensor ;
reflective sensor)
Duplex unit
Sensor for detecting paper leaving the duplex unit (Duplex belt OUT sensor ; reflective sensor)
Switchback unit to re-feed paper for duplex printing.
Sensor for detecting paper entering and leaving the switchback unit (Switchback sensor ; reflective sensor)
(12)
(13)
(15)
(14)
(6)
(16)
(11)
(5)
(2)
(10)
(9)
(7)
(1) (3) (4)
(8)
Schematic diagram of paper transport paths, as viewed from the front of the machine
6-2
manuals4you.com
P a p e r t r a n s p o rt f r o m t h e R e g i s t r a t i o n r o l l e rs t o t h e P a p e r r e c e i v i n g t r a y .
(1)
(2)
(3)
The paper is fed from the standard feed tray or the multi-tray paper feeding unit and arrives at
the registration rollers. The paper is detected by the registration sensor and makes a buckle at
the registration rollers. The buckle is required to ensure correct print registration at the top.
Registration clutch then activates and transfer the main motor drive to the lower registration
roller via timing belt and pulley. The paper proceeds to the next area.
The top edge sensor and top edge sensor 2 detect the leading edge of the paper coming out
through the registration rollers. These two top edge sensors trigger the print head operation,
and also have a function to detect paper jams.
Because HC5000 is not equipped with the top edge sensor 2, the leading edge of the paper is
detected only with the top edge sensor 1 on HC5000.
(4)
The paper proceeds onto the transfer unit. The transfer unit is equipped with the suction fans to
suck the paper onto the transfer belt. The suction fans keep paper firmly on the transfer belt
while the printing is in process and the paper is transported to the exit area. The transfer belt is
driven by the transfer belt motor in the transfer unit.
The print head for each color is mounted above the transfer unit and performs the printing.
The CCD installed at the entrance to the transfer unit detects the width of each paper. The value
detected by the CCD is reflected in the lateral printing position for each print head.
While HC5000 is equipped with only 4 suction fans, HC5500 is equipped with 6 suction fans.
(5)
Exit sensor is installed at the very end of the transfer unit, just before the exit unit. This sensor
detects paper coming from the transfer unit and checks whether the paper is ejected out from
the exit unit.
Paper transported to the exit unit is discharged from the exit unit by a sponge roller driven by the
exit motor.
To ensure a smooth paper discharge from the exit unit, a paper ejection wing unit is installed at
the very end of the exit unit to let the paper fly out. The wing motor changes the wing position
according to the size of the paper being printed.
(6)
P a p e r t r a n s p o rt f r o m t h e f l i p p e r u n i t , b a c k t o t h e r e g i s t r a t i o n r o l l e r s ( Du pl e x
printing).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
For the duplex printing, Gate solenoid changes the position of the flipper gate at the tip of the
flipper unit, so that paper is guided into the flipper unit instead of being ejected straight out
through the exit unit.
Before the paper reaches the duplex unit, it passes two types of sensors (Flipper sensor and
Duplex belt IN sensor), which detect paper entering and leaving the flipper unit, respectively.
The paper feed roller inside the flipper unit is driven by the main motor via pulley, timing belt and
gears.
The duplex unit holds and transports the paper by its upper and lower belts. The upper and
lower belts of the duplex unit are driven by the main motor via pulley, timing belt and gears.
Paper discharged from the duplex unit is sent to the switchback unit.
Switchback sensor detects paper discharged from the duplex unit. Paper from the duplex unit is
transported by the paper feed roller operated by the main motor via pulley, timing belt and gears.
It is then carried to the switchback standby position after passing over the separation claws and
carried further out by another paper transfer roller (driven by an exclusive drive motor).
Paper arriving at the standby position is ready for the printing on the reverse side.
The paper is switched back under the separation claws and sent towards the registration roller.
From the registration roller, the paper goes through the same path as the simplex printing and
ejected out from the exit unit after the duplex side of the paper is printed.
6-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
M u lt i p l e f e e d d e t e c t i o n
During the transport of paper for printing, the multiple feed sensor measures the amount of
transmitted light to check for multiple feeds. If a multiple feed occurs, printing is halted and an
error message is displayed.
The amount of transmitted light is measured during the feeding of the first sheet, then recorded
as reference data. The amounts of transmitted light for the second and subsequent sheets are
compared to this reference data. If the amount of transmitted light differs significantly from the
reference data, a multiple feed condition is determined. (Multiple feed detection positions are different for the papers from the standard paper feed tray and multi-tray paper feed section.)
Multiple feed detection can be turned On/Off separately for the standard paper feed tray and
MTPF trays 1 & 2 using [Menu 4: Function setting] on the control panel (default: On).
Multiple feed detection timing (from the first sheet or from the second sheet) can be selected for
the MTPF trays 1 & 2. (Default: detection from the first sheet.)
Multi-drag feed detection can be turned On or Off for the MTPF trays 1 & 2. (Default: On).
6-4
manuals4you.com
Mechanism of the side registration unit
The side registration unit is equipped with CCD unit (2 pieces) to detect the lateral position of the
paper, and controls the printing positions by the print heads.
The side registration unit is also equipped with a detection mechanism (jam detector and sensor) to prevent paper from contacting the print heads and damaging the print head surfaces by
curled or dog-eared sheets. If paper contacts the jam detector bracket, due to dog-ear fold,
paper curling, etc., a sensor detects the jam and immediately stops the printing operation.
There is a metal roller at the exit of the side registration unit for the purpose to press down on
the papers to help prevent paper from lifting up and hitting the print head surface.
* The function itself is the same although the structure of the side registration unit has some difference
between HC5500 and HC5000.
CCD unit
Jam detection sensor
Jam detector
CCD unit
Side registration unit of HC5500
Side registration unit of HC5000
When paper contacts the jam detector,

the sensor detection plate escapes out from
the sensor. (The sensor is blocked by the sensor
detection plate in the normal condition).
6-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
M e c h a n i s m o f t ra n s f e r u n i t
The paper transfer belt is driven by the transfer belt motor.

The roller on the unit is equipped with an encoder sensor to monitor the transfer belt drive.
There are the suction fans (HC5500:six fans, HC5000:four fans) installed in the unit.
A belt tension adjustment mechanism is provided. Operating this adjustment mechanism moves
the roller that applies belt tension to adjust belt skew. The adjustment method is described in a
later section.
Only HC5000 is provided with the cleaning roller on the main unit, above the end of the transfer
unit. This roller contacts the belt surface and removes ink mist which lands on the belt. (The
cleaning roller must be replaced at regular interval.)
Though cleaning roller is provided, the ink mist does build up between the under-surface of the
belt and the top-surface of the belt pate, and cause belt slippage. Periodical cleaning is needed.
This photograph is the transfer unit of HC5000.

Transfer belt motor
Paper transfer belt
Encoder
Paper feed direction
Belt plate
Belt tension adjustment mechanism
This photograph shows removing the cleaning roller of HC5000.
6-6
manuals4you.com
Transfer unit elevating mechanism
The power of the main motor is transmitted to the elevating mechanism via a worm gear when
the lift gear unit clutch activates. Rotary power is transmitted directly to the drive mechanism by
the gear on one side (left side as viewed from the front) of the elevating mechanism. This drive
power is transmitted to the other side by a wire assisted by plates.
The upper limit position (printing position) and lower limit position (position for removal of
jammed paper) are detected by separate sensors.(Transfer unit upper / lower position sensor)
The Transfer unit is fixed in the upper limit position (printing position) by four BP spacers onto
the four mounting shafts on the print head carriage.
Depending on the paper type selected by the menu and the position of the paper feed pressure
lever, the position of the four BP spacers are automatically selected in hooking the transwer unit
to give appropriate gap between the print head and the paper.
* As descrived above, the HC5500 supports the transfer unit onto the head carriage by the BP spacers on
the mounting shafts. Therefore the gap between the print head and the paper depends on the thickness of
the BP spacers.
* The BP spacers have 3-step thickness. How far the BP spacers slide against the mounting shafts determine the gap between the print head and paper in 3-steps. These three steps are named as, [Normal],
[Card] and [Envelope]. The [Normal] has the smallest gap while the [Envelope] has the largest gap.
* The HC5000 does not have the mounting shafts and BP spacers. The printing height position of the transfer unit on HC5000 is controlled by the amount of main motor rotation from the detection of the upper limit
sensor to swing up the lift arms.
* Therefore, on HC5000, the gap between the print head and the paper is adjusted by SE-Mode No.5.9.x.32
[gap adjustment] in units of 0.1mm for each paper type. On HC5500, the gap is selected by the operator
in 3-steps, [Normal], [Card] and [Envelope] for each paper type.
BP spacers
Mounting shaft
BP spacer
The 4 BP spacers hook onto the 4 mounting

shafts to support the maintenace unit.
Enlarged view of
BP spacer.
6-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
M e c h a n i s m o f f li p p e r u n i t
The flipper unit is equipped with a flipper gate function to send paper to either the exit unit or
duplex unit.
The flipper gate is operated by Gate solenoid in the flipper unit.
Two rollers send paper to the duplex unit. The upper roller receives the drive from the duplex
entrance roller via gear. The upper and lower rollers are synchronized by timing belt.
Flipper sensor is mounted on the machine to confirm entry and exit of paper into and out of the
flipper unit.
Flipper cover SW is provided on the machine to monitor the open/close condition of the flipper
unit.
Paper feed roller
Flipper gate solenoid
Flipper gate
Flipper unit
6-8
manuals4you.com
Mechanism of duplex unit
The duplex unit uses the upper and lower belts to hold and transport paper.
The upper and lower belts are driven by gears located on the rear of the unit.
The lower section of the duplex unit is provided with a roller to prevent the lower belt from sagging due to environmental fluctuations (particularly high temperatures) that might lead to interference with other parts.
Belt slack prevention roller
Duplex unit in overturned position
Drive gear
6-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanism of exit unit

Paper is discharged by the sponge roller and star wheel (mounted on the flipper unit).
The sponge roller is driven by the exit motor on the exit unit. The rotation speed of the exit motor
is detected by an encoder sensor.
Ejection wing is provided to give rigidity to paper during discharge. The wing slightly curves the
paper during ejection to give rigidity. The position of the wing is moved by the wing pulse motor.
The wing home position is detected by wing HP sensor.
Wing (front)
Antistatic brush
Sponge roller
Wing motor unit
Exit motor encoder sensor
6 - 10
Wing (rear)
Wing HP sensor
Exit motor unit
manuals4you.com
1-2. Drive system for pa per transport

S c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m o f t h e p a p e r t r a n s p o rt d ri v e p o w e r t ra n s m i s s i o n s y s t e m,
v i e w e d f ro m t h e r e a r o f t h e m a c h i n e .
Drive power from the main motor is transmitted to the paper feed rollers via timing belts.
Since a single main motor is used to drive a number of rollers, a clutch is provided for each
roller, either to engage or disengage the drive to the rollers.
The switchback drive roll of the switchback unit is driven by a dedicated switchback motor.
Each timing belt is provided with a tensioner to maintain proper timing belt tension. These are
self tensioners operated by spring.
Switchback motor
Duplex roller gear

Duplex clutch unit
B
Duplex drive gear
C
Main motor
Registration roller clutch unit
Idler pulley
Pickup clutch
A: Timing belt DPX (duplex belt)

B: Timing belt C-D (from clutch to duplex belt)
C: Timing belt M-C (from main motor to clutch)
D: Timing belt M-R (from main motor to registration roller)
E: Timing belt R-P (from registration roller to first paper feed)
6 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
S c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m o f c o r r e s p o n d e n c e b e t w e e n p a p e r t ra n s p o rt p a t h a n d
p a p e r t r a n s p o r t d r i v e p o w e r t r a n s mi s s i o n s y s t e m
The following diagram illustrates the correspondence between the rotating rollers in the schematic diagram of the paper transport paths (viewed from the rear of the machine) and their drive
power transmitting systems.
D
C
S c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m o f p a p e r t r a n s p o rt p a t h s a s v i e w e d f r o m t h e r e a r
E
A
B
S c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m o f t h e p a p e r t r a n s p o rt d ri v e p o w e r t ra n s mission system as viewed from the rear
6 - 12
manuals4you.com
Disassembly
1.Registration roller upper
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Open front door left and right.

Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift the unit up.
Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2 (three M4x8 binding screws).
Lift the PCB box.
Loosen the right and left screws and lift the PCB box.
Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).
Remove screws and hang loose the connector bracket from the rear side (two M3x6 screws).
Disconnect the connector for the multiple feed sensor (receive).
Release the sensor wire harness from the harness clamps (4 locations).
Remove a screw from the rear side (M4x8 screw).
Harness clamp
Connector for multi feed

sensor (receive)
Two M3x6 screws
Harness clamps
Connector bracket
M4x8 screw
Connector for multi feed

sensor (receive)
6 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(8)
From the front of the machine, remove the spring hooked onto the registration roller unit upper in
the front and the rear.
(9) Remove the mounting screw of the registration roller unit upper on the rear of the machine
(HC5500:one M4x8 IT screw) (HC5000:one M4x5 IT screw - a short screw).
(10) Before removing the registration roller unit upper from the machine, remove the bracket of the
multiple feed sensor (receive). (One M4x8 IT screw in the front. The rear is hooded onto a pin.)
The registration sensor is also attached onto the same bracket.
* Note: Work carefully to avoid damaging the paper dust cover on the multiple feed sensor (receive).
Photograph of HC5000
Spring on front side
Spring on rear side
M4x5 IT screw
Registration roller upper
Multiple feed sensor (receive) bracket

This is the correct direction for the spring. This is incorrect direction for the spring.
If the spring is hooked in the incorrect direction as shown on the photograph on the right,
the white colored roller with the green knob in which the two springs rub against will make a
squeaky noise during the printing operation.
Photograph of HC5500
Spring on front side
Spring on rear side
M4x8 IT screw
6 - 14
Registration roller upper
Multiple feed sensor (receive) bracket
manuals4you.com
(11) Remove registration roller unit upper from the machine.
C a u t i o n in A s s e m b l y
Confirm that the metal on the registration roller upper is correctly positioned in the U-shaped cutout on the machine frame on the front and rear.
* Registration roller unit upper is equipped with an adjustment mechanism. For the adjustment method, refer
to the [Adjustment] in this chapter.
6 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2.Registration roller lower

(1)
(2)
Remove registration roller upper before performing the work.

Disconnect the two connectors for the registration clutches (one is used as clutch, another is a
brake).
* Note: When reconnecting, check the identification marks (color-coded cable bands) to prevent wrong connections (brake: blue; clutch: white).
(3)
(4)
Remove the snap pin from the shaft of the registration roller lower which holds the clutches.
Remove the clutch in the front, which is used as the registration brake.
Registration clutch snap pin
Registration clutch connectors
Registration brake
(5)
(6)
Remove the idler pulley assembly (one M4x8 IT screw).

Remove the clutch on the back, which is used as registration clutch.
Registration clutch
Rotation prevention bracket
6 - 16
Idler pulley assembly
M4x8 IT screw
manuals4you.com
(7)
Remove the lift gear unit.
* Note: For the instruction on the removal of the lift gear unit, refer to the page on item: 27. Lift gear unit.
(8)
Remove registration roller L pulley.
Lift gear unit
(9)
Registration roller L pulley
Remove the knob from the registration roller at the front of the machine (one M3x12 IT screw).
M3x12 IT screw
Knob
6 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(10) Remove the green plastic plate with the multiple feed sensor (send) attached.
(11) Remove the bearing from the front side (one E-ring, one M4x8 IT screw).
If the bearing is difficult to remove, insert a flathead screwdriver to pry it loose.
(12) Remove the bearing from the rear side (one M4x8 IT screw) - no E-ring on the rear.
(13) Push registration roller lower toward the rear and pull out from underneath to remove.
6 - 18
manuals4you.com
(14) Precautions in assembly:
(15) Make sure that belt 1 and belt 2 on the rear of the machine are hooked onto the shaft of registration roller lower.
* In the photograph below, belt 2 is not hooked onto the shaft of the registration roller lower.
Make sure that this type of mistake does not occur during the installation.
Belt 1
Belt 2
When reinstalling the registration clutch on the rear of the machine against the registration roller
L pulley, be sure to align the projection and indentation and ensure proper attachment of the registration roller L pulley.
Match the hole in the registration clutch to the D-shaped section on the shaft of registration roller
lower.
When reinstalling the idler pulley assembly back on the machine, fit the rotation prevention
bracket section against the registration clutch.
6 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
3.Side registration unit

(1)
Open the left and right cover and check the position of the transfer unit.
* Jumpt to step (5) for HC5000.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Go to step (3) if the transfer unit is hanging on the print head carriage. Go to step (5) if it is not.
Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.2] to raise the transfer unit lift arms to the maximum up position.
Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.3] to slide the PB spacers to the HP (unhooked) position.
Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.2] to lower the transfer unit down to maximum down position.
* Make sure to turn OFF the machine power after lowering the transfer unit.
(6)
(7)
(8)
Remove the top cover from the machine.

Remove the Operation panel together with the bracket (two M4x8 IT screws).
Loosen the four screws (M4x8 IT screws) on the ink bottle unit. Slide the ink bottle unit all the
way to the left.
Loosen M4x8 IT screws, two in the front and two in the rear.
Control panel
Switchback unit
lever
Control panel bracket
Ink bottle unit
(9)
6 - 20
Remove M4x8 IT screws, one on the left and one on the right.
Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift the unit up.
manuals4you.com
(10) Pull out the duplex unit.
Duplex unit
(11) Remove the print head carriage covers L and R.

Platen cover L
Platen cover R
(12) Remove the print head drive PCB for the black ink.
* Note: During reassembly, make sure that the flexible hose from the head is not inserted slanted nor loosely
connected.
(13) Disconnect the connectors P151 and P154. (HC5000:P151,155)
P154
P151
6 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(14) Loosen two screws and lift the side registration unit.
These two screws holding the height positioning blocks should never be loosened.
Loosen.
The upper photograph shows the screws

from the paper feeding side.
Loosen.
* The height positioning blocks will not function properly if the two screws pointed out are loosened excessively. If the screws are over-loosened, tighten slightly before reinstallation.
(15) Remove the side registration unit.
Side registration unit
* CCD gain adjustment must be made after the side registration unit is replaced. For the details on the
adjustment method, refer to [item 10: CCD gain adjustment] in the adjustment section on this chapter.
* Image adjustment must also be made after replacing the side registration unit. Refer to the chapter on
which the adjustment procedure is given.
* Since external light entering into the CCD may cause error results, be sure to keep the cover in place when
checking machine operations and making adjustments on the side registration unit.
6 - 22
manuals4you.com
4 . Tr a n s f e r u n i t
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
If the transfer unit is hanging on the print head carriage, refer to the page on the Side registration
unit removal to lower the transfer unit. Make sure to turn OFF the machine power.
Open front door L / front door R.
Lift the PCB box.
* Note: For steps (1) through (3) above, refer to [item 1. Registration roller upper].
(5)
Remove the mounting screws of the ground wire and remove the wire.
Ground wire
(6)
Lift the transfer unit manually by hand and insert the support bar jigs.
Insert the support bar jigs in these holes of

the rear frame.
(7)
(8)
Remove the mounting screw of the connector cover bracket and remove the cover bracket.
Free the wire harness from the wire saddle.
Wire saddle
Connector cover bracket
(9)
Disconnect the five connectors of the transfer unit.

( HC5000 : four connectors )
(10) Lower the transfer unit manually by hand.

* [Refer to the page on item 27: Removal of Lift gear unit.]
6 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(11) Pull out the transfer unit.
* Caution: The transfer unit is heavy (approx. 15 kg). Dropping it may result in injury.
* Caution: The encoder installed in the transfer unit is a precision component. A strong blow or shock may
cause centering deviations and result in irregular paper feed speeds.
* Caution: When reinstalling the transfer unit, make sure that the transfer unit rests securely on the front
roller in the correct position, or the transfer unit may lift the maintenance unit up too high and cause the belt
to hit the print head during printing and damage the print head.
Front roller
* When the transfer unit is replaced, check the belt tension and adjust if necessary. The adjustment method
is described in a later section.
* When replaced with a new the transfer unit, the unit may need to be adjusted so that the unit is parallel to
the registration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.
* Transfer belt speed adjustment and initial paper feed motor adjustment must be performed after transfer
unit replacement. The adjustment method is described in a later section.
* Image adjustment may be required after replacing the transfer unit. Refer to the image adjustment procedures in the separate chapter.
6 - 24
manuals4you.com
5 . Tr a n s f e r b e l t
(1)
Remove the transfer unit.

* The encoder unit mounted on the transter unit is a very fragile component. Handle the trasfer unit
with care. Hitting the encoder unit may result in deformation of the encoder unit, leading to an incorrect belt speed control affecting the print results, including 130mm pitch image distortion.
(2)
Remove the four small belt retaining plates on the front and rear (four M4x8 IT screws).
* In putting back the 4 belt retaining plates, mount the 2 rear ones first.
* HC5000 has only 2 belt retaining plates on the paper ejection side of the transfer unit.
* On HC5000, after removing the 2 belt retaining screws, remove four M4x8 IT screws from the top of
the belt base plate on the operator side of the unit, and jump to step (11).
M4x8 IT screw
M3x6 IT screws (2 pcs)
Belt retaining plates
M4x8 IT screw
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Unhook the springs, one each from the front and rear.
Remove the gear cover.
Remove E-ring on the rear.
Remove the gear on the rear and remove pin from the shaft.
(7)
Remove the gear from the front by removing a pin. Then remove the spacer.
* Pay caution, as the pin, if faced down, may drop off from the unit.
* Pay caution not to drop the pin, which may fall off if faced down.
(8)
(9)
Remove the shasft from the rear.

Remove the hook unit from the front by removing 2 E-rings.
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Set the transfer unit, motor down, on the transfer belt stand jig and lock the unit on the jig.
Remove the bearing retaining plate (two M3x6 IT screws).
Remove the bearing.
Remove the side bracket (10 M4x8 IT screws and three M3x8 screws).
* Pay caution, as the white colored space on the shaft may fall off.
* In mounting back the side bracket, the paper-feed side of the side bracket should hit against the belt
base plate.
(14) Pull out the transfer belt.

* Check the suction fan positions. The positions of the suction fans may shift during transfer belt
removal/attachment. Refer to [item 8: Suction fan].
* When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure it is positioned left and right in parallel.
6 - 25
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
In mounting back the side bracket, the paper-feed side of the side
bracket should hit against the belt base palte.
* When the transfer belt is replaced, check the belt tension and adjust if necessary. The adjustment method
is described in a later section.
* When replaced with a new the transfer belt, the unit may need to be adjusted so that the unit is parallel to
the registration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.
* Image adjustment may be required after replacing the transfer unit. Refer to the image adjustment procedures in the separate chapter.
* Working on HC5000, if the trasfer belt is replaced, Transfer belt speed adjustment and Initial paper feed
motor adjustment becomes necessary.
6 - 26
manuals4you.com
6.Belt encoder
(1)
(2)
Remove the transfer unit.

Remove the belt encoder (two M3x6 IT screws).
* Caution: The encoder installed in the transfer unit is a precision component. A strong blow or shock may
cause centering deviations and result in irregular paper feed speeds.
M3x6 IT screw
Belt encoder
* In certain cases, image adjustment will need to be performed after the belt encoder has been replaced.
Check by printing out test print images of the image adjustment software and perform image adjustment if
color shifts or other abnormalities are noted. Refer to the separate chapter on the image adjustment for the
details on the adjustment.
6 - 27
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
7 . Tr a n s f e r b e l t m o t o r
(1)
(2)
Remove the transfer unit from the machine.

Remove the bracket.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Disconnect all connectors except for the transfer belt motor connector (P532, P722, P750).
Remove the binders which are fixing harness.
Remove the transfer belt motor (three M4x8 IT screws).
* HC5000 is not equipped with this bracket.
connectors
Bracket
Transfer belt motor
* Caution: Hook the timing belt correctly when reinstalling the transfer belt motor back on the Transfer unit.
Tension roller
* Caution: Since the exterior cover of the transfer belt motor rotates during the motor operation, make sure
that the moving part does not interfere with the cables of the belt encoder or suction fan.
* Following the replacement of the transfer belt motor, transfer belt speed adjustment and initial paper feed
motor adjustment must be performed. The adjustment method is described in a later section.
* In certain cases, image adjustment is necessary following the transfer belt motor replacement. Check the
test print pattern using the print adjustment software and perform the image adjustment if color shifts or
other abnormalities are noted. Refer to the chapter on the image adjustment for the details on the adjustment.
6 - 28
manuals4you.com
8.Suction fan
(1)
(2)

Remove the transfer belt.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Disconnect the suction fan connector.

Pull out the suction fan unit.
Remove the cover from the suction fan unit.
Remove the suction fan.
* Note: Refer to [item 5: Transfer belt].
Suction fan
Top view of the suction fan unit (HC5500).
Top view of the suction fan unit (HC5000).

* Note: Be careful to prevent interference from the suction fan cables during reinstallation.
* Note: Check through the window to make sure that the blower fans are at the specified positions during
reinstallation.
* Belt tension must be adjusted following replacement of the transfer belt. The adjustment method is
described in a later section.
* When blower fans have been replaced, the transfer unit position must be adjusted so that it is parallel to the
registration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.
* In certain cases, image adjustment is necessary following blower fan replacement. Check the test pattern
and perform image adjustment if you note color shifts or other abnormalities. For a discussion of the adjustment method, refer to [Adjustment] in [Ink supply passages].
6 - 29
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
9.Cleaning roller
* Only HC5000 is equipped with the cleaning roller.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Lower the transfer unit all the way down using Test mode on the operation panel.
Select [Down] in [8.1.4.2 Lowering operation] to lower the transfer unit.
Switch off the main power.
Lift the cleaning unit, push down the cleaning roller, and pull out the cleaning roller from underneath the cleaning unit.
* Note: Before lifting the cleaning unit, confirm that the ink pan is not positioned under the print heads. If the
ink pan is positioned under the print heads, it may strike and damage the print heads.
Cleaning unit
Cleaning roller
Cleaning roller
* The cleaning roller needs to be replaced periodically.
6 - 30
manuals4you.com
1 0 . B P Spa c e r, G e a r a n d B P s pa c e r m o t o r
* These items are equipped on HC5500 only.
< G e a r ( F r o n t ) a n d B P s p a c e r s ( Fr o n t ) >
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Remove the gear cover.
Remove two E-rings on the rear, one is in front of the gear and the the other against the machine
frame on the same shaft.
Remove the gear on the rear and remove the pin from the shaft.
(5)
Remove the gear on the front by removing a pin.
(6)
Remove the BP sapcer unit by removing 2 E-rings.
(7)
Remove the BP spacers.

BP spacer unit
BP spacer
BP spacer
Gear cover
< G e a r ( R e a r ) , B P s p a c e r m o t o r a n d B P s p a c e r s ( Re a r ) >
(1)
(2)

Remove E-ring from the gear on the rear and remove the gear.
Follow down to step (3) for removing the PB spacer motor. Jump to step (4) for removing the
BP spacers.
(3)
(4)
Remove the BP spacer motor by removing 2 screws and 1 connector.

Remove the BP spacer unit by removing 2 E-rings.
(5)
Remove the BP spacers.
The transfer belt motor on the far left of the

transfer unit needs to be detached (loosened) away from the transfer unit frame to
allow the BP spacer unit to come out.
BP spacer motor
Transfer belt motor
Gear
6 - 31
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
* In mounting the gears on the front and rear, slide the BP spacer units (front & rear) all the way toward the
paper ejection side.
Slide the BP spacer
units (front & rear) all
the way to the paper
ejection side when
mounting the rear
gear back on the
unit.
Gear
BP spacer unit
When putting the gear in the front

and rear, back on the machine
with the BP spacer unit pushed
all the way to the paper ejection
side, both of the gears should be
put back in the position shown on
the photograph.
Any other position is not
acceptable.
Activate SE-Mode No. [8.1.4.3 BP Spacer] and check the PB Spacer stop positions.
Card Position
Home Position
Envelope Position (two views)

Normal Position
6 - 32
manuals4you.com
11 . E x i t u n i t
(1)
(2)
Remove the paper receiving tray from the machine.

Remove the exit unit cover (two M4x8 binding screws).
Exit unit cover
M4x8 IT screw
(3)
(4)
Disconnect the connectors for the wing motor, exit motor, exit motor encoder, and wing HP sensor.
Remove the exit unit (four M4x8 IT screws).
Wing
Wing
Wing motor
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
M3x5 RS-tight screw
connector
Exit motor unit
connector
6 - 33
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
11-1. Exit motor unit

(1)
Remove the exit motor unit (two M3x5 RS-tight screws).
* Note: When reinstalling the exit motor unit, let the weight of the exit motor unit apply tension to the belt.
11-2. Wing moto r

(1)
(2)
Remove the roller motor unit.

Remove the wing motor.
(HC5500:two M3x3 RS-tight screws) (HC5500:two M3x3 RS-tight screws).
M3x3 RS-tight screw
M3x3 RS-tight screw
Wing motor
* Note: When reinstalling the exit motor unit, keep the wings on the front and rear to the fully opened position.
6 - 34
manuals4you.com
1 2 . Sp o n g e r o l l e r
(1)
Remove the exit unit.
* Note: Refer to [item 11: Exit unit].
(2)
(3)
Remove the wings from the front and rear (two M3x10 tapping screws).
(Screws are found from the bottom of the unit, with the wings opened to the widest position.)
Remove the cover.
* Note: When the cover is being removed, burring of the anti-static brush will interfere with the cover. To prevent this, open the exit unit slightly by hand during removal.
(4)
Remove the pulley.(one E-ring)

* The pulley of HC5000 is mounted with set screw.
(5)
(6)
Remove the bearing. (two E-rings)

Remove the sponge roller (two bracket screws).
Bearing
E-ring
E-ring
pulley
Sponge roller
Screw
6 - 35
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
13.Flipper unit
(1)
(2)
Remove the paper receiving tray.

Remove the exit tray unit cover.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remove the exit unit.

Disconnect the connector.
Open the flipper unit.
* Note: Refer to [item 11: Exit unit].
Flipper unit
(6)
Remove the E-rings from the front and rear, and release the link-arms from the shafts.
* In HC5500, since it does not have the mechanism of a link arm, this work is unnecessary.
E-ring
Link-arm
(7)
Push the lower plates on the front and rear toward the inside and release the shafts.
Lever
(8)
6 - 36
Pull and remove the flipper unit from the machine.
manuals4you.com
14.Flipper roller upper / Flipper roller lower

(1)
Remove the flipper unit.

* Note: Refer to [item 13: Flipper unit].
(2)
Remove the cover (four M4x8 binding screws).

* Note: Use a workbench to keep from applying excessive load onto the fragile flipper gate. Excessive
loads may result in shape distortions.
Flipper roller upper
Binding screw
M4x8
Binding screw
M4x8
Bottom roller
Binding screw
M4x8
Binding screw
M4x8
Side lever
(3)
(4)
Remove the flipper gate unit (three M4x8 IT screws).

Remove the side lever (two M4x8 IT screws).
* Note: When reinstalling, be careful to avoid interference with the cables.
(5)
Remove the timing belt and other parts and dismount the Flipper rollers Upper and Lower. (Erings)
6 - 37
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
15.Duplex entrance roller

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Remove inner cover 3.

Remove the top cover.
Lift the PCB box.
Remove the E-ring from the front side.
E-ring
(7)
Remove the pin from the pulley on the rear, remove the belt, and dismount the pulley.
* Caution: Keep in mind that the straight pin may fall out if positioned facing down.
Gear
Belt
Straight pin
6 - 38
manuals4you.com
(8)
Remove the spacer and bearing.
Bearing
Spacer
(9)
Remove the duplex entrance roller.
6 - 39
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
16.Duplex unit
(1)
(2)
(3)

Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift switchback unit upper.
Pull the duplex unit to the front (forward).
Duplex unit
(4)
(5)
Open up the upper duplex belt to access to the mounting screws.

Remove the duplex unit by gently pushing the duplex unit toward the rear a little bit to disengage
it from the hook pins (two M4x4 IT screws).
M4x4 IT screw
6 - 40
manuals4you.com
17.Duplex belt upper

(1)
Remove the duplex unit.
* Note: Refer to [item 16: Duplex unit].
(2)
Remove the hinges (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).
[ The duplex unit turned up-side-down ]
Duplex belt lower
Hinge
Duplex belt upper

M4x8 RS-tight screw (2 pcs)
M4x8 RS-tight screws (2 pcs)
(3)
Pull the lever forward with a finger and separate the upper belt unit from the lower belt unit.
Lever
6 - 41
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(4)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the side covers (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).
* Caution: When reinstalling, be sure to install the right and left side covers in their original positions.
(5)
Pull the belt out in the direction of the arrow.
M4x8 RS-tight screw
M4x8 RS-tight screw

Side cover
Side cover
M4x8 RS-tight screw
6 - 42
manuals4you.com
18.Duplex belt lower

(1)
Remove the duplex unit.

* Refer to [item 16: Duplex unit].
(2)
(3)
(4)
Remove the hinges (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).

Pull the lever forward with a finger and separate the upper belt unit from the lower belt unit.
Remove the side covers. (four M4x8 RS-tight screws)
* Caution: When reinstalling, do not interchange the covers for the left and right.
* Note: For steps (1) through (4), refer to [item 17: Duplex belt upper].
(5)
Remove the center screw (M4x8 IT screw) and rotate the bracket 180 degrees.
M4x8 RS-tight screw
Cover
M4x8 RS-tight screw
Cover
Bracket
M4x8 RS-tight screw

M4x8 IT screw (1 pc)
(6)
Pull the belt out towards the front.
6 - 43
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
19.Switchback unit upper

(1)
(2)
(3)

Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2.
Pull out the pin (one M4x8 IT screw).
* When reinstalling, be
sure to check the pin
hole position in the back.
Pin
Switchback unit upper
(4)
Lift switchback unit upper slightly and remove.
* When reinstalling, be sure to check the pin hole position in the back.
6 - 44
manuals4you.com
20.Switchback unit lower

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2 (three M4x8 binding screws).
Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper, then lift switchback unit upper.
Pull the duplex unit to the front (forward).
Duplex unit
(6)
Remove the re-feed sensor bracket (one M4x8 IT screw).
* Note: Disconnect the connector first.
M4x8 IT screw
connector
Re-feed sensor bracket
6 - 45
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(7)
(8)
(9)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the re-feed paper guide (two M3x6 IT screws).

Remove the re-feed paper guide bracket (one M4x8 RS-tight screw).
Remove the pin (one M4x8 IT screw).
M3x6 IT screws (2)
Re-feed sensor bracket
Pin
M4x8 RS-tight screw

M4x8 IT screw
Re-feed guide bracket
Re-feed guide
(10) Remove switchback unit lower (two M4x8 IT screws).

Switchback unit lower
M4x8 IT screws (2)

* Note: Before pulling out switchback unit lower, disconnect the connector on the rear.
* Note: When reinstalling, make sure to connect to the correct pin.
6 - 46
manuals4you.com
21.Switchback drive roller

* Caution: Nip pressure is applied to the switchback drive roller. Be sure to open the switchback door to
release the nip pressure before working.
* Caution: Lower the standard paper feed tray to the lowest position to prevent interference.
(1)
(2)
(3)

Remove the bearing (one M4x8 IT screw).
* Note: If the bearing is difficult to remove, insert a flathead screwdriver to pry it loose.
(4)
Pull the switchback drive roller toward the front to remove.
* Caution: Pull the roller straight out to prevent bending of the roller shaft.
Switchback drive roller
Bearing
Bearing
Flathead screwdriver
* Note: When reinstalling, match the hole on the rear side to the D-shaped section on the shaft of the switchback drive roller.
D-shaped section
6 - 47
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
22.Switchback unit
(1)
Remove the two IT screws (M4x8).
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
Switchback unit
(2)
6 - 48
To remove the switchback unit, open it and lift it out.
manuals4you.com
23.Main motor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Lift the PCB box.
Remove the main motor (four M4x8 IT screws).
M4x8 IT screw
connector
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
Main motor
* Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the belt separator is positioned between the two belts.
<> Tighten the main motor mounting screws (4 pcs) with the locating pin on the machine frame positioned at
the center of the elongated hole of the motor bracket.
<> Loosen the screw of the belt tensioner pulley and let the tensioner work by the pull of the spring. Then
tighten the belt tensioner screw. (Do not push the pulley against the belt when tightening the tensioner
screw, as that would put too much tension on the belt.)
Belt separator
The elongated hole of the main motor bracket
Spring
Screw of the belt tensioner pulley
* Note: When reinstalling, make sure the main motor does not interfere with the cables.
6 - 49
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
24.Registration clutch
(1)
(2)

Disconnect the two connectors.
* Note: When reconnecting, check the identification marks (color-coded cable bands) to prevent wrong connections. (brake: blue; clutch: white)
(3)
(4)
Remove the snap pin.

Remove the registration brake located on the front.
Registration clutch snap pin
Registration clutch connectors
Registration brake
Paper feed clutch
Registration clutch
Registration brake
(5)
(6)
Connect the clutch wires to

the correct connectors
according to the coloring.
Remove the idler pulley (one M4x8 RS-tight screw).

Remove the registration clutch on the back.
* For steps (1) through (5), refer to steps (2) through (6) in [item 2: Registration roller lower].
* Note: When reinstalling, align the projections and indentations on the clutch and brake.
6 - 50
manuals4you.com
Registration clutch
Bracket in which the clutches

hooks on to stay stationary.
Idler pulley
M4x8 RS-tight screw
* The clutch in the back: Registration clutch ........Connector with white colored marking.
* The clutch in the front: Registration brake..........Connector with blue colored marking.
6 - 51
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
25.Paper feed clutch

(1)
(2)

Disconnect the connector of the paper feed clutch.
Snap pin
D-shaped section
connector
Paper feed clutch
Registration clutch
Registration brake
(3)
(4)
(5)
Connect the clutch wires to

the correct connectors
according to the coloring.
Remove the pressure chamber.

Remove the snap pin of the paper feed clutch.
Remove the paper feed clutch.
* Note: When reinstalling the paper feed clutch, match the hole in the pickup clutch to the D-shaped section
on the shaft.
6 - 52
manuals4you.com
26.Duplex clutch unit

(1)
(2)
(3)

Remove the duplex clutch unit. (four M4x8 IT screws)
M4x8 IT screw (2 pcs)
connector
M4x8 IT screw (2 pcs)
* Note: When reinstalling the duplex clutch unit, be sure to install the belt first.
* Note: When reinstalling the duplex clutch unit, engage its gear teeth to that of the paper re-feed roller.
Belt
6 - 53
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
27.Multiple feed sensor (receive)

(1)
(2)
(3)

Lift the PCB box.
* Loosen the right and left screws and lift the PCB box.
* Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).
(4)
Remove the connector for the multiple feed sensor (receive).
Connector for multi feed sensor

(receive)
(5)
Remove the bracket for the multiple feed sensor (receive) (one M4x8 IT screw) (front).
* Note: Work carefully to avoid damaging the paper dust cover on the sensor.
(6)
Cut the cable bands.
* Note: Use new cable bands to tie the wire in reassembly.
(7)
6 - 54
Remove the multiple feed sensor (receive) from the bracket (two M3x6 RS-tight screws).
manuals4you.com
2 8 . L i ft g e a r u n i t
(1)
(2)
(3)

Insert the support bar jigs from the front.
* Note: After inserting the support bar jig, rotate the shaft jigs and confirm that the jigs are locked in position.
(4)
Insert an Allen wrench in the shaft of the lift gear unit on the rear of the machine and turn clockwise to lower the transfer unit down until the unit sits completely on the support bar jigs.
* Note: The rotation of the shaft becomes lighter when the transport unit sits on the jigs. Make sure that the
unit is sitting firmly on the support bar jigs.
Lift gear unit
down
(5)
(6)
(7)
Disconnect the connector from the sensor at the bottom.

Remove the sensor detection plate (one M3x6 IT screw).
Remove the sensor bracket with the sensor attached (one M4x8 IT screw).
M4x8 IT screw
connector
Lift gear unit
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
M4x4 IT screw
M3x6 IT screw
Sensor detection plate
M4x8 IT screw
Sensor bracket
6 - 55
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(8)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Remove the gear.
* Note: Loosen the set screw of the gear ( M6x20 ) using an Allen wrench.
* Before removing the gear, remove the plastic sensor detection actuator which is screwed onto the
gear. This actuator has a play in mounting. Remove the play by rotating the actuator all the way in
Counter-Clockwise direction when mounting it back onto the gear.
* If the set screw (M6 x 20) is not in a good position to fit the Allen wrench, rotate the shaft of the lift
gear in the clockwise direction to shift the position of the set screw.
Set screw
(9)
Remove the lift gear unit (four M4x8 IT screws).
* Note: Pay caution not to drop the small rectangular key.
Push down in the

direction of the
arrow.
Key
* Caution: Do not forget to mount the key in reassembly.

* Caution: Position the set screw, so it can be tightened at the flat portion of the D-shaped shaft.
* Caution: There is a play between the teeth of the gear removed and the teeth on the gear threaded on the
shaft. To reduce the play, push the lift gear unit diagonally down in the direction shown on the photograph
by the arrow mark. (Temporary tighten the set screw, push the lift gear unit diagonally down and tighten the
set screw.
* If the gear starts to wear out, remove the set screw, removed the gear and rotate it 180 degrees, and then
tighten the set screw back. The unused portion of the screw then can be used.
6 - 56
manuals4you.com
29.Multiple feed sensor (send)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Disconnect the connector from the sensor.
Push up the green plastic sensor plate, and then pull it diagonally down against the plate spring.
Pull out the multiple feed sensor (send) to the front.
* The green plastic plate and the sensor is in one piece.
6 - 57
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Adjustment
List of adjustments to be made when the parts described in this chapter are replaced
List of adjustments to
follow from next page
Transfer
unit (Section 4)
1.A d j u s t i n g t h e s k e w o f
tr an sfe r be lt
2.Ad justin g the t ra nsf er un it
par al l el t o t h e r e gi s t r at i on
r ol l er s
Transfer
Belt
Transfer Suction fan Machine
belt
encoder
belt motor (Section 8) Setup work
(Section 5) (Section 6) (Section 7)
3.Tr an sf er b el t s pe ed ad j us tme nt
4.In itia l pa pe r fe ed mo tor

a dj u s tme nt
5.B a c k u p r o l l e r h e i g h t
6.A d j u s t i n g t h e h ei gh t of th e
pape r gu ide pla te in fr on t
of t he re gist ra tion r olle rs
7.Ad j us ti n g the p os i ti o n of
r e gi s t r at i on r ol l er u pp er
8.A d j u s t m en t m ec h a n i s m o f
r eg is t r at i o n r o l le r gu i de
9.C omp en satio n for the
tw istin g o n the m achin e
fram e
A
C
Image adjustment (Chapter [Ink

supply passages])
A : Need to check and then make the adjustment if needed.

B : Basically the adjustment is not required, but do so if in need.
C : Print the test pattern using the image adjustment software and make the adjustment if required.
As can be seen from above chart, replacing the listed parts may require the image adjustment.
Therefore, complete all the mechanical adjustments before doing the image adjustment.
The image adjustment should be done at the very last.
< Adjustments that must be performed in a specific sequence >
Tra nsfer b elt sp eed ad justment -> Ini ti a l pape r feed motor ad justme nt -> Image
adju stmen t.
Adjusting the transfer unit parallel to registration rollers -> Image adjustment.
Adjusting the frame distortion compensation -> Image adjustment.
6 - 58
manuals4you.com
1.Adjusting the skew of the transfer unit belt

1-1. < Overview o f ad justm ent >
The belt may skew due to improper tensioning of the transfer unit belt.
To prevent this, the belt skew must be properly adjusted.
Using the [8.1.3.1 Transfer Motor] function of [Drive check 8.1.3 BP Unit], operate the transfer unit
belt for about 3 minutes. Check to make sure that the edge of the belt is touching lightly against the
belt retaining plate on the operation side of the machine. The belt should not be hitting too hard
against the belt retaining plate and making a buckle. Always perform this check after replacing the
transfer unit, transfer belt, or suction fan.
Before doing the check and the adjustment, remove three of the four belt guide plates. The one belt
guide plate to stay on the unit is the one in the front, located on the paper ejection side.
1-2. < Adjus tment meth od >

< C h e c k f o r b e l t s k e w a n d b uc k l i n g >
(1)
(2)
Raise the transfer unit to the printing position.

1) Open front door L / front door R and check the position of the transfer unit.
2) If the transfer unit is in the down position, follow the instruction below to bring the transfer
unit up and hang it onto the print head carriage. If the transfer unit is already hanging on
the print head carriage, jump to step (2).
If the transfer unit is in the up and hung position, go to (2):operation of the transfer unit belt.
3) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink catch pan to the right..
4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the transfer unit to the upper limit position.
5) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], slide the BP spacer to the NORMAL position.
6) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], swing down the lift arms to the lower limit position.
Using Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1, operate the transfer unit belt in [300-3] mode for about 3 minutes.
While rotating the belt, look though from the exit end of the machine and confirm following
things.
The belt does not slide gradually toward front or rear side of the machine.
The belt is touching lightly against the belt retaining plate on the front side of the machine.
The belt is not skewing too far to one end so much as a buckle is made on the belt.
* The belt does move up and down 0.1 to 0.2 mm in normal conditions due to the belt joint.
If any condition of above is not correct, make adjustment at that time.

Refer to the following pages for the method to check and to adjust.
6 - 59
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Check to make sure that the belt does not skew or lift on one side.
The belt should be touching lightly against the belt retaining plate on the operators side of the machine.
View from the exit end of

the machine.
Wing
REAR
FRONT
The belt should be touching lightly on the operators side (front).
Guide
Belt
The belt contacts the guide

too hard and lifts (make buckle).
GOOD
NO GOOD
The belt is not touching the

guide on the operators side.
NO GOOD
< Adjustment method >

* The adjustment procedure given below is for HC5500, butthe same procedure applies on HC5000 also.
The difference between HC5500 and HC5000 is that the belt guide plates do not need to be removed on
HC5000. Therefore, the transfer unit on HC5000 need not be pulled out.
(1)
6 - 60
Pull out the transfer unit and remove three belt guides. (Refer the next page photograph)
1) Insert the jig shafts under the transfer unit.
2) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the lift arms to the upper limit position.
3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the BP spacers to the HP position.
4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], lower the transfer unit down to the lower limit position.
5) Turn OFF the machine power and pull out the transfer unit.
6) Remove three belt guides.
7) Return the transfer unit into the machine.
manuals4you.com
Belt guide
(2)
(3)
To check the belt skew, use Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1 and run the belt at the seed of 300 -3 drops
for at least 3 minutes with the transfer unit raised to the highest (printing) position.
If the belt starts to slide too much to the either side, the following adjustment is performed.
1) Loosen the two IT screws which locks the adjusting unit. Then rotate the adjusting screw
until the edge of the belt on the operation side of the machine lightly touches the belt guide
under the belt retaining plate. The belt should not hit the belt guide too hard as to lift. The
belt should only lightly touch the guide on the operation side (front) of the machine. The
adjustment should be made while the belt is running with above test mode.
2) When the indicator is moved toward the left on the scale (clockwise turn of the adjustment
screw), the belt will move toward the front. When the indicator is moved toward the right
(counterclockwise turn of the adjustment screw), the belt will move toward the rear.
3) After the adjustment, check the belt for skew by running the belt for at least another 3 minutes. If the belt stays at the good position, tighten the two loosened IT screws.
4) After tightening the two screws, make a final check by running the belt for at least another 3
minutes. If the belt stays at the good position, stop the belt rotation.
5) Turn the adjustment screw 1/8 turn toward left (counterclockwise).
6) Pull out the transfer unit again and mount back the three belt guides.
7) Make a final check by running the belt for at least another 3 minutes.
8) The adjustment is completed. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the jig shafts.
Adjusting screw
Screws which locks the

adjusting unit.
Scale
< Symptom of faulty adjustment >

Improper adjustment will result in belt skew. This can cause the belt to lift, causing the paper to
scrape against the printing head and cause smudged prints.
In a worst case, the printing head may be damaged. The corner of the belt may start to tear.
6 - 61
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2 . A d j u s t m e n t t o p o s i t i o n t h e t ra n s f e r u n i t pa r a l l e l t o r e g i s tration rollers
< Overview of adjustment >
If the transfer unit is not parallel to the registration rollers, the paper sheet whose leading edge is
aligned by the registration rollers may not run straight when transferred onto the transfer unit. As the
printing process moves to K, to C, to M, and to Y, the positions at which ink is dropped will begin to
skew (vertical skew). The adjustment described here will make the correction. This must be checked
after the transfer unit, suction fan or transfer belt is replaced, and the correction should be made
when necessary.
(1)
Check to see if adjustment is necessary.

1) Select [-M-K 1_6] in [9.2 Pattern selector] and output a test pattern from the standard paper
feed tray.(The speed should be 300-7 drops and printed in simplex). In this pattern, K and
M vertical lines are printed vertically straight. To see the condition better, A3 size matt
paper should be used. Smaller papers do not have enough distance to show the result so
good. This inspection is to see if the K and M colors are printed vertically straight or not.
There is no need for the two colors to be on top of each other. Also, there is not need to
compare the color or the darkness between the 4 vertical large strips. Looking at the
printed sheet about 60 centimeters away from the eye, if the coloring within each large strip
stays constant from top to bottom, the adjustment is good. If the coloring changes in
between, from top to bottom, the adjustment is not good.
2) If the K and M lines are parallel on the pattern output in step 1), no adjustment is needed.
Enlarged view of printed pattern
K and M parallel to each other
K and M not parallel to each other
Adjustment not necessary
Adjustment is necessary
* The four vertical image group can differ in color between the each. If the printing of the K and M are
made in a straight line, the color within each block should stay constantly the same.
6 - 62
manuals4you.com
(2)
Method of adjusting to correct defects

1) Check the output pattern and determine how the adjustment mechanism should be moved.
Enlarged view of printed pattern
A
B
The space should be made smaller in

the instruction which follows.
Not parallel
The space should be made larger

in the instruction which follows.
Parallel
Not parallel
Registration roller and transfer unit as viewed from the top
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the lift arms to the upper limit position.
Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the BP spacers to the HP position.
Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], lower the transfer unit down to the lower limit position.
Measure the space using thickness gauge (feeler gauge), and memo down.
Using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench, loosen the two cap screws securing the adjustment mechanism in place.
7) Using thickness gauge (feeler gauge), adjust the gap wider or narrower, according to which
way the transfer unit should be shifted, referring to the previous sketch A or B.
8) Using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench, tighten the two cap screws securing the adjustment mechanism in place with the gap adjusted with the correct thickness gauge (feeler gauge).
9) Output the adjustment pattern again. Check the result. If the K and M lines are not parallel,
repeat the adjustment process until they are parallel.
Cap screws
GAP
Narrow the gap for B

Widen the gap for A
< HC5500>
< HC5000>
Insert the thickness gauge here
Cap screws
6 - 63
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Solid black color print pattern can also be used for the checking purpose. Use HC paper IJ (normal paper) for this purpose. Refer below for the instruction.
NO GOOD 2
NO GOOD 1
The area after the registration

roller becomes all whiter in color.
The area only just after the registration

roller becomes whiter in color.
[ Make the gap smaller ]
[ Make the gap larger ]
GOOD
< Symptoms of incorrect adjustment >

An error is generated during image adjustment.
The vertical lines printed by the four colors cross each other.
* This check is required if the transfer unit, suction fan, or transfer belt is replaced. Adjustment needs to be
made according to the result of the check. After this adjustment is performed, image adjustment must be
performed. Even if the parts are not replaced, image adjustment may be necessary after this adjustment.
Check the test pattern and perform image adjustment if you note color shifts or other abnormalities. For the
detailed steps on the image adjustment, refer to the separate Chapter on the image adjustment.
* After the adjustment is made, check for the transfer belt skew by running the transfer belt for at least 3 minutes at the speed of 300 - 3 drops with the transfer unit raised to the highest position (printing position).
* Check that the transfer belt is not hitting the ejection guides and flipper gate. If needed, make mechanical
adjustment in those area to make the correction.
6 - 64
manuals4you.com
3 . Tr a n s f e r b e l t s p e e d a d j u s t m e n t
This adjustment process monitors the transfer belt motor speed by detecting the belt encoder signal,
then automatically adjusts the speed based on a reference value. This adjustment must be performed
after the transfer unit is replaced.
< A dj u s t m e n t me t h o d >
(1)
(2)
(3)
Select Test Mode No. [8.3.1 Belt motor speed adjustment].

Select [Enter]. Entering the selection starts the transfer belt motor and initiates automatic
adjustment.
The adjustment will stop automatically when completed.
* Be sure to make this adjustment before performing the [Initial paper feed motor adjustment] described next.
* After this adjustment, the image adjustment, described on another chapter, may become necessary.
6 - 65
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4 . I n i t i a l pa p e r f e e d m o t o r a d j u s t m e n t
This adjustment synchronizes the main motor rotation speed and that of the transfer belt motor. This
adjustment should be made by observing the paper loop formed immediately after the registration
rollers.
Since an actual sheet of paper is used for this adjustment, avoid using paper with extremely high or
low rigidity. This adjustment must be performed after the transfer unit or transfer belt motor is
replaced.
* Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the [Transfer belt speed adjustment] described in the
previous section.
(1)
Adjustment using large volumes of paper (confirmation of loop amount by continuous feeding),
The Test Mode feeds 100 sheets of paper continuously without printing. Placing about 50 sheets on the
standard paper feed tray should be enough to complete the adjustment.
1) Select Test Mode [8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment] and activate the test mode.
2) Press the Right key to feed the paper continuously.
3) While observing the paper for the amount of loop, use the Up/Down keys to change the
value.
4) When the loop disappears, press the Enter key to register the new value setting.
Check the size of the loop at the position indicated

by the red border.
Large loop: Unacceptable
Small loop: Still unacceptable
No loop: OK
If the loop is large, reduce the value.

If the loop disappears, increase the value one step or two to make the loop again. Then
reduce the value again to make no loop.
* Since this adjustment is made while observing the loop in actual paper sheets, this method is unsuitable for
thick paper that does not produce loops, or thin paper that does not remain stable during transport. To
confirm the best result, use A3 or Ledger size papers.
* No loop could mean that the transfer belt could be rotating at a slower speed than the registration rollers.
Since that is unacceptable, always make the loop and reduce the value to make the loop disappear. This
will ensure that the speed of the main motor and the transfer belt motor is synchronized.
* By the eye, it may be difficult to judge that the loop is gone or not, as to judge No Loop is difficult.
* Print test pattern _CK4L at speed of 300 x 3 drops to confirm. This test pattern prints C and K colors in horizontal lines. If the paper transfer speed changes after the registration rollers, the horizontal pitches
printed on the paper changes, making the colors within each block change. If the colors in each block
6 - 66
manuals4you.com
does not change, the adjustment is made correctly. If color changes can be seen within each block, the
adjustment still needs to be done.
(2)
Adjustment using smaller volumes of paper (confirmation of loop amount in single paper feed.)
* Set one sheet of paper at a time on the standard paper feed tray for this adjustment.
1) Select the same Test Mode [8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment] and activate.
2) Set one sheet of paper on the standard paper feed tray and press the key on the right to
feed the paper.
3) While observing the paper for the amount of loop, use the Up/Down keys to change the
value as you place one sheet of paper at a time on the standard paper feed tray and feed.
4) Check the amount of loop during the paper feeding operation in step 3) and adjust the
value setting until the loop disappears.
If the loop is excessive, reduce the value.
If no loop is found, increase the value slightly make the loop and, gradually reduce the
value to eliminate the loop.
5) Press the Enter key to register the new value setting when the loop is eliminated.
* By feeding one sheet of paper at a time from the standard paper feed tray, No Paper error message
appears after the sheet is fed. When the loop is eliminated and ready to press the Enter key to register the
new value setting, the Enter key is active even though the No Paper error message is displayed.
* Since this adjustment is made while observing the loop in actual paper sheets, this method is unsuitable for
thick paper that does not produce loops, or thin paper that does not remain stable during transport. To
confirm the best result, use A3 or Ledger size papers.

Horizontal color banding occurs if the adjustment is incorrect.
Print test pattern _CK4L at speed of 300 x 3 drops to confirm. This test pattern prints C and K
colors in horizontal lines. If the paper transfer speed changes after the registration rollers, the
horizontal pitches printed on the paper changes, making the colors within each block change. If
the colors in each block does not change, the adjustment is made correctly. If color changes
can be seen within each block, the adjustment still needs to be done.
* This adjustment is required after replacing the transfer unit or transfer belt motor. After this adjustment is
performed, image adjustment, which is described on another chapter, may need to be performed. Even if
the above parts are not replaced, image adjustment may be necessary after making this adjustment. Check
by printing the test pattern prints included in the image adjustment software, and perform image adjustments if color shifts or other abnormalities are noted.
6 - 67
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
5.Adjustment of backup roller position

Adjust the height position of the backup roller according to the type of paper used.
Move the adjustment lever. Set the lever to one of the three setting positions on the inner cover.
Inner cover installation position (2 locations)
Adjustment lever in the

Standard center position.
Backup roller: Up position
Backup roller: Down position
Adjusting position is changed according to a paper kind. (Normal paper : center position)
The lever position adjustment may be needed for feeding different papers.
Backup roller at the center position --- Normal paper, premium paper, thin paper (lever : center)
Backup roller at the lower position --- thick paper, postcard (lever : right)
Backup roller at the upper position --- According to the state and kind of use paper (lever : left)
6 - 68
manuals4you.com
6 . A d j u s t m e n t m e c h a n i s m o f r e g i s t r a t i o n r o l l e r pa p e r g u i d e
Certain types of paper may cause paper jams at the transfer unit entrance guide.
This paper guide
This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment.
Therefore, this adjustment is normally not required in the field.
* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of how to do the adjustment.
(1)
Loosen the two RS-tight screws securing the entrance guide in place.
Screw No.1
(View from the top)
Factory default setting1.3
mm
Screw No.1
Screw to be loosened before rotating
Screw No.1. (Do the same to the
screw on the back.)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Insert a thickness gauge of the desired thickness(1mm to 1.5mm) between the guide and top
surface of the Transfer unit. Adjust the gap by turning the Screw No.1 in the front and rear.
After completing the adjustment, tighten the two loosened RS-tight screws.
Tighten the Screw No.1 in the front and back to complete the adjustment.
* Make sure the amount of adjustment made on the front and the back is the same. If the adjustment is
incorrect, paper jamming will occur.
* Image adjustment may be necessary after this adjustment. Check the test pattern print using the image
adjustment software and perform image adjustment if judged required.
6 - 69
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
7.Adjustment of the Registration roller upper

Certain types of paper may cause problems at the registration roller section.
< Adjustment method (HC5500) >
This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment.
* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of how to do the adjustment.
(1) Remove Inner cover 1 and front spring from the registration roller upper.
(2) Remove the adjustment screw from the machine frame and very loosely screw it into the adjusting position screw hole on far right. Then loosen the fixed-position screw.
(3) Adjust the position of the adjustment screw up or down to the desired position. Then tighten the
adjustment screw. The adjustment screw now stays on this new screw hole.
(4) Finally tighten the fixed-position screw.
* If wrongly adjusted, wrinkles may appear on printed papers.
Adjustment screw
Adjusting position
screw hole
Fixed-position
screw
Spring
* This adjustment may affect the printed image Print out the test pattern and check the image. Refer to the
chapter on the image adjustment to make necessary adjustment(s).
6 - 70
manuals4you.com
< Adjustment method (HC5000) >
This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment/
* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of what this adjustment is.
(5)
(6)
(7)
Remove registration roller upper from the machine.

Loosen the front and rear screws (IT screws) securing the adjustment mechanism in place.
While observing the scale, make the necessary adjustments and tighten the loosened screws.
* Make sure the amount of adjustment is the same in the front and rear. If not, paper skewing may occur.
* This adjustment is to make the registration rollers upper and lower parallel positioning and the nipping
pressure.
* The factory uses special jig to make the adjustment. Each machine is adjusted to the best condition, thus
the default positioning (scale reading) is different for each machine.
* Before starting the adjustment, check and record the original positions on the scales of the adjustment mechanisms at the front and back. If the scale positions are not recorded, the roller cannot be
returned back to its original position when required.
Adjustment mechanism
Before the adjustment, record the scale position.

If this is not recorded, the part cannot be returned to
the original position.
The screw to make the adjustment
* Image adjustment may become necessary after this adjustment. Check by using the test pattern prints
included in the image adjustment software to determine whether the image adjustment is required or not.
6 - 71
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
8.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller guide

How the leading edge of the paper arrive at the registration rollers may affect the paper skew.
The registration roller guide height position changes where the leading edge of the paper hits against
the registration roller when the paper is fed through. The factory uses a special jig to set the height
of the registration roller guide to the best paper feeding position, which is where the registration roller
lower is 1mm plus/minus 0.1mm above the top surface of the guide.
This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment/
The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of what this adjustment is.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check and record the default position of the eccentric Hexagon plate.
If the Hexagon plate is turned clockwise, the guide will come to a higher position and less of the
registration roller lower will show above the guide.
If the Hexagon plate is turned counter-clockwise, the guide will come to a lower position and
more of the registration roller lower will show above the guide.
Hexagon plate
counterclockwise
clockwise
6 - 72
manuals4you.com
9.Adjustment of frame distortion compensation

Due the unlevel surface of the installation site, the frame of the machine may distort. If the distortion
on the machine frame exceeds to certain level, it may affect the image adjustment made at the factory
with the machine in a flat level condition.
Use the following procedure to compensate for frame distortion caused by the floor condition.
This adjustment may be needed when the machine is installed or relocated.
The machine leveling using the four legs to the floor should be done before this adjustment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remove paper from the standard paper feed tray and exit tray.
Using a 6-mm Allen wrench, loosen the cap screws on the adjustment mechanisms (on the right
and left of the front of the machine).
(6)
Tighten the two loosened cap screws (turn clockwise) until the tip of each screw just touches the
base (right and left). Then look the gap between the bottom unit of the machine and the top unit.
Excluding the three anchor plates, there should be a gap between the top unit and the bottom
unit, from the paper feed side to the paper receiving side. The gap need not be even.
Base surface on which equipment support sections (3 points) rest

Tip of cap screw
* Image adjustment may become necessary after this adjustment. Check by using the test pattern prints
included in the image adjustment software to determine whether the image adjustment is required or not.
6 - 73
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
10.Adjustment of CCD gain on the side registration unit

This adjustment must be performed after the exchanging of the side registration unit or the CCD unit.
When the gain value of CCD is unsuitable, the abnormalities in a image of a side mask portion may
occur.
* Close all the doors and covers to prevent the CCD to catch the external light. If the CCD catches external
light, it will result in abnormal printing on the side mask area.
abnormalities in a image

(1)
(2)
(3)
Start test mode.

Lower the transfer unit to the lower limit position.
1) Open front door L / front door R and check the up-down position of the transfer unit.
2) If the transfer unit is in the up and hanging position, go to the next step 3).
If the transfer unit is not in the hanging position, jump to step 5).
4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], slide the BP spacers to the HP position.
5) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], lower the transfer unit down to the lower limit position.
Set a white clean A3 paper, with no curl, on the transfer unit. (Paper with curl is unacceptable).
RISO HC Matt Paper is too white and RISO HC IJ Paper is not white enough, so these are not fit
for use. Use RISO Risograph Paper or normal copy paper which is normal white in color.
* Use a paper with no curl.

* Any paper, when placed on a flat surface, with 1mm or so lifted portion is considered to have curl, and cannot be used for this adjustment purpose.
Set a A3 paper on the center of the

3rd hold on the transfer belt.
To identify the hole positions, the
holes are colored on the photo.
Set with the center axis of the roller
6 - 74
manuals4you.com
(4)
(5)
(6)
Raise the transfer unit to the print position.

1) Open front door L / front door R and check the up-down position of the transfer unit.
2) If the transfer unit is not in the hanging position, go to next step 3).
If the transfer unit is in the hanging position, jump to setp 6).
3) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink pan to the right.
5) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the transfer unit to the NORMAL position.
6) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the lift arms to the lower limit position.
Turn the backup roller lever (orange colored lever) to the right, so the paper is pinched by the
backup roller.
Using the CCD gain adjustment Test Mode No. 8.5.2.4.1 (left) and No.8.5.2.4.2 (right), check the
present value setting. After getting into each of these two test modes, wait at least 30 seconds
for the value reading to stabilize.
* After the value reading stabilizes in about 30 seconds, check to see that 3-digit value is between 240 to
250. Below or above that is no good. If the value does not stabilize within the value of 240 to 250, change
the 2-digit adjustment value (displayed above the 3-digit value). Making the 2-digit value smaller will make
the 3-digit value smaller. Making the 2-digit value larger will make the 3-digit value larger
(7)
When the 3-digit value is adjusted to within 240 to 250, register the newly adjusted value by
using Test Mode No. 8.5.6.1.
(8) Using Test Mode, lower the transfer unit down.
2) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the BP spacers to the HP position.
3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the transfer unit to the lower limit position.
(9) Return the backup roller lever to the center.
(10) Remove the piece of paper from the transfer unit.
(11) Using Test Mode, raise the transfer unit to the print position.
1) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink pan to the right.
3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the transfer unit to the NORMAL position.
4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the lift arms to the lower limit position.
* Right after completion of above adjustment, if the CCS (A/D) figure is re-checked by SE-Mode (8.2.4.21),
the figures shown for the left and right may differ. If the number displayed is below 220, the adjustment
must be done over again. If the displayed number exceeds 255, it is still considered acceptable.
6 - 75
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
11 . A d j u s t m e n t o f t h e F l i p p e r G a t e p o s i t i o n
If the flipper gate is not correctly adjusted in its position, the parts around the flipper gate, including
the gate may hit against the transfer belt when the flipper gate is activated by the solenoid.
If any of the parts hit the transfer belt, the position of the flipper gate must be adjusted.
The adjustment may also become necessary when the flipper unit or the flipper gate is replaced.
d-2
b
c
a
d-1
d-3
Height adjustment position
Frame
< Initial adjustment >

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
6 - 76
Loosen the three mounting screws (a,b,c).

Set the height of the two screws (a and c) 4mm.
Set the height of the screw (b) 3.5mm.
Loosen the three mounting screws (d-1,d-2,d-3).
Close the flipper unit in this state and confirm whether there is any trouble in the following item,
if there is no above, adjustment will be completed, and if there is trouble, the following fine
adjustment should be performed.
1) Confirm that neither the exit sensor nor the exit sensor bracket hit the flipper gate when the
flipper door is opened or closed.
manuals4you.com
2) Confirm that the flipper gate does not touch the transfer belt when the flipper gate solenoid
activates to move the gate down toward the transfer belt in duplex printing.
3) When the transfer elevates all the way up to the printing position, the wheels on the cleaning unit should not hit the flipper gate.
After above three items to confirm are finished, make both the simplex and duplex printing to
confirm that the paper jamming problem does not occur at the flipper gate area.
< Fine adjustment (1) >

This adjustment should be done if the exit sensor or the exit sensor bracket hit the flipper gate when
the flipper door is opened or closed.
1) Loosen the screw (b).
2) Loosen the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.
3) Tighten the screws (b).
This adjustment should be done if the flipper gate touches the transfer belt when the flipper gate solenoid activates to move the gate down toward the transfer belt in duplex printing.
1) Loosen the screw (b).
2) Tighten the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.
3) Tighten the screws (b).
This adjustment should be done if the wheels on the cleaning unit hits the flipper gate when the transfer elevates all the way up to the printing position.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Loosen the two screws (a,c).

Tighten the two screws (d-1,d-3) 1/2 turn.
Tighten the screws (a,c).
Loosen the screw (b).
Tighten the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.
Tighten the screws (b).
Even if these above-mentioned fine adjustments are done repeatedly, some troubles occur, it should
be done from initial adjustment.
6 - 77
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Cleaning method
1 . R e m o v a l o f pa p e r d u s t
Paper dust may cause printing problems such as misfires. Clean the internal mechanisms regularly to
eliminate possible causes of printing problems.
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove paper dust.
<< Precautions in cleaning >>
Never use an air duster, since doing so will raise paper dust, which may settle and adhere to the
nozzle surfaces of the print heads and lower the printing quality.
Be sure to turn OFF the printer power before cleaning.
< PAPER FEED TRAY >
Paper dust tends to collect in the area (indicated

by arrow marks) close to where the corners of the
leading edge of paper are set on the standard
paper feed tray. Clean these area using a vacuum cleaner.
< REGISTRATION ROLLER AREA >
Paper dust also collects around registration rollers. Dust accumulates especially where the side
edges of the papers transfer through. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove paper dust.
* Use a vacuum cleaner to remove accumulated paper
dust.
6 - 78
manuals4you.com
< TOP EDGE SENSOR >
* Cleaning is recommended every 300,000. prints.
Lower the transfer belt all the way down.

Mounting screw
Remove one RS-Tight screw M4 x 8 and detach

top edge sensor, together with its bracket, from
the machine frame.
Using a cleaning paper, wipe off the dust from the

clear plastic sensor cover, especially where the
sensor receives the light.
* When the sensor is covered with dust, error message
No. X02-212 may occur.
Light receiving area
< CCD area of the SIDE REGISTRATION UNIT >
* Cleaning is recommended every 300,000. prints.
The photograph is of a CCD on the side registration unit (the unit is removed to give a clear view.
There is no need to remove the side registration
unit when cleaning).
The white area is the CCD which detects the
paper width. If this portion is dirty with paper dust
or ink residue, the side masking will become
abnormal. Wipe clean when dirty.
The CCD can be cleaned without the side registration unit removed from the machine, but for a
thorough cleaning, removing the unit from the
machine is recommended.
< EXIT SENSOR >
If the exit sensor is covered with paper dust, wipe clean the sensor.
* If there are any other area of the machine found with paper dust, clean the area.
6 - 79
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2.Cleaning the rollers

Stained rollers may cause printing problems such as dirty prints. Clean the rollers to eliminate possible causes of printing problems.
<< Precautions for cleaning >>
Wipe with a micro-fiber cloth moistened with IPA (isopropyl alcohol).
Do not use tissue that sheds paper dust or fibers.
Wipe off ink from the rollers.
Nip roller of the flipper unit on the machine
Wipe off ink from the center portion of the

switchback roller.
* The switchback roller needs to be cleaned every
300,000. sheet printing.
Switchback section
Nip rollers
Wipe off ink from the nip rollers on the machine.
Switchback door
(opened)
* Clean other rollers that are stained with ink.
6 - 80
manuals4you.com
< Transfer Unit and Transfer Belt >
Reverse side of the printed paper
After repeated printing, the ink tends to build

up on the transfer belt surface & reverse side
and the large black metal plate under the belt
on the transfer unit.
* Cleaning the ink off is required after every 300,000
prints.
If the ink build up becomes bad, the ink transfers on the reverse side of the printing paper.
Enlargement of the ink stain on the reverse

side of the printed paper.
On the cleaning jig, wrap cleaning wiper cloth

around the jig for the length of about 357mm of
the jig (equals to the width of the transfer belt).
* The cloth should be a micro-fiber type which does
not shed fiber.
Wrap cleaning wiper around the teeth
Moisten the cloth with IPA (isopropyl alcohol)

on the both surfaces of the cleaning jig.
6 - 81
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Making sure that the power is OFF, slide the transfer unit out of the machine.
* Refer to the section on the transfer unit removal for
above procedure.
Insert the cleaning jig, wrapped with IPA (isopropyl

alcohol) moistened micro-fiber type cloth, between
the transfer belt and the black metal guide plate.
Slide the cleaning jig back-and-forth for about 5

times.
Then rotate the transfer belt by hand and repeat
until the built up ink is removed.
If the cleaning cloth becomes dirty, replace with

new cloth, moisten with IPA (isopropyl alcohol),
and repeat.
* Depending on how much the ink is built up, the cleaning should be repeated about 2 to 3 times to get the ink
off the under-surface of the transfer belt and the metal
base plate.
6 - 82
manuals4you.com
After the under-surface of the transfer belt is

cleaned, clean the top surface of the transfer
belt using micro-fiber type cloth moistened with
IPA (isopropyl alcohol).
* Do not use cloth which shed fiber.
Rotate the transfer belt by hand (rotate the pulley by hand in the correct paper transfer direction) and continue with the cleaning of the top
surface of the transfer belt.
Belt rotating direction
* After the under-surface and the top surface of the transfer belt is cleaned, mount the transfer unit
back in the machine.
* Mount the covers back on the machine.
* Turn ON the power.
* Using Test Mode, elevate the transfer unit to the upper most position (printing position).
* Use Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1 to run the transfer belt at speed of 300 x 3 drops for about 3 minutes and
confirm that the belt does not skew. If the belt skews, make adjustment as described earlier on this
chapter.
* Make prints and confirm that the papers are not stained by ink residue.
* If the papers get ink stain, repeat the cleaning of the belt. If no ink stain appear, the cleaning job is
completed.
6 - 83
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
6 - 84
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
manuals4you.com
I n k s u p pl y pa s s a g e s
CHAPTER 7: Ink supply passages

CONTENTS
7-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanisms
1 . M e c h a n i s m o f i n k s u p p l y pa s s a g e s
1-1.I nk su pply passa ges
Ink passages can be categorized into two main categries: passages for supplying the ink required for
printing, and a waste ink passage for carrying ink used from print head cleaning.
Ink feed passages

Ink from the ink cartridges is supplied to the print heads via reservoirs and ID units (distributors).
Ink cartridge holder unit is equipped with independent ink solenoid valve for each color to open
and close the ink passage. An open air is supplied to the ink cartridges at all time via an air filter.
* On HC5000, one large ink fuse solenoid is equipped on the ink cartridge holder unit to open and
close the ink passage with an independent solenoid valve on each ink reservoir.
Each reservoir is equipped with two solenoid valves to open the reservoir to the atmosphere
(valve between reservoir and overflow tank), pressurizing (valve between reservoir and pressure pump). The reservoir is provided with a sensor to detect the presence of ink.
* The reservoir on HC5000 is equipped with three solenoid valves with the third one as ink supply valve
from the ink cartridge (refer to the previous paragraph).
The ID units distribute ink to print heads (6 print heads for each color). Two sets of ink distributors are equipped on the machine. One set of ink distributor contains two colors ink, with each
ink separated by a wall within the distributor. One set is for C and K color ink. The other set is
for M and Y color ink. The distributor for each color is equipped with a solenoid valve for the air
and a sensor to detect the ink presence. Each set of ink distributor is equipped with a heater.
* HC5500 has ink reservoir, ID units and print heads in the order of CKMY, while HC5000 has them in
the order of KCMY. The ink cartridges on both HC5000 and HC5500 are aligned in the order of
KCMY.
6 pieces of print heads exist for each color in horizontal layout. There are total of 24 print heads
for the 4 colors.
The overflow tank has a function to supply air passage for the ink reservoirs and ink distributors.
The solenoid valves open or close the air passage for each ink distribution method, such as in
normal ink distribution, compressed air ink distribution in head cleaning, etc.
In the case when the print head is replaced or worked on during the machine setup procedure in
which the print head is not filled with ink, compressed air is needed to force the ink through the
print head.
The YELLOW ink uses a different material for the tubing from the other color inks.
Waste ink passage
The ink sucked by the suction pump during the head cleaning is drawn into the waste ink tank
via suction chamber. The suction chamber separates the air and the ink and only the ink goes
into the waste ink tank.
The ink dripped into ink pan during the head cleaning goes into the waste ink tank by the gravity
through a dedicated ink tube.
The ink which drips out from the ink cartridge from the top and bottom nozzle, during the ink cartridge insertion into the machine, is gathered in a pan and drawn out into the waste ink tank by
the gravity through a dedicated ink tube.
If a problem occurs in a reservoir or ID unit and ink overflow from these units, the ink flows into
the overflow tank. In these cases, the ink flows into the overflow tank via the tube which is normally used as air passage. The overflow tank is equipped with a sensor for an ink full detection.
When this sensor detects the ink, and error message is displayed and stops the machine until a
7-2
manuals4you.com
serviceman drains the ink from the overflow tank. The ink which fills over this sensor is drawn
into the waste ink tank by gravity via dedicated ink tube.
As described above, all waste ink collects into the waste ink tank. The full level of the waste ink
tank is detected by the full detection sensor, triggered by the weight of the waste tank and the
ink accumulated in the tank. The cleaning ink tank must be replaced periodically. The printing
condition and how often the head is cleaned will determine how often the waste ink tank has to
be replaced.
Print head (x24)

Ink solenoid valves
Suction chamber
Air open filter
ID unit
Solenoid valve
Ink cartridge
(x4)
Suction
pump
Ink pan
Reservoir
(x4)
Cleaning unit
Overflow tank
Solenoid valves
Pressure pump
Pressure chamber
Waste ink tank
Schematic diagram of ink supply passages for HC5500
7-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Print head (x24)

Ink fuse solenoid
Suction chamber
Air open filter

ID unit
Solenoid valve
Suction
pump
Ink cartridge
(x4)
Ink pan
Reservoir
(x4)
Cleaning unit
Overflow tank
Solenoid valves
Pressure pump
Pressure chamber
Waste ink tank
Schematic diagram of ink supply passages for HC5000
7-4
manuals4you.com
1-2. Main p arts of the ink feed passag es

(1)
Ink fuse solenoid

* This Ink fuse solenoid is used only on HC5000.
It is not used on HC5500.
The ink fuse solenoid opens the ink passage valve at the ink cartridge joints when the ink cartridge cover is closed.
The ink fuse solenoid opens the valve only when the ink cartridge cover is closed, and when correct ink is detected by the tag the ink flows out from the cartridge.
* If for some reason the machine operation needs to be check with the top cover of the machine removed,
the ink fuse solenoid must be manually activated to open the ink supply valve. Use plastic band or alike to
simulate the normal condition equivalent to the existence of the top cover. (Refer to the photograph.)
* Pay caution not to insert wrong color ink cartridge in wrong slot when the valve is manually opened, as the
ink immediately flows down the tube with the valve opened. The plastic band must be pulled tightly.
Ink fuse solenoid
The lock which opens the

ink flow valve.
Pushed by the cover
Operation of solenoid
Solenoid
Photo sensor
Unlock
Schematic diagram of mechanism that opens the ink flow path
Cable binder
Example of manually pressing the lock release mechanism
7-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(2) Open air filter

This air passage vents the ink cartridges set in the holder to the atmosphere.
The air open passage is provided with a filter to keep dust and other particles out of the ink cartridges.
The air open filter is connected to the overflow tank and opens the overflow tank to the atmosphere.
Ink that flows from the ink cartridges into the air vent tube is discharged (by gravity) into the
waste ink tank.
Air open filter
To each ink cartridge

Opens to atmosphere
Filter
Accumulated oven flown ink
Overflown ink in the filter assembly

flows down into the waste tank.
Opens to atmosphere
(The tube connected to overflow tank)
The tube connects to waste ink tank

Schematic diagram of air open filter
(3)
7-6
Ink reservoir
manuals4you.com
The following diagram shows reservoir pipes and tubing for the ink and air passage. There are
total of 4 reservoirs, 1 reservoir for each color.
The ink drain port is used to drain ink from the inside and is normally not used. It is sealed with a
cap under normal conditions. To drain ink, remove the cap and connect a tube to the port and
attach a syringe to the tube and pump the ink out. The port is an extension of a pipe that extends
down close to the bottom of the reservoir. The following page shows the internal view.
The reservoir provides functions that opens or closes the passage to send ink to the ID unit
using compressed air from the pressure chamber, opens or closes the ink passage from the ink
cartridge and opens or closes the air vent passage.
HC5500 INK RESERVOIR
To ID unit
Ink drain port

(Not used under normal condition)
Magnetic reed switch
Pressure solenoid valve
Compressed air flow
Ink flow
To ink cartridge
To pressure chamber
Air open solenoid valve

Compressed air flow
Air passage
Overflow ink passage
To overflow tank
Ink flow
HC5000 INK RESERVOIR
Air passage
To ID unit
Ink supply solenoid valve
Ink drain port

(Not used under normal condition)
Compressed air flow
Pressure solenoid valve
Ink flow
To pressure chamber
Air open solenoid valve
Air passage
To ink cartridge
To overflow tank
7-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
The presence of ink in the reservoir is detected by a magnet attached to the float and a magnetic reed
switch mounted outside the reservoir. Details of the float operation are given further below.
To overflow tank
To ink cartridge
Internally connected
Tip is located here.
To ID unit
To pressure chamber
Ink drain port
For ink drainage
Float
7-8
manuals4you.com
Detection of ink cartridge replacement indication (No ink error)

The timing for the ink cartridge replacement message is determined by the ink detection mechanism
on the ink reservoir (magnet attached to a float and magnetic reed switch mounted outside the reservoir). The detection timing is described below.
< During printing >
During the printing, if the reservoir ink detection mechanism status changes from ink detection to no
detection, and if no ink detection status does not change for 4 seconds, the ink cartridge is determined to be empty and the ink not coming down into the reservoir. Then, the number of drops (not
dots) ejected from the print heads for each colors is counted. When the count exceeds a value of [A4
size x 30% dot density x 500 sheets], the printing operation is forcibly stopped, and an Ink cartridge
empty error is displayed. If a print job is completed before this value is reached, the Ink cartridge
empty error message is displayed when the job is finished.
< In standby mode >

If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 30 seconds, the Ink cartridge empty error
message is displayed.
< During head cleaning >

In startup cleaning
If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 3 minutes, the Ink cartridge empty
During other head cleaning menu
If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 30 seconds, the Ink cartridge empty
7-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(4)
ID unit
Each ID unit contains two colors (K&C / M&Y), separated by an internal wall.
Ink is distributed from ID unit to the printing heads, 6 heads to a color.
The presence of ink in the ID unit is detected by internal float and magnetic reed switch mounted
outside the ID unit. Details of the float operation is described later on this chapter.
Solenoid valve opens the passage to the atmosphere when ink is drawn into the ID unit.
Ink viscosity increases at low temperatures which may cause ink misfires. As a preventive measure, the ID unit is provided with a heater. The heater warms the ID unit and the ink within the
unit. Thermistor is provided for temperature monitoring.
Thermistor
Heater
ID solenoid valve
Tubes which connect to heads
(6 tubes arranged in the same layout configuration on the opposite side)
Tube to reservoir (for ink supply)

Tube to overflow tank (for air vent)
Thermistor
7 - 10
manuals4you.com
(5) Print head
The machine is equipped with piezoelectric type inkjet heads. When a voltage is applied, the
piezoelectric element changes shape and causes a change in the volume of the ink pressure
chamber, resulting in ink ejection.
The machine is provided with six modules, each of which is formed by joining two 8-gradation
318-nozzle piezoelectric type heads.
The following shows how the nozzles are positioned in the two bonded heads.
The two heads must be joined with high precision. The head bonding process can be performed
only at the factory. When one of the two heads in a module becomes defective, the whole module (two bonded heads) must be exchanged.
* Never touch the nozzle surfaces of the print heads.
* Dust or scratches in the nozzle surfaces of the print heads may result in printing problems.
* In the worst case, dust and scratches on the head nozzle surfaces may result in problems (such as
misfires) that require print head replacement. To prevent such problems, avoid touching the print
head nozzle surfaces during machine maintenance. Work carefully to avoid scratching print heads
with tools or parts when working near them. Never touch or wipe the nozzle surface.
* Protect the print heads from sudden impact or shock.
* The print heads are extremely delicate components. Handle carefully and avoid dropping or hitting
them.
* If print heads are replaced, they must be adjusted.
* Adjust the physical position (mechanical adjustment) and parameters that vary among individual
heads.
< PRINT HEAD MODULE >
Head unit
Nozzle
150 dpi pitch

300 dpi pitch
Schematic diagram showing nozzle positions
Print head
Never apply impact or shock to

this area.
Nozzle surface
Avoid dust and scratches.
7 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Print head position adjustment mechanism

To adjust the head module angle, turn the adjustment knob in 1/8-turn increments, monitoring the output result of the image adjustment software. (For more details, refer to the section describing the image adjustment procedure.)
Each head module is secured to a head base as shown below. The head angle adjustment
mechanism mounted on the cast aluminum carriage allows the head module to swivel with
one end of the module as a pivot.
One full turn of the adjustment knob swivels the print head module about 0.03 degrees.
Pivot of rotation
Plate spring
Head module
Head
head angle adjustment mechanism
Adjustment knob
Base
Base
Plate spring
The various print modes are listed below. Print modes change automatically according to the
print setting by the printer driver.
Print mode
code
Horizontal
Resolution
Vertical
Resolution
Maximum
Number of
drops
300-7
300dpi
300dpi
300-6
300dpi
300dpi
300-5
300dpi
300dpi
300-4
300dpi
300dpi
300-3
300dpi
300dpi
600-7
300dpi
600dpi
600-6
300dpi
600dpi
600-5
300dpi
600dpi
600-4
300dpi
600dpi
600-3
300dpi
600dpi
600-2
300dpi
600dpi
600-1
300dpi
600dpi
Horizontal resolution --- Paper width-wise direction

Vertical resolution ------ Paper feed direction
Number of drops --- 0 (no ejection) to 7 drops (maximum drops)
7 - 12
manuals4you.com
(6)
Overflow tank
The pipes to the reservoirs of individual color inks are arranged as shown below.
The overflow tank collects excess ink resulting from a problem on the reservoir, ID unit, etc.
The air vent tubes for various components in the ink supply passages are connected to the overflow tank and open to the external atmosphere via the overflow tank.
The presence of waste ink in the overflow tank is detected by the internal float and the reed
switch mounted outside the overflow tank. Details of the float operation is given later.
The overflow tank has a waste ink drain plug. If the overflow tank becomes full, waste ink can be
drained from the tank by removing the plug and using a syringe and a tube.
To air open filter

Waste ink drain plug (plug is installed under normal conditions)
To reservoir C
(for air vent and overflow)
To reservoir K
To reservoir Y
To ID solenoid valve (K)

To ID solenoid valve (C)

To reservoir M
To ID solenoid valve (M)


To ID solenoid valve (Y)
To waste ink tank
7 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(7)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Pressure pump
The pressure pump uses one-way valves mounted on the two tubes connected to the pump.
The one-way valve allows air to flow in only one direction.
The pressure pump motor moves the piston inside the pressure pump up and down via the linkage.
When the piston is pushed up, air inside the pump is sent to the pressure chamber (air discharge) through the one-way valve (the other valve prevents air from escaping through the
intake side).
When the piston moves down, air is drawn into the pump through the other one-way valve,
which is open to the external atmosphere (the other valve prevents air from returning back from
the pressure chamber).
These steps are repeated to allow the pressure pump to send air to the pressure chamber.
The pressure pump has a photo-sensor to monitor the piston operations.
The system is also equipped with a torque limiter to keep the pressure chamber pressure from
exceeding the preset level due to pump malfunctions.
Piston up/down motion
One-way valve
One-way valve
(Contains air filter)
Air discharge
(To the press chamber)
Air intake
(external atmosphere)
Schematic diagram of pump operation
7 - 14
manuals4you.com
(8) Pressure chamber

The pressure chamber stores compressed air to be sent to the reservoirs.
The pressure chamber cannot detect pressure levels. Instead, pressure levels are controlled by
the number of rotations that the piston motor makes.
The tubes from the pressure chamber are connected to the compressed air intake solenoid
valves for the K, C, M, Y reservoirs.
The supply of compressed air from the pressure chamber to each reservoir is controlled by the
compressed air intake solenoid valves installed on each reservoir. The solenoid valves open or
close to send compressed air according to the machine operating conditions - for example,
sending compressed air to all reservoirs at the same time (the resulting air pressure will be relatively low, since air is distributed among all colors) or sending compressed air to one specific
color (air pressure is much higher when supplying compressed air to one single reservoir).
These operations are controlled by each type of head cleaning operations.
C
K
M
Y
Sends compressed air to the

intake solenoid valves on
each reservoir
7 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-3.Mai n pa rts in the waste in k pass age

(1) Cleaning unit
Six wiper-equipped suction nozzles for vacuum operation and wiping in head cleaning operation
are provided for each color, totaling 24 units (same number as the print heads) for all colors.
During head cleaning, the suction nozzles apply vacuum suction as they sweep over the head
nozzle surfaces. A motor (cleaning motor) is provided for this sweeping operation.
The ink pan keeps ink from the print heads from dropping onto the transfer unit. The ink pan
moves away from the location under the print heads during printing operation, then returns to
the location under the print heads after a preset time elapses after completion of a printing operation. A motor (ink pan motor) is provided for this operation.
The cleaning unit is positioned over the transfer unit. During the head cleaning operation, the
transfer unit pushes the cleaning unit up against the printing heads. A sensor detects the height
of the cleaning unit during the head cleaning operation.
One photo-sensor is equipped on the cleaning unit to detect the front-back movement of the
unit, and two photo-sensors are equipped on the unit to detect the side way movement.
Two torque limiters prevent ink pan motor damage when an excessive load is applied and prevents side way movement of the ink pan (photograph on next page).
< CLEANING UNIT >

Photo-sensors to detect ink
pan slide position.
Torque limiter
Ink pan motor
Cleaning motor
Torque limiter
FRONT OF THE MACHIINE
Photo-sensor to detect cleaning head sliding position.
7 - 16
Suction head
manuals4you.com
Photo-sensor for detecting the height position of the cleaning unit during the cleaning operation
(ink pan sliding height & head cleaning height).
7 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(2) Suction pump unit

This pump generates a vacuum pressure to draw ink from the print heads through the suction
heads (24 unit in total) during the head cleaning.
The unit has two types of sponge filters, round and rectangular in shape, to prevent ink mist from
entering the pump. In addition, an absorption sponge (pump sponge) is also installed to prevent
ink mist that enters the suction pump unit from blowing out. These filters and sponge must be
replaced periodically. (The replacement interval depends on the printing conditions, cleaning
cycle settings, head cleaning operations conducted from the panel, etc.)
Suction pump unit
Suction pump
Filter (small)
Filter (large)
Pump sponge
7 - 18
manuals4you.com
(3)
Suction chamber
The suction chamber separates the waste ink drawn by the suction pump unit into ink and air.
Ink separated from air is sent to the waste ink tank (by gravity via dedicated waste ink tube).
The presence of waste ink in the suction chamber is detected by internal float and magnetic
reed switch mounted outside the suction chamber. The detail on the float operation is given
later on this chapter.
In normal operations, waste ink will not cause the float to rise so far as to activate the reed
switch. In such cases as when the waste ink drain tube is bent by an operational error, the float
will rise and displays an error to indicate irregular waste ink discharge.
From cleaning unit
To suction pump
To waste ink tank
Plate spring
In normal condition
In vacuum operation
Discharge hole
Waste ink
Plate spring
Waste ink
Schematic diagram showing discharge of vacuumed ink
In normal condition, the plate spring hangs down to drain the collected in out from the suction
chamber. During the vaccum operation, the plate spring is pulled up by the vaccum force
and the plate spring serves as a lid to plug the ink discharge hole.
7 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(4) Waste ink tank

The waste ink tank receives the ink, which is accumulated in the suction chamber and ink pan of
the cleaning unit during the head cleaning.
The waste ink tank capacity is about 6.5 liters.
The waste ink tank holder detects when the waste ink tank reaches its maximum level.
The ink tank holder, on which the waste ink tank is installed, is pulled up by a spring. When
waste ink accumulates into the tank, the ink tank holder starts to sink down from the weight of
the waste ink collected. Two photo-sensors monitor the position of the tank holder and detect
four conditions: No tank, Normal, Near full, and Full.
The waste ink tank must be replaced periodically before the Full error message is displayed.
(Replacement interval depends on the printing conditions, cleaning cycle settings, head maintenance operations conducted from the panel, etc.).
Waste ink tank

Spring
Joint cap
Photo sensors
Waste ink tank is not

detected. Machine cannot
operate.
7 - 20
Normal condition.
Machine operates.
Near-full detection
Machine operates.
FULL detection.
Machine cannot operate.
manuals4you.com
1-4. Mechani sms co mmon to the in k fe ed and waste ink passag es

(1)
Mechanisms for detecting the presence of ink or waste ink.

The basic mechanism for detecting the presence of ink or waste ink is the same, despite some
minor differences due to the shapes of the containers such as the ink reservoir, ID unit, overflow
tank and suction chamber.
These containers each contain a float (a hollow resin object containing air) with a magnet, as
shown in the diagram below. The float elevates with the increase in the amount of the ink accumulated in the container. The reed switch mounted on the exterior of these containers activate
when the switch detects the magnet, and the FULL detection is made.
Pivot of the float
Float
OFF
Clean ink or waste ink (depends on the container)
Reed switch
Magnet
Float rises due to ink or waste ink.
ON
Ink or waste ink
Schematic diagram of mechanism that detects presence of ink or waste ink
Reservoir
Detects the presence of ink inside the reservoir. (When the reed switch remains OFF for a preset duration, the ink cartridge is determined to be empty.)
ID unit
The presence of ink inside the ID unit is detected.
Overflow tank
Detects the overflow tank full condition.
Suction chamber
Detects the suction chamber full condition when the waste ink within the suction chamber is not
draining out.
7 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-5.Ope rations of i nk su pply passag es

(1)
Flow of the ink from the ink cartridge:

1) Four color ink cartridges are in position (ink cover is open).
(Ink cartridges tags are detected by the Receiver PCB and identified by the RD/WR PCB.)
2) Ink cover closing operation.
The Ink cover sensor confirms the closing of the ink cover.
When the ink cover is closed, the ink passage solenoid valves under each ink cartridge
opens and the air vent solenoid valves on each ink reservoirs open to let the ink flow down
into the ink reservoirs.
* On HC5000, when the machine confirms that the ink cover is closed, the ink fuse solenoid ia activated to open the ink passage valve from the ink cartridge to the entrance of the ink reservoir. The
ink-valve open sensor confirms that the valve is actually opened. HC5000 has the ink passage solenoid valves at the entrance of each reservoir, and these solenoid valves and the air vent solenid
valves on each ink reservoir open to allow the ink to fill into the reservoirs.
Under normal operating conditions with the ink cover closed, the ink passage is opened.
The passage closes only when the ink cover is opened.
(2)
Flow of the ink into the ID units via ink reservoirs:

Since the machine is shipped with the ID unit filled with ink, in normal conditions this is performed at the factory before the machine shipment.
1) In the operation described in above (1), ink flows into reservoirs (under the force of gravity).
2) The ink detecting mechanism (reed switch) on the reservoirs detect the ink full level.
The air vent solenoid valves on the ink reservoirs close and at the same time the air vent
solenoid valves on the ID units open.
3) Ink flows into the ID units (free fall by the force of gravity - ink cartridge is higher than ID unit.
4) The detecting mechanisms (reed switch) on the ID units detect the ink full level.
5) The air vent solenoid valves on the ID units close.
Ink supply operation
Ink
cover
sensor
RD/WR
PCB
Ink fuse
solenoid
(HC5000)
Solenoid
valves at
ink cartridge
Ink passage
valve
Solenoid valves on
reservoirs
Air vent
valve
Compressed
air passage
valve
Solenoid
valves on
ID units
Air vent
valve
Reed switches for the FULL

detection
Reservoirs
ID units
detected
Machine is powered ON
Cover
closed
closed
opened
closed
closed
opened
closed
closed
Tag
detected
activates
opened
Ink flows to ink reservoir

Ink reservoir FULL
open
close
close
opened
Ink flows into ID unit

Ink ID unit FULL
close
opened
closed
detected
close
The ink reservoirs and ID units are filled with ink.
7 - 22
manuals4you.com
(3)
Overview of operations for initial ink supply to print heads
* This operation supplies ink to the internal of each print head and must be performed when the print heads
are not filled with ink (after replacement of print heads, ID units or reservoirs). When this operation is executed from the operation panel, the following movements are performed automatically.
* The following operations must be performed for each color. (They cannot be performed simultaneously for
all four colors at one time.)
* This is the Start-Up Cleaning.
1) The pressure pump operates and pressurizes the pressure chamber. (Pressure levels are
controlled by how many rotations the motor operates.)
2) The pressurized air solenoid valves on the reservoirs open.
3) The pressurized air forces ink to be ejected out from the print head nozzles.
4) Both the air vent solenoid valves and pressurized air solenoid valves on the reservoirs
open to bring ink pressure within the print heads down to appropriate level.
5) The suction pump performs a vacuum operation. (The suction heads sweep the print head
nozzle surfaces.)
Initial ink supply operation to the Print Heads
Solenoid
valves at
ink cartridge
Solenoid valves on
ink reservoirs
Solenoid
valves on
ID units
Ink passage
valve
Air vent
valve
Compressed
air passage
valve
Air vent
valve
opened
closed
closed
closed
Pressure
pump
Reed
Reed
switch on switch on
reservoir
ID unit
detected
detected
Suction
pump
Suction nozzles
(Cleaning unit)
Lifts to
the head
cleaning
position
Head
cleaning
action
closed
pumping
Operation of pressure motor for preset duration (pressure controlled by pump operating time)
opened
Compressed air ejects ink in the reservoirs and ID units from the print heads toward the ink pan of the cleaning unit.
closed
opened
opened
Solenoid valves open to reduce internal head pressure to appropriate level.
closed
opened
opened
(Solenoid valves open to reduce internal head pressure to appropriate level).

Vacuum
operation
starts
Vacuum
operation
continues
Lifts to
position
Wipes
heads
from front
to rear.
Suction nozzles move from the front to the rear while drawing ink from print heads using vacuum force provided
by the suction pump. This completes the initial ink supply operation for the print heads.
7 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(4)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Head maintenance operation

There are six cleaning modes for head cleaning operations, depending on the purpose of cleaning.
* The processing time given on the chart below is for reference only. The Startup cleaning K/C/M/Y and
KCMY may take longer or less time depending on how much of the ink supply route on the machine is filled
with ink before the cleaning operation is started.
Cleaning mode
7 - 24
Operation
Processing time
Note
Normal cleaning
(5.5.5)
Automatically operate for

every fixed printing number of sheets, preset by
user mode 5.5.6
Also can be operated
from operation panel.
(All colors at one time)
Normal cleaning
About 1
minute
For recovering from

misfire.
Hyper cleaning
(5.5.4)
Operates only by panel

operation (selected color
only).
Hyper cleaning
once and then
Normal cleaning
once.
The wiper cleans
the heads only
once.
About 1
minute
For recovering misfire.

More powerful than Normal.
Extra cleaning
(5.5.3)

only).
More powerful
than Hyper x 2
times.
The wiper cleans
the heads twice.
About 2.6
minute
For recovering misfire.

More powerful than
Hyper.
Startup cleaning
K/C/M/Y
(5.5.1.1 - 5.5.1.4)

only).
One time Hyper

cleaning after
giving extra time
for Reservoir and
ID unit to fill with
ink.
About 1
minute
Cleaning menu to use

after replacing reservoir,
ID unit, print head or
tubes.
Startup cleaning
KCMY
(5.5.1.5)

operation (All color operation: one by one).
Twelve times
Hyper cleaning
(3 times per color
= 3 times x 4 colors = 12 times.)
About
12.5 minutes
The first head cleaning

menu to be used in
machine setup.
Flush cleaning
K/C/M/Y
(5.5.2)

only).
Extra cleaning
twice with piezo
movement on the
Yellow heads,
allowing more
time for ink to
drip for the Yellow heads.
About 3.5
minutes
The cleaning menu to

use after the machine
has been left unused for
a long period of time.
manuals4you.com
Disassembly
1.Bottle joint (K, C, M, Y)
In principal, the removal procedure is the same for all the colors.
The Yellow Ink uses different tube material in certain places.
(1)
(2)
*
(3)

Pull out the cartridge of the ink color for which the bottle joint is to be replaced.
Work carefully to avoid dripping ink.
Remove the RD/WR PCB bracket (one M3x6 IT screw).
* The RD/WR PCB barcket needs to be detached only when removing the bottle joints K or C.
* The PCB is located on the other side of the wire harness core. It is best to undo the wire from the wire harness clamp.
* Let the removed PCB hang loose, out of the way.
RD/WR PCB
RD/WR PCB bracket
Cable clamp
Core
7 - 25
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
* The following steps from (4) to (8) are for HC5000.

* For HC5500, jump to step (9).
(4)
Remove two springs.

(6) 5mm diameter E-ring
(4) Spring
Ink release bracket
Solenoid lever
(5) Two M3x6 IT screws

(4) Spring
(7) 5mm diameter E-ring
(5) Split pin
(8) Ink release bracket
(5)
Remove the solenoid lever.

Remove the split pin from the solenoid.
Remove the solenoid lever (two M3x6 IT screws).
(6)
Remove 5mm diameter E-ring from the shaft of the Ink release bracket (on the K ink side).
* Depending on the machine, plastic damper is attached on the K ink side. For the machines with the
damper attached on the K ink side, remove the damper by removing two screws.
(7)
(8)
7 - 26
Remove 5mm diameter E-ring from the shaft of the Ink release bracket (on the Y ink side).
Remove the Ink release bracket.
manuals4you.com
(9)
Disconnect the connector from the solenoid valve.
* This step is only for HC5500.
(10) Remove two ink tubes.

[One ink tube is at the ink bottle joint, which leads to the ink reservoir. The other ink tube is from
the ink tray.]
* Watch out for the ink leakage.
(11) Remove the ink bottle joint (two M3x6 IT screws.)
IT screws M3x6
Ink bottle joinit
The two ink tubes to be removed
[ HC5000 only ]
Mounting screws of the ink
bottle joint.
Disconnecting of ink joint
How the clips should be positioned
7 - 27
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
In mounting back the ink joint, face the clip of the ink joint should face to the left.
In mounting back the ink tubes, never bend the tubes. Make loose loops on the tubes when
directing the tubes in different direction.
Make loose loops on the tubes

in this area when changing the
direction on the tubes.
If working on the tubes other than the Yellow Ink, make sure to hook the O-ring attached portion
of the tube onto the tube bracket. If working on the Yellow Ink tube, position the tube so that
the tube stays close to the ink catch pan, next to other tubes. Instead of the O-ring, the Yellow
Ink tube has a clip which should be hooked onto the hook.
Make sure that the ink tubes do not tangle with each other whensetting the tubes in position.
The O-rings on the tubes

should hook onto the tube
bracket (excludes the Y
tube).
Let the yellow

ink tube settle
in position by
its pre-shaped
curve.
Hook the tubes onto the

hooks.
The clip on the yellow ink tube should

hook onto the hook.
The photograph below shows the layout of the tubes when correctly positioned.
Enlarged top view of

the air open filter area
These two thin tubes should

go under the larger tubes.
7 - 28
manuals4you.com
2.Receiver PCB
(1)
(2)
(3)

Remove the ink cartridge from the ink cartridge holder from which the receiver PCB is to be
removed.
Pull the ink cartridge holder slightly forward (two M3x6 IT screws).
* If the ink cartridge holder is pulled too much forward, the tubes from the ink pan may disconnect and
may result in ink leakage. Pay caution when pulling the ink cartridge holder forward.
M4x5 IT screw
Ink cartridge holder
M4x5 IT screw
(4)
(5)
Disconnect the special cable from the Receiver PCB connection.

Pinch the Receiver PCB holder in the direction of the arrow and pull out the PCB holder with the
Receiver PCB attached.
Special cable
7 - 29
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(6)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Detach the Receiver PCB from the PCB holder.

* When reinstalling the PCB holder unit, pay close attention not to touch hard against the ink tubes
nearby, as that may cause the tubes to partially disconnect, or in worst cases the ink tubes may come
loose and spill the ink.
* Make sure that the PCB is firmly inserted into the PCB holder and the PCB holder secured firmly onto
the ink cartridge holder.
Receiver PCB
7 - 30
manuals4you.com
3.Ink Reservoir K / C / M / Y
The removal method is practically the same for all the colors.
The tube material for the Yellow Ink is different from the other colors.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, move the ink pan to the left, under
the heads).
Disconnect the chamber tube from the pressure chamber for the reservoir to be removed (the
tube that leads from the pressure chamber to the ink reservoir).
* Plug the removed end of the air tube onto the nipple on the ink reservoir to prevent dust from getting into
the tube.
Pressure chamber
Chamber tubes
Reservoir C
Reservoir K
Reservoir M
Reservoir Y
The nipples onto which the unplugged ends of the air tubes should be attached to prevent
dust from entering into the tubes. One nipple is for the chamber tube.
The other is for the air vent tube to be unplugged from the overflow tank.
- Refer to the photographs on the next page for the following instructions (4)
(5)
(6)
Disconnect the connector for the reservoir to be removed.

Disconnect the tube joint (rotate and pull).
unhook the tube joint, located between the ink cartridge and ink reservoir, from the bracket
Watch out for the ink dripping.
Disconnect the air vent hose from the overflow tank for the reservoir to be removed.
* Plug the removed end of the air tube onto the nipple on the ink reservoir to prevent dust from getting into
the tube.
7 - 31
manuals4you.com
Unplug the air vent tube from the overflow tank.

HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Tube joint
Tube joint
M3x6 IT screw
Connector
Reservoir (Cyan)
(7)
Unplug this air vent tube from the overflow tank

and plug the removed end onto the nipple on the
ink reservloir.
Remove the ink reservoir (two M3x6 IT screws).

* Although the tube joint is provided with a self sealing valve, watch for ink leaks.
* Plug the ends of the unplugged air vent tube and tube from the pressure chamber into the nipples on
the reservoir to prevent dust from entering into the tubes.
* In putting back the tube joints on the brackets, make sure to position the metal clips so that the grip of
the clips face to the right, as shown on the photograph on the right, below.
Plug the ends of the two unplugged

tubes, one from the overflow tank
and the other from the pressure
chamber into the nipples on the ink
reservoir. (The photograph shows
that of the tube from the overflow
tank.
7 - 32
The grips on the tube clips should faceto the

right, as shown on the photograph.
manuals4you.com
< Tube layout in assembly >
* Tubes to the pressure chamber.
The tubes to the pressure chamber should not be tangled.
HC5500
HC5000
NO GOOD: Tubes tangled.
Port
Tube
GOOD: Tubes not tangled.
Gap less than 2 mm

Tube layout
* The tubes should be laid out so they do not touch any shafts, belts or any other moving objects.
The view of the ink joint at ink reservoir and tubes around the ink reservoir.
The tubes should be laid out so that they do not tangle with each other.
The photograph shows that of the tube around the Yellow Ink reservoir.
7 - 33
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Enlarged view of the ink reservoirs of all four colors.
* Where the tubes must curve, make the loops in large diameters, so the tubes do not bend and stop the ink
flow.
* After the ink reservoir is replaced, use Test Mode 5.5.1 Start Up Cleaning for the color of the ink of
which the ink reservoir was replaced.
7 - 34
manuals4you.com
4 . O v e r f l o w ta n k
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

If the overflow tank is filled with overflown ink, empty the overflow tank of the overflown ink
before the removal by unplugging the plug on the ink draining port and connect a syringe with a
tube connected at the tip to draw the ink out of the overflow tank from the port.
Disconnect the reed switch connector from the overflow tank.
Disconnect the drain tube.
(5)
(6)
Disconnect all the tubes from the overflow tank (9 tubes).

Slide the overflow tank toward the right and lift to remove (two M3x6 IT screws).
* If the overflow tank contains waste ink, watch for ink leaks.
* Keep the overflow tank in level state all through the removal procedure to prevent ink from leaking.
Two M3x6 IT screws
Connector
Drain tube
Overflow tank
Plug for the ink drainage when using syringe.
* The end of the tube connected to the overflow tank may stretch wide with the time. If the end opening
is stretched wide, cut off the widened end portion before reconnecting.
* The plug for the ink draining port is the 4th port form the left. Do not connect hose to this port by mistake.
* Whenever the overflow tank is filled with overflown ink and error message displayed, use a syringe
with a tube attached on the tip.
7 - 35
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
5.Pressure pump unit

(1)
(2)

Disconnect the tube connector (1 location) by pulling it off from the other end gently.
Tube connector
(3)
(4)
Disconnect the sensor connector.

Remove the Pressure pump unit. (two M3x6 IT screws)
M3x6 IT screw
Sensor connector
M3x6 IT screw
(5)
Disconnect the motor connector.

Pressure pump unit
Motor connector
7 - 36
Sensor connector
manuals4you.com
6.Pressure chamber
(1)
(2)

Disconnect the four tubes.
Pressure chamber
Tube
M3x6 IT screw
Tube connector
(3)
Disconnect the tube connector by pulling it gently.
Tube connector
(4)
Remove the press chamber (two M3x6 IT screws).

* Connect the tubes in the sequence C, K, M, Y.
* For HC5000, it is in the sequence K, C, M, Y.
* The end of the tube connected to the press chamber may stretch and become larger in the diameter
with the time. If the diameter is enlarged, trim the tip end of the tube before reconnecting.
7 - 37
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
7.ID unit / ID solenoid valve

7-1.I D unit
(1)
Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, slide the ink pan to left, under the
heads, using the test mode).
* Ink will drip from the print head nozzles, so the ink pan must be positioned under the heads.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Place paper on top of the transfer belt to catch any ink that may land on the belt.
Remove the PCB cover and raise the PCB box to the maintenance position.
Remove the control panel together with the bracket, and place the control panel aside.
Remove the control panel cable guide (center stay).
Pull out the duplex unit from the machine and remove.
Slide the ink cartridge holder to the side by loosening 4 screws.
Remove one of the carriage cover of which is located over the ID unit to be removed
Empty the ID unit of the ink (2 colors).
* If the ID unit is being replaced due to problem with the ink, such as ink separation or ink viscosity becoming
too thick, do not remove the ink from the ID unit in the steps described below. Removing faulty ink in the
steps described may damage (clog) the print heads. In those cases, remove the ID unit with the ink
filled, but special caution must be paid in preventing ink spillage.
* Use the filter, described below, to prevent foreign object from entering into the heads.
1) Disconnect the tube joint between the ink reservoir and the ID unit to be removed.
* If not disconnected, the ink in the ID unit will fall back into ink reservoir and the reservoir will overflow.
2) Of the air vent tube connected between the ID solenoid valve and ID unit, unplug the tube
from the solenoid valve.
3) Connect the air filter onto the tip of the unplugged air vent hose, and connect a syringe
onto the other end of the air filter, using a tube in between.
4) Using the syringe, force the ink within the ID unit out through the print heads.
5) Unplug the syringe tube from the filter, put air in the syringe again, and connect the syringe
back onto the filter and pump the ink out from the ID unit again.
6) Repeat the process until the tubes between the ID unit and print heads become empty,
checking with the eye.
* The syringe to use should be of about 20 milliliters in size. A syringe of too big of a volume may damage the print heads due to too much pressure produced by the syringe.
ID solenoid valve
unplug the tube from the ID solenoid valve and connect it to an air filter.
connect a syringe onto the other end of the air filter,
using a tube in between
From the syringe, with the filter between the syringe
and the ID unit, force the air out from the syringe into
the ID unit. The ink is forced out from the ID unit
out through the print head nozzles.
Filter
7 - 38
manuals4you.com
(13) From the overflow tank, disconnect the tube which leads to the ID unit (2 colors).
Tube
ID solenoid valve
ID unit
ID unit
Overflow tank
Tube
Ink joint
(14) Disconnect the connectors to the ID solenoid valves (5 connectors).
ID magnet valve
Connector
ID unit
tube
(15) Disconnect the head ribbon cables.

* Make sure that main power for the machine is turned off.
* Disconnect all 24 ribbon cables from the Ink drive PCBs for the two colors.
7 - 39
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
ID unit
tube
Valve opened
Print head
Head ribbon cable
Valve closed
Head drive PCB
(16) Close the valves on the printing heads (12 valves)

(17) Disconnect the tubes from the print heads.
(18) Remove the screw from the front side of the ID unit and remove the ID unit
(one M3x6 IT screw). There is a hook underneath the ID unit. Slide to the front to disengage
the hook.
Caution in reinstalling:
* Make sure that the valve is open after reinstalling.
* Refer to the instructions given under the Print Head removals for the cautions in connecting the Valve
onto the print head.
* The end of the tube connected to the ID solenoid valve may stretch over the time. If the end opening
has over-stretched, trim the end section before reconnecting.
* Be sure to remove paper placed on the transfer unit in the previous step before turning the machine
power ON.
* After completing the work, select the colors (2 colors) for the replaced ID unit and perform [5.5.1 Startup cleaning].
NOTE: Specification on the Filter suggested for use.

Manufacturer: Sartorius
7 - 40
Model Name: Minisart 17594-K
5.00 micrometer
manuals4you.com
7-2. <Removi ng I D so lenoi d val ve >

(1)
In removing the ID solenoid valve (one piece to a color on the ID unit), disconnect the Tube joint
between the ink reservoir and the ID unit.
* If the tube joint is not disconnected, the ink from the ID unit will drop down into the ink reservoir and the ink
will overflow from the reservoir when next step, described bellow, is performed.
(2)
Disconnect a connector and remove two mounting screws (IT M3x6 screws) to dismount the
solenoid valve. Disconnect the air vent hoses from the solenoid valve.
Ink Joint
7 - 41
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
8.Print head
The print heads are very fragile and vulnerable to impact and shock. Pay attention to the following
when handing the print head.
* Do not drop the print head. The print head surface will be damaged, and the piezo mechanism will also be
damaged.
* Prevent the print head surface (the nozzle portion) from touching any surface after taking the head out of
the machine.
* Never lay anything on top of the print head.
* When transporting the print head, use the special print head shipment container in which a print head is put
in when ordered as a spare part, and place it in the container correctly.
* Avoid from hitting the nozzle surface against the print head carriage when installing the print head on the
machine.
* To prevent print head damage from static electricity, be sure to wear an antistatic wrist band when touching
print heads. If antistatic wrist band is not available, touch the machine metal frames firmly with both hands
before working to let the static electricity escape from the body.
(1)
(2)
Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, slide the ink pan under the heads
using Test Mode). Place paper on top of the belt to catch any ink that may drip from the heads.
Remove the rear cover and disconnect the tube joint, located between the ink reservoir and the
I.D. Unit, to prevent the ink from draining into the overflow tank due to the air getting into the system through the print head area.
* The disconnected tube joint should be re-joined after all the components are reassembled back on
the machine, the power to the machine is turned ON and the Startup Cleaning is started by the SEMode. As soon as the Startup Cleaning is executed by pressing the Start button, re-join the disconnected tube joint.
Disconnect the tube joint at
the ink reservoir for the color
of the head to be replaced.
Watch out for some ink which
may spill out from the tube
joint when disconnected.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Remove the control panel together with the bracket and put the panel aside.
Remove the control panel cable guide (beam).
Pull out the duplex unit and detach it from the machine.
Remove the carriage cover.
* Depending on the ink color, the Ink cartridge holder unit may have to be slid toward the paper feeding
side to access to the screws to remove the carriage cover.
(8)
(9)
Remove the head ribbon cables from the head drive PCB for the print head to remove.
Disconnect print head tube from the print head to remove.
* Be sure to close the valve before disconnecting the print head tube.
* Disconnect other print head tubes if they interfere.
Valve closed
7 - 42
Valve opened
manuals4you.com
(10) After removing the screws with washers, lift the head straight up (two M3x23 screws with washers).
The screw to be removed the first in removal.

The screw to be tightened the last in mounting.
The two screws to remove.

The screw to be removed the last in removal.
The screw to be tightened the first in mounting.
Do not touch this screw.
M3x23 screw with washer
Print head
Lift the print

head straight
up, and be careful to avoid accidentally pulling
the other ribbon
cables.
Ribbon cable
*
*
*
*
The print head is a precision device. Avoid impact or shock on the head.
Do not disconnect the ribbon cables which are connected the print head.
Be careful to avoid scratching the nozzle surfaces.
To prevent print head damage from static electricity, be sure to wear an antistatic wrist band when
touching print heads. If antistatic wrist band is not available, touch the machine metal frames firmly
with both hands before working to let the static electricity escape from the body.
7 - 43
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Caution in assembly:
* Clean the print head and the surroundings free of spilled ink. But never wipe the nozzle surface.
Use lint-free/dust-free cloth or paper. Never use cloth or paper which emits lint or dust.
Uncleaned dripped ink will eventually drop down onto the transfer belt and get on the printing papers.
* Use a torque driver to tighten the screws (two M3x23 screws with washers) securing the head in
place to ensure the correct tightening force and to minimize the possibility of damaging the screw
slots. The tightening force differs depending on the ink color on HC5500.The tightening torque
is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m).
* The tightening torque for for HC5500 is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m) for both the front and rear
screws on all the C and K heads. For M and Y heads, the front screw for all the heads is 9.0 kgfcm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m), and for the rear screws the torque is 3.0 kgf-cm (0.3 N-m or 30 cN-m).
* The tightening torque for for HC5000 is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m) for both the front and rear
screws on all the K, C, M, Y heads.
Example of setting the torque driver

to 9.0 kgf-m (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m)
The setting method varies depending on the manufacturer and model. Refer to the
instructions provided with the torque driver.
* Make sure that the print head is correctly fit on the carriage before screwing it firmly on the carriage.
Otherwise the head will be mounted raised on the carriage and will not print correctly.
* Before inserting the valve back on the print head, check that the O-ring on the valve is in good condtion. Worn or broken O-ring will cause ink leakage, or lets air in and cause ink to drop back into the
ink reservoir and cause ink overflow.
* The valve should be pushed gently but firmly and into the print head by rotating it slightly back and
forth as pushed in. When correctly inserted back on the print head, the valve should rotate freely on
the head. If incorrectly inserted, the valve will not rotate as freely. If incorrectly inserted, pull the
valve out again and check for any damage on the O-ring. If no damage on the O-ring, try putting it
back on the head again.
7 - 44
manuals4you.com
* Make sure that all the ribbon cables are connected back in the correct slot on the head drive PCB,
firmly and straight. The head drive PCB and/or print head may be damaged by short-circuit if the ribbon cable connection is not done correctly.
Example of ribbon cable not fully inserted
Example of ribbon cable not inserted straight
* Mount back the carriage covers back on the machine, paying attention not to jam on the ribbon
cables and pull the cables out.
* Make sure that the carriage covers are mounted before putting the duplex unit back on the machine.
Otherwise the duplex unit will catch the ribbon cables and rip the cables.
* Remove the papers from the transfer belt before turning the machine power back ON.
* After the print head is replaced, use Test Mode 5.5.1 [Start Up Cleaning] and select the ink color of
the print head and activate to clean the head.
* Print the test pattern using print adjustment software to check to see if print adjustment is necessary
or not. Refer to the print adjustment procedure to follow on this chapter if adjustment is necessary.
7 - 45
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
9.Head drive PCB

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Pull out the duplex unit and remove from the machine.
Remove the carriage cover.
Disconnect the connectors (2 locations) on the rear end of the head drive PCB.
Disconnect the head ribbon cables (12 locations).
Remove the screws from the head drive PCB bracket and dismount the PCB together with the
bracket (two M3x6 IT screws).
M3x6 IT screws
Connectors
REAR
(8)
FRONT
Remove the screws from the Head driver PCB bracket (two M3x6 IT screws), and dismount the
PCB from the bracket.
Head drive PCB bracket
M3x6 IT screws
Head drive PCB

* Check carefully to make sure that the ribbon cables from the heads are not inserted loosely or at an
angle. Improper insertion of the ribbon cables will result in short-circuit and damage the PCB.
* Be careful not to pull the ribbon cables when putting the carriage cover back on.
* While working on the head drive PCB, hands will touch on the print head tubes. Touching the tubes
will result in misfires in printing (white lines). After all the parts are mounted back on, do Normal
Head Cleaning once.
7 - 46
manuals4you.com
10.Cleaning unit
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Lower the transfer unit all the way down and turn OFF the machine power. If the power is
already off with the transfer unit not all the way down, rotate the lift gear unit shaft to lower the
transfer unit.
Remove inner cover 3 to access to the cleaning unit.
Put papers on top of the transfer belt to protect the belt from the ink which may drip.
Bracket
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
Bracket
Tube
Lift gear unit shaft
Connector
(5)
Cleaning unit
Tube
Disconnect the cleaning unit connector from the transfer belt drive PCB at rear left of the
machine (HC5500).
* On HC5000, the connector is located at rear left of the machine, just next to the cleaning unit.
Bracket
Tube
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
Bracket
Connector on
HC5500 is on
the transfer
belt drive PCB.
Connector on
HC5000
Cleaning unit
Cleaning motor
7 - 47
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(6)
Disconnect the two tubes, one from the ink pan and the other from the suction chamber, on the
rear of the machine. The one from the ink pan should be unplugged from the Y shaped connector located close to the C ink reservoir (near K ink reservoir on HC5000).
Insert the tube from the ink pan into the bracket (indented section) on the cleaning unit to secure
the tube in place.
(7)
Remove the 4 brackets, 2 in front and 2 in rear, by removing one IT screw M4x8 from the each.
* On HC5500, remove the two brackets in the rear first. Then remove the bracket on the front right. The
bracket on the front left should be removed the last.
* On HC5000, remove the two brackets in the front first. Then remove the bracket on the rear left. The
bracket on the rear right should be removed the last.
M4x8 IT screw
M4x8 IT screw
This bracket on
the front left of
the machin
should be
removed the
last.
Cleaning unit
(8)
< FRONT >
Bracket
Pull the cleaning unit out along the railing.
* Be careful to avoid the disconnected drain tube from falling off from the bracket on which it is hooked onto,
or the ink will start to spill out from the tube.
7 - 48
manuals4you.com
Cautions in assembly:
* Due to a lack of grease on the shaft, shown on the photograph, too much load is put on the ink pan
motor, and may display error message [S04-300: Ink pan motor time-out]. To prevent this problem,
apply grease on the shafts as judged necessary. Make sure that the grease does not get on the suction heads or the print heads when applying.
Lack of grease on these shafts (for the

four colors) may cause the error display
S-04-300 to occur.
* As it was when removing the unit out, also watch out during the assembly to avoid the drain tube from
falling off from the bracket on which it is hooked onto, or the ink will start to spill out from the tube.
* When connecting the bellow-shaped large black tube onto the left rear side of the maintenance unit,
wipe clean the surface of the nozzle on the maintenance unit and inner surface of the tube. If a film
of ink is present on either of the two pieces, that makes it very easy for the tube to come off from the
maintenance unit during machine operations. That will cause ink to spill out of the machine from the
maintenance unit. The same with the other tube from the ink pan which is disconnected from the Yshaped tube connector.
Wipe clean the inner surface of

the hose and the outer surface
of the plastic tubing. (The same
is for the other tube from the ink
pan discunnected from the Yshaped tube connector.
* Do not forget to remove the papers from the transfer belt before turning ON the machine power.
7 - 49
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
11 . S u c t i o n h e a d
(1)
(2)
Remove the cleaning unit.

To remove the suction head, push it down gently and open the hook that holds it in place.
* Take care to prevent the spring from springing out.
* Do not widen the hook too much, as that may crack the hook.
* After attaching the suction head, check that the suction head does not lean.
If the suction head leans, remove it once and attach it back on again. If attached on correctly, the
suction head should elevate up-and-down freely when pushed down by finger.
* If the suction head leans, poor suction of ink is caused and ink may drip and fall from the print head,
and the suction head may fall off after hitting the print head.
Suction head
Spring
7 - 50
manuals4you.com
1 2 . C a p ( e x i s ts o n H C 5 0 0 0 o n l y )
(1)
(2)
Remove the cleaning unit.

To remove the rectangular rubber cap, push it down and open the hook securing it.
* Take care to prevent the spring from springing out.
* Do not widen the hook too much, as the hook may break off.
Note:
The cap has no function. It was originally designed for a purpose, which later wasdecided not to
use.
Cap
Spring
7 - 51
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
13.Suction chamber
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Remove the IT screw (one M3x6 IT screw).
Disconnect tube 1.
Tube 2
Suction chamber
Connector
M3x6 IT screw
Tube 1
Tube 3
(5)
(6)
Disconnect tube 2 and plug it to where tube 1 was plugged in, to prevent ink leakage from the
tube.
Disconnect tube 3 from the ST. TANK and connect it to the tube connector nipple on the suction
chamber to prevent ink from leaking out the tube.
* Work carefully to avoid dripping ink.
Wipe the inside of the tube and outer rim of the plastic pipe
when reconnecting, as film of ink on those surfaces will make
the pipe to come off easily during machine operation.
ST.TANK
Tube 2
Tube connector nipple
Tube 3
7 - 52
manuals4you.com
(7)
Remove the suction chamber by pulling it forward and lifting.
* Be careful to avoid bending the drain tube during reassembly. Bending the tube will stop the waste ink
flow.
7 - 53
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1 4 . I n k c a t c h pa n
* On HC5000, remove the ink release bracket first (refer to page 7-26).
(1)
Unplug the four ink drain tubes from the ink catch pan under the ink tray (one tube per color).
(2)
(3)
Wipe clean the ink on the ink catch pan.

Disconnect the drain tube from the bottom of the ink catch pan.
* Watch out for the ink dripping.
View from underneath
Drain tube
(4)
Unhook the tubes from the tube bracket and remove the clear plastic sheet.
* The removed clear plastic sheet needs to be placed on the new ink catch pan.
Clear plastic sheet
(5)
7 - 54
Remove mounting screws (two IT M4x8 screws) from the ink catch pan and remove the pan.
manuals4you.com
1 5 . Wa s t e i n k ta n k
(1)
(2)
(3)
Open waste ink tank access door on the front bottom of the machine.
Turn the knob screw and remove the waste ink tank cover.
Remove the cap from the waste ink tank.
* Turn the cap over and hang it on the waste ink tank holder.
Waste ink tank cap
Waste ink tank cover
Knob screw

* When reinstalling the waste ink tank, press down on the waste ink tank holder before setting the tank
in place.
Waste ink tank holder
* The waste ink tank must be replaced periodically.
7 - 55
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1 6 . Wa s t e i n k ta n k h o l d e r
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Open waste ink tank access door on the front bottom of the machine.
Turn the knob screw and remove the waste ink tank cover.
Remove the PS7R controller. (HC5000 only)
Remove the waste ink tank.
Pull out the waste ink tank holder from the front of the machine. (Two M4x8 screws with washers)
Waste ink tank holder
(6)
7 - 56
Disconnect the sensor connectors (2 locations) from the waste ink tank holder.
manuals4you.com
1 7 . S u c t i o n p u m p u n i t , p u m p fi l t e r, p u m p s p o n g e
(1)
(2)

Remove the MTPF rear cover bracket (one M4x8 screw with washer).
Base cover bracket
(3)
(4)
Disconnect the large black tube.

Remove the two cable bands shown on the photograph below, and disconnect two connectors.
Cable bands
Connectors
Suction pump unit
Large black tube
Base cover bracket
7 - 57
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(5)
(6)
(7)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Pull the suction pump unit forward to remove (two M4x8 screws with washers).
Remove the suction pump cover (three M4x8 IT screws).
Remove the pump filter.
* When replacing filters, be sure to replace both the large and small filters as a set.
* Wearing a glove is recommended to prevent the hands from getting dirty.
(8)
Remove the pump sponge from the suction pump cover.
* The pump sponge must be replaced periodically.

Suction Pump Unit
Suction pump unit
Filter (small)
Filter (large)
Pump sponge
Suction pump cover

M4x8 IT screw
7 - 58
manuals4you.com
Adjustment
1 . A d j u s t m e n t a ft e r p r i n t h e a d r e p l a c e m e n t
After replacing print heads, two types of parameters specific to each head must be set and image
adjustments made (physical head positions and print timing depending on combination of heads).
Make these adjustments according to the procedures described below.
1-1. Parameter setti ng

Enter the two types of parameters (voltage and AL type) specific to each print head for proper operation in this printer.
The parameter values are indicated on the print head and print head packaging.
Enter the indicated parameter values by following the procedure described after the photograph.
Check before installation and record as necessary.
E x a mp l e o f re p l a c e me n t o f
C6 head
From machine rear side, the heads
are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Since the C6 head has been replaced,
enter data on the input screen for the
C61/C62 head. (The parameters to be
entered are indicated on the head and
package.)
207/211
AL2/3
< Voltage >

C6120.7V
C6221.1V
<AL>
C61+2
C62+3
Entering parameters from the control panel

Using Test Mode [8.5.1.1 Voltage] and [8.5.1.3 AL type], select the replaced print head and
enter the values indicated on the print head, as shown above. Then press the Enter key to save
the new parameter settings in the NVRAM mounted on the ORIP PCB.
Download the saved parameters from the NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB as a backup by using
Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.].
7 - 59
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-2.Preparation for the image adjustment

Arrange the tools and instruments required to make the adjustment.
Head angle jig
Reference chart for scanner calibration
Notebook PC (commercially available) running

image adjustment utility software
USB 2.0 x2 equipment is necessity.
Flatbed scanner (commercially available)

Recommended scanner: Canon CanoScan
LiDE 35, 40, 50 and 60.
One USB extension cable and one USB 2.0 cable, both commercially available.
* The USB extension cable is to use between the USB cable
from the ORIP PCB and PC.
* The USB cable is for connection of Canon LiDE scanner to the
PC.
Loupe (magnifier) to check the printed image quality.
Paper for image adjustment Approximately 20 sheets of A4

coated paper, and A3 coated paper. Paper for print test
Approximately 20 sheets of A4 plain paper.
Connect the notebook PC to the machine using the USB extension cable, and notebook PC to the
flatbed scanner using USB 2.0 cable.
* Use USB 2.0 cable.
USB 1.1 cable will not work properly.
1 - 3 . C o n ne c t i o n o f U S B c a b l e f r o m t h e H C p r i n t e r t o L a p to p P C .
(1)
(2)
7 - 60
Disconnect Controller from the machine (disconnect all the connections).

Connect USB extension cable to the USB cord from the ORIP PCB and pug to PC.
manuals4you.com
1-4. Installation metho d of the USB dri ver

Installing special HC USB driver in a PC is necessary to use the image adjustment software.
Install the USB driver beforehand in the following procedures.
From CD-R etc. supplied, save following two files in one folder in the laptop PC.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
olytest.sys
olytest.inf
Turn ON the HC printer.
Connect the extended USB cable from the ORIP PCB to the laptop PC.
The wizard of installation of the USB driver starts. Operate the laptop PC according to the wizard.
Choose olytest.inf which was saved in a folder in laptop PC.
Complete installation according to the wizard.
1-5. Set up metho d of auto imag e adj ustmen t so ftware

From CD-R etc. supplied, copy the folder on the laptop PC in which the auto image adjustment software is contained. (The software is compatible for both HC5500 and HC5000).
When using the program, double click the execution file (ImageProcess_***.exe) in this holder, and
select the correct scanner when the scanner selection dialog box appears on the PC display.
* If the property of the saved holder is displayed as [reading only], when copied from CD-R, cancel the property of [reading only]. When write-in operation is carried out into this holder during program operation, if it
is [reading only], the image adjustment operation ends in error.
* The USB driver, described previously on item 1-4 above, must be pre-installed to continue with the image
adjustment.
* Use the fresh set of software for each image adjustment by downloading the software each time from the
CD-R, etc.
1-6.Set up method of Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner driver.

Set up the scanner driver by following the instruction supplied with the scanner. Make sure to confirm the operation of the scanner in prior to the image adjustment.
1-7. Set up metho d of manua l ima ge ad justm ent s oftware

From CD-R etc. supplied, copy the folder on the laptop PC in which the auto image adjustment software is contained. (The software is compatible for both HC5500 and HC5000).
When using the program, double click the execution file (orToolbox_***_olytest.exe) in this holder.
* If the property of the saved holder is displayed as [reading only], when copied from CD-R, cancel the property of [reading only]. When write-in operation is carried out into this holder during program operation, if it
is [reading only], the image adjustment operation ends in error.
* The USB driver, described previously on item 1-4 above, must be pre-installed to continue with the image
adjustment.
1-8. Auto im age ad justment pro cedure

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Make sure that the Controller is completely disconnected from the HC printer.
Turn machine power ON and check that the panel displays, [Waiting for data].
Warm-up the machine by following the procedure given on item 1-9 on next page.
Operate normal cleaning of the print heads to ensure no misfire exists.
Connect PC to the HC printer and also to the CanoScan scanner.
Start the PC used for adjustment and launch the auto image adjustment software.
Input Test Mode [8.5.6.1. Save Adj. Config.] to save the present adjustment setting as a backup
just in case the adjustment ends in failure. Test Mode [8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config.] will allow
the backed up data to revive.
7 - 61
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(8)
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Start the auto image adjustment software and make adjustments by following the instructions on
the PC display.
Following menus are available in the automatic image adjustment software.
* Excluding the adjustments (1), (2) and (3), one specific required adjustment can be selected.
Caution Before Adjustment (0)

Rough Adjustment (1)
Print Head Angle Adjustment (2)
Fine Adjustment (3)
Density Adjustment (4)
Top and Back End Margin Adjustment (5)
Center Line Adjustment (6)
Side Margin Adjustment (7)
Print Head Edge Density Adjustment (8)
Caution After Adjustment (9)
Should open and read before adjustment.

These three adjustments are in one package.
The adjustments in given order of (1), (2) and (3)
must be executed in given order.
Independent adjustment.
Read through the caution, but activate Test Mode
8.5.6.1 only after confirming that the adjustment
finished successfully.
(9)
The adjustment result is automatically saved on the removable NVRAM mounted on the ORIP
PCB as the adjustment proceeds.
(10) Do not input Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.] right after the adjustment ends.
(11) Print image check test pattern image from the image adjustment software.
(12) If and only if the result of the adjustment is satisfactory, use Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.] to save the newly adjusted values in the ORIP PCB as a backup. If the adjustment ended in
error, execute Test Mode [8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config.] to revive the image adjustment parameters of before the image adjustment.
1-9.W arm -up o peratio n for the trans fer belt

Before image adjustment, perform a warm-up operation for the transfer belt according to the procedures described below to ensure stable transport operations.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Confirm that the machine is in normal operating condition, mechanically well adjusted.
Make sure that the machine is levelled good on the floor.
Operate the Test Mode in the following sequence.
Using Test Mode 8.5.1, slide the ink pan to the right.
Raise the transfer unit all the way up to the printing position by Test Mode 8.1.4.2
Select BP Spacer position to either Normal, Card or Envelope (does not matter which is
selected).
Lower the transfer belt lift arms down using Test Mode 8.1.4.2
Run the transfer belt for one minute at speed of 300x7 drops.
* Do not run the belt in transfer belt other than the printing position, as that will cause the belt to shift to
one side.
(4)
After one minute of warm-up operation, stop the belt and go out of the test mode menu.
1-10. Setting adju stmen t patterns o n th e fla tbed scann er

When placing the calibration reference chart, coarse adjustment pattern, density adjustment pattern,
or any other adjustment pattern on the flatbed scanner, make sure to place them accurately on the
scanner glass, as explained on the next page.
7 - 62
manuals4you.com
Set at the top corner of the chart on the corner of the glass.
Chart placed face down.
If after scanning, the error display on the

PC says, Cannot detect image pattern,
the chart needs to be trimmed (cut)
0.5mm or more so on the correct side of
the chart, so the scanner can scan the full
A4 size image of the charts.
(This may occur only in scanning the Calibration Chart.)
CanoScan LiDE 35, 40, 50 or 60 for HC5500.

* This is the same for HC5000 when the same auto image adjustment software is used.
Calibration chart
This corner of the chart is placed on the top corner of the scanner.
TOP
BOTTOM
The thick line is the bottom of the chart.
1-11 .Pl acing the Matte Pape rs correctly on the feed tray
Place clean sheets of A4 or A3 Matte Papers (coated paper) on the Standard paper feed tray of HC
printer. Make sure that the side guides on the tray is positioned flat against the side of the papers.
The paper size and the direction of the paper to place on the standard paper feed tray will be
instructed for each adjustment on the PC display.
7 - 63
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-12. Preparatio n of the Can on CanoScan LiDE sc anner.

Scanner driver
Install the scanner driver in the PC prior to the image adjustment.
Follow the downloading instruction given in the instructions book which came with the scanner.
Make sure to confirm that the scanner is operational via PC in prior to the image adjustment.
The image adjustment will end in error if the scanner does not operate correctly.
Following LiDE Scanner series can be used in making the image adjustment with this auto image
adjustment software (for both HC5500 and HC5000).
Canon CanoScan LiDE 35, 40, 50 and 60.
The image adjustment may end in error if the scanner setting is incorrectly selected.
The scanner setting which must be confirmed are following five items.
Unsharp Mask
select to OFF
Descreen
select to ON
Output Resolution
image adjustment software automatically selects, but check each time.
Automatically Execute Preview
select to ON
Color Setting
select to NONE
The display on the PC screen will differ according to the scanner driver (according to which LiDE
scanner model is used.)
The three screen shots to follow are those of LiDE 60 as samples. LiDE 35, 40 and 50 will show different screen on the PC, as these screen relies on the scanner driver.
Select the equivallent settings on LiDE 35, 40 and 50.
[ LiDE 60 ]
Differs for each

selected adjustment.
Important
7 - 64
manuals4you.com
[ LiDE 60 ]
Select to ON to execute preview scanning

each time before making the actual scanning.
[ LiDE 60 ]
Select the color settings to None.
7 - 65
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Caution throughout the auto image adjustment in regard to the scanning area.
After each prescanning and before executing the actual scanning, check and make sure that the
cropping area (identified by the dotted rectangular marking) is to the maximum scanning area.
If this cropping area is not at A4 maximum size, the scanner will not read all the image to be
scanned. If the scanning area is not A4 maximum, the image adjustment will end in error.
[ LiDE 60 ]
[ LiDE 60 ]
INCORRECT
The scanning area is not

selected to the maximum.
[ LiDE 60 ]
CORRECT
If the scanning area is not at

the A4 maximum position,
drag the dotted lines out to
the maximum scanning area.
7 - 66
manuals4you.com
1-13 .Exe cuti ng th e auto im age ad justment.

Before starting the image adjustment, check the following machine settings.
1) Sleep Mode [5.8.1] must be selected to OFF, all through the image adjustment.
* Return the setting to the original selection after the adjustment is finished.
2) Stand-by Mode [5.8.22] must be selected to OFF, all through the image adjustment.
3) Print Area [4.10] must be selected to Maximum, all through the image adjustment.
4) Clean the print heads by executing normal head cleaning and print nozzle check pattern by
SE-Mode [9. Test Pattern Print]. Confirm that no misfire exists by checking the print. If
any misfire exists and the print is not clean, repeat the normal head cleaning until no misfire is confirmed.
Confirm that no misfire exists by printing
the nozzle check pattern.
Open the folder in which is auto image adjustment software is stored, and double click the
ImageProcess_***_exe icon.
Double click the icon.

This number refers to
the version number of
the software.
Select the LiDE scanner to use.
7 - 67
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Though explained on page 7-62 that specific adjustment can be selected from the list, the standard auto image adjustment procedure is to excute all the adjustment in the order given from (0)
to (9).
Explanation on each adjustment:
1. Caution Before Adjustment (0)

Following dialog is displayed to instuct the execution of SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.] to
download the present image adjustment parameters in the removal NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB
as a backup. This is for in case the image adjustment ends in error.
2 . R ou gh A d j us t m e nt ( 1 )
* This rough adjustment sets the parameters on menu 8.5.1.7 Vertical Position.
This Rough Adjustment(1) should be made with Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) and Fine
Adjustment(3) as a set.
1) Set A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray.
2) On a piece of paper, memo down the present parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].
* After this adjustment is done, check these two menus and enter the parameter settings copied down.
3) Select Rough Adjustment(1) from the Auto Image Adjustment software.

After A4 matte-papers are set
on the standard paper feed tray
is side-ways (A4R), click OK.
7 - 68
manuals4you.com
4) Rough adjustment pattern is printed.
The next step is to scan this printed pattern.

* Follow the instruction below.
5) After following message is displayed on the PC, set the printed rough adjustment pattern
on the LiDE scanner and press OK to scan.
* Before scanning, confirm the scanner setting according to the scanner preparation instructions previousely described on pages from 7-64.
Confirm that the scanning resolution

is set to 400 dpi.
6) After the next dialog is displayed, press OK to end the Rough Adjustment(1)
* Check the parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment], and input the original parameters copied down prior to the adjustment.
3. Print Head Angle Adjustment(2)

* This print head angle adjustment instructs how much to mechanically realign the print heads.
This Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) should be made with Rough Adjustment(1) and Fine
Adjustment(3) as a set.
1) Load A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray.
2) Select Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) from the Auto Image Adjustment software.
3) Place the calibration reference chart on the scanner.
7 - 69
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4) Making sure that the chart is positioned correctly and the scanning resolution set to 400
dpi, click [OK] on the display, shown below, on the PC.
5) Instuction is displayed on the PC to set A4 size matte papers on the standard paper feed
tray in side-ways (A4R). Set the paper on the tray and click OK.
6) Following print head angle adjustment pattern sheet is printed.
7) Set the printed pattern sheet on the scanner and click OK on the dialog box, shown below,
with the scanner resolution set at 400 dpi.
8) After the scanning, following print head angle adjustment instructions sheet is printed.
Adjustment is not required for the
heads with the value under 1.0
The sheet gives the instuction of the
direction and the amount in which the
print heads need to be adjusted.
* 0.1 = 1/8 turn
* 0.2 = 1/4 turn
* 0.3 = 3/8 turn
* 0.4 = 1/2 turn
* 0.5 = 5/8 turn
* 0.6 = 3/4 turn
* 0.7 = 7/8 turn
* 1.0 = 1 turn
7 - 70
manuals4you.com
9) Following dialog box will be displayed on the PC to instruct the adjust the print head angles
until all the heads are under the value of 1.0.
10) Follow the instuction below in making the print head angle adjustment.
Using [Safely Remove Hardware] on the PC, disconnect HC from the PC, and turn of the
HC power by first pressing the soft-switch and then shut the HC main power switch OFF.
Keep the PC power ON.
* If the heads do not require to be adjusted in their angle, press [Next] and jump to the step (11).
Referring to the section on the print head removal [page 7-42], access to the mounting
screws of the print head.
Print head mounting screws
Loosen the two mounting screws completely from the head to be adjusted.
Adjustment screw
Rotate the head adjustment screw using

the head angle jig (box wrench) in the
amount instructed on the print head angle
adjustment instruction sheet printed out.
Do not loosen this screw
7 - 71
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
* The photograph shows the print head

angle being adjusted
* After adjusting the angle of each head,
tighten the two mounting screws on the
print heads before going onto the next print
head to adjust.
* Torque screw driver should be used to
tighten these print head mounting
screws to the specified torque power.
Refer to the section on the print head
removal for the details.
Sample image
of the torque
driver.
Adjustment screw
being rotated by the
head angle jig.
The screw which should

never be loosened.
One of the two mounting
screws to be loosened
completely.
* Refer to top of page 7-44 for the caution

on the amount of torque to use in tightening the print head screws. Wrong
torque setting will damage the screw
and print head, and may also cause ink
leakage and image problem.
* The top of the machine can be left opened until the image adjustment is completely finished.
* Make sure to keep the duplex unit detached from the machine to prevent damaging of the print head
ribbon cables.
Turn the HC power ON and wait until the machine status becomes [Ready]. If the print
mode is OFF, press the green Start button to change the display message to [Ready] status.
Execute [5.5.5 Normal Cleaning] once, and print nozzle check pattern to confirm that no
misfire exits.
Start up the auto image adjustment software.
Repeat the Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) from the start.
If the newly print head angle adjustment instructions sheet still shows values over 1.0,
repeat the print head angle adjustment until all the heads show values under 1.0.
After all the values become under 1.0, end the adjustment by turning the HC power OFF
and mount all the covers back on the machine. Make sure that the inner top covers are
closed before putting back the duplex unit or otherwise the print head flexible may get
caught on the duplex unit.
Proceed to Fine Adjustment(3).
7 - 72
manuals4you.com
4. Fine Adjustment(3)
* This fine adjustment sets the parameters on menus [8.5.1.4 Horizontal Offset], [8.5.1.5 Horizontal Overlap]
and [8.5.1.7 Vertical Position].
This Fine Adjustment(3) should be made with Rough Adjustment(1) and Print Head Angle
Adjustment(2) sas a set.
2) On a piece of paper, memo down the present parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].
* After this adjustment is done, check these two menus and enter the parameter settings copied down.
3) Select Fine Adjustment(3) on the auto image adjustment software.

4) When following dialog box apear on the PC display, unput [ 5 ] in the box.
* Numbers from 1 to 10 can be input, but normally 5 is input.
5) Instuction is displayed on the PC to set A4 size matte papers on the standard paper feed
tray in side-ways (A4R). Set the paper on the tray and click OK.
6) Fine adjustment pattern prints are printed out in the quantity specified.
7 - 73
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
7) After following instruction is displayed on the PC display, place the first print on the scanner
and scan. Confirm that the scanning resolution is set at 400 dpi.
8) Repeat the scanning for the number of prints made until following message is displayed to
inform that the adjustment has ended. Click OK to end the adjustment.
9) Input the parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask
Adjustment], which were copied down on a piece of paper as instructed on step (2) of this
adjustment.
Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [5. Density Adjustment(4)], or if no other
adjustment is necessary, jump to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].
7 - 74
manuals4you.com
5. Density Adjustment(4)
* This adjustment sets the parameters on menu [8.5.1.2 Corrective Power Supply].
1) Select Density Adjustment(4) on the auto image adjustment software.

2) Set A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray, and click OK when
following instruction displays on PC.
3) The density adjustment pattern is printed.

The auto image adjustment software automatically calculates how many times to scan the
density adjustment pattern. The maximum times it may ask is 10 times. The print is numbered from 0 to maximum 9.
* For instance, if the software decides to scan 6 times, it will print 6 adjustment patterns which are numbered from 0 to 5. Each print is printed after scanning the previous print.
The printing and scanning

of the density adjustment
pattern is repeated for maximum of 10 times.
How many times is automatically calculated by the
image adjustment software.
The prints are numbered
from 0 to maximum of 9.
4) Set the density adjustment pattern on the scanner and click OK on the following display to
scan.
* The scanning resolution should be set to 300 dpi.
* Make sure that the Unsharp Mask setting on the scanner is selected to OFF and Descreen is
selected to ON. [Selecting the Descreen setting to ON is the most important setting on this
adjustment.]
7 - 75
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
5) The following display may appear on the PC display after each scanning.
* The listed items on the display should reduce after one scanning to the next.
6) After the automatically specified number of prints are scanned, the adjustment ends with
the following display. Click OK to end the [Density Adjustment(4)].
Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [6. Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)]
* If only the [Density Adjustment(4)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by going to [10.
Caution After Adjustment(9)]. But is recommended that [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] be
also done after completing this [Density Adjustment(4)].
* The [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] is available for HC5500 only and does not exist when
adjusting the image on HC5000.
7 - 76
manuals4you.com
6 . Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)
* This adjustment sets the parameters on following menu.
HC5500
* Menu [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment], [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment], [8.5.7.1 Top Edge Sensor
Top Timing] & [8.5.7.2 Top Edge Sensor Bottom Timing].
HC5500
* Menu [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment], [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].
CAUTION:
Once this adjustment is activated, finish the adjustment completely. Do not cancel or end
the adjustment prematurely.
2) Select Density Adjustment(4) on the auto image adjustment software.
3) Following dialog box appears on the PC display.
This [Top Edge Sensor] adjustment at the top should be finished

in full before making the [Top Edge
Sensor 2] adjustment on the bottom.
This [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjustment on the bottom should be
done only after completing the [Top
Edge Sensor] adjustment at the
top.
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.7.1
8.5.7.2
These two phrases should be referred as [Top Edge Sensor

Adjustment 1] and [Top Edge Sensor Adjustment 2]. These two
phrases do not represent the part name of the top edge sensors,
i.e. Top Edge Sensor 1 or Top Edge Sensor 2.
The [Top Edge Sensor] adjustment

sets the parameters for menus
8.5.3 and 8.5.4 for Top Edge Sensor 2 on HC5500.
On HC5000, the parameters for
these two menus for Top Edge
Sensor is set.
The [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjustment sets the parameters for

menus 8.5.7.1 and 8.5.7.2 for Top
Edge Sensor 1 on HC5500.
When the adjustment software is
used on HC5000, this bottom portion of the dialog box is grayed out
and becomes inactive.
7 - 77
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
4) Click the [Print 1] button on the display.
Click [Print 1] button.
5) The top edger sensor adjustment pattern for adjustment 1 is printed.

6) Measure the Top Edge and Bottom Mask position on the print and input the necessary
number on the display.
Top edge of paper
5 mm
Horizontal line
0.5 mm
Bottom edge of paper

Measure above two spaces.
The Top Edge distance should be measured from
the top edge of the paper to the horizontal line on
the print. The distance should be 5 mm. If the
distance is not 5 mm, imput the amount in millimeters to adjust.
(+ ) number widens the space.
( - ) number narrows the space.
The Bottom Mask distance should be measured
from the bottom edge of the paper to the bottom of
the four-color lines on the print. The distance
(gap) should be 0.5 mm. If the distance is not 0.5
mm, imput the amount in millimeters to adjust.
(+ ) number widens the space.
( - ) number narrows the space.
7 - 78
manuals4you.com
7) After entering necessary amount of distance to adjust, click the [Print 1] button again to
make a new print.
* If the four-colored lines on the Bottom Mask adjustment is printed to the bottom edge of the paper
and no gap available, or if the four-colored lines are out of the printing area and not printed, input (+)
numbers to bring the four-colored lines well above the bottom edge of the paper, and then input (-)
numbers to bring the four-colored lines down to adjust the gap to 0.5 mm.
8) Measure the distances again.

9) If the measurements still need to be adjusted, repeat the above process.
10) If correct measurements are achieved, do the same for the adjustment titled, [Top Edge
Sensor 2] by clicking the [Print 2] button to print the adjustment pattern.
* HC5000 does not have this adjustment.
This column is added on the print to indicate that

the printout is for the [Top Edge Sensor 2]
adjustment.
11) After the [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjustment is completed, click the OK button on the dialog
box shown on the previous page to download the new parameter setting.
12) A new dialog box, given below, is displayed. Click OK button to end the adjustment.
Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [7. Center Line Adjustment(6)]
If only the [Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by
going to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].
7 - 79
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
7 . Center Line Adjustment(6)

* This adjustment sets the parameter on menu [8.5.2.6 Image Center Adjustment].
* This adjustment is available only for HC5500, and not available for HC5000.

2) Select [Center Line Adjustment(6)] on the auto image adjustment software.
3) The following dialog box is displayed on PC. Select [1] and click OK button.
Always select [1. CCD Mode] to

adjust the CCD to automatically
detect the center of all paper
sizes.
* Do not select 2, 3 or 4
when making this adjustment.
4) After the following dialog box is displayed on the PC, look into SE-Mode No. [8.5.2.3 Side
Registration Offset] on HC5500, and enter the parameter setting displayed on the machine
operation panel. Then click OK button.
This number is a sample.
5) A new dialog box, shown below, is displayed on PC.

ment pattern sheet, shown on the next page.
Enter the parameter setting displayed on the HC5500 operation panel for the SE-Mode No.
8.5.2.3 Side Registration Offset,
and click OK button.
Click [Print] button to print an adjust-
The number entered on the previous dialog box appears.

Press the [Print] button to print center-line adjustment pattern
sheet.
7 - 80
manuals4you.com
6) After the following center-line adjustment pattern sheet is printed, fold the sheet in half at
the center of the sheet. Measure the distance from the center-fold of the paper to the line
printed on the sheet. Bring the line to the center of the paper by adding or subtracting the
required distance from the number in the dialog box shown on the previous page. Adding
(+) a number will move the line to the right. Subtracting a number (-) will move the line to
the left.
7) Press the [Print] button gain to make a new center-line adjustment pattern sheet.
8) Measure the distance between the center fold of the sheet and the printed line.
9) If the printed line is still not on the center of the sheet, repeat the adjustment.
10) If the printed line lands on the center of the sheet, click [OK] button on the dialog box
shown on the previous page.
11) Following dialog box is displayed. Click OK to end the adjustment.
Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [8. Side Margin Adjustment(7)]
* If only the [Center Line Adjustment(6)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by going
to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].
7 - 81
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
8 . Side Margin Adjustment(7)

* This adjustment sets the parameter on menu [8.5.2.1 Adjusting the CCD Position].
1) Set A4 or Letter size matte-papers side-ways (A4R/LetterR) on the standard paper feed
tray.
2) Select [Side Margin Adjustment(7)] on the auto image adjustment software.
3) The following dialog box is displayed on PC. Select the size of the paper on the standard
paper feed tray and click OK.
Select [1] if A4 size paper is used.
Select [2] if A4 size paper is used.
4) When following dialog box is displayed, click OK to print the side margin adjustment pattern
sheet.
5) The side margin adjustment patter sheet, shown below, is printed. For each of the four
colors, on the left and right, measure the distance from the edge of the paper.
Measure the distance for each color.
7 - 82
manuals4you.com
6) Enter the measurements in the dialog box below, and click OK.
These are sample measurements.
7) Click OK on the following dialog box to end the adjustment.
Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)]
* If only the [Side Margin Adjustment(8)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by going
to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].
7 - 83
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
9 . Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)

* This adjustment does not exit in SE-Mode menu. This adjustment, to set the edge density parameter for
each print head, is possible by this auto image adjustment software only.
* This adjustment is available only for HC5500 and does not exist for HC5000.
1) It is recommended that [Print Head Overlap Adjustment] is done using the Manual Image
Adjustment Software prior to this adjustment.
* The Manual Image Adjustment Software can be started up while this Auto Image Adjustment Software is active.

3) Select [Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] on the auto image adjustment software.
4) On HC5500, go into SE-Mode [8.5.2.3 Side Registration Offset] and input its setting in the
dialog box which appears on the PC display. Click OK on the dialog box.
Read the parameter setting of

SE-Mode No. 8.5.2.3 on the
HC5500 panel display and
input the parameter setting in
the dialog box displayed on
the PC.
This is a sample number.
5) Click OK in the following dialog box to make three prints. One print is in Cyan, the other
two are in Magenta and Black.
6) Sample of the Cyan Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.
7 - 84
manuals4you.com
7) Sample of the Magenta Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.
8) Sample of the Black Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.
9) Make check marks, using black color ink pen, in the square boxes on the left and right of
each column of colors for all three prints. The check mark should be dark and solid.
Choose where the best overlap between the heads is found.
If the overlap between the print

heads are not complete in any of the
choices (white line frome the top to
the bottom of the column) or too
much overlap on all the choices,
Manual Image Adjustment software
needs to be started up, and [Print
Head Overlap Adjustment] must be
made. Then come back to this
adjustment.
7 - 85
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
10) Follow the instruction and scan the Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheets in
the order of the instruction. The scanning is to be done at 100 dpi resolution.
11) If the scanner cannot see the check marks, either because the check marks are made too
thin or check marks forgotten, following display will show. In that case, make darker
check marks and scan again.
A sample display.
12) After the sheet is scanned successfully, following dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
13) Click OK on the next dialog box to end the adjustment for Cyan.
14) Continue the same procedure for Magenta and Black.
7 - 86
manuals4you.com
15) The adjustment is competed after all three colors are scanned.
End the auto image adjustment by going to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].
10. Caution After Adjustment(9)

This is the last step in completing the auto imag adjustment.
Read the following before selecting the [Caution After Adjustment(9)] on the auto image adjustment
software.
(1)
(2)
(3)
When this last step is selected on the auto image adjustment software, a dialog box displayed
on the PC will instruct the SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to be activated.
Do not activate SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] yet.
Using either the [OR_PRINT] or [Manual Image Adjustment] software, print SE_PatternA3_2A,
and make print.
How to check the SE_PatterA3_2A test pattern image.
Check the solid color area for the density and overlaps.
Check the horizontal and vertical lines.

Check the circles and the lines within.
The circles and the lines within the circles
should print out as composed black in color.
The image adjustment is very good if no other
colors are mixed in the circle images.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Check the test pattern image print to confirm that the image adjustment ended in success.
If the print result of the test pattern print is not better than the image adjustment parameters
backed up prior to the adjustment, repeat the Auto Image Adjustment or activate [8.5.6.2
Restore Adj. Config.] to restore the original backup data from the ORIP PCB to the removable
NVRAM.
If the test pattern print image after the adjustment is better than that of before the adjustment,
follow the instruction given by [Caution After Adjustment(9)], and activate the SE-Mode [8.5.6.1
Store Adj. Config.] to copy the newly adjustment parameters entered on the removal NVRAM
onto the ORIP PCB as a backup data.
After understanding the above explanation, select [Caution After Adjustment(9)] on the auto
image adjustment software.
Following instruction is displayed on the PC.
7 - 87
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(9)
The display instructs to perform SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.]. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
* Clicking OK does not automatically active SE-Mode 8.5.6.1
The dialog box is making the instruction only. The SE-Mode 8.5.6.1 must be activated manually on the HC operation panel key.
(10) Perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to download the newly adjusted adjustment
parameter saved on the removal NVRAM onto the PRIP PCB as a backup data.
This ends the Auto Image Adjustment.
Note:
Return the following three settings back to the original setting before the image adjustment.
1) Sleep Mode [5.8.1].
2) Stand-by Mode [5.8.22].
3) Print Area [4.10].
7 - 88
manuals4you.com
1-14 .Exe cuti on of Manua l Ima ge Adjustment

If the machine image quality is not as bad as to use the Auto Image Adjustment, but may still require
minor improvements. In these cases, Manual Image Adjustment, instead of the Auto Image Adjustment, can be used. Though limited in the adjustments the Manual Image Adjustment, compared the
Automatic Image Adjustment, require much less time to perform.
Follow the steps given below to perform the Manual Image Adjustment.
(1)
(2)
Place A3 size Matte (coated) paper on the standard paper feed tray.
Connect the Laptop PC to HC5000 using USB 2.0 cable in the same way as for the Auto Image
Adjustment procedure.
* The USB drive for the HC5000 must also be downloaded in the PC, as it was for the Auto Image Adjustment procedure, for the PC to recognize HC5000.
(3)
(4)
From CD-R, etc., download the Manual Image Adjustment software [orTool Box] folder on PC
and double click [orToolbox_...._olytest.exe] Icon to start the software.
Following window will be displayed.
(5)
Above adjustment 1 is the X (horizontal) Position adjustment.
* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.4 Horizontal offset].
(6)
Above adjustment 2 is the Y (vertical) Position adjustment.
* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.7 Vertical offset].
(7)
Above adjustment 3 is the Print Head Overlap adjustment.
* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.5 Horizontal overlap].
(8)
Above adjustment 4 is the Print Head Density adjustment.
* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.2 Voltage correction].
(9) Above 5 is the [Print] button to print the image to adjust.

(10) Above 6 is the [Adjust] button to jump to the adjustment display.
(11) Above 7 is the [Save] button to save the new parameter setting into PC.
* The parameter setting can be saved in the software folder in the PC for future recall of that setting. This
button is to save the parameter data into the PC. No need to use if not saving the data in PC.
(12) Above 8 is the [Load] button to save the new parameter setting into NVRAM on ORIP PCB.
* The past parameter setting can be downloaded into HC5000 by clicking this button and recalling the
parameter setting saved in PC during past adjustments (these past data exist only if they were saved in PC
during the past adjustments).
(13) Above 9 is the [Save] button to save the new parameter settings for 1 to 4 into PC all at once.
* Clicking this button after completing adjustments 1 through 4 will save the new parameter settings into
the PC. It is equivalent to clicking 7 for each adjustments 1 though 4 . Do only if needed.
(14) Above 10 is the [Load] button to save the new parameter settings for 1 to 4 into NVRAM on
ORIP PCB all at once.
* The past parameter settings can be downloaded into HC5000 by clicking this button and recalling the
parameter setting saved in PC during past adjustments (these past data exist only if they were saved in PC
during the past adjustments). It is equivalent to clicking 8 for each adjustments 1 though 4 . Do only if
needed.
(15) Above 11 is the [Sample Print] button to select and print test patterns included in the Manual
Image Adjustment software.
(16) Above 12 is the [Exit] button to exit from the Manual Image Adjustment software.
7 - 89
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
X ( Ho r i z o n t a l ) P o s i t i o n A d j u s t m e n t
(1)
Click [Print] button. The image shown below is printed out.
< Enlarged image from the print on the left >
If the setting is not good, the K/C, K/M and K/Y thin line does
not overlap one on top of the other, and gap (white line)
between the solid C, M, Y colors and solid black, or overlap
against the solid black color may appear. Looking at the thin
K/C, K/M and K/Y lines, make adjustments so each make one
line by landing on top of each other. K (black) is stationary.
(2)
Click [Adjust] button to access to the dialog box screen.
(3)
For each C, M, Y color for each print heads 1 through 6 (1 is on the drive side and 6 is on the
operators side of the machine), if the color has to move one dot to the right against the K, input
[+1]. Input [-1] if the color has to move one dot to the left of the K. Input the required number
for each box on the display.
Click [OK] after desired numbers are filled in the boxes. Click [Cancel] to abort the adjustment.
(4)
* Clicking [OK] button will automatically load the new parameter setting into NVRAM on the ORIP PCB.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
7 - 90
After clicking the [OK] button above, the display returns back to the original display shown on the
previous page.
Click [Print] button on the original display to make a new print to check the result of the adjustment. If the result is not satisfactory, repeat the adjustment using the new printout as a guidance.
After the adjustment is completed, if wanted, click [Save] on the original display and save the
parameter setting in PC for future use. Omit this procedure if the data is not needed to be
saved in the PC.
On the original display, if the [Load] button is clicked, past parameter data (if saved in PC) can
be selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Horizontal position adjustment, if
wanted.
manuals4you.com
Y (Vertical) Position Adjustment
(1)

Enlarged image of the print on the right.
If the setting is not good, the K,

K/C, K/M and K/Y thin lines do
not print in overlapped straight
horizontal lines. In that case, the
solid block prints may overlap or
have gap (white line) running in
horizontal direction.
Using the adjustment display,
adjust the vertical print position
of each print head, 1 though 6,
so all the heads print at same
vertical position, making straight
lines across the paper. The left
is head No.1 and far right is
head No.6.
The best way to adjust is to
choose the 3rd or 4th head and
align the thin K color lines in one
horizontal line first. Then adjust
the C, M and Y color thin lines to
overlap with the K color line.
(2)
(3)
Changing the parameter setting to larger number brings the print position down. Make the number smaller to raise the print position up.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
previous page.
saved in the PC.
be selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Vertical position adjustment, if
wanted.
7 - 91
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Print Head Overlap Adjustment

(1)
If the adjustment is not good, the overlap

print area between the print heads (total 5
places per color) becomes too much or too
less.
If the overlap is too much the color at the
overlap becomes too dark.
If the overlap is not enough, white vertical
line will appear on the printout.
Adjust the overlap area referring to the
printout.
(2)
(3)
Changing the parameter value to larger number will decrease the overlap. Making the number
small will increase the overlap.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
7 - 92
previous page.
saved in the PC.
be selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Print Head Overlap adjustment, if
wanted.
manuals4you.com
Print Head Density Adjustment
(1)
Click [K], [C], [M] and [Y] buttons. The image shown below will be printed out. The one shown
below is of K color as an example.
If the adjustment is not good, the print

density across the image is not constant.
Looking at the printout, adjust the print
head which does not match with the
other print heads in the print density.
If there are more than one print head
which needs to be adjusted for a color, it
is very difficult to make the adjustment by
this Manual Image Adjustment software.
In those cases, it is recommended that
Auto Image Adjustment software is used.
Use either of these two areas to make

the judgement.
(2)
(3)
Changing the parameter value to larger number will increase the darkness. Make the number
smaller to decrease the darkness.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
previous page.
Click [K], [C], [M] and [Y] buttons on the original display to make new prints to check the result of
the adjustment. If the result is not satisfactory, repeat the adjustment using the new printouts
as guidance.
saved in the PC.
be selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Print Head Density adjustment, if
wanted.
7 - 93
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Closing the Manual Image Adjustment Software

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
7 - 94
Before ending the Manual Image Adjustment software by clicking the [Exit] button, click the
[Sample Print and select SE_PatternA3_2A from the sample test pattern folder containing
many test image patterns, and make print.
Checking the printed out test pattern image confirm that the image is good.
If the print result of the test pattern print is not good, repeat the Manual Image Adjustment or if
judged not good enough to make the correction by the Manual Image Adjustment, do the Auto
Image Adjustment.
To end the Manual Image Adjustment software, click the [Exit] button.
After above display is closed, the new display shown below is displayed.
The display instructs to perform Test Mode menu [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.].
Perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to download the backup data onto the PRIP PCB
if the Manual Adjustment went well.
If the adjustment did not go well, do not perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.]
Click [OK] to close above display.
manuals4you.com
2 . A d j u s t m e n ts o n t h e C l e a n i n g U n i t .
This adjustment may become necessary if the cleaning heads on the cleaning unit are not cleaning
the print heads correctly due to incorrect parameter settings of the cleaning head positions during the
print head cleaning.
Make visual check of the present distances by operating Normal Cleaning.
If the distances are out of the setting as specified on the sketch below, that could be the cause for the
improper head cleaning. In that case, make the required adjustment.
* There are total of three adjustments.
(1)
(2)
The three adjustments should be made in one set, in the given order.
After all three adjustments are completed, activate SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to copy
the new parameter settings saved in the NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB as backup data.
2-1. Cle aning start position

Refer to the following sketch and make an adjustment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remove the center inner cover and plug two connector jigs into the connector plug.
Turn ON the machine power.
Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.2 Nozzle Suck Pos.] and input the parameter setting of
13.0mm and enter.
Activate 5.5.5 (Normal Cleaning), and while standing on the operators side of the machine,
watch and confirm that the most front rubber Wiper Blade is 0.5mm to 1.0mm away from the
Print Head for each color (K,C,M,Y) when the cleaning starts.
If the measurement is not within 0.5mm to 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.2
* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.2 decreases the distance, and decreasing the parameter setting increases the distance.
* If the wiper blade is too much away (too much space), the cleaning head will miss the print head
when the cleaning unit is raised. If that happens, the cleaning head will break off from the cleaning
unit when the leading edge of the cleaning head hits the print head at the start of the cleaning action.
This will damage both the cleaning unit and print head.
* The adjustment value is same for both HC5500 and HC5000 on this adjustment.
7 - 95
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2.Clea ning position

Refer to the following photograph and make an adjustment.
HC5500
1.0 to 1.5 mm
HC5000
1.0 mm
The photograph shows the cleaning head before

touching the print head, so 1.0mm to 1.5mm space
cannot be seen. But when the cleaning head
touches the print head for the cleaning action,
there should be 1.0mm to 1.5mm space.
* The space is 1.0mm for HC5000.
Plastic bracket
Plastic shaft on the cleaning head
(1)
(2)
(3)
Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.5 Cleaning Position] and make the parameter setting to
0.0mm and enter. (For HC5000, make the parameter setting to 0.5mm and enter.)
watch and confirm that during the head cleaning action, the space between the plastic bracket
and the shaft of the cleaning head is between 1.0mm and 1.5mm
* The space should be 1.0mm for HC5000.
(4)
If the measurement is not approximately 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.5
* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.5 increases the space, and decreasing the parameter
setting decreases the space.
* If the space is too little, the wiper blade will not wipe the ink off the print head nozzle surface properly
and causes misfires or cause ink blot to appear on the prints.
* If the space is too much, the cleaning head is pushing against the print head too strong and may
damage the print head. The cleaning head may break off from the cleaning unit.
7 - 96
manuals4you.com
2-3. Cle aning fin ish p osition

Refer to the following sketch and make an adjustment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The first two adjustments on the cleaning unit, described on the previous two pages, must be
completed before doing this adjustment.
Turn ON the machine power.
Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.3 Nozzle End Pos.] and input the parameter setting of
88.5mm and enter. (For HC5000, input the parameter setting of 86.0mm and enter.)
watch and confirm that the rubber Wiper Blade is about 1.0mm away from the Print Head for
each color (K,C,M,Y) when the cleaning movement finishes.
If the measurement is not about 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.3
* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.3 increases the distance, and decreasing the parameter setting decreases the distance.
7 - 97
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
7 - 98
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
manuals4you.com
Tro u b l e s h o ot i ng
CHAPTER 8: Tr oubleshooting
CONTENTS
8-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Tr oubleshooting for printing problems

1 . C a u s e s o f m a i n p r i n t i n g p r o b l e m s a n d c o r r e c t i v e m e asures
1-1.Procedure for res pondi ng to printing pro blems
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Check that the SE mode settings, mechanical settings and printer driver settings match with the
media which causes the error.
Check whether the operating condition is within the specification.
Activate SE mode, select the test pattern and printing mode necessary to examine the problem,
and output the test pattern.
If necessary, output the user data and other test charts brought with you.
Take corrective measures by referring to the following troubleshooting chart.
Refer to the contents of the technical manual for troubleshooting the misfire (MF).
Image problem
Printing fails, large nonprinted area
White streaks
8-2
Cause
Corrective measure
Print head tubes are bent, preventing supply of ink.
Correct the bent tubes.
Head joint (sealing valve) is closed,

preventing supply of ink.
Open the ink valve (sealing valve).
There is a problem in the print

heads.
Replace the print heads.
Three is a problem in the Head

driver PCB or ORIP PCB.
Check and correct the connections for all

connectors of the PCBs indicated to the
left.
Replace the PCBs indicated to the left.
Defective vacuum operation due to

disconnected suction tube (head
maintenance not possible)
Correct the disconnected or bent tube of

the suction pump or suction chamber.
Ink problems
Replace the ink if it appears defective.

Since degraded ink remaining in the ink
passages may cause problems, replace
the main ink passage components, if necessary.
Defective Controller(PS7R)
Correct the Controller(PS7R) problem.
The print heads do not eject ink correctly.

Infrequently generated white streaks
that can be eliminated by head
maintenance is regarded as part of
normal machine operations. It is not
possible to completely eliminate in
the inkjet system.
If the problem is due to misfire/non-perpendicular ejection, perform a normal

cleaning.
If the normal cleaning does not correct the
problem, select the misfiring color, and
perform a thorough cleaning.
Clean the ejection nozzles using a wipe
stick.
Replace the print heads.
The conditions of the operating environment are unsuitable.
Confirm that room temperature and

humidity are within the permissible
ranges.
10 to 30 degrees Celsius 40% to 70% RH
Ink problems

manuals4you.com
Image problem
The printed color is too
dark, or the ink runs.
The color is too light or

uneven.
Vertical lines are not

straight.
Horizontal lines are not

straight.
Printing irregularities
Cause
Corrective measure
Paper with low ink absorption is

used in a print mode involving a
large number of drops.
Use the appropriate media/print mode.
Prints are made on the wrong side of

the paper, due to incorrectly set
paper (especially when using coated
paper).
Set the paper correctly.
The paper being used is unsuitable.
The print density setting is too high.
Reduce print density.
Ink problems

The paper being used is unsuitable.
The conditions of the operating environment are unsuitable.
Confirm that room temperature and

humidity are within the permissible
ranges.
10 to 30 degrees Celsius 40% to 70% RH
Paper (such as coated paper) with a

high ink absorption rate is used in a
print mode that produces a small
number of drops.
Set the print mode suitable for the type of

paper in use.
The print density setting is too low.
Increase print density.
Ink problems

Incorrect adjustment
Perform image adjustment.

(For more information, refer to section 2 in
this chapter.)
Transfer belt skew
Adjust the belt tension.

Replace the transfer belt.
Replace the transfer unit.
Machine alignment is slightly distorted due to an uneven installation

surface.
Adjust the adjustment screw on the front

side.
Set up the machine on a flat surface, and
perform image adjustment if necessary.

this chapter.)
Defective belt encoder (located

inside the transfer belt unit)
Correct installation conditions for the belt

encoder.
Replace the belt encoder.

this chapter.)
Analog ink remains in the ink passage.
Perform a thorough cleaning.

Replace the reservoirs.
Replace the ID units.
Ink problems

8-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Image problem
Color mismatching/abnormalities
Contaminated printed surfaces (in single-side printing)
8-4
Cause
Corrective measure
Printing results differ from the colors

displayed on the monitor.
Due to differences between the RGB and

CMYK color systems, printed colors may
not be identical to the colors displayed on
the monitor. Adjust the application and
RIP settings to achieve optimum color
matching.
Analog ink remains in the ink passage.
Perform a thorough cleaning.

Replace the reservoirs.
Replace the ID units.
Ink problems

Contaminated paper transport path

for single-side printing.
Contaminated registration rollers Clean

Contaminated cleaning roller (periodic
replacement after 250,000 prints) -
manuals4you.com
2.Explanation of automatic image adjustment and adjusted

image quality
2-1. Overv iew of auto matic image adju stmen t
Automatic image adjustment for the printer involves scanning of the test pattern printed by the printer
using the image adjustment software and a scanner, and adjustment of parameters based on the
results of automatic measurement of the images. Through this process, the printer determines and
sets the optimum parameters automatically.
Of the image adjustment items, only the head angles need to be set manually. Except for the following two items, image adjustment items are automatically set by the printer by exchange of information
with the image adjustment software.
When print heads are replaced during maintenance, the parameters for the recommended head drive
voltage and head drive AL must be changed before head angle adjustment. These two items must be
set manually on the Control panel and saved.
* For information on the image adjustment method, refer to [Adjustment after print head replacement] in [Ink
supply passages].
2-2. Overv iew of test patt erns fo r i m age adjustment

Use the following test patterns for automatic measurement and setting of parameters.
(1)
Scanner calibration test chart

Compensating for geometrical distortion of the scanner
(2)
Coarse adjustment pattern

Head angle parameter
Print timing of two heads in each print head
(3)
Density adjustment pattern

Recommended drive voltage correction
(4)
Fine adjustment pattern

Print timing of print head
Overlap amount
Top edge registration
Execution of fine adjustment of relative positions of colors and other settings
2-3. Parameters and image quali ty

Described below are the characteristics of image affected by parameter settings. If the image defects
described in a later section appear, the parameter settings may be unsuitable for the printer conditions. If so, repeating automatic image adjustment will correct the problem. The original device conditions will tend to drift over time, and automatic image adjustment may need to be repeated.
If the characteristics of the actual image differs from those described, image quality will not improve
even if automatic adjustment is performed. This is because such defective image conditions arise
from the mechanical instability of the paper transport system or other factors rather than parameter
settings. In these cases, you must locate and correct the cause of the problem.
8-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Image defects caused by defective parameter settings are characterized by uniform deviation of dots.
On the other hand, mechanical defects result in irregular and uneven deviations. The occurrence of
the defect will also be unpredictable.
2-4.I mage defec ts ca used b y erro neous image adju stmen t perfo rmed by
service personn el
< H e a d d ri v e p a r a m e t e r 1 >
Paper transport direction
Applicable print head width
1) Voltage: After replacing a print head, enter the recommended drive voltage printed on the
new print head. If this recommended parameter value is not entered, image defects may
occur due to incorrect drive parameters (menus [8.5.1.1], [8.5.1.3]).
2) Characteristic of image defects: Image defects appear as a continuous difference in lateral
print head density. See the above diagram.
3) Corrective measure: Check the voltage value and AL type settings on the Control panel
(service mode) to see if they correspond to the values indicated on the label. If not, enter
the correct values according to the procedure described in [Adjustment after print head
replacement, 1-1Parameter setting]. Then perform image adjustment.
* Changing voltage values affects print timing. Be sure to perform image adjustment and to correct
other parameters.
8-6
manuals4you.com
< Head drive parameter 2 >
1) AL type: After replacing a print head, enter the recommended head drive AL type printed
on the new print head. If this recommended parameter value is not entered, image defects
may occur due to an incorrect defective drive parameter. (8.5.1.3)
2) Characteristic of image defects: When the printed image is positioned so that the paper
transport direction is vertical, as wide as the print head (see the left diagram), continuous
vertical print density differences are visible or misfires are seen due to ink ejection problems for the replaced head (see the right diagram).
3) Corrective measure: Check the AL type setting in the service mode on the Control panel to
see if it corresponds to the type indicated on the label. If not, enter the correct type according to the procedure described in [Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-1Parameter
setting]. Then perform image adjustment.
* Changes in the AL type will affect print timing. Be sure to perform image adjustment and correct other
parameters.
8-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< Defective head angle adjustment >

1) Head angle adjustment: After replacing a head, perform head angle adjustment.Refer to
[Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-5 Execution of image adjustment]. If this manual setting of the head angle is performed incorrectly, image defects may arise.
2) Characteristic of image defects due to defective head angle adjustment
horizontal single-color lines
1. Deviation of
Deviation of horizontal singlecolor lines
Example of defective printing

caused by misaligned K head
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, the
defect appears in the horizontal lines of a single color. An abnormality is seen in horizontal
lines of a single color of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defective head. The horizontal lines of
a single color printed by the misaligned head are slightly displaced. If there is more than
one misaligned head, the horizontal lines of a single color will appear irregular. This defect
is produced continuously from the top of the page to the bottom. This defect appears in
every print. See the above diagram.
3) Characteristic of image defects due to defective head angle adjustment 2. Deviation of
horizontal multiple-color lines
Deviation of horizontal multiple-color lines
Example of defective printing

caused by misaligned K head
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, the
defect appears in horizontal multiple-color lines. Multicolor horizontal lines show a color
shift within the width of the misaligned head. This defect is produced continuously from the
8-8
manuals4you.com
top of the page to the bottom within the width of the applicable head. In some images, the
defect appears cyclically. This defect appears in every print. See the above diagram.
4) Corrective measure: Perform image adjustment, referring to [Adjustment after print head
replacement, 1-5 Execution of image adjustment].
2-5. Effects of para meters an d ima ge ch arac teristic s

Described below are image characteristics and the parameters that affect them. Note that defects
caused by parameters tend to generate uniform symptoms (such as constant deviations).
In the case of deviation of vertical multiple-color lines, for example, if the amounts of K and C deviations are uniform from the top to the bottom, the defect is due to improper parameters. This defect
can be corrected by repeating image adjustment.
If the extent of the deviation gradually increases farther down the printed page, the defect is most
likely due to a paper transport problem such as paper skew. If so, remove the cause of the paper
skew.
< P r i n t d e n s i t y d i f f e r e n c e s a mo n g s i n g l e - c o l o r h e a d s
Characteristics
Differences in print density with the adjacent head occurs within the head width. The density difference is continuous in the paper transport direction within the width of the print
head.
Parameters that may lead to this problem
The recommended drive voltage (Voltage) entered is incorrect or inappropriate.
The recommended AL type entered is incorrect or inappropriate.
Corrective measure
Check the recommended drive voltage (Voltage) on the Control panel and correct the setting.
Check the recommended AL type on the Control panel and correct the setting.
8-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Perform image adjustment, referring to [Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-5 Execution of image adjustment].
Replace the defective print head (determine the defective print head by checking the color
and position).
< F r e qu e n t m i s f i r e s o f c e r t a i n p ri n t h e a d s
Characteristics
Certain print heads cause frequent misfires.
The recommended AL type entered is incorrect or inappropriate.
The print head is incorrect.
Corrective measure
Check the recommended AL type on the Control panel and correct the setting.
and position).
8 - 10
manuals4you.com
< Deviation of horizontal single-color lines >
Deviation of horizontal single-color lines
Characteristics
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, a
defect is visible in the horizontal lines of a single color of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defective head. The horizontal single-color lines printed by the misaligned head are slightly displaced. This defect is produced continuously from the top of the page to the bottom and
appears in every print.
Defective head angle adjustment or deviation of adjustment
The vertical position parameter setting of the defective head on the Control panel does not
match printer conditions.
Corrective measure
and position).
8 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< D e v i a t i o n o f d o t s o n s i n g l e - c o l o r h o r i zo n t a l l i n e s
Deviation of horizontal single-color lines
Characteristics
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, a
defect is visible in the horizontal single-color lines of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defective
head. When observed under a magnifying glass, the single-color horizontal lines printed by
the defective head consist of separate, distinguishable dots.
Defective print timing in the paper transport direction
The ink ejection timing parameters for the two heads in the defective head are incorrect.
Corrective measure
and position).
8 - 12
manuals4you.com
< Deviation of horizontal multiple-color lines
Deviation of horizontal multiplecolor lines
Characteristics
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, there
is a 1-PEL multiple-color shift in horizontal lines composed of two colors from K, C, M, and
Y. This appears as a color irregularity in multiple-color horizontal lines.
When observed under a magnifying glass, the multiple-color horizontal lines printed by the
defective heads show displaced dots. This color shift occurs uniformly within the width of
the print head.
Defective head angle adjustment or deviation of adjustment
Defective print timing in the paper transport direction. The vertical position parameter setting of the defective head on the Control panel does not match printer conditions.
Corrective measure
and position).
8 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
< Deviation of vertical multiple-color lines

Deviation of vertical multiple-color lines
Characteristics
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, there
is a 1-PEL multiple-color shift in vertical lines composed of two colors from K, C, M, and Y.
This appears as a color irregularity in multiple-color vertical lines.
When observed under a magnifying glass, the multiple-color vertical lines printed by the
defective heads show displaced dots. This color shift occurs uniformly within the width of
the print head.
Lateral print timing problems relative to the paper transport direction. The horizontal position parameter setting of the defective head on the Control panel does not match printer
conditions.
Corrective measure
and position).
8 - 14
manuals4you.com
< V i s i b l e p ri n t d e n s i t y d i s c o n t i n u i t i e s a t h e a d j o i n t s i n h a l f - t o n e p ri n t i n g
Several types of
multiple-color half-tones
Characteristics
When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, print
density discontinuities are visible at the head joints in half-tone printing.
Vertical lines may have higher or lower density compared to surrounding areas. The defect
also appears as vertical white streaks.
An overlap occurs at the joint between two adjacent heads. Image adjustment performs
image processing to make this overlapping section less conspicuous. The overlap parameter does not match printer conditions.
Corrective measure
Replace one of the problem-causing print heads (determine the defective print head by
checking the color and position).
8 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
8 - 16
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
manuals4you.com
CHAPTER 9: Paper receiving section

CONTENTS
9-1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanisms
1.Basic mechanism
1-1.Ove rvi ew of m echani sm
After printing, paper is discharged into the V-shaped exit tray. The paper exit section features the following mechanisms for the neat stacking of discharged sheets.
Paper receiving tray fence
Two side fences and one end fence aligns the papers on the paper receiving tray.
These three paper fences feature an automatic slide function to adjust their positions to match
the size of the paper in use.
The cushion on the end fence keeps discharged paper from bouncing back. The cushion plate is
manually adjustable on is vertical position on the end fence.
Paper-settling flaps
The side fences are provided with a total of four paper setting flaps. These flaps move slightly
due to the weight of discharged paper, giving the paper a slight upward curl so that they stack
neatly in the exit tray.
The paper-settling flaps can be stowed away by pulling the flap knobs up.
Paper fence HP button
Pressing the paper fence HP button moves the exit paper fences to their preset positions.
If there is no printed paper in the paper receiving tray, the three fences retract to their stowage
positions. If printed paper is found in the tray, the stopper and guides move to the paper retrieving position set by user menu 4.8.4 (shifting guide).
The user menu 4.8.4 (shifting guide) allows the user to select either only the side fences to
move or only the end fence to move, or all three fence to move when the button is pressed.
The sensor checks whether any paper printed in the previous print job remains in the exit tray.
According to the sensor detection status, the fence position is determined at the start of new
printing job.
End fence cushion
Side fence
Paper stopper
Paper-settling flaps
Paper guides HP button
9-2
Paper-settling flap knob
manuals4you.com

Damper mechanism
Since the paper receiving tray is heavy, the tray support sections on both sides are provided
with dampers to open the tray slowly and minimize the impact when the tray is opened from the
stowed condition.
Damper
Paper guide base SW

The paper guide base switches are provided to detect the folded state of the three fences. The
fences slide only when all switches are activated (the fences are in upright condition).
If any one of the fence is folded, the switch disables the fence from sliding and error message is
displayed.
Paper guide base SW for the side fence
Plate
When the fence is in the upright
position, the switch is activated.
Plate
Paper guide base SW for the end fence
When the fence moves to the upright position, the white
plate descends and presses on the actuator plate, activating
the switch.
Actuator
9-3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2. Fence sliding mechanism

2-1.F ence slidi ng me chani sm
Side fence sliding mechanism
The following mechanisms are provided for side fence sliding operations.
1) Side fence pulse motor: Drive power for sliding operations.
2) Side fence HP sensor: Detects the widest opened position.
3) Side fence limit sensor: Detects the narrowest position. Prevents overruns due to malfunctions.
The two side fences are operated by linked gears and belts the synchronized movement.
Side fence on the machine drive side
Side fence on the operator side
Side fence HP sensor

Side fence limit sensor
Side fence pulse motor
9-4
manuals4you.com

Back stopper fence sliding mechanism
The following mechanisms are provided for the paper stopper sliding operation.
1) End fence pulse motor: Drive power for the sliding operation.
2) End fence HP sensor: Detects the widest position.
3) End fence limit sensor: Detects the narrowest position. Prevents overruns due to malfunctions.
End fence
(HC5000)
End fence limit sensor

End fence pulse motor
End HP sensor
9-5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2.Slid ing operatio ns at the begi nning of the pri nt o pera tion
B a s i c o pe ra t i o n s
The auto paper receiving tray section is electrically connected to the HC Control PCB on the
HC5000. The three fences move to the appropriate positions according to the paper size at the
beginning of a print operation.
First, all three fences slide to the widest position detected by the HP sensors.
The three fences then slides inward to accommodate the paper size detected by the paper
guide fences on the paper feed tray of the HC5000.
W h e n t h e re i s a p a p e r l e f t o n t h e r e c e i v in g t ra y a t s t a rt o f n e w p r i n t i n g j o b
If there is a paper still detected on the paper receiving tray from the last printing job at the start of
a new printing job, the fences on the paper receiving tray stays at present position if the paper
size detected for the new print job is equal or smaller in size than the last printing job. If the
paper size for the new print job is detected to be larger in size than the last printing job, the three
fences on the paper receiving tray are widened in position to receive the larger paper size for the
new print job.
W h e n u s i n g n o n s t a n d a rd - s i z e p a p e r
For nonstandard paper sizes (custom sized papers), the side fences on the paper receiving tray
slides to the paper width detected by the paper guides on the paper feed tray. The end fence on
the paper receiving tray stops either of the two positions - fully wide position or half-wide position.
W h e n u s i n g p o s t c a r d - s iz e p a p e r
For receiving postcard size papers, the end fence moves in first before the side fences to prevent the side fences from blocking the inward movement of the end fence.
2-3.Other
Fine adjustment of fence stop positions can be performed from the user menu.
When thin paper, standard, thick paper, or custom paper is selected in the paper information
setting, the fences stop at the preset positions for the each paper registered. (The positions
must be preset by the test mode 5.9.1.60 and 5.9.1.61 by the serviceman.)
If the machine fails to operate due to a problem in the auto paper receiving tray, the HC5000 still
can be operated by disconnecting the connecting cable between HC5000 and the receiving tray.
9-6
manuals4you.com
Disassembly
1.Paper receiving tray
1-1. Rem oving the paper receiv ing tray < d isasse mbly >
(1)
Disconnect the electrical cord between the tray and HC5000.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Remove one mounting screw each from the flanges on the damper units left and right.
Holding the paper receiving tray so that it does not fall, remove the flanges.
After the flanges are removed, the paper receiving tray can be lifted off from the machine.
Flange
9-7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2 . T h e pa r ts i n t h e pa p e r r e c e i v i n g t r a y
2-1.Remo ving of the si de fence b elt
(1)
(2)

Remove the bottom cover (seven M4x8 binding screws).
Bottom cover
< Re m o v a l >
(1)
(2)
(3)
Detach the idler spring and loosen the tensioner.

Remove the belt clamp (one M3x8 binding screw).
Detach the clip and flange from the pulley and remove the belt.

The two side fences are mechanically linked when they slide, so where the belt clamp is
attached during the assembly is important.
With the sliders of both fences moved all the way toward the center, place a mark on the belt to
indicate the installation position of the belt clamp, and then mount the belt clamp.
Idler spring
Belt clamp
Remove clip and flange from this pulley.
9-8
manuals4you.com
2-2. Rem oving the side fence pul se motor

(1)
(2)

< Removal >

(1)
(2)
(3)
Dismount the reuse band and disconnect the motor connector.

Detach the retaining ring and flange from the pulley and remove the pulley. (Be careful to avoid
dropping the pin located inside the pulley.)
Dismount the motor (three M4x8 RS-tight screws).
Detach this flange from the pulley
Reuse band
Connector
9-9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-3.Remo ving the e nd fence b elt

(1)
(2)

< Re m o v a l >
(1)
(2)
(3)
Detach the retaining ring and flange from the pulley and remove the end fence belt from the pulley.
Remove the belt clamp (one M3x8 binding screw).
Remove the end fence belt.
Remove clip and flange from this pulley.
Belt clamp
End fence belt
9 - 10
manuals4you.com
2-4. Rem oving the end fence pulse motor

(1)
(2)

< Removal >

(1)
(2)
Disconnect the paper detection sensor and end fence limit sensor together with the
bracket.(Two M4x8 RS-tight screws)
Dismount the reuse band and disconnect the connector to the pulse motor and remove the
pulse motor (three M4x8 RS-tight screws).
End fence pulse motor

Reuse band
Connector
Connector
9 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
MEMO
9 - 12
manuals4you.com
CHAPTER 10: Controller & power supply unit

CONTENTS
10 - 1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Specification
1.PS7R-9000
10 - 2
manuals4you.com
2.HC3R-5000
10 - 3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanism
1.Controller (PS7R-9000 & HC3R-5000)
1-1.F ron t pa nel o f th e con troller
Power SW
LEDs
This figure shows the front panel of PS7R9000.
T u r n i n g t h e p ow e r O N a n d O F F
* In the following articles, in HC5500, Soft-SW means the sleep key on the operation panel and the state
where Soft-SW is turned OFF means the sleep state.
When operating HC5500/HC5000, prevent the crash on the controller by not turning OFF the
main power switch of HC5500/HC5000 directly.
Turn the machine off by pressing the Soft-Switch on the operation panel first. Turning the
machine off by the Soft-Switch gives the signal to controller to shut down and let the software of
the controller to shut down in the correct way, like normal computers.
If the main power switch on HC5500/HC5000 needs to be turned OFF, turn off the machine
using the Soft-Switch first. After controller shuts down completely then turn OFF the main
power switch on the machine.
In normal operating condition of the machine, the power ON and OFF is done by the operators
using the Soft-Switch. The main power switch is normally left turned ON.
USB Dongle
The controller except HC3R-5000 has a USB Dongle which is a hardware key.
On HC5500, it is mounted inside the controller.
On HC5000, since it is connected to one of the USB ports on the back panel of the controller,
caution should be paid not to misplace the USB Dongle.
Installation location of the controller
Though the controller is installed outside the machine, under the paper receiving tray for
HC5500, it is installed within the multi-tray paper feed unit for model HC5000.
10 - 4
manuals4you.com

LEDs display
The controller allows the execution of a print job, use of the touch panel (option), scanning of an
original on the scanner (option), or updating of the firmware.
The controller is connected to the ORIP PCB on the main unit via a USB cable, to the touch
panel via a serial cable, and to the touch panel LCD via a VGA cable.
The status of the controller can be checked with the three LEDs located on its front panel.
ERROR
(red)
READY
(green)
DATA (yellow)
Power OFF
BIOS starting up
1
2
lit
lit
lit
blinking
blinking
blinking
blinking / x
blinking / x
blinking / x
lit
lit
blinking
lit
lit
lit
lit
x / lit / blinking
Controller error (RIP-related error)
blinking
lit
x / lit /blinking
Controller error (system-related error)
10
blinking
blinking
blinking
Test, Reset button pressed
11
blinking
blinking
Under farm upgrade
12
blinking
blinking
LINUX starting up/shutting down

RIP starting up (Three LEDs blink in order. )
In standby
RIP, WRAPPER in processing operation
Awaiting output
Under HCC check
If the controller does not start up, disconnect the two connectors from the hard disk drive, then
check to see if the BIOS starts up.
If the BIOS does not start up, replace the power supply unit or motherboard of the controller.
If the BIOS starts up normally, replace the hard disk drive.
<< Caution >>
The controller has a built-in hard disk drive. Do not disconnect the power cord or turn off the
main power supply when it is operating.
The hard disk drive is easily damaged by impact or vibration. Handle carefully during disassembly and reassembly. (Handle it as carefully as a PC.)
Handle the controller carefully, since it contains settings entered by the network administrator at
the customers site.
The controller uses a USB connection to the ORIP PCB. In normal operation, do not connect
ORIP PCB directly to a PC using this USB connection.
Before removing or reinstalling the memory module or other components within the controller,
ground yourself by touching the metal frame to prevent damages by the static electricity.
10 - 5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-2. Bac k pan el of the control ler
Power cable
RS232C cable
(touch panel LCD)
VGA cable(touch panel LCD)
USB cable
(Connection fo scanner and
ORIP PCB, and for firmware
downloading.)
UTP cable (LAN)
Power control cable
Test SW
< PS7R - 9000 >
< HC3R - 5000 >
Reset SW
Power cable
VGA cable(touch panel LCD)
Power control cable

UTP cable (LAN)
USB cable
(scanner, Firmware download)
No connection
10 - 6
USB Dongle
USB cable (ORIP PCB)
< PS7R for HC5000>
manuals4you.com

Switches on the rear of the controller
(1)
(2)
TEST switch
Keep pressing the TEST switch until a buzzer sound is heard will print out a system data
page and allow to see the system setting of the controller.
For this print to come out, the machine must be in Print Ready condtion. Press the print
button on the HC5000/HC5500 if the green LED is not lit.
The printout is equivallent to the one printed out by using 5.6.1. menu on HC5000/HC5500
operation panel.
RESET switch
By keep pressing the RESET switch for one second will clear the network setting to the
default condition. The three addresses will be initialized to 0.0.0.0
This new default
setting becomes effective once the controller power is turned OFF and turned back ON.
Also the scanner functions and touch-panel calibration will be initialized.
This RESET switch should not be pressed by mistake. Otherwise all the data, which are
initialized, need to be input again.
* By keep pressing the RESET switch for three seconds, there is a beep sound twice.
And then keep pressing the RESET switch for one second again, after that, HDD is initialized and it
will be in a factory - default state.
10 - 7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Disassembly
1.PS7R for HC5000
Removing PS7R from HC5000 and disassemby
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Perform the shutdown procedure on HC5000 by first pressing the Soft-Switch, and then the
main power switch after the PS7R shuts down, unplug the power cord from HC5000.
Remove the four screws and detach the right cover from the base of HC5000.
Detach controller support bracket from HC5000 by removing one screw.
Disconnect the power cord connected between the controller (PS7R) and the power supply unit
of HC5000.
Disconnect the UTP cable, USB dongle, USB cable (connected to ORIP PCB), USB cable (connected to scanner), VGA cable (touch panel LCD), and serial cable (touch panel) from PS7R
and remove the PS7R from HC5000.
D i s a s s e m b l y a n d r e a s s e m b l y o f c o n t r o l l e r ( PS 7 R )
(1)
(2)
Dismount the controller (PS7R).

Remove the two screws from the back panel and dismount the cover.
Removing the hard disk drive

Remove one screw, disconnect the two connectors, and dismount the hard disk drive. (Keep a record
of the serial number of the hard disk drive.)
10 - 8
manuals4you.com

R e m o v i n g t h e m e m o ry m o d u l e
After touching the frame to release static electricity, release the locks on both sides of the DIMM and
dismount the DIMM.
Removing the motherboard
Disconnect the DIMM, power supply connector, HDD connector, panel connector, speaker connector,
and case fan connector, then remove the six screws to dismount the motherboard.
2.PS7R-9000, PS7R-9000(G2) & HC3R-5000

Detaching PS7R-9000 from HC5000 and PS7R-9000(G2) or HC3R-5000 from
HC5500 & disassembly
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Perform the shutdown procedure on HC5000/HC5500 by first pressing the Soft-Switch, and then
the main power switch after the controller shuts down. Unplug the power cord from HC5000/
HC5500.
Disconnect the cables from the back panel of the controller.
Remove the two screws on the back panel of the controller and detach the cover.
Remove the CPU fan duct.
CPU fan duct
HDD cable
Motherboard
Power unit
HDD
DIMM
PCI SW PCB
( USB dongle)
10 - 9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
3.Power supply unit

(1)
(2)
(3)
Remove the rear right cover from the MTPF.

Remove the suction pump unit.
* Note: 3. Refer to the section on the suction pump unit.
(4)
Remove the cable clamps.

* Note: When removing the power supply unit, be careful of cable clamp interference.
Cable clamps
Suction pump unit
(5)
(6)
Disconnect the Power cable to the controller.

Disconnect the connectors as shown on the photographs bellow.
Connectors
Connector
(7)
Remove the screws (two M4x8 screws with washers on the rear, and four M4x8 screws with
washers on the side).
10 - 10
manuals4you.com
Power supply unit
Connector
M4x8 screws with washer
M4x8 screws with washer
(8)
Pull out the power supply unit from the machine.
10 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
MEMO
10 - 12
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
CHA PT E R 11: Te s t mo d e
11 - 1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Test mode (SE-Mode)

1.Operation method
1 -1 .Sta rtu p an d sh u t d o w n o f t h e T e s t m o d e
< S t a rt i n g m e t h o d >
(1)
(2)
(3)
In normal mode (Print mode turned OFF), press the Menu key, (Up) key, and Enter key simultaneously for three or more seconds to display the password input screen.
Enter the password.
Test mode is added to the menu to allow operations in Test mode.
The Normal mode and Test mode menus are active at the same time.
When Test mode is active, the normal menu can also be used to enter settings.
< Shutdown method >

(1)
(2)
Press the Menu key, (Up) key, and Enter key simultaneously for three or more seconds to display the password input screen.
If incorrect password is entered, the machine will close the Test mode and enter Normal mode
standby status (Print mode turned OFF).
1-2.Ope rations in T est m ode

< Test mode menu >
When Test mode is active, the following test items are added to the menu:
Menu 4 Configuration
Menu 5 Administration
Menu 8 Check/Setting/Adjustment
Menu 9 Test Pattern
Menu 12 (Menu No. input)
From the hierarchical menu, select and run a test item.
Menu 12 is a check no. input menu for direct selection of a test item. The No. of each hierarchical menu layer with test items is shown as a check no.
< Types of Test modes >
Test mode offers the following specific test types (modes).
11 - 2
Individual unit check mode

(Sensor and switch check)
This mode is used to check the ON/OFF status of

sensors and switches.
Buzzer activation is determined by the ON/OFF
status.
Individual unit check mode

(Motor and solenoid check)
This mode allows ON and OFF operation of an

individual unit such as a motor.
Group unit check mode
This mode activates operation for a group of units

(group unit operation).
Data check mode
This mode displays the values entered as data.
Settings mode
This mode enables changes in system status and

timing adjustments.
Values can be entered directly. However, note
that entered values are not checked for appropriateness, and that input of an incorrect value may
result in abnormal operations.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
2.List of menu items

2-1. Menu i tems in Normal SE mode
The following shows the menu items.
Items indicated against a color background in the table are added to the menu at the time of Test
mode startup.
Items indicated against a red background are data setting menu items used for adjustment.
Menu item
Type
1. Print Position Adj
2. Test Print
3. Temp Data Retrieve
4. Configuration
4.1 Standard Feed Tray
4.1.1 Paper Size
4.1.2 Paper Type
4.1.3 Double Feed Check

4.2 Feed Tray 1
4.2.1 Paper Size
4.2.2 Paper Type
(Multi-tray paper feed multiple feed)
Description
55 50
This function is used to adjust paper printing positions.
0 0
Positions can be adjusted up to 20.0 mm from the top, bottom,
right, and left margins in 0.5-mm increments.
This function outputs an image temporarily stored in the main
0 0
units memory.
The number of test print sheets does not affect the number of
pages to be printed set from the PC.
This function is used to retrieve temporarily stored data and to 0 0
set the number of pages to be printed in addition to the base
value.
This function is used to set the size of paper placed in the feed
tray.
Select auto, standard size paper, or paper size registered for
paper size.
The standard paper sizes are A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R and
postcard for the millimeter size selection. For inch size selection, they are Ledger, Legal, Letter and Statement.
This function is used to set the type of paper placed in the feed
tray.
(When the setting described in 5.8.14 is Japan mode):
Select from HC normal paper, HC matte-coated paper, normal
paper, post card (IJ), post card, one of the registered paper
types 1 to 5, envelope, card stock, card stock (IJ). [Post card
(IJ), post card, envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock are not
available for Trays 1 & 2.]
(When the setting described in 5.8.14 is overseas mode):
Select from ordinary paper 1, high quality paper 1, high quality
paper 2, one of the registered paper types 1 to 5, envelope,
card stock (IJ) and card stock. [Envelope, card stock (IJ) and
card stock are not available for Trays 1 & 2.]
This function is used to enable or disable multiple feed detection.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4.2.5 Dragged Feed Check

(Multi-tray paper feed dragged multiple feed)
4.3 Feed Tray 2

4.3.1 Paper Size
4.3.2 Paper Type
->4.1.1
->4.1.2
->4.1.3
Select the method of detection when [Multiple feed detection]
is turned ON in the function setting screen.
May be set to perform detection from first print (evaluation
based on absolute value of transmitted light) or from the second print (evaluation based on relative value (comparison with
previous print)).
Setting item: From 1st print/From second print (no detection
conducted for first sheet)
Default: From 2nd print
Normally, the multiple feed and dragged multiple feed functions
are turned ON/OFF in concert, but it is possible to enable only
the dragged multiple feed function. Dragged feed check can be
enabled or disabled when [No multiple feed detection] is set on
the panel of the main unit (printer).
Setting item: ON/OFF
Default: OFF
->4.1.1
->4.1.2
11 - 3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
4.3.4 Double Feed Check timing
4.3.5 Dragged Feed Check
4.4 Feed Tray Relay
Type
D
D
4.5 Triple-Tray Source
4.6 Job Separation
4.7 Print Density
4.8 Paper Ejection

4.8.1 Eject Wing
4.8.2 Stack Guide

4.8.3 Stack Guide Adjust
4.8.4 Shifting Guide
4.9 Temp Data Clear
4.10 Print area
4.11 Cover Sheet Tray Selection

4.11.1 Paper Size
4.11.2 Paper Type
5. Management Information
5.1 Paper Size Entry
5.1.1 Paper Size 1
5.1.2 Paper Size 2
5.1.3 Paper Size 3
5.1.4 Paper Size 4
5.1.5 Paper Size 5
5.2 Paper Type Entry
5.2.1 Paper Type 1
5.2.1.1 Registration
5.2.1.2 Paper Type
5.2.1.3 Paper Feed Control
5.2.2 Paper Type 2

5.2.3 Paper Type 3
5.2.4 Paper Type 4
5.2.5 Paper Type 5
11 - 4
Description
->4.1.3
->4.2.4
->4.2.5
When two or more feed trays contain paper of the same size
and same type positioned in the same feed direction, this function automatically switches feed trays for continuous printing.
When 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule is for [size and type], the
printing continues between the trays with the same size and
type papers.
When 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule is for [size] only, the printing continues between the trays with the same size papers.
HC5000 does not have menu 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule.
HC5000 is fixed with [size and type].
When the feed tray selection is set to auto, this setting is used
to include or exclude the standard paper feed tray as a paper
source.
This function inserts separation paper at each break in printing
(between jobs, booklets, or pages).
Allows manual adjustment of print density.
Print density can be adjusted to one of five levels.
55 50
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
This is used to set the exit wing position to auto or special.

The special position is set by service personnel using Test
mode No 4.8.1.
This is used to select the auto exit paper fence adjustment or
fine adjustment from the panel.
This is for fine adjustment of the exit paper fence terminal positions.
This allows selection of the exit paper fence terminal positions
when the exit paper open button is pressed.
This function deletes data remaining in the main units temporary memory after a print job is completed.
This function selects the margin around the printing paper to
3mm when Normal printing area is selected, and for Maximum
printing area selection, the margin is reduced to 1mm.
This function is to set the size of the paper for the Cover Sheet
Tray on the HC-Finisher.
This function is to set the type of the paper for the Cover Sheet
Tray on the HC-Finisher.
This function allows registration of nonstandard paper sizes as

Paper Size 1 to Paper Size 5 to allow such paper sizes to be
handled in the same way as standard size papers.
This function allows registration of selected paper as Paper

Type 1 by setting the paper type and paper feed parameters.
The following settings are made:
Paper type indication: ON/OFF
Paper type (when the setting described in 5.8.14 is Japan
mode):
HC normal paper, HC matte-coated paper, ordinary paper, post
card (IJ), post card, envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock.
Paper type (When the setting described in 5.8.14 is overseas
mode):
Normal paper 1, high quality paper 1, high quality paper 2,
envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock.
Paper feed setting: Standard, thick paper, thin paper, custom
paper, envelope, postcard, etc.
Envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock cannot be selected on
HC5000.
-> Same as 5.2.1
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
5.2.6 HC Ordinary Paper
5.2.7 HC Matte-coated Paper
5.2.8 Ordinary Paper
5.2.9 Post Card (IJ)
5.2.10 Post Card
5.2.11 Envelope
5.2.12 Card Stock
5.2.13 Card Stock (IJ)
5.2.21 Normal 1
5.2.22 High Quality 1
5.2.23 High quality 2
5.3 Separation Paper
Type
When 5.8.14 is selected to Overseas [same as 5.2.1, but for

paper feeding only.]
55 50
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 x
0 x
0 x
0 0
Specify the feed tray loaded with separation paper to be

inserted in print breaks.
This displays the number of copies printed of a single page

regardless of paper size or orientation. These copies are discharged to the exit tray.
In duplex printing, each side is counted as one copy.
This displays the number of printed sheets counted based on
preset conditions.
The print paper size, single-side/duplex printing, and color/
black-and-white are set as counting conditions. (28 different
combinations are possible.)
This function displays a maintenance call prompt on the panel
when the counter (adding counter) reaches a preset value (target value).
This function can be disabled by setting the target count to 0.
This is used to set the number of prints (Total Count) output by
the machine before a maintenance call prompt LED lights.
Setting range: 0 to 9999000 sheets
Input value: 0 to 9999
Setting increment: 1 (1000 sheets)
Default: 0 (0 sheet): No maintenance call indication.
This clears the indication (confirmation) of the current count for
a maintenance call prompt, and resets the counter to zero.
This displays the number of cleaning operations conducted for

each head.
This indicates the number of normal cleaning operations performed.

This indicates the number of cleaning operations for each
head.
C
C
C
C
C
This displays the counter indication for each feed tray.
Displays the ink drop total number for each head.
C
C
C
C
U
U
U
U
U
Press the Enter key to perform startup cleaning. (Yellow head

does one each of the start-up cleaning and flush-cleaning.)
5.5.1.5 KCMY does the cleaning 3 times on all 4 colors and at
the end one Flush Cleaning on Yellow head.
U
U
U
U
Press the Enter key to perform flush cleaning. (Yellow head

does the flush cleaning in the given times set by SE-Mode
[5.5.8 Flushing Times].)
5.4 Count Management

5.4.1 Copy Count
5.4.3 Count Pattern
5.4.4 Maintenance Count
5.4.4.1 Maintenance Count Entry

(Maintenance print count setting)
5.4.4.2 Maintenance Count Clear

(Clear maintenance count (print))
5.4.5 Head Cleaning Counter
5.4.5.1 Start-Up Cleaning
5.4.5.2 Hyper-Cleaning
5.4.5.3 Normal-Cleaning
5.4.5.4 Extra-Cleaning
5.4.5.5 Flush-Cleaning
5.4.5.6 Head Recovery
5.4.6 Tray Counter
5.4.6.1 Standard feed tray
5.4.6.2 Feed tray 1
5.4.6.3 Feed tray 2
5.4.6.4 Duplex
5.4.7 Head Drop Count
5.4.8 Finisher Count
5.4.8.1 Interposer roller
5.4.8.2 Stacker Sub-paddle
5.4.8.3 Stacker paddle
5.4.8.4 booklet paddle
5.5 Head Maintenance
5.5.1 Start-UP Cleaning
5.5.1.1 K
5.5.1.2 C
5.5.1.3 M
5.5.1.4 Y
5.5.1.5 KCMY
5.5.2 Flush Cleaning
5.5.2.1 K
5.5.2.2 C
5.5.2.3 M
5.5.2.4 Y
Description
-> Same as 5.2.1. However, only the Paper Feed Control setting is available.
C
C
C
C
C
C
11 - 5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
5.5.3 Extra Cleaning
5.5.3.1 K
5.5.3.2 C
5.5.3.3 M
5.5.3.4 Y
5.5.4 Hyper Cleaning
5.5.4.1 K
5.5.4.2 C
5.5.4.3 M
5.5.4.4 Y
5.5.5 Normal Cleaning
5.5.6 Cleaning Cycle
Type
U
U
U
U
5.5.7 Recovery Cleaning

5.5.7 Recovery Cleaning
5.5.7.1 8 Hours
5.5.7.2
24 Hours
5.5.7.3
7 Days
5.5.7.4
20 Days
5.5.7.5 Execute timing
5.5.8 Flushing Times
5.6 Config Info Print

5.6.1 System Information
5.6.2 Menu Settings

5.6.4 Count Pattern
11 - 6
Description
55 50
Press the Enter key to perform extra cleaning.
Press the Enter key to perform hyper cleaning.
The normal cleaning operation is designed to prevent misfires

in the ink heads. Normal cleaning can be programmed to activate automatically after a preset number of prints have been
output.
The heads of all four colors are cleaned at one time in this
mode.
According to neglect time, automatic cleaning is performed
before a printing start.
1 Normal cleaning is automatically made after 24 hours has

passed from the previous head cleaning.
The timing for the head cleaning is according to the selection
made by Menu No. 5.5.7.5 [Execute timing].
Selection : ON / OFF
Default : ON
1 Normal cleaning is automatically made after 24 hours has
Default : ON
3 Normal cleaning are automatically made after 7 days has
Default : ON
1 Strong cleaning is automatically made for each color, and 1
Flush cleaning for Y color us made after 20 days has passed
from the previous head cleaning.
The strong cleaning counter (KCMY) and flush cleaning
counter (Y) are renewed.
Default : ON
Recovery cleaning execute timing is set.
Selection : At the start of printing / When turned back ON from
sleep.
Default : When turned back ON from sleep.
Sets the number of times the flush cleaning is performed.
One flush cleaning is 30 sec.
Setting values: 1 to 3 times
Default: 2 times
0
0
x
x
This function outputs the controller (PS7R) settings in list form.

The list can be used as a test print to determine whether the
machine operates normally after settings in the main machine
have been changed.
Prints out the user menu settings.
The following counts are printed out.
Detailed count lists.
Finisher function count list
Head cleaning count list
Count list for the maintenance.
0
0
x
x
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
5.6.5 SE Config Print
5.6.6 Charge Management
5.7 Network Config
Type
Description
55 50
U Following SE-Mode lists are printed out with the parameter set0 x
ting information for each SE-Mode number. All SE-Modes,
including those not changed (default setting) are also printed out.
For those not changed from the default setting, [NO CHANGE] is
indicated.
Parameter setting SE-Modes.
SE-Modes with selectable default settings.
U Selects whether the charge count is displayed on the menu.
0 x
selection ON (displays) / OFF (does not display)
Default : OFF (does not display)
This function is used to set and register the DHCP, IP address, 0 0
subnet mask, and default Flipper gateway.
After registration, reset power to enter the set values into the
controller.
Use the PC for settings other than the above network settings.
5.8 Initial Setting

5.8.1 Sleep
5.8.2 Waiting Time
5.8.3 Beep Sound Key
5.8.4 Beep Sound -Status
5.8.5 Beep Sound Error

5.8.6 TempData Retention
5.8.7 Displayed Language
5.8.8 Metric/Inch Switch
5.8.10 Date/Time 2
5.8.11Page Count
5.8.12 FULL-tank Display
5.8.13 Ink Temp Adjust

(HC5500: While in Standby mode)
(HC5000: While in Sleep mode)
5.8.14 Paper Type Switch over
5.8.16 Serial No.(RISO)

5.8.17 Tray Selection Rule
This is used to turn the sleep function ON or OFF.

This function is used to set the sleep activation time. (01 to 99
min.)
This is used to turn ON or OFF the buzzer function that produces a beep when a key input is detected.
This is used to turn ON or OFF the machine status buzzer
function that produces a beep when a job is generated or an
operation is completed.
This is used to turn the error buzzer ON or OFF.
This is used to see the setting made on the Console whether to
retain or purge the data for the last print job held in temporary
memory when the job is complete.
The setting can be changed via Console.
This is used to change the display language.
Select a display language from seven choices: Japanese, British English, American English, French, German, Italian, and
Spanish. Test mode indications are displayed only in Japanese
or English.
This is used to switch the measurement unit (mm/inch) displayed on the panel.
Only mm is shown for Test mode.
This is used to see the setting made on the Console for the calendar year, date, and time registered on the machine. The data is
used as a time stamp in the error log and the information stored
in ink tags.
Values: year, month, date (YY/MM/DD), time (HH:MM)
The Date/Time setting can be changed via Console.
This toggles the print counter between additive and subtractive
modes during normal printing operation.
Setting: Subtracting counter/adding counter
Default: Adding counter
This is used to set a cleaning tank overflow error as a service
error or user error.
Setting item: Service error/user error
Default: Service error
Switches ON/OFF for ink temperature adjustment in Standby
mode on HC5500 and in Sleep mode for HC5000.
Setting item: ON/OFF
Default: OFF
Paper type category can be selected from among the Japan
mode, overseas mode, and a mode combining settings from the
both modes. (The machine should be restarted after changing the
setting.)
If the paper type selected is not available from the specified
paper type category, the default paper type is selected.
Setting items: Japan mode / overseas mode / all
Default: Japan mode for Japanese specification model
Confirms the serial No.
Sets the rule for the auto-tray selection.
Selection : Size only / Size and Type.
Default : Size and Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
11 - 7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
5.8.18 Print Mode Auto-ON
Type
5.8.19 Print Mode Auto-ON Time
5.8.20 Menu Auto Shut OFF
5.8.21 Menu Auto Shut OFF Time
5.8.22 Stand-by
5.8.23 Stand-by Period
5.8.24 BP Idle Time
5.8.25 Paper Ejection Wing HP Return

Time
5.8.26 Envelope Margin
5.8.50 Head Recovery

5.9 Paper Feed Setting
5.9.1 Standard
5.9.1.1 SPFT Upper Limit
11 - 8
5.9.1.2 SPFT Postfeed
5.9.1.3 SPFT Prefeed
Description
Selection to enable or disable the automatic ON of the print
mode.
Selection : ON (enable) / OFF (disable)
Default : ON
Sets the time to automatically ON the print mode.
Selection : 1 to 60 minutes
Default : 5 Minutes
Selection to enable or disable the automatic switching of the
Menu display to the Print mode [OFF] status.
Default : ON
Sets the time to automatically switch the Menu display to the Print
mode [OFF] display.
Default : 5 Minutes
Selection of whether to turn the machine to Stand-by mode after
the set time the machine is not in use with power turned ON.
Default : ON
Sets the time to automatically switch the machine to the Sand-by
mode.
Default : 5 Minutes
Sets the time for the Transfer unit to elevate down from the hanging (print) position.
Selection : 0.5 minute to 10 minutes
Range : In steps of 0.5 minute (30 seconds)
Default : 5 minutes
Selects the time for the ejection wings to return back to the HP
position.
Selection : 0 to 60 seconds
Range : In steps of 10 seconds
Default: 10 seconds
Sets the length of the envelope margin
Selection : 12 to 72 mm
Range : Insteps of 1 mm
Default : 42 mm
Head recovery is activated by the operator.
55 50
0 x
This is used to change the elevator upper limit position setting.

Setting range: Top/middle/bottom
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> Middle
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> Top
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> Middle
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> Bottom
Postcard -> Top
Envelope -> Middle
Adjusting the postfeed amount
Setting range: -20 to +20 mm
Setting increment: 1 mm
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mm
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mm
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mm
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mm
Postcard -> 0 mm
Envelope -> 0mm
Adjusting the feed start timing
Setting range: 0 to 40 mm
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> -5 mm
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> -5 mm
Postcard -> -5 mm
Envelope -> -5mm
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
5.9.1.4 SPFT Assist
5.9.1.5 SPFT Double Feed
5.9.1.10 Tray1 Postfeed
5.9.1.11 Tray1 Assist
5.9.1.20 Tray2 Postfeed
5.9.1.21 Tray2 Assist
5.9.1.30 Simplex Page Gap
Type
Description
D Adjusting the amount of assist
Default:
Postcard -> 4 mm
Envelope -> 0mm
D Switching multiple feed detection ON/OFF
Setting: ON (enables multiple feed detection)/OFF (disables
multiple feed detection)
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> ON
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> ON
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> ON
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> ON
Postcard -> ON
Envelope -> OFF
D Adjusting the postfeed amount. This item appears only if the standard paper feed tray is mounted on the base.
Default:
D Adjusting the amount of assist. This item appears only if the standard paper feed tray is mounted on the base.
Setting range: ON/OFF
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> ON
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
D Adjusting the postfeed amount. This item appears only if the standard paper feed tray is mounted on the base.
Default:
D Adjusting the amount of assist. This item appears only if the standard paper feed tray is mounted on the base.
Setting range: ON/OFF
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> OFF
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> OFF
D Adjusting the distance between paper (value at 7 drops)
Default:
Postcard -> 35 mm
Envelope -> 35mm
55 50
0 0
11 - 9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
5.9.1.31 Duplex Page Gap
Type
Description
D Adjusting the distance between paper (value at 7 drops)
Default:
Postcard -> 60 mm
D Adjusts the distance between the print head and the paper
* The envelope gap distance can be selected for envelope feeding only. The envelope feeding can have only the envelope gap.
Setting : Normal / Card
Default :
Standard (U1, U2) -> Normal
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> Card
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> Normal
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> Card
Postcard -> Card
Envelope -> Envelope (cannot change)
D Adjusting the distance between paper and heads
Setting increment: 0.1 mm
Default:
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 0.2 mm
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 1.0 mm
Postcard -> 0.2 mm
D Adjusting the speed ratio between registration rollers and belt
Setting range: 95 to +102%
Setting increment: 0.1%
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> 98.0%
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 100.0%
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 98.0%
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 100.8%
Postcard -> 100.0%
Envelope -> 100.0%
D If the print mode for 300-5 drops is selected by the PS7R controller while that for 300-7 has been specified, the 5 drop-image data
received from the PS7R are output at the paper feed speed for 7
drops.
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> 300-3
Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3
Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3
Postcard -> 300-3
Envelope -> 300-3
D Vertical print positioning adjustment (1)
Adjustment : -20 `+20mm
Range : In steps of 1mm
Default :
Postcard -> 0 mm
Envelope -> 0 mm
D Vertical print positioning adjustment (1)
Adjustment : -20 `+20mm
Range : In steps of 1mm
Default :
Postcard -> 0 mm
Envelope -> 0 mm
5.9.1.32 P-Head Gap
5.9.1.32 Head Gap
5.9.1.33 BP Speed Rate
5.9.1.34 Limited Max. Speed
5.9.1.36 Print Position 1
5.9.1.37 Print Position 2
11 - 10
55 50
0 0
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
5.9.1.40 Wing Offset
5.9.1.50 Re-feed Postfeed
5.9.1.51 Re-feed Assist
5.9.1.60 AS Side-fence Offset
5.9.1.61 AS End-fence Offset
5.9.1.70 Paper Selection
5.9.2 Thick Paper

5.9.3 Thin/Light
5.9.4 Custom
5.9.5 Standard U1
5.9.6 Thick Paper U1
5.9.7 Thin/Light U1
5.9.8 Custom U1
5.9.9 Standard U2
5.9.10 Thick Paper U2
5.9.11 Thin/Light U2
5.9.12 Custom U2
5.9.13 Card Stock
5.9.14 Envelope
Type
Description
D Adjusting the wings
Default:
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 0mm
Postcard -> 25 mm
Envelope -> 40mm
D Amount of re-feed postfeed
Setting range: -10 to 10 mm
Default:
Postcard -> 0 mm
D Amount of re-feed assist
Default:
Postcard -> 4 mm
D Amount of paper guide offset
Default:
Standard (U1, U2) -> -4 mm
Thin paper (U1, U2) -> -4 mm
Postcard -> 25 mm
Envelope -> 25mm
D Amount of paper stopper offset
Default:
Postcard -> 0 mm
Envelope -> 0mm
D Display/hide registered paper types (Standard U1, Standard U2,
...Custom U2) as options in [Paper feed setting].
Setting item: Display/Hide
Default: Hide
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
D Same as 5.9.1.
55 50
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
11 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
5.10 Firmware Revision
Type
C
5.11 History
5.11.1 Error Log
5.11.2 Set SW History
5.12 System Management

5.12.1 Initialize Unit
5.12.2 Error Clear
5.12.3 Clear User Area
5.12.4 Clear Test Mode Area
5.12.7 Factory Default
5.13 System Fitting

5.13.1 System Fitting
5.13.2 Cancel Fitting
5.13.3 Machine ID
6. Feed Tray Selection
7. Job Clear
8. Check/Setting/Adjustment
8.1 Drive Check
8.1.1 SPFT Unit
8.1.1.1 Elevator motor
8.1.1.2 Button LED
8.1.1.3 Servo Action
Description
Displays CPU version information.
P2IP:ORIP PCB (PLIP on HC5000)
P2MC:ORMC PCB (PLMC on HC5000)
PLPR: HC Control PCB
PTPL: FL Control PCB
NOPL: HC Finisher (Only the machine equipped with finisher)
55 50
0 0
5.11.1.1 to 64
Displays a list of errors (Type-S, X,W99,W44,W45) previously
generated in normal mode (64 max.).
Shows the date, error no., and total count.
5.11.2.1 to 10
Displays set SW errors (Type-Z) that halted operations.
(10 max.)
Shows the date, error no., and total count.
Conducts an HP reset for unit initialization mechanisms. (BP,

wings, maintenance, etc.)
Normally, when an error is generated, the cause of the error
must be eliminated by conducting the specified error reset procedure. This setting allows the user to override this requirement and reset internal parameters.
Clears the data (function/administrator settings, etc.) in the
user area. (Restores default values.)
Restores all settings entered in Test mode to their factory settings.
Set the Users area and Test mode area to the default setting.
Buzzer sounds if the setting is not at default condition.
The setting of menu [5.8.10 Date/Time 2] is not cleared.
The data of menu [5.6 Config Info Print] is cleared.
Turn OFF and turn ON the power. Unless the machine is
restarted, the actual setting in the controller differs from the
printout by menu [5.6 Config Info Print].
Checks the compatibility of [HC unit (MC PCB)] - [HC Control

0
PCB] - [Ink] in temporary entry and switches off the [Maintenance call] indication if they are found to be compatible.
Reset the confirmation of 5.13.1
0
Maintenance Call identification lights up if the test mode is activated while the machine is still tentatively registered.
Displays the machine type ID sent from the HC Control PCB.
0
0
0
Activates the elevator ascending/descending operation. Also

displays the ON (light path blocked)/OFF status of the lower
limit sensor and upper limit sensor A, B.
Pressing the right key raises the elevator in four steps. Pressing the left key lowers the elevator all the way to the lowermost
position.
Elevator button LED operation check
If the LED is not lit, pressing the right key turns it ON.
If the LED is lit, pressing the left key turns it OFF.
Activates the elevator servo.
This function is disabled when the standard paper feed tray is
empty.
When the system is not operating, press the right key to activate the servo. Press the right key once again to halt the operation.
8.1.2 MTF Feeder Unit
11 - 12
manuals4you.com
0
0
0
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
8.1.2.1 FL Transfer motor
8.1.2.2 Multi feed tray pickup motor
8.1.2.3 Feed tray 1 clutch
8.1.2.4 Feed tray 2 clutch
8.1.2.5 Transfer clutch 1
8.1.2.9 Nip release solenoid 12
8.1.2.10 Nip release solenoid 34
8.1.3 BP Unit
8.1.3.1 Transfer motor
Type
Description
M Checks the motor operations.
Pressing the right key activates the operation. Pressing the
right key once again halts the operation.
Checks the solenoid operation.

Pressing the right key starts the operation. The operation stops
automatically after one second.
U
8.1.3.2 Paper feed motor
8.1.3.3 Pickup clutch

8.1.3.4 Registration clutch
8.1.3.5 Registration brake CL
8.1.3.6 Registration roller operation
8.1.3.7 Registration roller nip
8.1.3.8 Blower fan 1

8.1.3.14 All blower fans
8.1.3.15 Gate solenoid
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.12)
8.1.3.16 Duplex path CL
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.13)
8.1.3.17 Duplex belt
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.14)
8.1.3.18 Switchback CL
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.15)
8.1.3.19 Switchback motor
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.16)
8.1.3.20 Re-feed clutch

(HC5000 : 8.1.3.17)
8.1.3.21 Re-feed brake
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.18)
8.1.3.22 Re-feed roller
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.19)
8.1.3.23 Exit motor

(HC5000 : 8.1.3.20)
55 50
0 0
Activates the blower fans and belt motor.

0
The right and left keys are used to adjust the speed.
(It can not be activated when the transfer unit is lower position.)
Displays speed converted from the belt motor-axis encoder
and belt encoder outputs.
Checks main motor operations.
0
Displays speed converted from the main motor encoder output.
Checks clutch operations.
0
Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressing
the right key once again halts the operation.
Activates the interlock function for the motor and clutch to turn 0
the registration rollers ON/OFF.
Motor speed: 300 to 7
Activates the interlock function for the motor and clutch to con- 0
trol the registration roller nip.
When nip condition and release condition cannot be detected,
both are displayed at all times.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Drives the duplex belt.

Setting display: OFF/600-7/600-6//300-3
When the system is not operating, pressing the left key activates the vacuum operation. Pressing the right key starts the
discharge operation.
Pressing the left key while the vacuum operation is underway
halts the process. When the machine is discharging, pressing
the right key halts the operation.
Activates the interlock function for the motor and clutch to turn
the re-feed roller ON/OFF. The motor speed is 300-7.
Displays the rotation speed.
0
0
0
x
x
x
0
0
11 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
8.1.3.24 Exit Wing
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.21)
8.1.3.25 DF Sensor Light Intensity

(HC5000 : 8.1.3.22)
8.1.3.26 Cleaning Fan 1
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.23)
8.1.3.27 Cleaning Fan 2
(HC5000 : 8.1.3.24)
8.1.4 Platen Elevation
8.1.4.1 Elevator clutch
8.1.4.2 Elevation operation
Type
Description
U When the exit wings are fully closed, pressing the right key
activates the extending operation. If they are fully extended,
pressing the left key activates the folding operation.
Displays the ON/OFF status of the wing HP sensor.
U Sets the light intensity for multiple feed detection.
Displays the DA value of the set light intensity.
Displays the sensor AD value.
M Checks the operations of the dust fan (main motor control
PCB).
M Checks the operations of the dust fan (MC PCB).
Elevator clutch (BP elevator clutch)

When the platen is at the lower limit position, pressing the right
key raises it to the upper limit position through three steps.
Displays the ON (light path blocked)/OFF status of the lower
limit, vacuum, and upper limit sensors.
This function is disabled when the ink pan is retracted.
BP spacer slides by the push of the left or right key to the HP,
Envelope, Card or Normal position.
Activates only when the Transfer unit is at the maximum UP or
maximum DOWN position.
0
0
0
0
When the ink pan is at the operating position, pressing the left
key retracts it. Pressing the right key moves it to the operating
position.
Displays the sensor status.
When the suction nozzle is at the home position, pressing the
right key moves it toward the back. Pressing the left key moves
it forward.
Displays the HP sensor status.
With the KCMY pressurizing valves open, when the pressure
pump is not operating, pressing the right key activates the
pump. The pump stops automatically after one revolution.
When the pump is operating, pressing the right key halts the
operation. (Continuous revolution is not possible.)
Operations of the reservoir pressurizing valve
When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it.
Pressing the right key once again closes it.
When the system is not operating, pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressing the right key once again
halts the operation.
Operations of the reservoir supplementary valve

Operable only when the ink cover is open.
When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it. The
valve closes automatically after 1 sec.
Operations of the reservoir air open valve

0
When the valve is open, pressing the right key closes it. Pressing the right key once again opens it.
Operations of the ID unit air open valve

When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it. The
valve closes automatically after 1 sec.
Operations of the ID unit heater

When the heater is not operating, pressing the right key activates it. Pressing the right key once again halts the operation.
Also displays the temperature.
When the system is not operating, pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressing the right key once again
halts the operation.
The right key moves the fences to their HP positions.

The left key moves the fences to their limit positions.
To exit, press the Cancel key.
M
U
8.1.4.3 BP Spacer
8.1.5 Head maintenance

8.1.5.1 Ink pan
8.1.5.2 Suction nozzle
8.1.5.3 Pressure pump
8.1.5.4 K Pressure valve

8.1.5.5 C Pressure valve
8.1.5.6 M Pressure valve
8.1.5.7 Y Pressure valve
8.1.5.8 Suction pump
8.1.6 Ink supply

8.1.6.2 K Supply valve
8.1.6.3 C Supply valve
8.1.6.4 M Supply valve
8.1.6.5 Y Supply valve
8.1.6.6 KRSV Air valve
8.1.6.7 CRSV Air valve
8.1.6.8 MRSV Air valve
8.1.6.9 YRSV Air valve
8.1.6.10 KDST Air valve
8.1.6.11 CDST Air valve
8.1.6.12 MDST Air valve
8.1.6.13 YDST Air valve
8.1.6.14 KCDST Heater
8.1.6.15 MYDST Heater
8.1.6.16 Cooling fan 1

8.1.6.17 Cooling fan 2
8.1.7 Auto fence

8.1.7.1 Paper guide
8.1.7.2 Paper stopper
11 - 14
55 50
0 0
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
8.1.7.3 AS1 Cycle
Type
Description
U The following operations are performed:
(1) Returns the exit fences to the HP.
(2) Returns the stopper to the HP.
(3) Moves the exit fences to the MIN positions and stops for 1
sec.
(4) Moves the exit fences to the HP.
(5) Moves the stopper to the MIN positions and stops for 1 sec.
(6) Returns the stopper to the HP.
8.1.8 Other
8.1.8.1 Paper counter
8.1.8.2 LCD operation
U
U
8.1.8.3 LED operation
8.1.8.4 Buzzer
8.2 Sensor monitor

8.2.1 Cover
8.2.1.1 Cover, front right/front left
8.2.1.2 Cover, switchback/flipper
8.2.1.3 Cover, ink cover/MTPF paper
feed (Jam release safety SW)
8.2.2 Standard paper feed tray
8.2.2.1 Limit SW, upper side/lower side
Each press of the right key increments the counter by one.

Pressing the right key turns on all the LCDs at certain intervals.
Pressing the right key once again turns off the LCDs.
Pressing the right key turns on all the LEDs at certain intervals.
Pressing the right key once again turns off the LEDs.
Pressing the right key activates the buzzer. Pressing the right
key once again stops the buzzer.
0
0
0
0
Displays the cover open/close status.

When open: OPEN, when closed: CLOSE
SW ON (elevator motor operable)

SW OFF for interlocked operation.
U-shaped sensors. Displays the status of each sensor.
Light axis blocked: ON
Displays the ON/OFF status of elevator SW.

Displays the status of the tray volume sensors A/B.
Light receiving condition: ON
Displays the status of the paper detection sensor and paper
size detection sensor (reflective sensor).
Light receiving condition (Turns ON when paper is present)
Displays the paper width A/D value.
Displays the automatically detected paper size.
Displays the status of the paper feed pressure sensor (Ushaped sensor).
Light axis blocked by thick paper: ON, standard: OFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Displays the status of each sensor. Turns ON when paper is

present.
Only feed sensor 3 is a transmission type sensor; it activates
(ON) when the light path is blocked. Other sensors are reflective, activating (ON) when they receive light.
Pressing Enter activates buzzer notification mode, and the
buzzer indicates the sensor ON/OFF status with an audible
buzzer signal. (ON: short beep, OFF: long beep)
Displays the sensor status of the FG sensor of the FL feed
motor.
U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.
Cover switch for the MTPF left cover.
SW ON (FL transfer motor operable)
SW OFF for interlocked operation.
Reflection type sensor. Light receiving condition (turns ON
when paper is present)
Displays 8-bit data (raw data) after A/D conversion of the
power width VR and paper width (mm) after correction of paper
width VR.
If the light path is blocked (by the detection plate), the sensor
turns ON.
The remaining paper volume is determined by the combination
of 1 and 2.
SW ON (Feed tray 1 is set)
8.2.2.2 Lower/Upper Limit Sensors 1, 2

Paper Feed Lower/Upper-limit Sensors
A, B
8.2.2.3 Elevator button
8.2.2.4 Remaining paper volume, upper
side/lower side
8.2.2.5 No paper, paper length
8.2.2.6 Paper width

8.2.2.7 Paper size
8.2.2.8 Paper feed lever
S
S
S
8.2.3 Front feeder

8.2.3.1 Feed sensor 1
8.2.3.2 Feed sensor2
8.2.3.5 Separation sensor
55 50
0 0
8.2.3.6 Feed FG sensor
8.2.3.7 Door safety SW
8.2.3.8 Feed tray 1Upper limit
8.2.3.9 Feed tray 1 paper detection

8.2.3.10 Feed tray 1 paper length
8.2.3.11 Feed tray 1 paper width
8.2.3.12 Feed tray 1 remaining paper volume 1

8.2.3.13 Feed tray 1remaining paper volume 2
8.2.3.14 Feed tray 1 set SW
11 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
Type
Description
55 50
8.2.3.15 Feed tray 2 upper limit
Same as 8.2.3.8 to 8.2.3.14
0 0
8.2.3.16 Feed tray 2 paper detection
8.2.3.17 Feed tray 2 paper length
8.2.3.18 Feed tray 2 paper width
8.2.3.21 Feed tray 2 set SW
8.2.3.22 cover SW
C Cover switch for the left front cover (SW on the right side. Jam 0 0
release safety SW for MTPF on the left side).
SW ON (cover is closed)
8.2.4 Paper feed path
8.2.4.1 Registration sensor
S Displays the status of each sensor. Turns ON when paper is
0 0
present.
8.2.4.2 Top edge sensor 1
0 0
The registration sensor and top edge sensor are transmission
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.2 Top edge sensor)
sensors. They turn ON when the light path is blocked.
8.2.4.3 Top edge sensor 2
0 x
The
paper emerge detection sensor is an U-shaped sensor.
8.2.4.4 Paper emerge detection sensor
0 0
They turn ON when the light path is blocked.
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.3)
Other sensors are reflective sensors. They turn ON when they
8.2.4.5 Exit sensor
0 0
receive light.
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.4)
Pressing Enter activates buzzer notification mode, and the
8.2.4.6 Flipper sensor
0 0
buzzer indicates the sensor ON/OFF status with an audible
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.5)
buzzer signal. (ON: short beep, OFF: long beep)
8.2.4.7 Duplex belt front sensor
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.6)
8.2.4.8 Duplex belt rear sensor
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.7)
8.2.4.9 Switchback sensor
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.8)
8.2.4.10 Pickup clutch
S Checks the status of the connector connection.
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.9)
Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF
8.2.4.11 registration/brake
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.10)
8.2.4.12 Fans 1, 2, 3
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.11 Fans 1,2,3,4)
8.2.4.13 Fans 4,5,6
0 x
8.2.4.14 Gate solenoid
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.12)
8.2.4.15 Switchback clutch
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.13)
8.2.4.16 Duplex path
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.14)
8.2.4.17 Re-feed/brake
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.15)
8.2.4.18 Cleaning fan 1
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.16)
8.2.4.19 Cleaning fan 2
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.17)
8.2.4.20 CCD (Edge)
C Displays the positional data for the paper edge detected by the 0 0
CCD. (Position of the CCD elements)
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.18)
8.2.4.21 CCD (A/D)
C Displays A/D values detected by the CCD.
0 0
(HC5000 : 8.2.4.19)
8.2.5 Exit wing unit
8.2.5.1 Wing home position
S Displays the sensor status.
0 0
8.2.5.2 Exit motor encoder
8.2.6 Belt platen
8.2.6.1 Platen position
8.2.6.2 Connector connection (elevation

clutch)
8.2.6.3 BP spacer
8.2.7 Head maintenance
8.2.7.1 Ink pan, right/left
8.2.7.2 Suction nozzle home position
8.2.7.3 Pressure pump home position
11 - 16
S
S
S
Displays the status of the lower limit, vacuum, and upper limit
sensors.
Checks the status of the connector connection.
Displays the status of the two sensor status: HP and Normal.

manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
8.2.7.4 Suction chamber (ink detection)
8.2.7.5 Overflow tank sensor
8.2.7.6 Waste fluid bottle, top/bottom
8.2.7.7 Chamber sensor
8.2.7.8 Connector connection (overflow
tank)
8.2.8 Ink supply
8.2.8.1 Ink bottle
Type
Description
S Displays the sensor status.
ON: Ink detected, OFF: No ink
S
S
S
55 50
0 0

Checks the status of the connector connection.
Checks whether RISO inks are set.

Simultaneous evaluation of four inks (KCMY).
ON: Compatible ink set, OFF: No ink or incompatible ink
Displays the ink passage sensor status.
Displays the reservoir ink sensor status (Hall element)
Simultaneous evaluation of four inks (KCMY).
Displays the ID unit ink sensor status. Simultaneous evaluation
of four inks (KCMY).
Displays the temperatures of the ID unit.
Checks conditions for two colors (KC or MY) at a time.
Checks the connection conditions of the reservoirs for the four
color inks (KCMY).
Checks the connection conditions of the ID units for two colors
(KC or MY) at a time.
Checks the connection conditions of the ID unit air open valves
for the four color inks (KCMY).
Checks the amount of remaining inks set in the machine.
Displays the amounts of remaining ink in the 1% unit.
Displayed ink volume: 100% to -50%
8.2.8.2 Ink supply passages
8.2.8.3 Reservoir ink
8.2.8.4 Distributor ink
8.2.8.5 Distributor temperature
8.2.8.6 Reservoir connection
8.2.8.7 Distributor connection
8.2.8.8 Distributor valve
8.2.8.9 Remaining ink volume
C
C
Displays the head temperature for each four blocks.

Checks the connection conditions of cooling fans 1 and 2.
0
0
0
0

Light axis blocked: ON
Displays the switch condition.

SW pressed: ON
Displays the sensor status. Reflective sensor.
Turns ON when light is received (paper detected).
S
S
Checks keys. Displays the name of the pressed key.

Checks the connection condition.
0
0
0
0
Checks the connection of options.

Pressing the right/left key displays the names of the connected
options in sequence.
Counts the shaft encoder clock count at speed of 300-7 for 5

seconds.
Compares the actual clock count and theoretical count and
stores the ratio as compensating data in NVRAM.
Compensating data is activated in the belt motor drive speed
during printing.
Used to set the main feed motor initial value in the % unit.
Setting range: 95% to 108%
Default: 100%
8.2.9 Head
8.2.9.1 - 8.2.9.12 Head temperature
8.2.9.14 Connector connection (cooling
fan)
8.2.10 Auto fence
8.2.10.1 Paper guide HP sensor
8.2.10.2 Paper guide limit sensor
8.2.10.3 Paper stopper limit sensor
8.2.10.4 Paper stopper HP sensor
8.2.10.5 Paper removing SW
8.2.10.6 Paper detection sensor
8.2.11 Others
8.2.11.1 Panel key
8.2.11.2 Connector connection (paper
counter)
8.2.11.3 Connector connection (CN PCB,
left)
8.2.11.4 Option connection
8.3 Motor speed adjustment

8.3.1 Belt motor speed adjustment
8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment
8.4 Paper width sensor adjustment, standard

paper feed tray
11 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
8.4.1 Standard paper feed tray
Type
Description
D Automatic adjustment of the paper width sensor
Set paper of A3 width (297 mm) and A6 width (105 mm), and
register the paper sizes.
D Automatic adjustment of the paper width sensor
Set paper of A3 width (297 mm) and B5 width (182 mm), and
register the paper sizes.
8.4.2 Feed tray 1

8.4.3 Feed tray 2
8.5 Image adjustment
8.5.1 Head adjustment
8.5.1.1.11 - 48 Power supply
8.5.1.2.1-48 Corrective power supply
8.5.1.3.1-48 AL type
8.5.1.4.1-4 Horizontal offset
8.5.1.5.1-20 Horizontal overlap
8.5.1.7.1-48 Vertical position
8.5.2 Side mask adjustment

8.5.2.1.1-8.5.2.1.8
Adjusting the CCD position
11 - 18
8.5.2.2.1-8.5.2.2.2
Adjusting the amount of mask
8.5.2.3 Side registration offset
8.5.2.4.1 CCD Gain Adjustment (left)
8.5.2.4.2 CCD Gain Adjustment (right)
8.5.2.5.1 CCD Offset Adjustment (left)
8.5.2.5.2 CCD Offset Adjustment (right)
55 50
0 0
Used to set the head drive voltage.

Setting range: 10.00 to 30.00 V
Setting increment: 0.1 V
Default: Set at the factory for each head.
Adjust the print density on each print head.
Setting range: 10.00 to 30.00 V
Setting increment: 0.1 V
Used to set the AL type (acoustic length).
Setting range: 0 to +5
Setting increment: 1
Used to set the horizontal offset for the CMY head with respect to
the K head.
Setting range: -1500 to +1500
Used to set the horizontal overlap for each head.
Setting range: 0 to +2000
Used to set the head vertical direction.
Setting range: -1000 to +1000
Used to adjust the detection position of the CCD sensor for the
paper side edge detection and the ink ejection position.
Default:
K Right -> 0.5, K Left -> 0.5
C Right -> 0.5, C Left -> 0.5
M Right -> 0.5, M Left -> 0.5
Y Right -> 0.5, Y Left -> 0.5
Adjusts the masking amount.
Setting range: 0 to 20.0 mm
Default: 0.5 mm
Adjusts the central positions of paper and image.
Setting range: -20.0 to 20.0 mm
Default: 0.0 mm
Adjusts gain of CCD output values.
Setting range: 0 to 255
Default: 55
Adjusts gain of CCD output values.
Default: 80
Offsets CCD output values.
Default: 0
Offsets CCD output values.
Default: 0
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
8.5.2.6.1 Image Center Adjustment
(Standard Feed Tray)

(Tray 1)

(Tray 2)
8.5.2.7.1 Image Mask Adj. LEFT
8.5.2.7.2 Image Mask Adj. RIGHT
8.5.3 Top edge position adjustment
8.5.4 End mask adjustment
8.5.5 Image length adjustment
Type
Description
55 50
D Adjusts the image center position on the paper when the Side 0 x
registration CCD cannot detect the paper width (for the papers
from standard feed tray).
Range : -10 to +10mm
Setting increment: 0.1mm
Default : 0.0mm
from Tray 1).
Default : 0.0mm
from Tray 2).
Default : 0.0mm
D Adjusts the image printing side mask position (left) when the
0 x
Side registration CCD cannot detect the paper width.
Range : 0.0 mm to 25.5 mm
Default : 10.0mm
D Adjusts the image printing side mask position (right) when the 0 x
Side registration CCD cannot detect the paper width.
Range : 0.0 mm to 25.5 mm
Default : 10.0mm
D Used to set the ink ejection start timing after the detection of the 0 0
leading edge of the paper by the top edge sensor.
Default: 0.5 mm
Adjusts masking amount of the tail end of the paper
0 0
This menu is to compensate the paper edge detection deviation due to the change in the masking value in the trailing edge
caused by the change in the leading edge printing position.
Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm
Default: 0.0 mm
D Use to set the image length.
0 0
Setting length: 98.0% to 105.0%
Default: 100%
8.5.6 Adjustment management

8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.
8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config.
8.5.7 Top edge sensor adjustment

8.5.7.1 Top edge sensor top timing
8.5.7.2 Top edge sensor bottom timing
8.5.7.3 Top edge sensor mode
8.6 Maintenance System Adjustment
Saves the adjustment parameters in the removable NVRAM

onto the ORIP PCB as a backup.
Rewrites the adjustment parameters in the removal NVRAM
with the backed-up data saved on the ORIP PCB.
Adjusts the top edge detection timing of top edge sensor 1 to

that of top edge sensor 2.
Default: 0.0 mm
Adjusts the bottom edge detection timing of top edge sensor 1
to that of top edge sensor 2.
Default: 0.0 mm
Selection of the top edge sensors from 2 selections.
One [Auto] is which the machine automatically chooses the data
from either the top edge sensor 1 or 2.
The other is [Top edge sensor 1 - fixed] in which the top edge
sensor 1 becomes active.
Setting : Auto / Top edge sensor 1
Default: Auto
11 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
8.6.2 Vacuum Scanning Start Position
8.6.3 Vacuum Scanning End Position
8.6.5 BP Vacuum Height Adjustment
8.7 Jam check

8.7.1 Registration IN jam detection
8.7.2 Registration OUT jam detection
8.7.3 Exit IN jam detection
8.7.4 Exit OUT jam detection
8.8 MTF feeder unit

8.8.1 CL3 OFF delay adjustment
Type
Description
D Adjusts the vacuuming start position of the vacuum nozzle.
Setting range: 6.0 to 16.0 mm
Default: 11.0 mm
D Adjusts the vacuuming end position of the vacuum nozzle.
Setting range: 70.0 to 90.0 mm
Default: 80.0 mm
D Adjusts the position (height) of the BP during vacuum operations.
Setting range: -2.0 to 3.0 mm
Default: 1.5 mm
D Change of the jam detection time of the registration sensor (IN)

Setting item: 0 mm/+5 mm/+10 mm
Default: 0 mm
D Change of the jam detection time of the registration sensor (OUT)
Default: 0 mm
D Change of the jam detection time of the exit sensor (IN)
Default: 0 mm
D Change of the jam detection time of the exit sensor (OUT)
Default: 0 mm
D
8.8.2 Multiple feed light intensity setting
8.8.3 Light intensity check (plain paper)
8.8.4 Light intensity check (thick paper)
8.9 Auto exit tray adjustment

8.9.1 Paper guide position correction
8.9.2 Paper stopper position correction
8.9.3 Postcard paper guide position correction
8.9.4 Postcard paper stopper position correction
8.10 Finiser test

8.10.1 Drive check
8.10.2 Sensor / Motor
8.10.3 Data check
8.10.4 Data setting
9. Test Pattern Print
9.1 Print
11 - 20
55 50
0 0
Used to adjust the OFF delay time of transfer clutch 3.

Setting item: 0 ms, 16 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 35 ms, 40 ms
Default: 30 ms
Feed the specified paper, take out the paper, then press the
right key to make the setting.
Displays the standard output A/D value (8-bit data) of the multiple feed sensor and the currently set reference light intensity
(D/A value) of the multiple feed sensor for confirmation.
Displays the thick paper output A/D value (8-bit data) of the
multiple feed sensor and the currently set reference light intensity (D/A value) of the multiple feed sensor for confirmation.
Used to set the offset amount of the exit fence HP position for the
auto fence function.
Setting range: 0 mm to +/ 5.0 mm (+ for extending)
Default: 0 mm
Used to set the offset amount of the stopper HP position for the
auto fence function.
Default: 0 mm
Used to set the offset amount for moving the exit fences to the
postcard position in the auto fence function.
Default: 0 mm
Used to set the offset amount for moving the stopper to the postcard position in the auto fence function.
The HC-Finisher test mode must be entered from here.

Menu 12 [Menu number input] cannot be used.
Refer to the Finisher test mode list for details.
After changing the data setting on the Finisher, the new setting
is not applied until the power is turned OFF and then ON.
Reflects the setting entered in the same hierarchical level, and

conducts print test.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
9.2 Tray Selection
9.3 Feed tray Selection
9.4 RES-DROPS
9.5 Simplex/Duplex
9.6 Copy Number
9.7 Test Pattern Prints
Finishing Mode
12. Menu no. input
Type
D Setting for print test.
Description
Selections :
55 50
0 0
<0>: No finisher function / Top tray

1 : 2-punches / Top tray
2 : 4-punches / Top tray
3 : Staple on front 1 position / Stacker tray
4 : Staple on center 2 positions / Stacker tray
5 : Staple on rear 1 position / Stacker tray
6 : Booklet no stapling / Booklet tray
7 : Booklet with stapling / Booklet tray
8 : Two folding / Booklet tray
9 : Inner 3 fold / Folder tray (Option Unit)
10 : Outer 3 fold / Folder tray (Option Unit)
11 : Z-folding (Option Unit)
11 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2.Menu items related to Finisher

Enter the test mode for the FINISHER from menu number 8.10 Finisher Test of the HC5000/HC5500
operation panel key in SE-Mode.
Drive checking-related
No.
12-001
12-005
12-006
12-007
12-008
12-009
12-010
12-011
12-012
12-013
12-014
12-015
12-019
12-020
12-021
12-022
12-023
12-024
12-025
12-026
12-027
12-028
12-029
12-030
12-031
12-032
12-034
12-035
12-036
12-037
12-038
12-039
12-040
12-041
12-042
12-043
12-046
12-047
12-048
12-049
12-050
11 - 22
Menu item
Type
Description
DEC TRANSPORT MOT ON/OFF
M Drives the I/F Module Transport Roll.
PUNCHER MOT 2HOLE HOME
M Moves the 2/4-hole Puncher to the home position.
MOVE
PUNCHER MOT 3HOLE HOME
M Moves the 3-hole Puncher to the home position.
MOVE
PUNCHER MOT 2HOLE ON/OFF
M Reciprocates the 2/4-hole Puncher.
PUNCHER MOT 3HOLE ON/OFF
M Reciprocates the 3-hole Puncher.
PUNCHER MOVE MOT HIGH
M Moves the Puncher Unit to the front at high speed.
FRONT ON/OFF
PUNCHER MOVE MOT HIGH REAR M Moves the Puncher Unit to the rear at high speed.
ON/OFF
PUNCHER MOVE MOT LOW
M Moves the Puncher Unit to the front at low speed.
FRONT ON/OFF
PUNCHER MOVE MOT LOW REAR
M Moves the Puncher Unit to the rear at low speed.
ON/OFF
FIN TRANSPORT MOT HIGH FORM Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 100 mm/s in forward rotation.
WARD ON/OFF
FIN TRANSPORT MOT LOW FORM Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.
WARD ON/OFF
FIN TRANSPORT MOT LOW
M Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 385 mm/s in reverse rotation.
REVERSE ON/OFF
COMPILE EXIT MOT HIGH FORM Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 1000 mm/s in forward
rotation.
WARD ON/OFF
COMPILE EXIT MOT MID FORM Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 800 mm/s in forward
rotation.
WARD ON/OFF
COMPILE EXIT MOT LOW FORM Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 285 mm/s in forward
rotation.
WARD ON/OFF
COMPILE EXIT MOT HIGH
M Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 1000 mm/s in reverse
REVERSE ON/OFF
rotation.
COMPILE EXIT MOT LOW
M Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 385 mm/s in reverse
REVERSE ON/OFF
rotation.
TRANSPORT GATE SOL PUSH
M Switches the paper path to the buffer path.
TRANSPORT GATE SOL PULL
M Switches the paper path to the Top Tray.
PUNCHER MOVE CLUTCH ON/OFF M Switches between Puncher moving operation and Sensor
moving operations.
PADDLE MOT ON/OFF
M Drives the Compile Paddle/Sub Paddle.
TAMPER MOT HIGH FRONT ON/
M Drives the Tamper toward the front at 3000 pps.
OFF
TAMPER MOT LOW FRONT ON/
M Drives the Tamper toward the front at 1000 pps.
OFF
TAMPER MOT HIGH REAR ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 3000 pps.
TAMPER MOT LOW REAR ON/OFF
M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 1000 pps.
END WALL MOT OPEN ON/OFF
M Opens/closes the End Wall.
EJECT MOT 1st FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.
EJECT MOT 2nd FORWARD ON/
M Drives the Eject Roll at 610 mm/s in forward rotation.
OFF
EJECT MOT 3rd FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 404 mm/s in forward rotation.
EJECT MOT 4th FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 320 mm/s in forward rotation.
EJECT MOT 5th FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 285 mm/s in forward rotation.
EJECT MOT 1st REVERSE ON/OFF
EJECT CLAMP MOT UP
M Drives the Eject Roll release operation.
EJECT CLAMP MOT DOWN
M Drives the Eject Roll Nip.
SHELF MOTOR EJECT
M Extends the Shelf.
SHELF MOTOR STORAGE
M Retracts the Shelf.
STAPLE MOT HIGH FRONT ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the front at 110 pps.
STAPLE MOT LOW FRONT ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the front at 530 pps.
STAPLE MOT HIGH REAR ON/OFF
M Moves the staple positions toward the rear at 1000 pps.
STAPLE MOT LOW REAR ON/OFF
M Moves the staple positions toward the rear at 530 pps.
COMPILE PADDLE SOL UP
M Raises the Compile Paddle.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
12-051
12-052
12-053
12-054
12-055
12-056
12-058
12-059
12-060
12-062
12-066
12-067
12-068
12-069
12-070
12-071
12-072
12-073
12-074
13-001
13-002
13-003
13-004
13-005
13-006
13-007
13-008
13-009
13-010
13-011
13-013
13-014
13-016
13-017
13-020
13-021
13-024
13-025
13-026
13-027
13-028
13-029
13-030
13-031
13-032
13-033
13-034
Menu item
Type
Description
COMPILE PADDLE SOL DOWN
M Lowers the Compile Paddle.
SUB PADDLE SOL UP
M Raises the Sub Paddle.
SUB PADDLE SOL DOWN
M Lowers the Sub Paddle.
STACKER FLAPPER MOT UP
M Raises the Stacker Flapper.
STACKER FLAPPER MOT DOWN
M Lowers the Stacker Flapper.
SET CLAMP SOL ON/OFF
M Raises/lowers the Set Clamp.
PADDLE SUPPORT CLUTCH ON/
M Raises/lowers the Set Paddle.
OFF
ELEVATOR MOT UP
M Raises the Stacker.
ELEVATOR MOT DOWN
M Lowers the Stacker.
STACKER OFFSET MOT REAR
M Drives the Stacker offset front/rear operation.
SCT EXIT MOT MID FORWARD ON/ M Drives the SCT Exit Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.
OFF
SCT EXIT MOT LOW FORWARD
M Drives the SCT Exit Roll at 285 mm/s in forward rotation.
ON/OFF
SCT EXIT MOT LOW REVERSE ON/ M Drives the SCT Exit Roll at 385 mm/s in forward rotation.
OFF
ELEVATOR MOT UP 2
M Raises the Stacker until the Stack Height Sensor activates.
ELEVATOR MOT DOWN 2
M Lowers the Stacker until the Stack Height Sensor activates.
TAMPER MOT MID FRONT ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the front at 2000 pps.
TAMPER MOT MID REAR ON/OFF
M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 2000 pps.
EJECT MOT Top Speed FORWARD
ON/OFF
EJECT MOT Top Speed REVERSE
M Drives the Eject Roll at 1000 mm/s in reverse rotation.
ON/OFF
INTERPOSER FEED MOT ON/OFF
M Drives the Feed Roll.
INTERPOSER TRAY MOT UP
M Raises the tray.
INTERPOSER TRAY MOT DOWN
M Lowers the tray.
INTERPOSER NUDGER SOL ON/
M Lifts/lowers the Nudger Roll.
OFF
BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT HI
M Drives the Booklet IN Roll at 800 mm/s.
ON/OFF
BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT MID
ON/OFF
BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT LOW
ON/OFF
BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL MOT
M Drives the Folder Roll in forward rotation.
FORWARD ON/OFF
BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL MOT
M Drives the Folder Roll in reverse rotation.
REVERSE ON/OFF
BOOKLET KNIFE CLUTCH ON/OFF
M Turns the Knife Clutch ON/OFF (This operates the Booklet Knife
(This operates the Booklet Knife
Flapper Solenoid.)
Flapper Solenoid.)
BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT LOW
M Drives the Booklet End Guide downward at 450 pps.
DOWN
BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT HI
M Drives the Booklet End Guide downward at 1002 pps.
DOWN
BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT LOW
M Drives the Booklet End Guide upward at 450 pps.
UP
BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT HI UP
M Drives the Booklet End Guide upward at 1102 pps.
BOOKLET STAPLE ON
M Executes stapling for the Booklet Staple F/R.
TRAY BELT DRIVE MOTOR ON/OFF M Drives the Tray Belt.
BOOKLET PADDLE MOT ON/OFF
M Rotates the Booklet Paddle.
BOOKLET GATE SOL PUSH
M Switches the paper path to the booklet path.
BOOKLET GATE SOL PULL
M Switches the paper path to the stacker path.
FOLDER DRIVE MOT2 ON/OFF
M Drives the Transport Roll and Folding Roll.
FOLDER DRIVE MOT1 ON/OFF
M Drives the Folder internal transport.
FOLDER ENTRANCE MOT HI ON/
M Drives the Folder upper transport.
OFF
ENDGUIDE MOT 1 UP ON/OFF
M Raises the first fold stopper position.
ENDGUIDE MOT 1 DOWN ON/OFF
M Lowers the second fold stopper position.
ENDGUIDE MOT 2 UP ON/OFF
M Raises the second fold stopper position.
ENDGUIDE MOT 2 DOWN ON/OFF
M Lowers the third fold stopper position.
FOLDER GATE SOL 1 PUSH
M Switches the paper path to the top path.
FOLDER GATE SOL 1 PULL
M Switches the paper path to the folder path.
11 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
13-035
13-036
13-037
13-040
13-043
13-044
13-045
13-046
13-047
13-048
13-049
13-050
13-051
13-052
13-053
13-054
13-055
13-056
13-057
13-058
13-059
13-060
13-061
13-062
13-063
310-001
310-002
311-001
311-002
311-003
311-004
311-005
311-006
Menu item
Type
Description
FOLDER ENTRANCE MOT LOW
M Drives the Folder upper transport.
ON/OFF
FOLDER GATE SOL 2 PUSH
M Switches the paper path to the Letter Tray.
FOLDER GATE SOL 2 PULL
M Switches the paper path to the folder path.
INTERPOSER T/P ROLL CLUTCH
M Turns the Interposer Transport Roll Clutch ON/OFF.
ON/OFF
ENV TRAY LED 1
M Turns the Envelope Tray LED 1 ON/OFF.
FOLDER C SOL ON/OFF
M Turns the Folder Clamp Solenoid ON/OFF.
ENV TRAY LOCK SOL OPEN
M Opens the Envelope Tray Lock.
ENV TRAY LOCK SOL CLOSE
M Closes the Envelope Tray Lock.
NIP RELEASE SOL ON/OFF
M Turns the Folder Nip Release Solenoid ON/OFF.
BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F REAR
M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the rear (tamping) at 985
ON/OFF 1
pps.
ON/OFF 2
pps + F97s.
ON/OFF 3
pps.
ON/OFF 4
pps.
BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F FRONT
M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the front (tamping) at 985
ON/OFF 1
pps.
ON/OFF 2
pps.
ON/OFF 3
pps.
ON/OFF 4
pps.
BOOKLET TAMPER MOT R FRONT
M Drives the Booklet Tamper R toward the front (tamping) at 985
ON/OFF 1
pps.
ON/OFF 2
pps.
ON/OFF 3
pps.
ON/OFF 4
pps.
BOOKLET TAMPER MOT R REAR
M Drives the Booklet Tamper R toward the rear (tamping) at 985
ON/OFF 1
pps.
ON/OFF 2
pps.
ON/OFF 3
pps.
ON/OFF 4
pps.
HC TRANSFER UNIT TRANSPORT
M Drives the Transport Motor of the HC Transfer Unit at 389 mm/s.
MOT ON/OFF
HC TRANSFER UNIT SUCTION FAN M Drives the Suction Fan in the HC Transfer Unit.
ON/OFF
TRANSFER MOTOR, PAPER EJECM Drives the motors and fan.
TION MOTOR & SUCTION FAN.
OFFSET MOTOR
M Drives the motor for one movement.
TRAY ELEVATOR MOTOR
M Drives the motor to make one initial movement.
TRAY ELEVATOR MOTOR
M Drives the motor to bring the offset tray all the way down.
UNIT INITIAL MOVEMENT
M Drives the motors to make one machine initial movement.
CONTINUOUS RUNNING MOVEM Papers size: A4R (A4-LEF).
MENT
Offset tray makes normal operation down-up movement for
every 2 sheets received.
Offset tray makes one offset movement after every 10 sheets.
The test mode stops after 50 sheets are received.
Sensor & Switch Monitor-related

No.
12-100
12-101
12-102
12-105
12-106
11 - 24
Menu item
DEC IN SNR
DEC OUT SNR
DEC HOME SNR
PUNCH OUT SNR
COMPILE EXIT SNR
Type
S
S
S
S
S
Description
Paper detection by the Dec IN Sensor
Paper detection by the Dec OUT Sensor
Detection of home position of Decurler
Paper detection by the Punch OUT Sensor
Paper detection by the Compile Exit Sensor
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
12-107
12-108
12-109
12-110
12-111
12-112
12-113
12-114
12-115
12-116
12-117
12-118
12-119
12-121
12-123
12-124
12-125
12-126
12-127
12-128
12-130
12-131
12-132
12-133
12-134
12-135
12-136
12-137
12-138
12-139
12-140
12-141
12-142
12-143
12-144
12-145
12-146
12-148
12-149
12-150
12-154
12-155
12-156
13-100
13-101
13-102
13-103
13-104
13-105
13-106
13-107
13-108
13-109
13-110
13-111
13-112
13-114
13-115
13-119
13-120
13-121
13-122
13-123
Menu item
Type
Description
TOP TRAY EXIT SNR
S Paper detection by the Top Tray Exit Sensor
BUFFER PATH SNR
S Paper detection by the Buffer Path Sensor
SIDE REGI SNR
S Paper detection by the Side Regi. Sensor
PUNCH MOT. SNR
S Detection of Punch Motor rotation
PUNCH MOVE HOME SNR
S Detection of home position of Puncher Move
PUNCH MOVE HOME SNR(B5)
S Detection of home position of Puncher Move (B5)
PUNCH MOVE HOME
S Detection of home position of Puncher Move (3 Letter)
SNR(3LETER)
PUNCH HOME SNR
S Detection of Puncher home position
PUNCH FRONT SNR
PUNCH HOLE SELECT SNR
SIDE REGI HOME SNR
S Detection of home position of Side Regi. Home Sensor
PUNCH BOX SET SNR
S Detection of setting for Punch Box
TOP TRAY FULL SNR
S Detection of full Top Tray
COMPILE TRAY NO PAPER SNR
S Paper detection by the Compile Tray NO Paper Sensor
SUB PADDLE HOME SNR
S Detection of home position of Sub Paddle
STAPLE 50PIN SNR
S Detection of setting for the Staple 50 Pin
TAMPER HOME SNR
S Detection of Tamper home position
END WALL HOME SNR
S Detection of End Wall home (close) position
END WALL OPEN SNR
S Detection of End Wall open position
SHELF HOME SNR
S Detection of Shelf home (close) position
STAPLE CENTER POSITION SNR
S Detection of Stapler center position
STAPLE MOVE HOME SNR
S Detection of Stapler Move home position
STACK HEIGHT SNR 2
S Detection of paper base section by Stack Height Sensor
LOW STAPLE SNR
S Detection of absence of staples
SELF PRIMING SNR
S Detection of Stapler feed ready status
STAPLE HOME SNR
S Detection of home position of Stapler Head (Staple Open)
MANUAL DEC SW 3
S Detection of pressure on Manual Dec SW3
EJECT UP SNR
S Detection of Eject Unit raised position
EJECT SNR
S Paper detection by the Eject Sensor
STACKER NO PAPER SNR
S Paper detection by the Stacker NO Paper Sensor
STACKER HIGHT SNR
S Detection of the top surface of stacked paper
TRAY HIGHT SNR LOWER
S Detection of paper removal during print job
MIX STACK SNR
S Detection of mix position
HALF STACK SNR
S Detection of half position
FULL STACK SNR
S Detection of full position
STACK HEIGHT SNR 3
S Detection of presence of paper
STACKER REAR POSITION SNR
S Detection of Stacker position
LOWER LIMIT SWITCH
S Detection of Stacker Tray lower-limit position
STACKER SAFTY SWITCH
S Detection of obstructing items
I/F MODULE FRONT DOOR SW
S Detection of open condition
FINISHER FRONT DOOR SW
S Detection of open condition
FOLDER ENV TRAY OPEN SW
S Detection of switch operation
FOLDER ENV TRAY SW
S Detection of presence/absence of tray
INTERPOSER TOP COVER SW
S Detection of 24 V shutdown
KNIFE HOME SNR
S Detection of Booklet Knife home position
BOOKLET COMPILE NO PAPER
S Paper detection by the Booklet Compile NO Sensor
SNR
BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL EXIT SNR S Paper detection by the Booklet Folder Roll Exit Sensor
BOOKLET DRAWER SET SNR
S Detection of Booklet Drawer set status
BOOKLET STAPLER READY
S Detection of Booklet Stapler ready status
BOOKLET STAPLER ERROR
S Detection of Booklet Stapler error status
BOOKLET LOW STAPLE F SW
S Detection of low booklet staple levels (Stapler on front side)
BOOKLET LOW STAPLE R SW
S Detection of low booklet staple levels (Stapler on rear side)
FEED OUT SNR
S Paper detection by the Feed OUT Sensor
INTERPOSER PAPER SNR
S Paper detection by the Interposer Paper Sensor
LEVEL UP SNR
S Detection of Interposer raised position
BOOKLET TRAY BELT SW
S Detection of switch operation
LENGTH SNR
S Paper detection
FOLDER ENTRANCE SNR C
S Paper detection
FOLDER PATH SNR 2
S Paper detection
FOLDER PATH SNR 3
S Paper detection
ENDGUIDE HOME SNR 1
S Detection of home position
ENDGUIDE HOME SNR 2
S Detection of home position
ENVELOP TRAY FULL SNR
S Paper detection
11 - 25
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
13-125
13-126
13-130
13-131
13-132
13-133
13-134
13-135
13-136
13-137
13-139
13-140
13-141
310-101
310-102
310-103
311-101
311-102
311-103
311-104
311-105
311-106
311-107
311-108
311-109
311-110
Menu item
FOLDER PATH SNR 1
FOLDER PATH SNR 4
PUNCHER 3 HOLE DETECT 3
FOLDER DETECT
BOOKLET DETECT
INTERPOSER DETECT
BOOKLET TAMPER HOME SNR F
BOOKLET IN SNR
BOOKLET TAMPER HOME SNR R
BOOKLET END GUIDE HOME SNR
BOOKLET NO PAPER SNR
KNIFE FOLDING SNR
FOLDER EXIT SNR C
HC TRANSFER UNIT IN SNR
HC TRANSFER UNIT OUT SNR
HC TRANSFER UNIT SAFETY SW
PAPER IN SENSOR
PAPER OUT SENSOR
OFFSET HP SENSOR
LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
TOP PAPER DETECTION SENSOR
DOOR SWITCH
DOCKING SWITCH
DIP-SW 1
DIP-SW 2
DIP-SW 3
Type
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Description
Paper detection
Paper detection
Detection of Puncher Unit connection
Detection of Folder Unit connection
Detection of Booklet Unit connection
Detection of Interposer Unit connection
Detection of home position
Paper detection by the Booklet IN Sensor
Paper detection by the Booklet NO Paper Sensor
Detection of folding position of Booklet Knife
Paper detection
Paper detection
Paper detection
Detection of Transfer Unit Cover open status
Sensor check
Sensor check
Sensor check
Sensor check
Sensor check
Switch check
Switch check
Switch check
Switch check
Switch check
D a t a c he c k i n g - r e l a t e d
No.
13-113
Menu item
SIZE SNR
Type
Description
C Returns the value of the Paper Size Sensor (VR) of the Cover
Tray.
Data setting-related
No.
Menu item
310-301 HC TRANSFER UNIT SPEED
ADJUSTMENT
310-901 SFX FIN NV READ
310-931 SFX FIN NVM INITIALIZE
310-951 SFX FIN NV WRITE
311-201 PAPER EJECTION MOTOR SPEED
763-201 THICK PAPER 1 UNSTAPLE SET

EJECT LIMIT COUNT 1
11 - 26
Type
Description (default indicated in < >)
D Adjusts the speed of the HC Transfer Unit (setting of ratio to
HC5000 transport speed).
Setting range: 85% to 115% < 105 >
D Reads NV data of the Finisher and saves it to the HC Control PCB
FRAM only if the parameter is set to "43534."
* A read operation always returns a "0."
Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 0 >
Initializes the NV data in the SFX Finisher only if the parameter is
set to "05674."
* A read operation always returns a "0."
D Writes NV data of the Finisher saved in the HC Control PCB
FRAM to the NV in the Finisher only if the parameter is set to
"50315."
* A write operation always returns a "0."
D Speed ratio between HC5500 and Auto Stacker.
Adjustable range: 90% - 110%
Default setting: 100%
D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for thick paper 1
with length of 216 mm or less.
Paper is automatically ejected when (1) the number of sheets
exceeds the maximum staple paper count (set in 763-245 or 763353) or when (2) the number of sheets set with this menu item are
output to the Compiler in a job not requiring stapling.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
Menu item
763-202 THICK PAPER 1 UNSTAPLE SET
EJECT LIMIT COUNT 2
763-207
763-208
763-211
763-213
763-214
763-215
763-218
763-219
763-220
763-221
763-223
763-224
Type
D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for thick paper 1
with length of greater than 216 mm.
Paper is automatically ejected when (1) the number of sheets
exceeds the maximum staple paper count (set in 763-245 or 763353) or when (2) the number of sheets set with this menu item are
output to the Compiler in a job not requiring stapling.
SIZE SNR ANALOG MIN VALUE
D Stores the size sensor analog minimum value of Interposer during
the execution of 763-308.
* This menu is for reference purpose only.
SIZE SNR ANALOG MAX VALUE
D Stores the size sensor analog maximum value of Interposer during
the execution of 763-309.
* This menu is for reference purpose only.
UNSTAPLE SET EJECT LIMIT
D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for paper of
COUNT 1
lengths 216 mm or less.
Output paper is automatically ejected when the number of
discharged sheets exceeds the maximum staple count set in 763245 or 763-353, or when paper sheets specified by the value
(number of sheets) set with this menu item are output to the
Compiler during a print job not requiring stapling.
PUNCH SIDE REGI. ADJUSTMENT
D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction for
1
paper 297 mm wide.
Increasing the value moves the punch position to the rear.
Decreasing the value moves the punch position to the front.
Setting range: 10 to 170 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 97 >
D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction for the
2
following paper sizes:
203 mm paper width 285 mm in the case of 2/3-hole Puncher,
and 216 mm paper width 285 mm in the case of 2/4-hole
Puncher.
D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction for the
3
following paper size:
203 mm < paper width 216 mm in the case of 2/4-hole Puncher.
STACKER TRAY DESCENT
D Enables/disables Stacker Tray descent immediately before the
ADJUSTMENT
Finisher stops during Stacker eject.
Setting range:
<0> : Enabled
1
: Disabled
PUNCH REVERSE AMOUNT
D Adjustment of amount of motor reverse skew correction loop in
ADJUSTMENT 1
Punch mode for paper of lengths 216 mm or less.
This function is not available for the following paper sizes:
203 mm paper width 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole Puncher,
and 216 mm < paper width 235 mm in the case of 2/4-hole
Puncher.
Setting range: 8 to 68 pulses (1 pulse = 0.52 mm) < 42, or 38 in
the case of 3 holes >
PUNCH DUST FULL DETECTION
D Number of punch dust full detections.
COUNT
STAPLE LIMIT COUNT (100 sheets)
D Limits the number of stapled sheets for a 100-sheet cartridge.
Setting range: 50 to 150 sheets < 100 >
REAR STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTD Adjustment of rear stapling position (excluding A4 LEF and A3
SEF).
MENT
UNSTAPLE SET EJECT LIMIT
D Changes the unstaple set eject count for paper of lengths greater
COUNT 2
than 216 mm.
Output paper is automatically ejected when the number of discharged sheets exceeds the maximum staple count set in 763-245
or 763-353, or when paper sheets specified by the value (number
of sheets) set with this menu item are output to the Compiler during a print job not requiring stapling.
11 - 27
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
Menu item
763-225 TAMPING HOME POSITION
ADJUSTMENT
763-227 Eject Select
763-229 REAR STAPLE POSITION

ADJUSTMENT (A4 LEF, A3 SEF)
763-231 BOOKLET TRAY BELT AUTO FEED

OPERATION SETTING
763-232 BOOKLET COMPILE POSITION

FOLD POSITION CORRECTION (B4
AND LARGER)
FOLD POSITION CORRECTION
(SMALLER THAN B4)
763-236 COMPILE PADDLE UP SETTING
NUMBER
763-237 SUB PADDLE UP SETTING
NUMBER
763-238 SINGLE STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT
COUNT
763-240 DUAL STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT

COUNT
763-242 PUNCH REVERSE AMOUNT

ADJUSTMENT 2
763-244 BUFFER SHEET REVERSE

AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT (NON
PUNCH MODE)
763-245 LARGE SIZE MAX STAPLING
763-246 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE FOLD

POSITION ADJUSTMENT (B4S AND
LARGER)
763-247 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE FOLD
POSITION ADJUSTMENT
(SMALLER THAN B4S)
763-248 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE
POSITION ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT
(B4S AND LARGER)
763-249 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE
(SMALLER THAN B4S)
763-251 MAX BOOKLET STAPLING
11 - 28
Type
D Adjustment of the home position of the Tamper for paper
alignment. Reduce the value if the paper pressing force is
excessive during paper alignment. (The home position moves
toward the rear.)
D Unstaple eject operation mode.
Setting range:
<0> : Set eject
1
: Sheet eject
D Adjustment of rear stapling position (A4 LEF, A3 SEF).
Increasing the value moves the stapling position toward the rear.
Decreasing the value moves the stapling position toward the front.
D Sets the Booklet Tray Belt automatic feed operation during the
cycle down.
Setting range:
0
: Auto feed disabled
<1> : Auto feed enabled
D Correction of amount of movement to the folding position in the
lead direction of paper (when no stapling is performed) in compile
position folding position (B4 and larger).
D Correction of amount of movement to the folding position in the
lead direction of paper (when no stapling is performed) in compile
position folding position (smaller than B4).
D Sets the number of sheets for the Compile Paddle lifting operation.
D Sets the number of sheets for the Sub Paddle lifting operation.
D Sets the maximum number of single stapled sets stackable on the
Stacker. When the number of stapled sets with single-location
staples reaches the set number, a full status is signaled regardless
of the number of stapled sheets.
D Sets the maximum number of dual stapled sets stackable on the
Stacker. When the number of stapled sets with two-location
staples reaches the set number, a full status is signaled regardless
of the number of stapled sheets.
Punch mode for paper of lengths greater than 216 mm.
This function is not available for the following paper sizes:
203 mm paper width 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole puncher,
puncher.
D Adjustment of overlap for buffer sheets and setting of value for
Reverse Pulse + NVM for each paper size.
D Maximum number of stapled sheets for large paper sizes (paper
length > 216 mm and paper width > 216 mm, or paper length > 297
mm).
Setting range: 1 to 200 pulses < 65 >
D Adjustment of folding position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stable
mode. (B4S and larger)
D Adjustment of folding position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stable
mode. (Smaller than B4S)
D Adjustment of stapling position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stable
mode. (B4S and larger)
D Adjustment of stapling position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stable
mode. (Smaller than B4S)
D Maximum number of folding stapled sheets in Booklet mode.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
Menu item
763-252 MAX BOOKLET UNSTAPLING
FOLD POSITION SHEET COUNT
CORRECTION VALUE 1

FOLD POSITION SHEET COUNT
CORRECTION VALUE 2
763-255 STACKER TRAY EJECT Z-FOLD

A3S/17S PAPER REDUCTION
NUMBER
763-256 FOLDING TIMES
763-259 Z-FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT

(A3)
(11 x 17)
(B4)
(A3)
(11 x 17)
(B4)
763-269 ENV-C FOLD POSITION 1
ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT (8.5 x 11 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT (8.5 x 11 SEF)
763-273 PAPER FEED ADJUSTMENT
AMOUNT
763-276 STACKER TRAY EJECT Z-FOLD B4
SEF PAPER REDUCTION NUMBER
763-277 Z-FOLD EJECT COUNT LIMIT

STACKER TRAY B4 SEF
Type
D Maximum number of folding unstapled sheets in Booklet mode.
D Adjustment of correction value for amount of movement to the
folding position in the lead direction of paper (when no stapling is
performed) in compile position folding position for specific
number of sheets. Adjusts the correction value for two-sheet
folding.
D Adjustment of correction value for amount of movement to the
folding position in the lead direction of paper (when no stapling is
performed) in compile position folding position for specific
number of sheets. Adjusts the correction value for three or moresheet folding.
D Sets the number of sheets of other paper to be ejected in order to
subtract the number of Z-folded sheets of A3 SEF 11 x 17 SEF
paper discharged on the Stacker Tray.
D Number of forward-reversal operations of the Booklet Folder Roll
when 10 or more sheets are folded.
The number of operations is equal to the sum of the number of
ordinary operations (1 time) and this setting value.
(Since this setting specifies the number of additional folding
operations, setting a "1" results in two folding operations.)
D Adjustment of the first Folding Roll position in Z-fold and the paper
leading-edge stop position.
D Adjustment of the second Folding Roll position in Z-fold and the
paper leading-edge stop position.
D Adjustment of the Folding Roll position in Env-C fold and the paper
D Adjustment of the amount of paper feed (feed distance from
contact with the end guide to motor stop).
D Sets the number of sheets of other paper to be ejected in order to
subtract the number of Z-folded sheets of B4 SEF paper
discharged on the Stacker Tray.
D Maximum number of B4 SEF Z-folded sheets stackable on the
Stacker Tray.
When the number of Z-folded B4 sheets (B5 landscape after folding) reaches the number set in this menu item, a full status is signaled whether or not paper sheets are stapled.
11 - 29
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
Menu item
763-280 Z-FOLD EJECT COUNT LIMIT
STACKER TRAY A3/17 SEF
Type
D Maximum number of B4 SEF Z-folded sheets stackable on the
Stacker Tray and maximum number of stackable A3 SEF 11 x 17
SEF Z-folded sheets.
When the number of Z-folded A3 or Ledger sheets (A4 landscape
or Letter-R after folding) reaches the number set in this menu item,
a full status is signaled whether or not paper sheets are stapled.
763-296 Z-FOLD (A3/11 x 17) PAPER COND Factor used to convert the number of A3/Ledge Z-folded sheets to
the number of unprocessed paper sheets. One sheet of Z-folded
VERSION NUMBER
paper is equal to 10 (default) sheets of unprocessed paper.
763-300 PUNCHING NUMBER
D Recording of the number of punching operations for detection of
punch full status.
763-306 AMOUNT OF BOOKLET END GUIDE D Sets the amount of extra up/down operation of the End Guide durUP/DOWN FOR MIS-REGI PREVENing output of small booklets to prevent misregistration.
TION
763-308 SIZE SNR MIN VALUE ADJUSTD Adjusts the Interposer size sensor analog minimum value (A4 LEF
width) by writing a "1," then writes the value to [763-207: SIZE
MENT
SNR ANALOG MIN VALUE]. Be sure to set the Interposer paper
guide for A4 LEF. The process takes 5 seconds.
763-309 SIZE SNR MAX VALUE ADJUSTD Adjusts the Interposer size sensor analog maximum value (B5
LEF width) by writing a "1," then writes the value to [763-208: SIZE
MENT
SNR ANALOG MAX VALUE]. Be sure to set the Interposer paper
guide for A4 LEF. The process takes 5 seconds.
763-314 STACKER EJECT SPEED
D Maximum number of sheets (paper width 216 mm) for stacker
CONTROL PAPER LIMIT COUNT
eject speed control. When the number set in this menu item is
(PAPER WIDTH 216 mm)
exceeded, the paper ejection speed is reduced to prevent shifting
of paper discharged from the Compiler to the Stacker Tray.
763-315 STACKER EJECT SPEED
D Maximum number of sheets (paper width > 216 mm) for stacker
CONTROL PAPER LIMIT COUNT
eject speed control. When the number set in this menu item is
(PAPER LENGTH > 216 mm)
exceeded, the paper ejection speed is reduced to prevent shifting
of paper discharged from the Compiler to the Stacker Tray.
763-316 ENV-Z FOLD POSITION 1
D Correction of the paper leading-edge stop position of the Folding
ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)
Roll in Env-Z fold.
ADJUSTMENT (Letter SEF)
Roll in Env-Z fold.
ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)
Roll in Env-Z fold.
ADJUSTMENT (Letter SEF)
Roll in Env-Z fold.
763-328 THIN PAPER COMPILE PADDLE UP D Condition: Thin paper, length of 182 mm or less in the feed
SETTING NUMBER
direction and 257 mm or less (B5 LEF or smaller) in the width
direction, other than Z-fold.
Sets the number of sheets for the Paddle Solenoid ON (Up
position movement) operation to be activated under the above
conditions.
763-329 THIN PAPER COMPILE PADDLE
D Sets the Paddle Solenoid ON/OFF operation to be activated every
DOWN-UP OPERATION SETTING
5 sheets after 60 sheets.
Setting range:
< 0 >: Operates under all conditions.
1:
Operates only when paper is thin, B5 LEF or
smaller, and Z-folded.
2:
Operates only when paper is (thin or ordinary
paper), B5 LEF or smaller, and Z-folded.
3:
Disabled at all times.
11 - 30
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
Menu item
Type
763-330 THIN PAPER TAMPING OPERATION D Changes tamping operation for paper of B5 LEF or smaller
SETTING
(excluding Z-fold).
Setting range:
< 0 >: Operates under all conditions.
1:
Operates only when paper is thin, B5 LEF or
smaller, and Z-folded.
2:
Operates only when paper is (thin or ordinary
paper), B5 LEF or smaller, and Z-folded.
763-332 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT
D Sets the speed reduction for the Booklet Paper Path Motor for
SPEED REDUCTION SETTING FOR
individual feed trays; applied when the Booklet Compiler receives
INDIVIDUAL PAPER FEED TRAYS
thick paper.
* Reducing the speed minimizes damage to paper when thick
paper is fed, but may increase motor noise.
Setting range:
< 0 >: Reduces speed to 50 mm/s, 50 mm/s.
1:
Reduces speed to 50 mm/s, 250 mm/s.
2:
3:
The two figures in each line indicate the rate of paper feed from
trays other than the Interposer Tray and the rate of paper feed
from the Interposer Tray, respectively.
763-336 SINGLE STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT
D Maximum number of single sets stackable on the Stacker when
(FLAPPER UP)
the Stacker Tray flapper is lifted.
763-337 DUAL STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT
D Maximum number of dual sets stackable on the Stacker when the
(FLAPPER UP)
Stacker Tray flapper is lifted.
763-339 PUNCH REV AMOUNT
ADJUSTMENT 4
Punch mode when paper length is greater than 216 mm and when
paper size is as follows:
203 mm paper width 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole puncher,
puncher.
763-344 Z-FOLD (B4/8-kai) PAPER
D Factor used to convert the number of B4 Z-folded sheets to the
CONVERSION NUMBER
number of unprocessed paper sheets. One sheet of Z-folded
paper is equal to 20 (default) sheets of unprocessed paper.
763-347 FOLDER C SOL ON START TIME
D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder Path
(A4 SEF) ADJUSTMENT
Sensor 2 in A4 SEF folder C fold.
Setting range: 0 to 160 pulses (1 = 2.5 msec) < 86 >
763-348 FOLDER C SOL ON START TIME
(LET SEF) ADJUSTMENT
Sensor 2 in LET SEF folder C fold.
763-349 FOLDER C SOL ON TIME
D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time in inner 3-fold.
ADJUSTMENT
763-350 BOOKLET FULL DETECTION SET
D Number of sets of paper of lengths less than B4S for booklet full
COUNT SMALLER THAN B4
detection (based on 15 sheets/set).
Number of sets for detection of full status = Reference value + difference of SE-Mode setting from the default number of 20.
[Reference value]
Normally the booklet tray will receive
1 to 5 sheets: 23 sets
more booklets on the tray before the
Up to 10 sheets: 19 sets
FULL message is displayed.
* Nonstandard paper size: 15 sets regardless of number of sheets
763-351 BOOKLET FULL DETECTION SET
D Number of sets of paper of lengths B4S and larger for booklet full
COUNT B4 AND LARGER
detection (based on 15 sheets/set).
Number of sets for detection of full status = Reference value + difference of SE-Mode setting from the default number of 20.
[Reference value]
Normally the booklet tray will receive
1 to 5 sheets: 25 sets
more booklets on the tray before the
FULL message is displayed.
763-353 SMALL SIZE MAX STAPLING
D Maximum number of stapled sheets when using small paper sizes
(paper length 216 mm or paper width 216 mm and paper
length 297 mm)
11 - 31
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
Menu item
763-354 BOOKLET INTERPOSER PAPER
STAPLE HOLD AMOUNT
ADJUSTMENT
763-355
763-356
763-359
763-361
763-362
763-363
763-364
763-365
763-369
763-370
763-371
763-372
763-373
763-374
11 - 32
Type
D Adjustment of the amount of Interposer paper held at the Tamper
Rear during stapling.
Setting range:
0:
3 mm tamping
1:
2 mm tamping
< 2 >: 1 mm tamping
3:
Without tamping
4:
1 mm from paper
DUAL STAPLE - FRONT SIDE
D Adjustment of the amount of movement to the front side during
MOVEMENT AMOUNT
dual stapling.
ADJUSTMENT
Setting range: 0 to 40 pulses (1 = 0.157 mm) < 20 >
DUAL STAPLE - DUAL WIDTH
D Adjustment of the amount of dual width movement during dual
MOVEMENT AMOUNT
stapling.
ADJUSTMENT
Setting range: 0 to 40 pulses (1 = 0.157 mm) < 20 >
BOOKLET FS DIRECTION STAPLE
D Adjustment of booklet stapling position in the FS direction
POSITION ADJUSTMENT
(widthwise).
When a value exceeding "30" is set, the stapling position is
adjusted toward the front.
BUFFER SHEET REVERSE
D Adjustment of the overlap for buffer sheets in Punch mode and the
AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT (PUNCH
value of Reverse Pulse + NVM for each paper size.
MODE)
Setting range: 0 to 80 (1 = 0.52 mm) < 26, or 31 in the case of 3
holes >
ENVELOPE FOLDER TRAY FULL
D Effective only when "1" is set in 763-362 for detection of full status
COUNT ENABLE
for the Envelope Folder Tray based on the number of discharged
sheets.
Setting range:
< 0 >: Detection not based on discharged sheets
(Disabled)
1:
Detection based on discharged sheets
(Enabled)
ENVELOPE FOLDER TRAY FULL
D Setting of number of sheets for detection of full status for the
CHECK NUM
Envelope Folder Tray based on the number of discharged sheets.
Effective when [NVM: Envelop Folder Tray Full Count Enabled] =
1.
STACKER MISS REGI.
D Adjusts the typing operation to prevent misregistration of the
IMPROVEMENT ENABLE
Stacker compile.
Setting range:
< 0 >: Enabled
1:
Disabled
INTERPOSER SHEET PUSH MISS
D Permits pressing of front/back cover paper (Sub Paddle lowering
REGI. IMPROVEMENT ENABLE
operation) to prevent misregistration.
Setting range:
0:
Enabled
< 1 >: Disabled
BOOKLET STAPLE PAPER COUNT
D Fine-adjustment of fold position adjustment value for each sheet
FOLD POSITION FINEduring booklet stapling.
ADJUSTMENT VALUE 1 _S
Adjustment value for 3 sheets (smaller than B4S).
Adjustment value for 5 to 7 sheets (smaller than B4S).
BOOKLET 15-SHEET STAPLE
D Automatic adjustment of stapling position according to number of
sheets based on the input stapling position deviation for 15-sheet
(B4S AND LARGER)
folding in Booklet Staple mode. (B4S and larger)
BOOKLET 15-SHEET STAPLE
D Automatic adjustment of stapling position according to number of
sheets based on the input stapling position deviation for 15-sheet
(SMALLER THAN B4S)
folding in Booklet Staple mode. (smaller than B4S)
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
Menu item
763-375 BOOKLET STAPLE PAPER COUNT
STAPLE POSITION FINEADJUSTMENT 1
763-376
763-377
763-378
763-380
763-383
763-384
763-387
763-389
763-390
763-391
763-392
763-394
763-396
Type
D Fine-adjustment of the automatic stapling position for each sheet
in Booklet Staple mode.
Adjustment value for 3 sheets.
STAPLE POSITION FINEin Booklet Staple mode.
ADJUSTMENT 2
ADJUSTMENT 3
Adjustment value for 5 to 7 sheets.
ADJUSTMENT 4
REAR STAPLE POSITION
D Adjustment of the rear stapling position for paper with width of 250
ADJUSTMENT (EXCLUDING A4
mm or less (excluding A4 LEF, A3 SEF)
LEF, A3 SEF) PAPER WIDTH OF 250
mm OR LESS
PADDLE SUPPORT EXECUTING
D Threshold value of paper width for which the paddle support
PAPER WIDTH THRESHOLD VALUE
operation is performed.
The paddle support operation is not executed for paper of widths
less than 235 mm. The threshold value for the Tamper operation
can be changed at the same time.
Setting range: 204 to 254 mm < 235 >
THICK PAPER 1 SETTING
D Operational setting for thick paper feed.
The operation is not executed for paper of widths less than 235
mm. The threshold value for the Tamper operation can be changed
at the same time.
Setting range:
< 0 >: Normal operation for Thick Paper 1 (without
buffer, without pushing prevention operation)
1:
Thick Paper 1 is handled as Thick Paper 2 in
operation. (without buffer, with pushing
prevention operation)
3-TIME TAMPING EXECUTING
D Changes the paper count for 3-time tamping in tamping operation
PAPER COUNT THRESHOLD
(6). In the default setting, 3-time tamping is conducted for 31st and
VALUE
subsequent sheets.
Effective when: 203 mm paper width 235 mm and paper length
298 mm
BOOKLET STAPLE COUNT FOLD
D Fine-adjustment of the automatic folding position adjustment
POSITION FINE-ADJUSTMENT
amount for each sheet in Booklet Staple mode. Adjustment
VALUE 1 _L
amount for 3 sheets (B4S and larger).
VALUE 2 _L
VALUE 3 _L
amount for 5 to 7 sheets (B4S and larger).
VALUE 4 _L
INTERPOSER PAPER PADDLE
D Sets whether the paddle support operation 1 (support operation) is
SUPPORT OPERATION SETTING
performed for the back cover sheet with paper widths of less than
235 mm ("235 mm" is set in 763-383) supplied from the Interposer.
Setting range:
0:
Disabled
< 1 >: Enabled
INTERPOSER PAPER TAMPER
D Sets whether the Tamper pressing operation is performed for back
PRESSING OPERATION SETTING
cover paper supplied from the Interposer.
Setting range:
0:
Disabled
< 1 >: Enabled
11 - 33
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
No.
Menu item
763-398 Z-FOLD PAPER TAMPER
PRESSING OPERATION SETTING
763-399 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ON

STARTING TIME (LEF SEF)
ADJUSTMENT
STARTING TIME (A4 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT
STARTING TIME (B4 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT
STARTING TIME (A3 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT
STARTING TIME (11 x 17 SEF)
ADJUSTMENT
763-406 ENV Z/Z FOLDER C SOL ON
STARTING TIME ADJUSTMENT
763-409 IOT PAPER PUNCH SIDE POSITION
ADJUSTMENT 1
ADJUSTMENT 2
ADJUSTMENT 3
ADJUSTMENT 4
ADJUSTMENT 5
ADJUSTMENT 6
ADJUSTMENT 7
763-416 I/P PAPER PUNCH SIDE POSITION
ADJUSTMENT 1
ADJUSTMENT 2
ADJUSTMENT 3
ADJUSTMENT 4
ADJUSTMENT 5
ADJUSTMENT 6
ADJUSTMENT 7
763-423 THIN B5L SIZE COMPILER EXIT
SPEED REDUCTION SETTING
763-424 ORDINARY B5L SIZE COMPILER

EXIT SPEED REDUCTION SETTING
11 - 34
Type
D Sets whether the Tamper pressing operation is performed for Zfold.
Setting range:
0:
Disabled
< 1 >: Enabled
Sensor 2 ON in outer 3-fold for Letter size.
Sensor 2 ON in outer 3-fold for A4 size.
Sensor 2 ON in Z-fold for B4 size.
Sensor 2 ON in Z-fold for A3 size.
Sensor 2 ON in Z-fold for Ledger size.
D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON time in outer 3-fold/Z-fold.
D Adjustment of punch side position for IOT paper or Interposer
paper.
D Adjusts the punch position toward the front.
* Use 763-409 through 763-415 only when the punch position
deviation cannot be adjusted for Interposer paper using 763-416
D
through 763-422.
Setting
range: 0 to 24 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 0 >
D
Adjustment 1: 2/4-hole puncher: 216 mm < paper width 230
mm
D
2/3-hole puncher: 203 mm paper width 223 mm
D
mm
2/3-hole puncher: 223 mm < paper width 241 mm
D
mm
D
D
mm
D Adjustment 5: 2/4-hole puncher: 285 mm < paper width < 297
mm
D
2/3-hole puncher: 285 mm < paper width < 297 mm
Adjustment 6: 2/4-hole puncher: paper width = 297 mm
2/3-hole puncher: paper width = 297 mm
D
Adjustment 7: 2/4-hole puncher: paper width 216 mm
D
D
D
Sets the speed of paper ejection to the Compile Tray for single thin
paper sheets of length 182 mm or less in the feed direction and
257 mm or less in the width direction (B5 LEF and smaller), other
than Z-fold.
Setting range:
1:
544 pps (285 mm/sec)
2:
735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)
3:
830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)
< 4 >: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)
Sets the speed of paper ejection to the Compile Tray for single
ordinary paper sheets of length 182 mm or less in the feed
direction and 257 mm or less in the width direction (B5 LEF and
smaller), other than Z-fold.
Setting range:
1:
544 pps (285 mm/sec)
2:
735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)
< 3 >: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)
4:
1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
No.
Menu item
Type
763-425 SETTING OF BOOKLET END GUIDE D Sets whether extra up/down operation of the End Guide is
UP/DOWN OPERATION FOR
performed to prevent misregistration during End Guide Staple
SMALL BOOKLETS FOR MIS-REGI
positioning in stapling for small booklets and in End Guide
PREVENTION
positioning in unstapling/bi-fold jobs.
Setting range:
0:
Disabled
< 1 >: Enabled
11 - 35
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1.List of HS2000 scanner menu items

1-1.Getting into an d getting out of the T est mode
< Getting into test mode >
(1)
(2)
(3)
The test mode for HS2000 is operated only from the optional touch panel. The test mode for
HS2000 cannot be operated from HC5500 operation panel.
The test mode for HS2000 is accessed by following steps.
1) From the TOP window of the touch-panel, press the COnfiguration button and access to
the Password input window.
2) Push the CapsLock key to enable capital letter input.
3) Type in the 5-digit test mode access password A S T U ~ .
4) Push on the phrase Password input shown on the top of the touch panel screen.
5) Press the OK button at the bottom of the display.
The test mode display on the touch panel screen shows the following information.
Scanner firmware version number.
Auto document feeder (AF) firmware version number.
HS2000 Scanner machine serial number.
< Executing and Pausing the test mode activation >

(1)
(2)
Enter the test mode number and press [START] to activate the selected test mode.
[ In Action ] is displayed.
Press [START] again to pause the test mode.
[In Standby Mode ] is displayed.
[ Stop ] is displayed when the test mode movement ends automatically or when manually
stopping the movement by pressing the [START] button again.
< Going to next test mode >

(1)
(2)
After stopping one test mode by pressing the [START] button, explained above, press the
[STOP] button to clear the previous test mode number selected on the test mode display.
Enter the next test mode number to operate and press [START] to active the newly selected test
mode number.
< E s c a p i n g o ut o f t h e t e s t m o d e d i s p l a y >
(1)
(2)
Press the [TOP] button on the lower left corner on the touch panel display to escape out of the
Test Mode.
If the [TOP] button is not active, press the [STOP] button to while the test mode is in either [In
Standby Mode] or in [Stop] condition to make the [TOP] button active. mode number.

(1)
11 - 36
The parameters set by the test mode are stored on the EEPROM on the FB PCB, but for those
test mode parameters which apply only to the Auto Document Feeder (AF), the newly set
parameters are stored on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.
The test modes which apply only for AF and saved on the AF EEPROM are No. 0483,
0484, 1010, and 1011.
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
1-2. Test Mode Men u Li st for HS2000 Scann er

Menu item
System Test Mode
0140 Download Scanner Program
Type
Description
Downloads the Scanner (FB) firmware program.

The LED in the front of the scanner unit blinks in green+red
color during the downloading. The LED changes to a solid
green light when the downloading is completed.
The touch panel instructs to reboot the scanner. The new firmware version number is displayed after rebooting the scanner.
Downloads the AF Unit firmare program.
The LED in the front of the scanner unit blinks in green+red
color during the downloading. The LED changes to a solid
green light when the downloading is completed.
The touch panel instructs to reboot the scanner. The new firmware version number is displayed after rebooting the scanner.
Prints a color graduation data.
The print is made according to the setting made by test mode
No. 0180 and 0181.
LED1 / LED2 (0 = OFF / 1 = ON)
Repeats from 0/0, 0/1, 1/0, 1/1 and 0/0.
Prints the test mode numbers and the set value for those which
the parameters are out of the selectable range.
Prints the test mode numbers and the set value for those which
are changed from the programmed default parameters.
Clears the Jam error display.
The cause for the Jam should be corrected before activating this
test mode to clear the Jam error on the touch panel display.
Returns the test mode parameter settings to the programmed
default settings for those test modes with which the set values
are out of the selectable range.
Caution: Following test modes are also included: 1000, 1001,
1002, 1010 and 1011.
Returns all the test mode parameter settings to the programmed
default settings.
Following test modes are not included: 1000, 1001, 1002, 1010
and 1011.
Displays the error which caused the unit to stop the operation.
The display also shows all the errors existing at that moment.
Displays the total scanning counter which is saved in the
EEPROM.
The counter count goes up in the timing when the scanning job
is finished.
Displays the FB counter which is saved in the EEPROM.
The counter goes up in the timing when the FB scanning job is
finished.
Displays the AF counter which is saved in the EEPROM.
The AF counter goes up after every 5 sheets scanning through
the AF unit, and also after the last original goes through and
comes out of the AF unit. Example: In scanning 8 originals, if
the 7th original jams, the counter goes up by 5 only.
Displays the test mode numbers and the set value for those
which the parameters are out of the selectable range.
Displays the test mode numbers and the set value for those
which are changed from the programmed default parameters.
0141 Download AF Program
0154 Test Print (Gradation)
0155 LED Check
0158 Out of range Data Output
0159 Data Setting Output
0161 Clear Paper Jam Status
0168 Clear Out of Range Data
0169 Clear Data Setting
0170 Error
0175 Total Scanning Counter Display
0176 FB Counter Display
0177 AF Counter Display
0178 Out of Range Data Display
0179 Data Setting Display
55 50
0
11 - 37
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
0180 Sequence Test Resolution set
0181 Sequence Test Paper Size set
0182 Sequence Test Scanning Speed set
Scanner Test Modes

0310 FB Original Det. Sensor
0311 FB Original Size Sensor 1
0318 FB Stage Cover Angle Sensor
0319 Stage Cover Angle Sensor
0320 HP Sensor
0330 Scanner Lamp
0340 Scanner Home Action
0341 Scanner Action
Type
Description
D Sets the resolution for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-Cycle
Operation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.
Selectable range = 0 to 4 <default = 0>
0 = 300dpi x 300dpi
1 = 300dpi x 600dpi
2 = 600dpi x 300dpi
3 = 600dpi x 600dpi
4 = 600dpi x 1200dpi
In operating test mode No. 0146 to 0153 [Test Pattern Print] with
above 2 to 3 selectable ranges are selected, the selected range
is ignored and 300dpi x 300dpi will be used.
In operating test mode No. 0146 to 0153 [Test Pattern Print] with
above 2 to 3 selectable ranges are selected, following ink drops
are used.
0 = 5 drops
1 = 4 drops
2 = 4 drops
3 = 5 drops
4 = 5 drops
D Sets the paper size for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-Cycle
Operation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.
Selectable range = 0 to 13 <default = 0>
0 = A3
1 = B4
2 = A4
3 = A4R
4 = B5
5 = B5R
6 = A3 large (305mm x 435mm)
7 = Foolscap
8 = Ledger
9 = Legal
10 = Letter
11 = Letter-R
12 = Statement
13 = Satement-R
If choice No.4 is selected in by previous test mode No.0180, the
selection made on this test mode number is ignored and automatically A4R is selected at the paper size.
D Sets the speed for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-Cycle Operation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.
Selectable range = 50 to 200 (50% to 200%) <default = 100>
This selection is active only when choice No.1 or No.3 is
selected in by previous test mode No.0180. If No.0, No.2 or
No.4 is selected by test mode No.0180, the selection made on
this test mode number is ignored and the speed is automatically
set to 100 (100%).
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
M
U
U
0342 Continuous Scanning Action
0343 Scanner Lamp Replace Position

0344 Scanner Shipping Position
U
U
11 - 38
ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected)

ON (Stage Cover closed) / OFF (Stage Cover opened)
ON (Stage Cover closed) / OFF (Stage Cover opened)
ON (Lamp Carriage is at HP) / OFF (Lamp Carriage not at HP)
Turns ON the scanner lamp.
Moves the Lamp Carriage to the HP position.
Makes 1-cycle scanning action (Lamp Carriage).
HP positioning - Shading - Scanning - HP positioning.
The 1-cycle movement is made with the parameter setting made
by test modes 0180 through 0182.
Repeats the 1-cycle scanning action (Ref: test mode No.0341).
Press START button to stop the movement.
Moves the Lamp carriage to the lamp removal position.
Slides the Lamp Carriage to the mechanical lock-position.
55 50
0 x
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
x
x
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Menu item
0370 FB Original Size Display
0380 FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment
0381 FB Scan Start Position Adjustment
0382 FB Scanning Speed Adjustment
0384 Prohibit Scanner Action
0385 Offset Adjustment (R0)

0386 Offset Adjustment (G0)
0387 Offset Adjustment (B0)
0388 Offset Adjustment (R1)
0389 Offset Adjustment (G1)
0390 Offset Adjustment (B1)
0391 Gain Adjustment (R0)
0392 Gain Adjustment (G0)
0393 Gain Adjustment (B0)
0394 Gain Adjustment (R1)
0395 Gain Adjustment (G1)
0396 Gain Adjustment (B1)
AF Test Modes
0410 AF Original Detection Sensor
0412 AF Registration Sensor
0413 AF IN Sensor
0414 AF Reverse Sensor
0415 AF Cover Sensor
0416 AF Original Size Sensor 1
0417 AF Original Size Sensor 2
0420 AF Recognition
0430 AF Read Pulse Motor (CW)
0431 AF Cooling Fan
0441 AF Continuous Action
Type
Description
55 50
C Displays the size of the original on the stage glass.
0 x
D Adjusts the horizontal position of original scanning on the stage 0 x
glass.
Adjustable range = 81 to 175 (-2.0mm to +2.0mm from the
default position) [Larger number moves the image to the left].
Changing the setting by 1 moves the position by 0.04233mm.
Default position is set by test mode No.1000
D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning on the
0 x
stage glass.
default position) [Larger number increases the scanning skip
amount]
Changing the setting by 1 changes the position by 0.0486mm.
D Adjusts the image elongation & shrinkage of original scanning
0 x
on the stage glass.
Adjusts the FB read pulse motor speed.
Adjustable range = 123 to 133 (-0.5% to +0.5% from the default
position) [Larger number shrinks the image]
Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1%
Default setting is set by test mode No.1002.
D Software lock of the Lamp Carriage.
0 x
Selectable range = 0 or 1
0 = unlocks the lamp carriage software lock.
1 = activates the lanp carriage software lock = the carriage is
locked. Other scanner test modes are also disabled also when
[1] is selected.
C These test mode are only to view the present offset parameter
0 x
setting.
C
0 x
C No need to use this test mode in normal field maintenance.
0 x
C These test modes are for R&D use.
0 x
C
0 x
C
0 x
C These test mode are only to view the present gain parameter
0 x
setting.
C
0 x
C No need to use this test mode in normal field maintenance.
0 x
C These test modes are for R&D use.
0 x
C
0 x
C
0 x
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
M
M
U
0442 AF Original Feed Action
0451
0452
0453
0470
U
U
U
C
AF IN Sensor Adjustment
AF Guide-size VR Adjustment (100mm)
AF Guide-size VR Adjustment (297mm)
AF Original Size Display
ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original)

On (Cover closed) / OFF (Cover opened)
ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original)j
ON (AF unit connected) / OFF (AF unit not connected)
Activates the Read Pulse Motor in original feed (cw) direction
Rotates the AF cooling fan.
Makes lamp carriage movements and sends the originals
through the AF unit for the amount the originals placed on the
orginal feed table.
The test mode ends when the original runs out from the original
feed table.
Brings the lamp carriage to HP position - shading compensation
- brings the lamp carriage to AF scanning position - feeds the
originals.
The test mode activates with the settings made by test modes
No.0180 through 0182.
Continuously sends the originals through the AF unit for the
amount of the originals placed on the origianl feed table.
Originals are fed with the speed set by test mode No.0182.
Used in adjusting the AF IN Sensor sensitivity.
Used in adjusting the original feed tray guide potentiometer.
Used in adjusting the original feed tray guide potentiometer.
Displays the original size set on the original feed tray.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
11 - 39
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
0480 AF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment
0481 AF Scan Start Position Adjustment (Front)
0482 AF Scan Start Position Adjustment (Back)
0483 AF Scanning Speed Adjustment (Front)
0484 AF Scanning Speed Adjustment (Back)
0485 AF Mirror Position Adjustment
0489 AF Test Scanning Side Selection
Image Processing Test Mode

0530 Default value of character recognition level.
to Default value of line edge stress level.
0578 Default value of moire elimination level.
Default value of base color slice level.
0585 Standard Scanning Level selection
11 - 40
Type
Description
D Adjusts the horizontal scanning position when scanning via AF.
D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning through
the AF unit (original front surface).
Adjustable range = -40 to +40 (-4.0mm to +4.0mm from the
amount]
Default = 0 (0mm)
D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning through
the AF unit (original rear surface).
amount]
Default = 0 (0mm)
through the AF unit (original front surface).
Adjusts the AF read pulse motor speed.
Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0% to +2.0% from the default
through the AF unit (original rear surface).
Adjusts the AF read pulse motor speed.
D Adjusts the mirror carriage position when using AF unit to scan.
default position) [Larger number shifts the image to the top.]
Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1mm
Default = 0 (0mm)
D Selects the surface of original to scan when using Test Mode
No.0441 [AF Continuous Action] and No.0442 [AF Original Feed
Action].
Selectable range = 0 or 1
0 = Simplex scanning (original front surface only).
1 = Duplex.
Default = 0
D
Sets the default settings for each image processing.

Refer to the chart on next page for the details on this adjustment.
Adjustable range = 1 to 7
Sets the standard scanning density level by offsetting the scanning density table.
Adjustable range = -2 to +2 <default = 0>
55 50
0 x
manuals4you.com
Te s t m o d e
Detailed chart for the Image Processing Test Modes from No.0530 to No.0578 on previous page.
No.
0530
0531
0532
0533
0535
0536
0537
0538
0540
0541
0542
0543
0545
0546
0547
0548
0550
0551
0552
0553
0555
0556
0557
0558
0560
0561
0562
0563
0565
0566
0567
0568
0570
0571
0572
0573
0575
0576
0577
0578
Scanning
Mode
Line
Color
Mode
Color
Screening
Items
---
Character Recognition
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Monochrome
---
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Duo
Color
Error Diffusion
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Dot Screen
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Monochrome
Error Diffusion
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Dot Screen
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Photo
Color
Error Diffusion
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Dot Screen
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Monochrome
Error Diffusion
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Dot Screen
Line Edge Stress
Moire Elimination
Base Color Slice
Default
Level
4
5
1
4
4
5
1
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
6
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
6
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
6
4
11 - 41
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Menu item
Type
Description
Default Setting Test Modes
The parameter settings made on the test modes No.1000, 1001, 1002, 1010 and 1011 are applied as the default setting for the
test modes No.0380, 0381, 0382, 0483 and 0484.
These test mode No.1000, 1001, 1002, 1010 and 1011 are the Factory Adjustments. These test modes should not be changed
in the field.
These 5 test modes are excluded from [Test Mode No.0169 Clear Data Setting], so the parameter settings on these 5 test
modes are not cleared when Test Mode No.0169 is activated.
These 5 test mode parameter settings are wrote down on a sticker during the scanner installation and pasted on the rear scanner cover by the serviceman.
1000 FB Horizontal Scan Position Default Setting
Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0380 [FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment].
Default = 128
1001 FB Scan Start Position Default Setting
Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0381 [FB Scan
Start Position Adjustment].
amount]
Default = 128
1002 FB Scanning Speed Default Setting
Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0382 [FB Scanning
Speed Adjustment].
Adjustable range = 123 to 133 (-0.5% to +0.5% from the default
Default = 128
1010 AF Scanning Speed Default Setting (Front)
Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0483 [AF Scanning
Speed Adjustment (Front)].
Default = 0 (0%)
The parameter is saved on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.
1011 AF Scanning Speed Default Setting (Back)
Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0484 [AF Scanning
Speed Adjustment (Back)].
Default = 0 (0%)
The parameter is saved on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.
11 - 42
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
CHAPTER 12: Panel messages
12 - 1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Overview of panel messages

1 . O v e r v i e w o f pa n e l
The panel has an LCD display, LEDs, and keys as shown below. When an error is generated, the
LCD and LEDs indicate information related to the generated error.
Consumable information
Data LED
Wake-up key & LED
LCD
Sleep key & LED
Warning LED
Enter key
Print mode key & LED
Cursor key
Out line diagram
Error
Cancel key
Menu key
Panel view
* Although the layout of a panel is the same at HC5500 and HC5000, some difference is in Key SW name
and a state name.
* HC5500 -> HC5000
* Sleep key -> Soft switch key
* Sleep -> Soft switch OFF
* Wake-up key (wake-up form Standby) -> Wake-up key (Wake-up from Sleep)
* Standby -> Sleep
2 . B a s i c s t r u c t u r e o f pa n e l
2-1.L ED-1
Name of LED
12 - 2
Color
Description
Print mode LED
Green
Lit : Print mode ON.

Not lit : Print mode OFF or Standby status.
Blinking : The current job is in pause.
Walk-up LED
Green
Lit : Standby status (only the power to HC5500 is cut off).
Sleep LED
Green
/
Orange
No light : The main power switch on the main unit is OFF.

Green light : Ready status or standby status.
Orange light : Sleep status (power to both HC5500 & Controller
is OFF).
Data LED
Green
The processing state of the received data is displayed.
Warning LED
Green
The warning error is indicated.
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
2 -2 . Pow er key
The Power key on the panel is used for operation power ON/OFF. When the power is turned OFF by
this switch, the machine enters the standby status. The main power switch is provided separately on
the main unit.
The power supply conditions are described below.
Power supply
condition
LED
Status
Main power OFF
OFF
The main power switch on the main unit is turned OFF.

In this condition, the Power key on the panel is disabled.
Standby status
Orange
The main power switch is turned ON, but the operation power is
turned Off.
In this condition, pressing the Power key on the panel turns on
the power and sets the machine in the ready status.
Ready status
Green
Power turned ON.

In this condition, pressing the Power key for more than 1 second turns the power OFF and sets the machine in the standby
status. However, the power cannot be turned OFF in the following cases.
When there is an unfinished job.
When a job is being received.
Sleep status
Green
Press the Walk-up key to set the machine in the ready status.
In this condition, pressing the Power key on the panel turns the
power OFF and sets the machine in the standby status.
2-3.Print mode key

The keys on the panel provide the following functions.
When the key repeat function is enabled, key repeat (continuous pressing) is activated when a
key is held pressed for 0.7 or more seconds. During key repeat, the display is refreshed every
0.2 seconds.
Name of key
Description
Print mode key
Turns the print mode ON/OFF.
Menu key
Turns the print mode OFF, and activates the menu.
Enter key
Enters a setting, etc.
Cancel key
Cancels a setting before it is entered.
Cursor key
Moves the cursor to the next menu item, next function, or next setting
item in the menu screen. (Up/Down keys).
Moves the cursor to the right/left direction in the numerical input screen.
Increments or decrements the numerical value in the numerical input
screen.
Used to adjust the top, bottom, right, and left printing positions.
Used for fine adjustment of the exit fences and stopper.
Walk-up key
Wakes up the machine from the standby status (only HC5500 power).
Sleep key
Turns ON/OFF sleep status (both HC5500 & Controller power).
12 - 3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
3.Error indication by LEDs

3-1.Outline diag ram
When an error is generated, numbered LEDs in the diagram light to indicate the location of the
error generated. This LED lighting condition provides the following information.
The color of the LEDs is red.
LED No.
Description
LED No.
Description
Paper feed error
11
K ink error
Paper transfer error
12
C ink error
Exit error
13
M ink error
Duplex entry error
14
Y ink error
Duplex transfer error
15
Ink set cover error
Duplex switchback
entry error
16
Waste ink tank error
Duplex switchback
error
17
Feed tray 1 error
Duplex re-feed error
18
Feed tray 2 error
Main unit right cover

error
19
Base left cover error
10
Main unit left cover

error
20
Vertical path upper section error
21
Option error
3-2.Cons umabl e inform ation

The LEDs in this area indicate the remaining volumes of ink and paper.
When the levels of K, C, M, and Y inks run low, the corresponding ink color LEDs (orange) lights
up.
When the remaining paper volume in the standard paper feed tray or the feed tray falls to very
low levels, the corresponding LED (orange) lights up.
When all the set inks are in correct operating condition, the [i-fit] LED (green) lights up.
3-3.Error types
When an error is generated, the LED (red) corresponding to the type of the generated error
lights up.
Name of LED
Ink change
Setting check
Service call
Paper jam
Maintenance call
12 - 4
Description
This LED lights up when ink cartridges or the waste ink tank need to be replaced.
This LED lights up when a cover is out of position.
This LED lights up to indicate a service error.
This LED lights up to indicate a paper jam.
This LED lights up when a scheduled maintenance call interval is approaching or the
waste ink tank is reaching full capacity.
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
4.Panel messages
4-1. Overv iew of messag es
(1)
Indication of error codes

Each error notification (error code) consists of an error type, categorized according to error reset
method or panel indication method, and the error point (assigned by a number), which indicates
the time or location at which the error was generated. The error point number is a sequential
value assigned to a mechanical unit. For errors that can occur in individual color systems, such
as heads, a parameter (K, C1, MY, etc.) is added after the error point to indicate the error-generating color.
Examples of error notification: S01-201, X02-123, W02-321-K1
(2)
Error type
Error type
S
P
U
X
(3)
Y
Z
P
M
Description of error
Service call
This error cannot be reset by the user.
Option device error
Unit error
Jam error
Also includes errors that can be reset by the user to restore normal operating conditions.
Out of consumable (ink)
Setting check (cover open)
If this error is generated during operations, the machine halts at the next appropriate point in time.
Warning: Continuous operations (action) may generate malfunctions. Confirm that
it is safe to continue operations before doing so.
Option error
Maintenance
Error point
Unit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Error point
0xx
1xx
2xx
3xx(-**)
4xx
5xx
6xx
7xx
8xx
Unit
System (power supply, H/W, S/W, communication), panel
Paper discharge system
Belt platen, duplex transfer system
Heads and related parts
Multi-tray paper feed
Option
Finisher
* [xx] indicates a sequential value assigned to an internal part of a unit.
12 - 5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
5 . Ty p e s o f e r r o r s
5-1.Error type
When an error occurs, the print mode will go OFF once, but in the errors indicated by [o] under
the [auto-return] column on the following tables, print mode automatically returns back to ON
after the error is corrected.
* The print mode automatic return function is not available on HC5000.
(1)
Type
Service call
Name
S01
BP motor lock
S02
S03
Elevator motor lock

Belt platen lock
S04
Head maintenance error
S05
S06
S07
S08
Head thermistor error

Ink heating error
Ink cooling error
Controller (PS7R) error
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
Exit option error

Multi-tray paper feed error
Paper feed motor lock
Exit motor lock
Blower fan lock
Waste ink tank error
Ink distributor ink level down
Auto fence error
Connected unit error
I/F Module error
Puncher Unit error
Stapler Unit error
Cover Tray error
3-fold Tray error
Top Tray error
Stacker Tray error
S26
S27
Booklet Tray error

Job information error
S94
S95
S96
Download error (loader)

Download error
PCB or hardware disconnection
Power supply error
Hardware error
Software error
S97
S98
S99
Indication
Service call
Reset
power.
Or call a
service engineer.
Overview/reset method
autoreturn
The main transport system cannot be controlled appropriately.

The elevator cannot be controlled appropriately.
The belt platen elevation mechanism cannot be set properly.
Head maintenance cannot be controlled appropriately.
Including waste ink tank full condition.
Head temperature control is malfunctioning.
Ink heating control is malfunctioning.
Ink cooling control is malfunctioning.
Communication with the controller (PS7R) cannot be
achieved.
Or an error notification has been received from the controller (PS7R).
A service error is generated in the exit option.
A service error is generated in the multi-tray paper feed.
The paper feed motor cannot be controlled appropriately.
The exit motor cannot be controlled appropriately.
The blower fans cannot be controlled appropriately.
The waste ink tank is full.
Error exists on the paper receiving tray auto-fence.

Transport Motor lock occurred in the connected unit.
The Decurler cannot be controlled appropriately.
The puncher cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Stapler Unit cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Interposer cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Folder section cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Top Tray section cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Stacker Tray section cannot be controlled appropriately.
The Booklet section cannot be controlled appropriately.
An error occurred in the function combination or output
destination.
Communication error or data error during downloading.
Communication error or data error during downloading.
The PCB is not connected.
There is a problem with the power supply.
The hardware cannot be controlled appropriately.
For debugging
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
* [ Error resetting method ]

* Reset power, or execute [Clear error] in Test mode.
* Some errors (such as PCB disconnection) may not be cleared by executing [Clear error].
* Even if an S error occurs, it may be possible to continue operations using another unit. Therefore,
certain error types require a specific reset procedure (described in Error Point).
12 - 6
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
(2)
Type
Unit error
Name
U01
U02
U03
U04
U05
U06
U07
U08
U09

I/F Module error
Puncher Unit error
Stapler Unit error
Cover Tray error
3-fold Tray error
Top Tray error
Stacker Tray error
Booklet Tray error
Indication
Overview/reset method
Finisher error
Restart the machine
or contact the
service engineer.
autoreturn
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
* Unit errors resemble service call errors but are restricted to a certain area of the machine. The machine
can be operated as long as the malfunctioning area is not used.
* [Error cancellation method]
* Restart the unit or execute [Clear Error] in Test mode. Press the Cancel key on the panel.
(3)
Jam error
* The HC5000/5500 series is not equipped with an LED to indicate paper jam locations in the Finisher.
Instead, paper jam locations are indicated by the jam area code shown below on the LCD panel.
Type
X01
Name
Indication
Paper jam in paper feed sec- No paper transport

tion
Remove the
jammed paper.
Description/Reset method
autoreturn
Paper jammed between the first paper feed section and

the second paper feed section.
Jammed paper must be removed from the standard
paper feed tray side.
Open and close the main unit cover, or press the Cancel
key on the control panel.
12 - 7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
Type
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Name
X02
Paper jam in main paper

transfer section
X03
Paper jam in exit unit
X04
X08
Paper jam in duplex entry

section
Paper jam in duplex transfer
section
Paper jam in duplex switchback entry section.
Paper jam in switchback section.
Paper jam in re-feed unit
X09
Paper jam in feed tray 1
X10
Paper jam in feed tray 2
X11
Paper jam in vertical path

upper section
X12

lower section
upper and lower sections
Main unit multiple feed
Multi-tray paper feed: multiple feed
X05
X06
X07
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
I/F Module error
X18
Puncher Unit error
X19
Stapler Unit error
X20
Cover Tray error
X21
3-fold Tray error
X22
Top Tray error
X23
Stacker Tray error
X24
Booklet Tray error
12 - 8
Indication
Jammed paper
Remove the
jammed paper.
No paper transport
Remove the
jammed paper.
Jammed paper
Remove the
jammed paper.
Multiple feed
Remove the
jammed paper.
Jammed paper (Finisher)
Remove the jammed
paper.
autoreturn
Paper jammed at the registration rollers or belt platen

section. Also covers multiple feeds.
Remove all sheets from the paper transport path except
for the vertical transfer unit, then close the main unit
cover.
(This error is automatically cleared if there is no paper on
the paper transport path when the recovery operation is
activated by opening and closing the main unit cover.)
Paper jammed near the exit unit outlet section.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in the flipper section.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in the duplex transfer section.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in the duplex switchback entry section.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in the switchback section.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in the re-feed unit.
Same as X01.
Paper jammed in feed tray 1
Open and close feed tray 1.
Paper jammed in feed tray 2
Open and close feed tray 2.
Paper jammed in the upper section of the vertical path.
(This error is cleared if FL feed sensors 1 through 4 are
OFF when the door of the vertical transfer unit is opened
and closed, or the jam release safety SW switches OFF/
ON.)
Paper jammed in the lower section of the vertical path
Same as X11
X11 and X12 are generated simultaneously.
Same as X11
Multiple paper feed occurred.
Open and close the door of the vertical transfer unit, or
open and close the left front cover.
(Turns the jam release cover safety SW OFF/ON.)
Paper jammed in the connected unit.
Remove the jammed paper.
Paper jammed in the I/F Module.
Paper jammed in the Puncher Unit or Buffer Unit.
Paper jammed in the Stapler Unit.
Paper jammed in the Interposer section.
Paper jammed in the Folder section.
Paper jammed in the Top Tray section.
Paper jammed in the Stacker Tray section.
Paper jammed in the Booklet section.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
(4)
Type
Consumable error
Name
Indication
Y01
Ink cartridge change
Y02
Waste ink tank change
Y03
Punch dust box almost full
Y04
Staple needle almost empty
Y05
Booklet staple almost empty Staple needle empty

(for saddle stitching)
Replace the stapler
cartridge.
(5)
Type
No ink
Change
ink cartridge(s).
Waste ink tank full.
Replace
ink cartridge(s).
Punch dust box full

Empty the punch dust
box.
Staple needle empty
Refill the stapler.
Name
Indication
Ink cartridge not set
Z02
Incompatible ink color
Z03
Incompatible ink cartridge
Z04
Ink cover not set
Z05
Z06
Front cover not set

(left/right)
Transfer cover (left) not set
Z07
Transfer cover (right) not set
Z08
Vertical transfer unit door not

set
Feed tray 1 not set
Feed tray open
Check feed tray.
No ink cartridge
Set ink cartridge(s).
Ink cartridge error
Check ink cartridges.
The cover is open.

Close
the cover.
Z10
Feed tray 2 not set
Z11

check
Feed tray error

Check
paper feed tray.
Z12
Waste ink tank

not set
Ink passage opening failure
No waste ink tank

Check ink tank.
The cover is open.
Close the cover.
Z13
autoreturn
No ink
Remove the applicable ink cartridge.
The waste ink tank is full.

(The default message setting for the service error indication is [Service error: S14]. The setting can be changed in
Test mode.)
Remove the waste ink tank.
(This error is cleared when the tank full sensor is activated or deactivated (i.e., turned ON/OFF).)
Punch dust box almost full
Discard the punch dust. Press the Cancel key. Clear the
print job.
Staple needle almost empty
Add staple needles. Press the Cancel key. Clear the print
job.
Booklet staple needle almost empty
Add booklet staple needs. Press the Cancel key. Clear
the print job.
autoreturn
Ink cartridge(s) not set

Set ink cartridge(s).
Ink cartridges of the incorrect color are set.
Remove the ink cartridges.
An incorrect ink cartridge is set.
Remove the ink cartridges.
The ink bottle cover is open.
Close the ink bottle cover.
The front cover (left/right) is open.
Close the front cover (left/right).
The transfer cover (left) is open.
Close the transfer cover (left).
The transfer cover (right) is open.
Close the transfer cover (right).
The left door of the MTPF is open.
Close the left door of the MTPF.
Feed tray 1 is open.
Close the applicable feed tray.
This error is ignored while paper fed from the standard
paper feed tray is being printed.
or during head maintenance.
Close the applicable feed tray.
This error is ignored while paper fed from the standard
paper feed tray is being printed.
or during head maintenance.
The safety SW for the standard paper feed tray is
pressed.
Or both the Upper and Lower Limit Sensors are activated
(too much paper on the tray).
Deactivate the safety SW for the standard paper feed
tray.
Remove the overloaded paper from the standard paper
feed tray to release the Upper/Lower-Limit Sensor.
The waste ink tank is not set.
Set the waste ink tank.
The ink passage opening operation failed.
Open the ink bottle cover.
Setting check error
Z01
Z09
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12 - 9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
Type
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Name
Indication
Z14
Jam release SW check
Z15
Z19
Connected Unit Jam Release Finisher error

Cover open
Close the cover.
I/F Module Front Door Inter
lock open
Booklet Drawer Set fail
Finisher error
Set the Booklet Unit.
Finisher Front Door interlock Finisher error
open
Close the cover.
Interposer Top Cover open
Z20
3-fold Tray not set
Z16
Z17
Z18
(6)
Type
W01
W02
W03
W04
W05
W06
W07
W08
W09
W10
W11
W12
W13
12 - 10
The cover is open.

Close the cover.
Finisher error
Check the 3-fold Tray.
autoreturn
The jam release cover safety SW is OFF.

Set the jam release cover safety SW to ON.
(Normally, the SW is released when the left front cover is
closed.)
The Connected Unit Jam Release Cover SW is OFF.
Set the Connected Unit Jam Release Cover SW to ON.
The I/F Module Front Door SW is OFF.
Set the I/F Module Front Door SW to ON.
The Booklet Drawer is not set.
Set the Booklet Drawer.
The Finisher Front Door SW is OFF.
Set the Finisher Front Door SW to ON.
The Interposer Top Cover SW is OFF.
Set the Interposer Top Cover SW to ON.
The 3-fold Tray is not set.
Set the 3-fold Tray.
Press the Cancel key on the panel.
autoreturn
0
0
0
0
0
0
Warning
Name
Paper change
Indication
No paper
Set paper.
No paper
Set the appropriate
paper.
No paper (When any tray is empty)

Set paper in one of the feed trays.
No paper (Standard paper
The standard paper feed tray is empty when paper feed
feed tray)
is selected.
Or load the applicable feed tray with paper.
Or select another feed tray (Menu 6).
Or clear the print job (Menu 7).
Or turn power OFF and ON.
Or clear the error.
No paper (Feed tray 1)
The feed tray 1 is empty when paper feed is selected.
Same as W02
No paper (Feed tray 2)
The feed tray 2 is empty when paper feed is selected.
Same as W02
No paper (Auto)
The auto feed tray selected is empty.
Same as W02
No separation sheets
No paper is available when the sorting function is
inserted between print jobs
selected.
Or load paper on the Sorting Tray.
Or disable the sorting function.
Or switch to another tray from the Sorting Tray (Menu
5.3).
Or clear the error.
Auto fence operation not pos- Check
The auto fence function is invalid.
sible
paper receiving tray.
Or disable the auto fence function (Menu 4.8.2).
Controller HDD full
Controller/HDD is full. The HDD of the controller is full.
Delete unnecessary data from the HDD.
Or the error is automatically cleared when free space is
available on the HDD.
*The error appears while processing a new job, but when
the error occurs, the processing job is automatically
deleted, so the error message also resets automatically.
No paper in Cover Tray
No paper (Finisher)
There is no paper in the Interposer.
Set the appropriate
paper in the Cover
Or set paper on the Interposer.
Tray.
Or clear the error.
Top Tray capacity limit
Tray holding capacity The holding capacity of the tray has been exceeded.
exceeded.
Stacker Tray capacity limit
Remove paper from the Or remove discharged paper from the tray.
Booklet Tray capacity limit
Paper-receiving Tray. Or clear the error.
3-fold Tray capacity limit
x
x
0
0
0
Standard
feed tray
:x
MPF
tray : 0
x
x
x
x
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Type
Name
W14
Stapler Unit not connected
W15
Puncher Unit not connected
W16
Top Tray not connected
W17
Stacker Tray not connected
W18
Booklet Tray not connected
W19
3-fold Tray not connected
W20
Cover Tray not connected
W21
No paper of applicable size
W22
W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
Indication
Finisher error
Check the Stapler Unit.
Finisher error
Check the Puncher
Unit.
Finisher error
Check the Top Tray.
Finisher error
Check the Stacker
Tray.
Finisher error
Check the Booklet
Tray.
Finisher error
Finisher error
Check the Cover Tray.
No paper (size)
Set the appropriate
paper.
An operational setting was made for a unit not
connected.
Or clear the error.
Paper of the specified size is not loaded in the selected

tray.
Set the appropriate paper.
Manually select the appropriate tray.
Or clear the error.
No applicable paper type
No paper (type)
Paper of the specified type is not loaded in the selected
tray.
Set the appropriate
paper.
Manually select the appropriate tray.
Or clear the error.
Or select [size] by auto-tray [tray selection rule: menu
No.5.8.17].
Or place correct type and size paper on the tray.
Or change the paper type input by menu No.4.x.2.
Or undo the separation paper tray selection by menu
No.5.3 if the error is caused due to the separation paper.
Or check by menu No.4.5 [triple tray source] to see that
standard paper feed tray is included or excluded, when
the feed tray selection is selected to auto.
Specified paper not available Original size error.
The specified paper size cannot be processed by the
for use
The set original cannot Finisher.
be printed.
Clear the print job.
Or clear the error.
Stapler Unit not available for Finisher error
An operational setting was made for a unit not available
use
Restart the machine or for use.
Puncher Unit not available for contact the service
engineer.
Or clear the error.
use
Top Tray not available for use
Stacker Tray not available for
use
Booklet Tray not available for
use
3-fold Tray not available for
use
Cover Tray not available for
use
Scratch sheets on Top Tray Finisher error
Paper for which printing has not completed normally was
output to the specified tray.
Check the Top Tray.
Scratch sheets on Stacker
Finisher error
Or clear the error.
Tray
Check the Stacker
Tray.
Scratch sheets on Booklet
Finisher error
Tray
Check the Booklet
Tray.
Scratch sheets on 3-fold Tray Finisher error
autoreturn
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Menu
setting
changes
are
required
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
12 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
Type
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Name
W35
Stacker Tray unable to

descend
W36
No cover paper on Sorting

Tray
W37

on Cover Tray
W38

on Sorting Tray
W40
Envelope selection error
W41
Duplex printing error (mixed

paper sizes)
W42
Paper size mix error
W99
Head maintenance
(7)
Type
autoreturn
Finisher error
Check the Stacker
Tray.
The safety device for Stacker Tray descent prevention

x
has been activated.
Cancel the safety switch to prevent Stacker Tray descent.
Or clear the error.
No paper
The Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray has run out of
same as
cover paper.
W06
Set the appropriate
paper on the Sorting
Add paper to the Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray.
Tray.
Or clear the error.
No paper (size)
The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or of a
0
paper size that can be supplied to the Finisher.
Set the appropriate
paper on the Cover
Tray.
Or clear the error.
No paper (size)
The Sorting Tray lacks paper of the specified size or of a same as
paper size that can be supplied to the Finisher.
W06
Set the appropriate
paper on the Sorting
Tray.
Or clear the error.
Envelope selection
Printing for the tray on which the envelopes are stacked
x
error. Change the
is selected to either duplex printing or face-down printing.
paper feed selection or Or on the auto-tray selection mode all the trays are registered as envelopes when the printing is selected as either
clear the print job.
duplex or face-down printing.
Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clear
the printing job by menu No.7 on the machine or from the
printer driver console.
Make necessary corrections and resend the print job
again.
If the error code is W40-129, change the Envelope margin input parameter (menu No.5.8.26) so that the sum of
the envelope margin and paper length by the paper size
entry (menu No. 5.1) is under 488mm.
Duplex printing error
In duplex printing job, the original size for the front and
x
(size) - This original
back of the print is different.
cannot be printed Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clear
Original of this size
One or more of the following selection is incorrect.
x
cannot be printed * The paper size combination must be A4R&A3,
B5R&B4, Letter&Ledger.
* Auto tray must be selected.
* Z-folding must be selected for the larger of the paper.
* Mixed paper size must be selected to ON.
Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clear
Perform the cleaning. Confirming head maintenance execution
x
Perform head maintenance (normal).
Maintenance
Name
M01
Maintenance call
M02
Waste ink tank

Near full
12 - 12
Indication
Indication
The waste ink tank

needs to be replaced.
autoreturn
The print count has reached the scheduled maintenance

value.
Run Test mode [Clear error] (5.12.2).
Or set the scheduled maintenance value to [0].
Or clear the scheduled maintenance value.
The waste ink tank needs to be replaced soon.
Replace the waste ink tank.
(This error is cleared when the absence of a waste ink
tank is detected.)
Or
the waste ink tank is full (automatic clear).
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Type
Name
M03
Operation in temporary registration status
M04
M99
Indication
autoreturn
The machine is currently operating under temporary registration.

Run Test mode [Conformity check] (5.13.1) while temporary registration status is in effect.
It will clear automatically when the temporary registration
period expires.
Incorrect ink version number Need to replace the ink No discharging parameter on the mounted ink cartridge.
information.
Upgrade the machine program version.
Paper dust removal Fan 2
The paper dust removal fan 2 is not connected or its
Error
cable is cut off.
0
0
5-2. Exp lanation o f pa nel m essages
Point
Type
Error detection condition
001
S96
003
S97
004
S97
006
S97
007
S97
008
S96
009
S96
011
S96
012
S96
013
S96
014
S96
015
S96
Power supply remote signal not connected

The control signal cable for the ON/OFF control of the 24/38-VDC output is disconnected. The signal wire grounded inside the power supply unit has been pulled up by the IP PCB to detect the
level.
38-VDC power supply voltage error
A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed by the IP PCB based on the signal
resulting from dividing the 38-VDC resistance inside the power supply unit. The detection level is
approximately 18 VDC.
Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a voltage drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec). No detection is performed when the
interlock SW is open.
24-VDC power supply voltage error
A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed by the IP PCB based on the signal
resulting from dividing the 24-VDC resistance inside the power supply unit. The detection level is
approximately 11 VDC.
Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a voltage drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec). No detection is performed when the
interlock SW is open.
3.3-VDC power supply voltage error
A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed in the 3.3-VDC power supply on the MIP
side of the IP PCB.
Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a voltage drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec).
1.8-VDC power supply voltage error
A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed in the 1.8-VDC power supply on the MIP
side of the IP PCB.
Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a voltage drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec).
Control panel not connected
The absence of the control panel unit to be connected to the MC PCB is detected. Since this configuration lacks this panel, this error indication will not be issued under normal operating circumstances.
Print counter not connected
The absence of a print counter is detected.
CIS PCB not connected
The connection of the CIS PCB cannot be confirmed.
IP PCB not connected (communication error)
The IP PCB is not connected.
Since the MC PCB receives its power from the IP PCB, this error indication will not be issued
under normal operating circumstances.
This error may be displayed when the connector is put aslant.
K head driver PCB not connected
The connection of the K color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detection
signal.
C head driver PCB not connected
The connection of the C color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detection
signal.
M head driver PCB not connected
The connection of the M color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detection
signal.
55 50
0
12 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
016
S96
017
S98
018
S98
019
S98
020
S98
021
S98
022
S98
023
S98
024
S98
025
S99
026
S99
027
S99
028
S96
029
S98
030
M01
031
S99
032
S99
033
S99
034
S99
035
S99
036
S99
037
S99
038
S99
039
S99
040
S98
041
S98
042
S96
Y head driver PCB not connected

The connection of the Y color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detection
signal.
Control panel LCD error
An error was detected in the panel LCD drive chip. Since the LCD driver will not operate when this
error occurs, this error indication will not be issued under normal operating circumstances.
K head driver PCB error
Head Driver PCB error is indicated when:
A head driver PCB configuration error has occurred.
A failure by the MIP to respond to a data request from the head driver PCB has been detected.
A communication error between the head driver PCB and IP has been detected.
C head driver PCB error
Same as when detecting a K head driver PCB error.
M head driver PCB error
Y head driver PCB error
MC PCB FPGA program error
Improper operation of the FPGA program on the MC PCB was detected.
IP PCB MIP program error.
MIP configuration on the main PCB failed.
IP PCB SPLD program error
SPLD configuration on the main PCB failed.
For debugging:
A DC startup report does not arrive from the IP-CPU within the specified time.
For debugging:
The IP-CPU does not respond to the sensor monitor demand from the MC-CPU.
For debugging:
The IP-CPU does not respond to the SQR from the MC-CPU.
ORCNL PCB on machine left side not connected
The connection of the ORCNL PCB on the machine left side cannot be confirmed.
HC Control PCB time-out
The Busy signal on the HC control PCB will not be deactivated upon the start of communication
from the MC PCB.
Maintenance call
Maintenance count reached the maximum at machine ON or at end of print job.
* The maintenance count is set by the Test Mode.
Multi-tray paper feed communication error 1
Multi-tray paper feed power line error
Multi-tray paper feed time-out
The machine status command transmitted from the paper feed device on the base was outside
the specified range (phase error).
Or the [Preparation complete] status command was not received within the specified interval after
receiving the [Preparing] status command.
The machine status command was not received from the paper feed device on the base within the
specified interval (when the paper feed device on the base does not respond).
Base paper feed initialization information completion command was not received within the specified time of 1 second after the base paper feed initialization command was issued.
Test mode status information could not be transmitted during communications with the auto fence
test mode function within the specified interval.
Auto fence communication error
A Test mode status command was not received before the elapse of the specified interval after the
transmission of the Test mode execution command.
Multi-tray paper feed communication transmission error
Multi-tray paper feed communication reception break error
Multi-tray paper feed communication transmission buffer error
R/W PCB failure 1
Initial communication with the R/W PCB failed.
R/W PCB failure 2
Run signal time-out
R/W PCB failure 3
Connection signal time-out (The PCB is not connected.)
12 - 14
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
043
S96
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
061
062
063
064
065
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
HC Control PCB not connected

The connection of the HC Control PCB cannot be confirmed.
(The HC Control PCB READY signal cannot be confirmed when the IP PCB is powered on.)
S99 HC Control PCB communication error (time-out error)
A command from the HC Control PCB was not received during the HC Control-MC communication within the specified interval.
S95 Download error (HC Control PCB detection)
An error was detected on the HC Control PCB during a download.
S95 or Download error (IP PCB detection)
S94 An error was detected on the IP (Image Processing) PCB side during a download.
S95 Download error (MC PCB detection)
An error was detected on the MC (Mechanical Control) PCB during a download.
S99 FRAM checksum error
FRAM checksum error of the HC Control PCB
S99 FRAM read verify error
The data does not match data read from the FRAM of the HC Control PCB.
S99 FRAM write verify error
The data does not match data written to the FRAM of the HC Control PCB.
M03 Operation in temporary registration status
The main unit is currently operating under temporary registration.
S98 Date/time setting error
The date/time is not set correctly.
The clock is set with a date predating the PLIP firmware release date.
Or
the clock is set with a date postdating the year 2030.
S99 FRAM access error
The FRAM of the HC Control PCB could not be accessed normally.
S95 Error in the downloaded data.
Error in the downloading data received.
S99 Machine information software error.
Error detected by the HC Control PCB while processing the machine type data.
S99 Machine software error (debug error)
S99 Communication error between IP-MC PCBs.
Error between IP-MC PCBs during communication.
S98 Error on NVRAM.
Error with NVRAM on the machine.
S98 Option connection inappropriate (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
Connected finisher type not defined.
Both the Auto Fence and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker are connected concurrently.
S99 Incorrect IP-MC PCBs version
IP-MC PCBs version is incorrect.
S99 Error on Finisher resumption information
Since there is the error on Finisher resumption information from HC control PCB, IP can not
restart printing.
S98 Incorrect controller version
HC5500 is equipped with the controller for HC5000.
S98 Incorrect NVRAM
IP PCB is equipped with the NVRAM for HC5000.
S12 Exit motor encoder error
The encoder frequency input from the exit motor unit deviates from the theoretical value.
S98 Multiple feed sensor error
A change in light intensity does not change the amount of light received at power ON
or during initialization to reset a multiple feed error.
* This error can be cleared by the panel setting [Multiple feed detection OFF].
S12 Wing motor time-out
The wings do not reach the HP when they are operated for a period of time corresponding to the
distance of travel.
S12 Wing motor time-out
The wing HP sensor does not detect the movement of the wings from the HP when they are operated for the specified interval.
S02 Elevator motor time-out
The upper limit sensor fails to activate when the elevator rising operation is activated within the
specified interval.
X14 Standard paper feed tray multiple feed
A multiple feed was detected during transport of paper from the standard paper feed tray.
X01 Standard paper feed tray feed failure (no paper transport)
The registration sensor fails to activate when the specified number of clock inputs is issued from
the belt encoder after paper transport from the standard paper feed tray begins.
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
12 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
107
X03
108
X02
109
X03
110
W02
111
Z11
112
Z11
113
S96
114
S96
115
S96
116
W01
117
W05
118
W06
119
S02
120
Z11
121
S96
122
S96
123
W21
124
W22
125
126
W23
W40
127
W41
128
W42
129
W40
130
W40
200
S03
Exit sensor paper end exiting delay

The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the exit sensor (sensor detecting the presence
of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Jammed paper at registration sensor section when the cover is closed
The registration sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the
paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
Jammed paper at exit sensor section when the cover is closed
The exit sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the paper
transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
No paper in standard paper feed tray
The standard paper feed tray is empty when it is selected as the feed tray.
Standard paper feed tray elevator upper limit SW detection
The upper limit SW for the standard paper feed tray is turned ON.
Standard paper feed tray overfilled
The upper limit sensor and lower limit sensor are turned ON simultaneously for more than 1 second.
IN test mode operation, this error is detected only at power ON or during a standard paper feed
tray moving operation.
Pickup clutch not connected
The connection of the pickup clutch cannot be confirmed.
Registration clutch not connected
The connection of the registration clutch cannot be confirmed.
Registration brake not connected
The connection of the registration brake cannot be confirmed.
No paper
All feed trays are empty.
No paper (auto)
None of the trays contain the required type of paper when auto feed tray is selected.
No separation sheets inserted between print jobs
The separation paper feed tray has run out of paper during a sorting operation.
Or the separation paper feed tray is empty at the beginning of a sorted printing operation.
Elevator motor time-out
The lower limit sensor fails to activate during a standard paper feed tray lowering operation within
the specified interval.
Standard paper feed tray elevator lower limit SW detection
The lower limit SW for the standard paper feed tray is turned ON.
Dust fan 1 not connected
Connection of dust fan 1 cannot be confirmed.
Dust fan 2 not connected
Connection of dust fan 2 cannot be confirmed.
Selected paper size does not exist.
(The error message comes out when auto-tray selection is ON).
Selected paper size does not exist.
(The error message comes out when a tray is manually selected).
The selected original size cannot be used.
Envelope duplex printing selection error.
Duplex or face-down printing is selected for the envelopes.
Or duplex or face-down printing is selected with auto-tray selection selected to ON and all the
trays are registered as for envelopes.
Duplex printing not allowed (mixed original sizes).
The original size for front and back of the print is different.
Mixed paper size error.
One or more of the following selection is incorrect.
* The paper size combination must be A4R&A3,
B5R&B4, Letter&Ledger.
* Auto tray must be selected.
* Z-folding must be selected for the larger of the paper.
* Mixed paper size must be selected to ON.
In correct envelope size.
With HC-Finisher connected in envelope printing, the total length of the paper registered, including
the envelope margin is over 488mm. (Menu 5.1 + Menu 5.8.26).
HC-Finisher paper ejection tray selection error with envelope printing.
The [Top Tray] was not selected for the receiving tray for the envelopes.
Transfer belt motor time-out
The motor shaft encoder of the transfer belt motor does not attain the specified pulse count within
the specified time.
The required movement does not complete even when the transfer belt motor operates for the
specified interval.
12 - 16
55 50
0
0
0
0
x
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
201
S03
202
S01
203
S01
204
S01
205
S96
206
S96
207
S96
208
S96
209
X07
210
X02
211
X02
212
X02
213
X02
214
X04
215
X04
216
X04
217
X04
218
X04
219
X05
220
X05
221
X05
222
X06
223
X02
224
X02
225
X04
Transfer belt unit sensor error

The three sensors that determine the position of the belt platen produced an abnormal detection
result.
Transfer belt motor error
An alarm signal from the DC servo motor was detected (detection of over-current during operations).
Transfer belt motion speed error
The clock frequency of the belt motor shaft encoder falls outside the specified range.
Belt encoder error
The frequency input from the belt encoder is below the specified value.
Blower fan 1 disconnected/not connected
The connector for blower fan 1 is disconnected, or there is a break in the winding.
Duplex re-feed unit failure
the belt encoder after paper is re-fed for duplex printing.
Registration sensor paper end exiting delay
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the registration sensor within the specified
interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Top edge sensor paper leading edge arrival delay
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the top edge sensor (sensor does not detect
the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Top edge sensor paper end exiting delay
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the top edge sensor (sensor detecting the
presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Exit sensor paper leading edge arrival delay
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the exit sensor (sensor does not detect the
Flipper sensor paper leading edge arrival delay
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the flipper sensor (sensor does not detect the
Flipper sensor paper end exiting delay
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the flipper sensor (sensor detecting the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Flipper sensor unknown paper detection
The flipper sensor detects the presence of paper within the specified interval based on the belt
encoder pulse count even though paper has been discharged to the exit tray.
Duplex belt front sensor paper leading edge arrival delay
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the duplex belt front sensor (sensor does not
detect the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.
Duplex belt front sensor paper end exiting delay
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the duplex belt front sensor (sensor detecting
Duplex belt rear sensor paper leading edge arrival delay
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the duplex belt rear sensor (sensor does not
Duplex belt rear sensor paper end exiting delay
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the duplex belt rear sensor (sensor detecting
Switchback sensor paper leading edge arrival delay (in paper vacuum positioning operation)
The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the switchback sensor (sensor does not
Switchback sensor paper end exiting delay (in paper vacuum positioning operation)
The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the switchback sensor (sensor detecting the
Paper lift detection
The paper emerge detection sensor at the transfer belt entrance section detected paper during
printing.
Jammed paper at top edge sensor section when the cover is closed
The top edge sensor detects the presence of paper when the cover is closed or during the interval
in which the paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
Jammed paper at flipper sensor section when the cover is closed
The flipper sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the paper
transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
55 50
0
12 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
226
X04
227
X05
228
X06
229
Z07
230
Z06
231
S03
232
S96
233
S96
234
S96
235
S96
236
S96
237
Z05
238
Z05
239
S96
240
S03
241
S03
242
S03
243
S03
244
S03
245
S98
246
247
248
S96
S96
S03
249
S03
250
S03
251
S03
252
S03
300
S04
301
S04
302
S04
303
S04
304
S96
Jammed paper at duplex belt front sensor section when the cover is closed
The duplex belt front sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which
the paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
Jammed paper at duplex belt rear sensor section when the cover is closed
The duplex belt rear sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which
the paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
Jammed paper at switchback sensor section when the cover is closed
The switchback sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the
paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.
Flipper cover not set
The flipper cover is not set.
Switchback unit not set
The switchback unit is not set.
Belt platen operation error 1
The HP position sensor fails to activate when the belt platen is operated.
Belt platen elevator clutch not connected
The connection of the belt platen elevator clutch cannot be confirmed.
Gate solenoid not connected
The connection of the gate solenoid cannot be confirmed.
Duplex transport not connected
The connection of the duplex transport unit cannot be confirmed.
Re-feed pickup clutch not connected
The connection of the re-feed pickup clutch cannot be confirmed.
Re-feed brake not connected
The connection of the re-feed brake cannot be confirmed.
Left front cover not set
The left front cover is detected as not set.
Right front cover not set
The right front cover is detected as not set.
Switchback clutch not connected
The connection of the switchback clutch cannot be confirmed.
The HP position sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen is operated.
The lower limit position sensor fails to activate when the belt platen lowers.
The lower limit position sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen rises.
The vacuum positioning sensor fails to activate when the belt platen operates.
The vacuum positioning sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen operates.
Error in Image Adjustment
Paper size used in Image Adjustment is out of the range.
Or the scanned data by the CCD is wrong (out of the range).
Wire not connected to suction fan No.5.
Wire not connected to suction fan No.6.
BP spacer movement error 1
The BP spacer HP sensor is OFF when the BP spacer should have moved to HP position.
The BP spacer HP sensor is ON when the BP spacer should have moved out of HP position.
When the BP spacer should have moved to the NORMAL paper position (moved to the left), the
limit sensor does not go ON.
When the BP spacer should have moved out from the NORMAL paper position towards the HP
position (moved to the right), the limit sensor does not go OFF.
The left and right BP spacer position detecting sensors are both ON at the same time.
Ink pan motor time-out
The right or left sensor fails to activate within the specified interval.
Ink pan sensor error
The right and left sensors activate at the same time.
Cleaning motor time-out
The cleaning motor dose not stop operation within the specified interval.
Suction chamber full
The suction chamber sensor is turned ON.
Suction chamber sensor not connected
12 - 18
55 50
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
305
S04
307
S04
308
S96
309
310
311
S96
S96
S05
312
S05
313
S05
314
S06
315
W99
316
S96
317
S96
318
S96
319
S07
320
S98
321
S04
322
324
S96
(Z12)
S14
(Y02)
M02
325
Z04
326
Z13
Suction pump rotation speed error

The rotation speed of the suction pump falls outside the specified range (checked by the encoder
clock frequency for the specified time).
Overflow tank full
Ink is detected by the overflow sensor.
Overflow tank not connected
The connection of the overflow sensor cannot be confirmed.
Cooling fan 1 not connected
Cooling fan 2 not connected
Disconnection in head thermistor
The head temperature could not be measured correctly.
When the reading of the thermistor is -86.9 C
* Head identification information (K1 - Y6) is added after the error point.
Head abnormally hot
The head temperature exceeded 80 C.
When the reading of the thermistor is 80.0 C
Head cooling time-out
The temperature remained above 45 C for 10 minutes.
When the monitored head temperature remains 45 C or more for 10 minutes
Ink heating time-out
When the temperature of ink in the distributor meets the following conditions after being heated for
a set time:
1) & either 2), 3) 4), 5), 6) or 7)
1) The temperature is less than 15 C.
2) It takes more than 360 seconds to raise the temperature by 1 C after the heater has been
powered on.
powered on.
powered on.
powered on.
6) It takes more than 1,320 seconds to raise the temperature by 13 C after the heater has been
powered on.
7) A temperature of less than 15 C holds for more than 1,800 seconds.
* Head identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.
ID unit low liquid level
Low liquid level is detected in the ID unit of each color ink.
* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.
Reservoir not connected
ID unit air open valve not connected
Distributor unit not connected
* Unit identification information (KC, MY) is added after the error point.
Ink cooling time-out
The temperature of ink being distributed remains 40 C for five minutes.
Head voltage error
The difference of the head voltage set as DA and the head voltage acquired from AD is over 5V.
Pressure pump motor time-out
The logic of the pressure pump sensor (detection at motor 180-degree intervals) does not change
even when the pressure pump motor is driven for a certain time period.
Waste ink tank not installed
The waste ink tank is not installed.
Water ink tank full
The waste ink tank is detected as full.
Waste ink tank near-full
The waste ink tank is almost full.
Ink bottle cover not set
The ink bottle cover is detected as not set.
Ink passage opening failure
The ink open sensor fails to activate when the ink fuse solenoid activates.
The ink open sensor fails to activate after the ink fuse solenoid activates even after a full one second elapsed. After a retry, the ink open sensor fails to activate even after a full one second
elapsed.
323
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
327
Y01
328
Y01
329
Y01
330
Z01
331
Z02
332
Z03
333
Z03
334
Z03
335
Z03
336
Z01
337
Z01
338
Z01
340
S99
341
Z13
343
M04
344
S04
345
S04
346
S04
347
S98
348
S98
400
S10
402
S10
403
S10
404
S10
405
S10
Ink cartridge change 1

No ink has been detected during printing or maintenance operation.
Ink sensor of the main unit reservoir fails to activate within the specified interval.
No ink has been detected at power ON or when the tag was read after cartridge replacement.
Ink cartridge not set
No ink cartridge detected.
Incompatible ink color
Wrong ink color detected.
Incompatible ink cartridge
Ink tag communication error on R/W PCB side (ink check)
Ink tag communication error on HC Control PCB side (ink check)
Ink tag communication error, other 1 (ink check)
Ink tag communication error on R/W PCB side (no tag)
Ink tag communication error on HC Control PCB side (no tag)
Ink tag communication error, other 1 (no tag)
Ink tag software error
(For debugging)
Ink open sensor error
The ink open sensor deactivates (passage closed) in standby or while printing.
Incorrect ink version
No discharging parameter on the mounted ink cartridge.
Cleaning motor time-out 2
HP sensor does not go ON even after the motor rotates for the specific time period to move the
cleaning motor to the front retracting position.
Error on the Cleaning Motor
When the cleaning motor rotated, the pulse count was below the parameter after completion of
moving.
Cleaning motor time-out 3
HP sensor does not go OFF even after the motor rotates for the specific time period to move the
cleaning motor to the rear.
Print head configuration error
Error in setting the print head configuration.
Head PCB power supply error
Abnormal power supply is detected on the Head PCB.
FL transfer motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)
There was no input interrupt from the FL transfer motor FG sensor during FL transfer motor operation, even after the specified time elapsed.
Feed tray 1 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)
The FL feed tray 1 upper limit sensor fails to activate after the FL feed tray 1 elevator motor turns
ON, even after the specified time elapses.
* This error can be cleared by opening feed tray 1.
Feed tray 1 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 2: over-current)
An over-current was detected in the FL feed tray 1 elevator motor.
Feed tray 2 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)
The FL feed tray 2 upper limit sensor fails to activate after the FL feed tray 2 elevator motor turns
ON even after the specified time elapses.
Feed tray 2 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 2: over-current)
Over-current was detected in the FL feed tray 2 elevator motor.
12 - 20
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
406
S10
407
S10
408
S10
409
S10
410
Z14
411
Z08
412
X15
413
X15
414
X11
415
X11
416
X12
417
X12
418
X12
419
X13
420
X13
421
X13
422
X12
Feed tray 1 paper width adjustment parameter error

The correction value for the feed tray 1 paper width VR falls outside the specified range.
* This error can be cleared by opening the feed tray or opening the cover of the vertical transfer
unit.
Feed tray 2 paper width adjustment parameter error
The correction value for the feed tray 2 paper width VR falls outside the specified range.
unit.
Multi-tray paper feed multiple feed sensor light emitting intensity error
The multiple feed sensor light emitting intensity falls outside the specified range.
unit.
Multi-tray paper feed EEPROM error
Data could not be written correctly to the EEPROM.
Or an EEPROM checksum error occurred.
unit.
Jam release SW check
The jam release cover safety SW is OFF.
Vertical transfer unit door not set
The door of the FL vertical transfer unit is open.
Feed tray 1 multiple feed (transmission light intensity detection)
A multiple feed occurred during paper transport.
Feed tray 1 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s))
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) occurred during paper transport.
Feed tray 1 paper feed failure
the belt encoder after paper transport from feed tray 1 begins.
Feed tray 2 paper feed failure
the belt encoder after paper transport from feed tray 2 begins.
Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 1: S1)
FL transfer sensor 2 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specified
pulse count after FL feed sensor 1 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1
remained activated.)
Or
FL feed sensor 1 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
pulse count after FL feed sensor 2 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1
and 2 remained activated.)
Or
FL feed sensors 1 and 2 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
pulse count after FL feed sensor 3 turned ON during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1,
2, and 3 remained activated.)
Or
FL feed sensors 1, 2, and 3 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors
1 through 4 remained activated.)
Or
FL feed sensors 1 through 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 5: S1234R)
FL feed sensors 1 through 4 and the registration sensor remained activated in standby mode.
remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 2 remained activated.)
Or
remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 2 and 3 remained activated.)
Or
55 50
0
12 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
423
X13
424
X13
425
X11
426
X11
427
X11
428
X11
429
X11
430
X11
431
X09
432
X10
433
W03
434
W04
435
Z09
436
Z10
437
X15
438
X15
439
X15
440
X15
441
X15
442
X15
443
X12

The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1
remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 2 through 4 remained activated.)
Or
FL feed sensors 2 through 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
Feed sensors 2 through 4, and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or in
standby mode.
pulse count after FL feed sensor 3 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1
and 2 remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 3 remained activated.)
Or
1 and 2 remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 3 and 4 remained activated.)
Or
Feed sensors 3 and 4, and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or in standby
mode.
1 through 3 remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 4 remained activated.)
Or
Feed sensor 4 and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.
Feed tray 1 separation error
The FL multi-tray pickup sensor activated at the feed tray 1 paper feed timing or on receiving a
feed tray setting command.
Feed tray 1 no paper transport
FL feed sensor 3 did not turn on when FL feed tray 1 pickup clutch turned ON and the FL transfer
motor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count while paper was being fed from feed tray 1.
Feed tray 2 no paper transport
FL feed sensor 1 failed to activate when FL feed tray 2 pickup clutch turned ON and the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count while paper was being fed from feed tray 2.
Feed tray 1 no paper
Although selected as the current feed tray, feed tray 1 is currently empty.
Feed tray 2 no paper
Although selected as the current feed tray, feed tray 2 is currently empty.
The feed tray 1 set SW is OFF (detection of feed tray open).
The feed tray 2 set SW is OFF (detection of feed tray open).
Feed tray 2 multiple feed (transmission light intensity detection)
A multiple feed occurred during paper transport.
Feed tray 2 multiple feed error (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s))
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) occurred during paper transport.
Feed tray 1 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) 2)
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (sensor 4 failure) occurred during paper
transport.
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (abnormal A/D value when postfeed operation is not operating) occurred during paper transport.
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (sensor 4 failure) occurred during paper
transport.
Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (abnormal A/D value when postfeed operation is not operating) occurred during paper transport.
Feed tray 2 separation error
The FL transfer sensor 1 activated at the feed tray 2 paper feed timing or on receiving a feed tray
setting command.
12 - 22
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
444
X11
500
S09
501
W07
502
W07
503
W07
504
W07
505
W07
506
W07
507
W07
508
W07
509
S16
510
S16
511
S08
512
S08
513
W08
660
S18
661
S19
662
S19
663
S20
664
S20
665
S20
666
S20
667
S20
668
S20
669
S27
670
S27
681
S98
682
S98
Release request command time-out

Release request command was not issued by the main unit within the specified interval after notification of completion of paper feeding from a tray.
Auto fence time-out (fence check)
[Movement complete] was not received during the fence moving operation within the specified
interval.
Paper guide HP reset time-out
The paper guide HP sensor fails to activate during a paper guide HP reset.
Paper guide HP failure time-out
The paper guide HP sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper guide.
Paper guide limit position movement time-out
The paper guide limit sensor fails to activate when the paper guides move to their limit positions.
Paper guide limit position failure time-out
The paper guide limit sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper guide.
Paper stopper HP reset time-out
The paper stopper HP sensor fails to activate during paper stopper HP reset.
Paper stopper HP position failure time-out
The paper stopper HP sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper stopper.
Paper stopper limit position failure time-out
The paper stopper limit sensor fails to activate when the paper stopper moves to its limit position.
Paper stopper limit position failure time-out
The paper stopper limit sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper stopper.
Paper guide sensor error
The paper guide HP sensor and limit sensor have activated simultaneously.
Paper stopper sensor error
The paper stopper HP sensor and limit sensor have activated simultaneously.
Controller system error.
the controller system is in abnormal condition.
Controller HDD access error.
Unable to access to the controller HDD.
Controller HDD full.
The controller HDD fully used.
Connected unit Transport Motor lock
Transport Motor lock occurred in the connected unit.
Dec. 1Home SNR OFF fail
Dec. 1Home SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec after operation startup.
Dec. 1Home SNR ON fail
Dec. 2Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec after detection of Dec. 1Home SNR OFF.
Dec. 2Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Dec. 1Home SNR ON.
Punch Home SNR ON fail
Punch Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec after operation startup.
Punch Home SNR OFF fail
Punch Home SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec after operation startup.
Puncher Move Home SNR OFF fail
Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn OFF within 1000 (100*) msec after operation startup.
Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Puncher
Move Home SNR OFF.
Puncher Move Home SNR ON fail
Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn ON within 400 (300*500**) msec after operation
startup.
Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Puncher
Move Home SNR ON.
Side Regi. Home SNR OFF fail
Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn OFF within 1000 msec after operation startup.
Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Side Regi. Home
SNR OFF.
Side Regi. Home SNR ON fail
Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 or 300 msec after operation startup.
Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Side Regi. Home
SNR ON.
Function combination error
Undefined function combination is specified.
Paper output destination error
A function that cannot discharge paper to the specified output destination has been selected.
Finisher communication equipment error (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
Parity, framing, overrun
Adjustment setting failure (writing failure)
Setting of Finisher adjustment value resulted in a failure.
55 50
0
12 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
685-01
S99
685-02
S99
685-03
S99
685-04
S99
685-05
S99
685-06
S99
685-07
S99
685-08
S99
685-09
S99
685-10
S99
685-11
S99
685-12
S99
686-01
S99
686-02
S99
686-03
S99
Finisher communication error 1

Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC.
Abnormality occurred in the command sequence. (command sequence error)
685-02S99 Finisher communication error 2
* Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC.
* Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)
The parameter of the received command does not conform to the standard. (command
parameter error)
The length of the received command is abnormal. (command packet length error)
The dummy data attached to the received command frame does not conform to the standard.
(command frame data error)
The header information (PS, PE) of the received command frame does not conform to the
standard. (command frame header information error 1)
The header information (EM) of the received emergency command frame does not conform to
the standard. (command frame header information error 2)
The header information (other than PS, PE, EM) of the received command frame does not
conform to the standard. (command frame header information error 3)
No free space in the receiving buffer when command frame was received. (command frame
receiving buffer full 1)
No free space in the receiving buffer when command frame was received. (command frame
No free space in the receiving buffer when command packet was received. (command packet
No free space in the receiving buffer when command packet was received. (command packet
Finisher communication error 1 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
HC Finisher
Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher.
Problem occurred in the command sequence. (command sequence error)
HC Auto Stacker
Break signal received and initial communication cannot be made when the power is turned ON.
Command was not received in correct sequence timing.
No reply from HC Auto Stacker within 200ms after its power is turned ON.
The firmware version number is not replied back within 200 ms.
Ready reply is not replied back from HC Auto Stacker within 400ms after power is turned ON.
Energy saving mode is not replied back from HC Auto Stacker within 500ms from power ON.
No reply from HC Auto Stacker against the command given.
Command sequence error.
Large amount of data is received at one time (buffer full in data receiving).
Large amount of data is sent at one time (buffer full in data sending).
Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker.
Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)
HC Finisher
No reply from HC Finisher within 40 ms for two consecutive tries.
HC Auto Stacker
No reply from HC Finisher within 100 ms for two consecutive tries.
12 - 24
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
686-04
S99
686-05
S99
686-06
S99
686-07
S99
686-08
S99
686-09
S99
686-10
S99
686-11
S99
686-12
S99
686-13
S99
687-01
S99
688-01
S99
688-02
S99
688-03
S99
688-04
S99
688-05
S99
688-06
S99
688-07
S99

No ACK was received within the specified interval after command transmission. (ACK reception
timeout)
HC Finisher
The sequence bit of the received ACK does not conform to the standard. (ACK sequence bit
error)
HC Auto Stacker
After confirming the HC Auto Stacker power ON, the first data frame identification received is
not odd number.
Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher.
The sequence bit of command received by the PRH does not conform to the standard.
(received command sequence bit error)
The checksum of the command received by the PRH does not conform to the standard.
(command packet checksum error)
HC Finisher
The length of the command received by the HC Control PCB does not conform to the standard.
(command packet length error)
HC Auto Stacker
The length of the data frame received by the HC Control PCB does not conform to the standard.
The packet structure of the synchronization sequence received by the PRH does not conform to
the standard. (syn packet error)
No ACK was received within the specified interval following transmission by the PRH of the
synchronization sequence packet. (syn reception timeout)
The Finisher ACK for the synchronization sequence packet transmitted by the PRH does not
conform to the standard. (syn sequence error)
No free space in the transmitting buffer when command was transmitted by the HC Control
PCB. (transmitting buffer full)
No free space in the receiving buffer when command was received by the HC Control PCB.
(receiving buffer full)
RH internal error 1
Error occurred inside the PRH control program.
Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH.
Connected unit notification command (XH-90) reception timeout.
Unit configuration notification command (XH-91) reception timeout.
Cycle-down completion notification command (XH-BF) reception timeout.
Process interruption completion notification command (XH-BD) reception timeout.
Header information (PS, PE) for received command frame does not conform to the standard.
(command frame header information error)
The length of the received command is invalid. (command packet length error)
The parameter of the PRH information command (PH-B0) is invalid.
55 50
0
12 - 25
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
688-08
S99
688-09
S99
688-10
S99
689-01
S99
689-02
S99
600
U03
601
U04
602
U04
603
U04
604
U04
605
U04
606
U04
607
U04
608
U04
609
U04
610
U04
611
U04
612
U04
613
U04
614
U04
615
U04
616
U04

Test mode notification command (XH-D0 through D3) reception timeout.
Reset information notification command (XH-BC) reception timeout.
Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)
Finisher error 1
The finisher's firmware download is required.
The finisher can start only in firmware download mode.
Finisher error 2 (HC Auto Stacker only)
Inappropriate command data.
HC Auto Stacker does not accept the action command given from HC5500.
Side Regi. SNR OFF fail
Side Regi. SNR does not turn OFF within 500 msec of start of operation.
Side Regi. SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Side Regi. SNR OFF.
Compile Stacker Tray offset fail
Stacker Front Position SNR does not turn ON within 500 msec of start of operation.
Stacker Front Position N SNR does not turn ON within 500 msec of start of operation.
Tamper Home SNR OFF fail
Tamper Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Tamper Home SNR
OFF.
Tamper Home SNR ON fail
Tamper Home SNR does not turn ON within 800 msec of start of operation.
End Wall Home SNR OFF fail
End Wall Home SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec of start of operation.
End Wall Open SNR ON fail
End Wall Open SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.
End Wall Home SNR ON fail
End Wall Home SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.
End Wall Open SNR OFF fail
End Wall Open SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec of start of operation.
Eject Clamp Up SNR OFF fail
Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec of start of operation.
Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Eject Clamp Up
SNR OFF.
Eject Clamp Up SNR ON fail
Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.
Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Eject Clamp Up
SNR ON.
Shelf Home SNR OFF fail
Shelf Home SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec of start of operation.
Shelf Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Shelf Home SNR
OFF.
Shelf Home SNR ON fail
Shelf Home SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.
Shelf Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Shelf Home SNR ON.
Stapler fail
Stable Home SNR OFF ON not detected within 450 msec of forward operation startup.
Stapler Head Home SNR does not turn ON at least once within 200 msec of Staple Mot reverse
rotation.
Staple Move Home SNR OFF fail
Staple Move Home SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of start of operation.
Staple Move Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Staple Move
Home SNR OFF.
Staple Move Home SNR ON fail
Staple Move Home SNR does not turn ON within 3000 msec of start of operation.
Staple Move Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Staple Move
Home SNR ON.
Staple Center Position SNR ON fail
Staple Center Position SNR does not turn ON within 3000 (200*) msec of start of operation.
Staple Center Position SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Staple
Center Position SNR ON.
Staple Center Position SNR OFF fail
Staple Center Position SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of start of operation.
Staple Center Position SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Staple
Center Position SNR OFF.
12 - 26
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
617
U04
618
U04
619
U05
620
U06
621
U06
622
U06
623
U06
624
U06
625
U08
626
U08
627
U08
628
U09
629
U09
630
U09
631
U09
632
U09
633
U09
634
U09
635
U09
636
U09
637
U09
638
U09
Sub Paddle Home SNR ON fail

Sub Paddle Home SNR does not turn ON within 800 msec of detection of Sub Paddle Home
SNR OFF.
Sub Paddle Home SNR OFF fail
Sub Paddle Home SNR does not turn ON within 3000 msec of start of operation.
Interposer Tray up fail
Level Down SNR does not turn OFF within TBD msec of the start of the Interposer Tray U/D
MOT lifting operation.
End Guide MOT1 start fail
End Guide Home SNR1 does not turn OFF within 40 msec of End Guide MOT1 start operation
following movement of the End Guide1 from the home position.
End Guide MOT2 start fail
End Guide Home SNR2 does not turn OFF within 40 msec of End Guide MOT2 start operation
End Guide MOT1 home fail
End Guide Home SNR1 does not turn ON within TBD msec of End Guide MOT1 start operation
End Guide MOT2 home fail
End Guide Home SNR2 does not turn ON within TBD msec of End Guide MOT2 start operation
Envelope Folder Tray broken
Envelop Tray Interlock SW does not turn OFF within the preset interval following Tray Latch
Solenoid ON.
Stacker Tray fail
Stack Height SNR does not turn OFF within 500 msec of start of descent operation.
Tray Height SNR Lower does not turn ON within 5000 msec of start of lifting operation.
Stacker Tray upper limit fail
Upper Limit SW ON detected after the Stacker Tray begins rising.
Stacker Tray lower limit fail
Upper Limit SW ON detected after the Stacker Tray begins lowering.
Booklet Tamper F Home SNR ON fail
Tamper F Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet Tamper
F returns to the home position.
Booklet Tamper F Home SNR OFF fail
Tamper F Home SNR does not turn OFF even when the Booklet Tamper F MOT outputs 75
pulses.
Booklet End Guide Home SNR OFF fail
Booklet End Guide Home SNR does not turn OFF even when 400 pulses are output after the
Booklet End Guide MOT starts.
Booklet End Guide Home SNR ON fail
Booklet End Guide Home SNR does not turn ON within 2000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet
End Guide returns to the home position.
Booklet Tamper R Home SNR ON fail
Tamper R Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet Tamper
R returns to the home position.
Booklet Tamper R Home SNR OFF fail
Tamper R Home SNR does not turn OFF even when the Booklet Tamper R MOT outputs 75
pulses.
Booklet Knife Folding SNR fail
Booklet Folding SNR does not turn ON within 520 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet
Knife is engaged in a folding operation.
Booklet Drawer broken fail
Booklet Drawer SNR OPEN detected when Finisher Front Door interlock is closed.
Booklet Knife Home SNR ON fail
Home SNR does not turn ON within 900 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet Knife
returns to the home position.
Knife Home SNR is OFF while the Knife is engaged in a folding operation for a booklet.
Booklet Knife Home SNR OFF fail
Home SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet Knife is
moving away from the position.
Booklet Stapler fail
Stapler Ready signal does not change to Not Ready within the preset interval after Booklet
Staple Start signal ON. (= Stapler does not operate)
Error signal ON or Ready signal OFF from Stapler detected during Stapler power ON check
processing in power ON or interlock close.
Ready signal remains at Not Ready status within the specified interval after detection of Stapler
NG, or Error signal turns ON.
Error signal turns ON immediately before a Staple command is issued.
55 50
0
12 - 27
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
690
Z15
691
Z16
692
Z17
693
Z18
694
Z19
695
Z20
696
Z21
700
X16
701
702
X16
X17
703
X17
704
X18
705
X18
706
X18
707
X18
708
X19
709
X19
710
X19
711
X19
712
X19
713
X20
714
X20
715
X20
716
X21
717
X21
718
X21
719
X21
720
X21
721
X21
722
X21
12 - 28

The Paper Jam Release Cover of the connected unit is open.
Detection of open status for Paper Jam Release Cover of the connected unit
Door interlock open (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
HC Finisher
I/F Module front door interlock open.
HC Auto Stacker
Door open detected on HC Auto Stacker.
Booklet Drawer set fail
Detection of open status for Booklet Drawer.
Finisher Front Door interlock open
Detection of open status for the Finisher Front Door SW
Finisher Front Door SW OFF.
Interposer Top Cover open
Detection of open status for the Interposer Top Cover SW 24V.
3-fold Tray not set
he 3-fold Tray is not set.
HC Auto Stacker docking released (HC Auto Stacker only)
HC Auto Stacker is not docked onto HC5500.
Paper not arriving to the connected unit (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
HC Finisher
The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher does not detect paper from HC
printer within the given time.
HC Auto Stacker
The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker does not detect paper from HC5500 within the
give time.
Paper jam before connected unit sensor 2
Dec. In SNR ON jam
Dec. In SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Dec. Out SNR ON jam
Dec. Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Punch Out SNR ON jam
Punch Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Punch Out SNR OFF jam
Punch Out SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Buffer Path SNR ON jam
Buffer Path SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Buffer Path SNR OFF jam
Buffer Path SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Compile Exit SNR ON jam
Compile Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Compile Exit SNR OFF jam
Compile Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Set Eject jam
Compile Paper SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Eject SNR ON jam
Eject SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Eject SNR OFF jam
Eject SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Interposer Feed Out SNR ON jam
Interposer Feed Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Interposer Exit (Dec. Out SNR) ON jam
When using Interposer, Dec. Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Interposer Feed Out SNR OFF jam
Interposer Feed Out SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Folder Ent SNR ON jam
Folder Ent SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Folder Ent SNR OFF jam
Folder Ent SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Folder Exit SNR ON jam
Folder Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Folder Path SNR-2 ON jam
Folder Path SNR-2 does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Folder Path SNR-3 OFF jam
Folder Path SNR-3 does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
723
X22
724
X22
725
X24
726
X24
727
X24
728
X24
730
X16
731
732
X16
X17
733
X17
734
X18
735
X18
736
X19
737
X19
738
X19
739
X20
740
X20
741
X21
742
X21
743
X21
744
X21
745
X21
746
X21
747
X22
748
X24
749
X24
760-01
Y03
Top Tray Exit SNR ON jam

Top Tray Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Top Tray Exit SNR OFF jam
Top Tray Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Booklet In SNR ON jam
Booklet In SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Booklet In SNR OFF jam 1
Booklet In SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Booklet In SNR OFF detected for the first sheet of the next booklet before the Booklet Exit SNR
turns OFF for the previous set. (reverse rotation prevention measure)
Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR ON jam
Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.
Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR OFF jam
Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.
Paper jam detected on the connected unit (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
HC Finisher
The paper detected by the Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher stays
detected by the sensor even after a given time has passed.
The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher keeps detecting the paper even
after the paper transfer is finished.
The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher detected a paper when its top cover
is opened.
HC Auto Stacker
The paper detected by the Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker stays detected by the sensor even after a given time has passed.
The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker keeps detecting the paper even after the paper
transfer is finished.
The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker detected a paper when its top cover is opened.
Paper is detected on Connected Unit SNR 2.
Paper remain at Dec. In SNR
Paper detected by the Dec. In SNR.
Paper remain at Dec. Out SNR
Paper detected by the Dec. Out SNR.
Paper remain at Punch Out SNR
Paper detected by the Punch Out SNR.
Paper remain at Buffer Path SNR
Paper detected by the Buffer Path SNR.
Paper remain at Compile Exit SNR
Paper detected by the Compile Exit SNR.
Paper remain at Set Compile Tray No Paper SNR
Paper detected by the Set Compile Tray No Paper SNR.
Paper remain at Eject SNR
Paper detected by the Eject SNR.
Paper remain at Interposer exit (Dec. Out SNR)
When using Interposer, paper detected by the Dec. Out SNR.
Paper remain at Interposer Feed Out SNR
Paper detected by the Interposer Feed Out SNR.
Paper remain at Folder Ent SNR
Paper detected by the Folder Ent SNR.
Paper remain at Folder Exit SNR
Paper detected by the Folder Exit SNR.
Paper remain at Folder Path SNR-1
Paper detected by the Folder Path SNR-1.
Paper remain at Top Tray Exit SNR
Paper detected by the Top Tray Exit SNR.
Paper remain at Booklet Compile No Paper SNR
Paper detected by the Booklet Compile No Paper SNR.
Paper remain at Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR
Paper detected by the Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR.
The punch dust box is almost full.
Every 10,000 sheets processed by puncher.
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
12 - 29
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
760-02
Y03
761-01
Y04
761-02
Y04
762-01
Y05
762-02
Y05
763-01
Y05
763-02
Y05
770-01
W09
770-02
W09
771-01
W10
771-02
W10
772-01
W11
772-02
W11
773-01
W11
773-02
W11
774-01
W12
774-02
W12
775-01
W13
775-02
W13
The punch dust box is almost full.

The status of consumables in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "Discard punch
dust" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode is ON.
Staple holder almost empty
Low staple levels detected by Low Staple Sensor. (around 20 staples remain)
Staple holder almost empty
The status of consumables in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "Replace staples
(replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode is ON.
Booklet staple holder almost empty (front side)
Low staple levels detected by Stapler Low Stable F Switch.
Booklet staple holder almost empty (front side)
The status of consumables in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Replace staples
on the front side (replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode
is ON.
Booklet staple holder almost empty (rear side)
Low staple levels detected by Stapler Low Stable R Switch.
Booklet staple holder almost empty (rear side)
The status of consumables in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Replace staples
on the rear side (replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode is
ON.
No paper on Cover Tray
No paper is detected by the Interposer No Paper Sensor when cover paper is inserted.
No paper on Cover Tray
The amount of ejected paper in the Cover Tray information display produces a "Add paper (no
paper)" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when
operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
Top Tray loading capacity limit
Full status detected by Top Tray Full SNR.
Approximately 500 sheets have been output to the Top Tray. (The actual amount will vary with
paper type.)
Top Tray loading capacity limit
The amount of ejected paper in the Top Tray information display produces a "Remove paper"
prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations
resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
Loading capacity limit on the tray during normal paper ejection (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
HC Finisher
Approximately 2000 sheets of A4 LEF size or approximately 1500 of A3 SEF size have been
output to the Stacker Tray. (The actual amount will vary with paper type.)
HC Auto Stacker
The offset tray of the HC Auto Stacker is detected to be full.
Loading capacity limit on the tray before printing job (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)
The stacker tray on HC Finisher or offset tray on HC Auto Stacker is detected full at start of a printing job.
When a printing job is sent to HC.
When the print mode button is pressed ON on HC.
When automatic head cleaning is finished on HC.
When warming up is finished on HC.
When cooling down is finished on HC.
Stacker Tray loading capacity limit (stapled paper discharge)
More than 200 sets of stapled paper have been output to the Stacker Tray.
Stacker Tray loading capacity limit (stapled paper discharge)
The amount of stapled paper in the Stacker Tray information display produces a "Remove
paper" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when
Booklet Tray loading capacity limit
More than 30 sets of booklet have been output to the Booklet Tray. (The actual amount will vary
with paper type and number of sheets per set.)
Booklet Tray loading capacity limit
The amount of ejected paper in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Remove
paper" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when
3-fold Tray loading capacity limit
Full status detected by the Envelop Tray Full SNR
Roughly more than 50 sheets have been output to the 3-fold Tray. (The actual amount will vary
with paper type.)
3-fold Tray loading capacity limit
The amount of ejected paper in the 3-fold Tray information display produces a "Remove paper"
prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations
12 - 30
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
776
W14
777
W15
778
W16
779
W17
780
W18
781
W19
782
W20
783
W24
784
W25
785
W26
786
W27
787
W28
788
W29
789
W30
790
W31
791
W32
Stapler Unit not connected

The unit status in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the
current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after the
specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
Puncher Unit not connected
The unit status in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the
Top Tray not connected
The unit status in the Top Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the
Stacker Tray not connected
The unit status in the Stacker Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when
the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after the
Booklet Tray not connected
The unit status in the Booklet Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when
the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after the
3-fold Tray not connected
The unit status in the 3-fold Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the
Cover Tray not connected
The unit status in the Cover Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the
Stapler Unit not available for use
The unit status in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "Unit present: nonoperational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode
is ON, or when operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cooldown).
Puncher Unit not available for use
The unit status in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "Unit present: nonoperational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode
Top Tray not available for use
The unit status in the Top Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational" or
"Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when
Stacker Tray not available for use
The unit status in the Stacker Tray information display produces a "Unit present: nonoperational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode
Booklet Tray not available for use
The unit status in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Unit present: nonoperational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode
3-fold Tray not available for use
The unit status in the 3-fold Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational"
or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or
when operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
Cover Tray not available for use
The unit status in the Cover Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational"
or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or
when operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
Scratch sheet on Top Tray
Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Cover Tray.
Eject notification from the Finisher to the Top Tray received.
Scratch sheet on Stacker Tray
Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Stacker Tray.
55 50
0
12 - 31
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Point
Type
792
W33
793
W34
794-01
W35
794-02
W35
795
W36
796
W37
796-01
W37
796-02
W37
797
W38
798
W39
800
X23
830
X23
860
S25
861
S25
871
W44
872
W45
999
M99
Scratch sheet on Booklet Tray

Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Booklet Tray.
Scratch sheet on 3-fold Tray
Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the 3-fold Tray.
Stacker Tray lowering not possible
Stacker Safety Switch has activated.
Stacker Tray lowering not possible
The Stacker Tray safety device for tray descent prevention in the Stacker Tray information
display produces a "Activated (tray cannot descend)" prompt when the current job is completed,
when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after the specified processing (auto
cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).
No cover paper on Sorting Tray
There is no paper in the Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray when the current job is completed,
when the print mode is ON, when operations resume after the specified processing (auto
cleaning, warm-up, cool-down), or during printing.
No paper of appropriate size on Cover Tray
The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to the
Finisher when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations
Finisher .
No paper of appropriate size on Sorting Tray
The Sorting Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to the
Sorting Tray is un-setting up.(cover feeding)
Although current job concludes the cover feeding from the sorting tray, the sorting tray is un-setting up.
Paper not arriving at Paper OUT Sensor - paper jam (HC Auto Stacker only)
Paper passing out through the Paper IN Sensor does not arrive at the Paper OUT Sensor.
Paper jammed at Paper OUT Sensor - paper jam (HC Auto Stacker only)
Paper detected by the Paper OUT Sensor stays detected during printing job.
Paper is detected by the Paper OUT Sensor after the printing job is completed.
Paper is detected by the Paper OUT Sensor when the top cover is either opened or closed.
Offset motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)
Offset HP Sensor status does not change even after a given time from the activation of the Offset motor, and it is judged that the correction is not possible.
Tray elevator motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)
Either of the following two conditions exists, and it is judged that the correction is not possible.
With the Top Paper Detection Sensor detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to go down, but
the Top Paper Detection Sensor keeps detecting the paper.
With the Top Paper Detection Sensor not detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to elevate up,
but the Top Paper Detection Sensor still does not detect the top paper.
Offset motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)
Offset HP Sensor status does not change even after a given time from the activation of the Offset motor, but the correction is judged to be possible.
Tray elevator motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)
Either of the following two conditions exists, but it is judged that the correction is possible.
With the Top Paper Detection Sensor detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to go down, but
the Top Paper Detection Sensor keeps detecting the paper.
With the Top Paper Detection Sensor not detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to elevate up,
but the Top Paper Detection Sensor still does not detect the top paper.
Paper dust removal fan 2 error
The paper dust removal fan 2 is not connected or its cable is cut off.
12 - 32
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
6.Panel messages for FB and AF area

6-1. Overv iew of messag es
* FB and AF are optional items for HC5500 and cannot be connected to HC5000. Therefore, the
panel messages related to the FB and AF are displayed only with HC5500.
* The following error messages are displayed on the optional Touch Panel and not on the
HC5500 operation panel.
(1)
(2)
When an error occurs, it indicates the contents of the error on the touch panel and LED (red) on
the panel of FB is blinked.
But under the error of R98-170,180 R13-200,201, it may not be able to perform communication
to a controller and only LED (red) is blinked in that case.
Indication of error codes
Each error notification (error code) consists of an error type, categorized according to error reset
method or panel indication method, and the error point (assigned by a number), which indicates
the time or location at which the error was generated. The error point number is a sequential
value assigned to a mechanical unit.
Examples of error notification: R10-101, R98-190
(3)
Error type
Error type
R1x,R9x
R2x
R3x
R4x
(4)
Description of error
Service call
This error cannot be reset by the user.
Jam error
Also includes errors that can be reset by the user to restore normal operating conditions.
Setting check (cover open)
If this error is generated during operations, the machine halts at the next appropriate point in time.
Warning: Continuous operations (action) may generate malfunctions. Confirm that
it is safe to continue operations before doing so.
Error point
Unit No.
1,9
2
3
4
Error point
1xx,9xx
2xx
3xx
4xx
Unit
System (power supply, H/W, S/W)
Communication with the controller
Scanner
AF
* [xx] indicates a sequential value assigned to an internal part of a unit.
6-2. Erro r type

Type
R10
R11
R12
R13
Name
R14
R15
R16
Download error
File system error
USB connection error
Controller communication
error
Scanner error
AF error
AF communication error
R17
Auto-canceled error
R96
R98
Data error
Hardware error
R99
R20
R30
Software error
AF jam error
AF setting error
Indication
Service call
Jam error
Setting error
Overview
Error during downloading.
Error about the file system.
Error about the USB connection.
Communication with the controller cannot be achieved.
Error about the scanner.
Error about the AF unit.
Communication between the scanner and AF cannot be
achieved.
The error which is automatically canceled after generating and which can be operated
Error about data storage.
The hardware cannot be controlled appropriately.
(Error on the EEPROM, Flash memory and DIMM)
For debugging
Paper feeding jam from AF.
Cover of AF dose not set.
12 - 33
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
6-3.Error reset method

Type
Error Point
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R96
----------------131,132
Indication
Error reset method
Download error
File system error
USB connection error
Controller communication error
Scanner error
AF error
AF communication error
Auto-canceled error
Data error
others
R98
R99
R20
Hardware error
Software error
AF jam error
R30
500 to 510
Turn power OFF and ON.
Touch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.

Perform the test mode No.0168 [Out-range setting value
clear] or No.0169 [Test mode setting data clear].
The error is not cancelled right after being reset by the
test mode. The error cancellation is made after the
machine power is turned OFF and turned back ON. The
new data saved in the EEPROM is reconfirmed after the
machine power is turned ON and that is when the error
cancellation is made.
Remove the jammed paper from the paper feed path,
and open and close the AF original feed cover. Then
touch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.
Open the AF original feed cover.
AF setting error
Device open error
6-4.Expl anati on of pan el mes sages

Point
Type
100
R10
101
R10
102
R10
103
R10
104
R10
105
R10
120
R12
130
131
132
140
141
R96
R96
R96
R98
R98
142
R98
143
150
160
170
180
---
R98
R98
R98
R98
R98
R99
200
R13
Scanner download error.

Check-sum error.
Program file error.
AF download error.
The program cannot be written on AF-EEPROM.
AF download error : Communication between the scanner and AF.
The ordinary mode command is received under the program download mode.
AF download error : Communication between the scanner and AF.
The communication sequence error (control signal error) occurred under the program download
mode.
AF download error.
Check-sum error.
Scanner download error.
The program cannot be written on the flash memory.
Not HS-USB Connection error.
USB connection is full, but not in high speed.
The serial number saved in EEPROM is not set up.
The test mode data saved in EEPROM is out of range.
The default value of image processing saved in EEPROM is out of range.
EEPROM is not proper.
Cannot read/write data on EEPROM.
EEPROM cannot be accessed.
EEPROM CRC error.
Data in EEPROM is not correct.
The model code in the EEPROM is incorrect.
Data writing failure to the flash memory.
No DIMM memory.
No CS-SUB-PCB.
FPGA configuration failure in the CS-SUB-PCB.
Software error.
For debugging.
Communication error between the scanner and controller.
Image data transmission cannot be carried out.
12 - 34
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
manuals4you.com
Panel messages
Point
Type
201
R13
300
301
302
310
R14
R14
R14
R14
311
R14
320
R14
321
R14
340
R98
341
R98
400
410
R30
R20
411
R20
412
R20
413
R20
414
R20
415
R20
416
R20
420
430
440
441
450
R15
R15
R15
R15
R16
460
R17
461
R16
462
R16
463
R16
Communication error between the scanner and controller.

The scanning start command is not sent from the controller under the state of being next originals.
Scanner operation is not completed within the set time.
The carriage HP sensor does not turn OFF within the set time.
The carriage HP sensor does not turn ON within the set time.
Scanner : Time-out during the black shading completion.
The black compensation is not completed within the set time.
The shading completion signal is not given out by shading LSI.
Scanner : Time-out during the white shading completion.
The white compensation is not completed within the set time.
The shading completion signal is not given out by shading LSI.
Scanner : Time-out during the off-set adjustment.
When the pixel data of the black level are read during the off-set adjustment, the completion
signal is not sent out from the scanner GA within the set time.
Scanner : Time-out during the Gain adjustment.
When the pixel data of the white level are read during the Gain adjustment, the completion signal is not sent out from the scanner GA within the set time.
Scanner : CCD PCB error
The error occurred during the memory check.
Scanner : Time-out during the interruption command of SSI communication.
(The CPU did not receive the interruption command from FORCE within 100msec)
SSI communication timing :
Data transmission to the A/D converter. (writing)
Data transmission to the CCD PCB. (writing)
Data reception from the CCD PCB. (reading)
Shading LSI dose not use SSI-Communication.
AF cover is not set.
Original pulled out.
After the registration sensor turned ON during the original feeding, the sensor turned OFF
before the original scanning started.
AF registration sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) .
Simplex scanning: The original is still detected by the registration sensor after the original IN
sensor turned ON.
Duplex scanning :The original is still detected by the registration sensor after the duplex original
feeding started.
AF original IN sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) .
The original is still detected by the original IN sensor after the registration sensor turned OFF.
AF original OUT sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) .
Simplex scanning: The original is still detected by the original OUT sensor after original IN sensor turned OFF.
Duplex scanning :The original is still detected by the original OUT sensor after the registration
sensor turned OFF.
Original not arriving at the AF Registration sensor.
The registration sensor dose not turn ON after the original feeding started.
Original not arriving at the AF Original IN sensor.
The original IN sensor dose not turn ON after the original scanning started.
Original not arriving at the AF Original OUT sensor.
Simplex scanning: The original OUT sensor dose not turn ON after the registration sensor
turned ON.
Duplex scanning : The original OUT sensor dose not turn ON after the original feeding started.
AF is not connected.
AF firmware does not exist.
AF The original IN sensor adjustment error.
AF fan motor error.
Communication error between the scanner and AF.
In the 24V power OFF state of AF, the operation demand command is sent from the scanner.
The communication error with AF occurred 3 times consecutively. The initialization of the AF is
tried and succeeded.
The communication error with AF occurred 3 times consecutively. The initialization of the AF is
tried but ended unsuccessfully.
Scanner cannot complete transmitting.
Communication sequence error (control signal error)
55 50
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
0
0
x
x
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
12 - 35
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
Point
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
12 - 36
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Type

Communication error between the scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000).
The scanner is not detected.
The scanner is detected but the initial communication is not completed.
Parameter file error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Error caused by an internal parameter file during the scanning action.
System error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
System error during the scanning action.
Pipe error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Error caused by an internal pipe during the scanning action.
Scanner data receiving error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Scanned image data does not arrive from the scanner after the scanning command is given.
Scanner image processing error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or
HC3R5000)]
The image data transmission is interrupted while receiving the image data from the scanner.
Abnormal command error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Abnormal command is returned back from the scanner.
Scanner action error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Data error received from the scanner when the scanner cannot make the action commanded.
CF Card mounting error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
CF Card mounting error on the controller, such as when downloading firmware on the scanner.
AF original feeding time-out error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or
HC3R5000)]
Original detection (second original and after) command is not received from AF within given
time.
HDD [FULL] error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)]
Controller HDD became full during scanning action.
55 50
0
manuals4you.com
CHAPTER 13: PCBs and Schematic diagrams

CONTENTS
13 - 1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1.Role of PCB
Role of PCB
PCB
Role
Power supply
Power supply
Control panel
Control of the panel display, Key input
ORIP PCB
Image data processing and control of the print head
ORMC PCB
Drive and control of the mechanism
HC control PCB
Control of the ink cartridge section, I/F between FL unit.
RD/WR PCB
I/F between Ink Tag of the Ink cartridge
ORCNR PCB
Exit side relay PCB
ORCNL PCB
Paper feed side relay PCB
Transfer motor control PCB
Drive and control of the Transfer motor
Main motor control PCB
Drive and control of the Main motor
Head drive PCB
Drive and control of the Print head (KCMY)
CIS PCB
Control the CCD sensor
AF Control PCB
Drive and control the Exit paper fence
FL Power supply
Power supply of FL unit
FL Control PCB
Drive and control of the FL section
Rear side 1
Control panel
RD/WR PCB
CIS PCB
ORCNR PCB
Transfer motor control PCB

(Y)
(M)
(C)
(K)
AF Control PCB
Power supply
13 - 2
Head drive PCB
manuals4you.com

Rear side 2
ORMC PCB
ORIP PCB
HC Control PCB
FL Control PCB
ORCNL PCB
FL Power supply
13 - 3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2.Power Supply Unit

Power Supply Unit
Fuse
Fuse No.
13 - 4
Voltage
Connection
F11
250V 6.3A
+24V
ORMC PCB
F12
250V 6.3A
+24V
ORMC PCB
F13
250V 6.3A
+24V
ORIP PCB
F15
250V 5A
+38V
Main motor
F16
250V 5A
+38V
Transfer belt motor
F17
250V 5A
+38V
Head drive PCB (K)
F18
250V 5A
+38V
Head drive PCB (C)
F19
250V 5A
+38V
Head drive PCB (M)
F20
250V 5A
+38V
Head drive PCB (Y)
manuals4you.com
3.Notes at the time of ORIP PCB exchange

The parameter of head adjustment etc. is recorded on the NVRAM installed on the ORIP PCB. The
printing operation is based on the parameter recorded within the NVRAM.
It is possible to save the same parameter for backup in another memory (flash memory mounted on
the ORIP PCB).
When the parameter is changed through adjustment, it should be saved for backup in this
memory.
When a failure occurs on the NVRAM, such as parameter loss, a much time is needed to re-do all the
adjustments. If a backup of the parameter is saved on the ORIP PCB, the lost parameter on the
NVRAM can be re-written in matter of seconds.
Follow the instruction given below in replacing the ORIP PCB and NVRAM.
CAUTION:
NVRAM on the ORIP PCB includes a battery.

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
* When exchanging the ORIP PCB or NVRAM, wear a hand strap to remove the static electricity to prevent
damaging of these electric parts by the static electricity.
< Exchanging ORIP PCB >

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Remove the existing ORIP PCB from the machine.

Remove the NVRAM, which is shown by the yellow colored arrow mark on the photograph
above, from the existing ORIP PCB, carefully not to damage the connecting legs.
Attach the removed NVRAM on the new ORIP PCB.
Attach the new ORIP PCB on the machine.
Power ON the machine and go into SE-Mode (Test Mode).
Select the Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Adjustment value storage] and activate. This will store the parameter on the NVRAM into the new ORIP PCB as a backup.
< Exchanging NVRAM >

This process will not work unless the parameter recorded in the NVRAM was backed up on the ORIP
PCB before the NVRAM broke.
(1)
(2)
Remove the existing NVRAM from the ORIP PCB.

Attach the new NVRAM on the ORIP PCB.
13 - 5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
(3)
(4)
13 - 6
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Power ON the machine and go into SE-Mode (Test Mode).

Select the test mode [8.5.6.2 Adjustment value loading] and activate. This will write the backed
up parameter on the ORIP PCB onto the new NVRAM.
manuals4you.com
4.Downloading/Upgrading the machine program firmware

Preparation
Following items are required to upgrade HC5000 and PS7R / PS7R9000 firmware.
(1)
Laptop PC
512MB Compact Flash Card (CF Card)
CF Card Reader with USB2.0 port.
Upgrading HC5000 Firmware
1) Turn OFF the HC5000 power by pressing the soft-switch, and then the main power switch.
2) Disconnect Touch Panel and Scanner from PS7R / PS7R9000 if these optional units are
connected.
3) Make sure that HC5000 is correctly connected to the PS7R / PS7R9000.
4) Copy new Firmware program (PLALL***.dl2) to an empty CF Card. Do not place any other
data in the CF Card.
5) Set the CF Card in CF Card Reader.
6) Plug the CF Card Reader to USB Port No.1 on PS7R.
* If PS7R9000 is used, the USB Port number does no matter - use any available USB port.
7) Turn ON the main power switch of HC5000.

8) Turn ON the soft-switch on the HC5000 operation panel.
* Make sure not to turn OFF the power until the firmware upgrading is completed.
(2)
9) The HC5000 operation panel will ask [Update Firmware ?]. Press O.K. Key.
10) When the firmware upgrading is finished, the message [Downloading Completed Restart
Printer] will be shown on the panel display.
11) Confirming that the PS7R / PS7R9000 power is OFF, turn OFF the HC5000 main power
switch.
12) Disconnect CF Card Reader from PS7R / PS7R9000.
Upgrading PS7R / PS7R9000
1) Confirm that PS7R / PS7R9000 power and HC5000 main power is OFF.
2) Disconnect PS7R / PS7R9000 completely free from HC5000. Only the power cable to
PS7R / PS7R9000 should be connected and plugged to an independent power supply
socket.
3) Copy new Firmware program (ps7r***.tgz) to an empty CF card. Do not place any other
data in the CF Card.
4) Set the CF Card in CF Card Reader.
5) Plug the CF Card Reader to USB Port No.1 on PS7R.
* If PS7R9000 is used, the USB Port number does no matter - use any available USB port.
6) Turn ON the PS7R / PS7R9000 by pressing the power button on the unit.
* Make sure not to turn OFF the power until the firmware upgrading is completed.
(3)
7) The LED buttons on the unit starts to flash and the firmware downloading starts.
8) The firmware downloading is finished when the LED flashing ends and only the Ready LED
(green) lights up.
9) Press the power button PS7R / PS7R9000 to shut OFF the power.
10) Disconnect CF Card Reader from PS7R / PS7R9000.
Confirming the firmware download
1) With the HC5000 and PS7R / PS7R9000 power OFF, correctly connect HC5000 and PS7R
/ PS7R9000.
2) Turn ON the HC5000 main power switch, and then press the soft-switch on the HC5000.
3) After the machine starts up completely, use menu No. [5.6.1 Config Info Print - System
Information] to print the Status List Page.
4) Check and confirm that the printout indicates the new upgraded firmware versions on both
the System and Main program columns of the printout.
5) If the optional Touch-Panel and Scanner are to be connected, turn OFF the machine correctly and connect those optional units onto the PS7R / PS7R9000.
13 - 7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
5.Exchange of ORMC (mechanical control) PCB

(1)
(2)

Remove the PCB box cover.
* Wear a hand strap to avoid damaging the PCB by static electricity.
(3)
(4)
(5)
13 - 8
Disconnect the connectors from the ORMC PCB.

Remove six screws.
Slide the ORMC PCB to the left to disconnect it from the HC control PCB joint connector.
manuals4you.com

(6)
Install the new ORMC PCB on the PCB box, being careful not to scratch the rear surface of the
PCB against the PCB box frame.
* When mounting the ORMC PCB onto the PCB box, be careful not to scratch the rear surface of the PCB
against the sharp edges on the PCB box, be careful especially with the extended edges on the PCB box
frame. If the back of the PCB is scraped against the sharp edges, the IC chips on the reverse side of the
PCB will be damaged. If the IC chips on the reverse side is damaged, the PCB becomes a waste.
Be careful of the edges.
IC chips on the reverse side of the PCB
13 - 9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
6.Schematic
Schematic
A1 block
32
32
J15
USB
PS7R
Controller
MC
I/F
P181
P501
ID unit air open valve (K)
J17
D1 block
ID unit air open valve (C)
P502
ID unit air open valve (M)
P503
From P206
ID unit ink sensor (C)

HC5000:K
ID unit ink sensor (K)
HC5000:C
P625 P154
J154
P151
CIS PCB
P155
HC5000:P155
J155
J152
40
J16
J151
ID unit ink sensor (Y)
J153
P152
P153
P161
P162
CIS L
(CCD)
P545
P540
P546
P506
P547
P541
P507
Distributor aria
P586
Head Cooling fan(KC)

P508
Head Cooling fan(MY)
CIS R
(CCD)
J53
P505
P544
ID unit ink sensor (M)
CIS
I/F
26
P504
ID unit air open valve (Y)

HC5000:P154
Paper emerge
detection
sensor
J64
IP PCB
I/F
J14
USB
I/F
P581
Elevator motor
P580
B1 block
Ink fuse solenoid

P851
6
P853
Ink heater 1
J10
P854
(HC5000 only)
P563
Ink cover sensor
HC control PCB
G1 block MF paper feed
Heater
Thermistor
P852
6
PRH
I/F
P564
Ink open sensor
Distributor thermistor 1
J65
P552
P562
(HC5000 only)
G2 block
Ink heater 2
Option
P561
Receiver
PCB
Distributor thermistor 2
P551
R/W PCB
P512
P510
P509
signal
P808
Main motor
12
J54
Main
motor
PWR
ORIP PCB
P513
P511
P516
P514
signal
14
Transfer motor
P515
P500
40
Control panel
D2 block
C Ink fuse solenoid

(HC5500 only)
K Ink fuse solenoid

M Ink fuse solenoid
Y Ink fuse solenoid
P589
80
HEAD * 12
P591
J62
Power control
P812
Thermistor
P123
HDR I/F
P83
0
P801
P802
P803 P810
P804
Head driver PCB K

(HC5000:C)
P828 P824
J4
P805
HDR I/F
Front door L SW
P825
P826
80
P122
P821
P822
P829
P827
P823
Front door R SW
J5
HEAD * 12
Head driver PCB M
Scraper cover SW
80
P122
HEAD * 12
POWER SUPPLY
24V
(pump) 5V 24V 38V
J3
Head driver PCB C

(HC5000:K)
J66
Ink fuse soleno
P588
22
Power
control
P122
J52
Panel
P590
C1 block
A2 block
P809
P517
J12
OR
BP motor
PWR
10
J61
P533
Transfer motor control
PCB
HDR I/F
Flipper cover SW
P806
P813
80
P122
HEAD * 12
J6
HDR I/F
Head driver PCB Y

Thermistor
P807
J7
Power supply
P123
MF paper
feed
P814
P815 P816
J51 Powe
P817
MF door safety SW
A3 block
13 - 10
manuals4you.com
E1 block
32
J64
IP PCB
I/F
CNL PCB J57

I/F
P201
24
Dust fan 1
J53
J55
Paper feed
Duplex
Pressure
P582
Dust fan 2
(HC5000 only)
P519
Pickup clutch
P520
Registration clutch
P521
P570
P601
P634
P203
P602
P631
Elevator LED
J203
P632
P633
P634
P204
Registration brake
P522
P202
J202
D1 block
P518
Distributor aria
J201
Elevator upper limit sensor

A
Elevator upper limit sensor
B
Feed tray button
P603
Paper width sensor
J204
Duplex clutch
P571
Re-pickup clutch
P205
P572
Re-pickup brake
P607
J205
Elevator lower limit sensor
P525
Platen elevator clutch
Remaining paper volume A

Remaining paper volume B
J206
P531
P583
P206
P608
P617
ORCNL PCB
Switchback motor
P611
Switchback clutch
P610
J65
P614
PRH
I/F
P612
P620
Registration sensor
Multiple Feed sensor
(receive)
Multiple Feed sensor (send)
Top edge LED
Transfer unit suction
position sensor
to CIS PCB
P626
10
P584
J63
P586
P585
Elevator motor
inter lock
P616
Paper feed tray upper

safety SW
Paper feed tray lower
safety SW
P207
P615
P625
P613
J207
P623
P624
12
J54
Main
motor
P630
J56
P532
P587
axis-encoder
4
Transfer motor-axis
encoder
P622
Switchback sensor
Pressure pump
Pressure pump sensor
Transfer unit lower position
sensor
Top edge sensor
Transfer unit upper position
sensor
F2 block
J61
28
ORMC PCB
BP motor
FW6702
J252
24
CNR PCB
I/F
P253
P707
J253
Reservoir
Ink fuse valve(C)
(HC5500 : not exist)
Pressure valve(C)
(HC5500 : K)
Air open valve (C)
(HC5500 : K)
Ink sensor(C)
(HC5500 : K)
P701
Counter
P255
J258
Power control
P709
J255
P710
P711
P712
Reservoir
Ink fuse valve(K)
Pressure valve(K)
(HC5500 : C)
Air open valve (K)
(HC5500 : C)
Ink sensor(K)
(HC5500 : C)
J62
P831
P713
P832
P714
P702
P833
P715
P716
P717
Wing HP sensor
Wing motor
Exit motor
Exit motor encoder
Exit sensor
Flipper sensor
Duplex belt IN sensor
Flipper gate solenoid
P718
P811
Suction pump
P735
Reservoir
Ink fuse valve(M)
Suction chamber sensor
P708
P258
P734
2
P252
J60
J66
Ink fuse solenoid
P705
J254
J251
20
J52
Panel
P254
P251
J58
J59
40
P621
Duplex belt OUT sensor
P703
ORCNR PCB
P720
Suction pump trouble

detection
Waste ink sensor U
P721
Pressure valve(M)
Waste ink sensor L

Air open valve (M)
Ink sensor(M)
P256
P722
J256
P736
Reservoir
Ink fuse valve(Y)
P723
P724
P704
P725
Pressure valve(Y)
P726
Blower fan 1
Blower fan 2
Blower fan 3
Blower fan 4
Air open valve (Y)

P257
Ink sensor(Y)
J257
P737
F1 block
P727
P728
Ink pan sensor 1
P729
Ink pan sensor 2
P730
J51 Power supply
Ink pan motor
P731
Cleaning motor
P732
Suction nozzle sensor
13 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
PHR-7
P161
CIS L
(CCD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AOUT
GND
+3.3V
CISSI
CISCLK
LEDG
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AOUT
GND
+3.3V
CISSI
CISCLK
LEDG
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
+5V
PATASNSX
GND
1
2
3
4
P152
P151
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PHR-8
P625
PHR-4
P853
Ink heater 1
Distributor thermistor
1
P854
Ink heater 2
Distributor thermistor
2
13 - 12
P154
1
2
HEATER6
HEATER5
4
THM
THM
3
2
1
P851
Paper
emerge
detection
sensor
CIS PCB
P851
(CCD)
P153
1
2
3
4
5
6
P852
CIS R
1
2
3
4
5
6
+24V
INKHEAT1
+24V
INKHEAT2
DISTTH1
GND
DISTTH2
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P10
E1
E2
1
2
HEATER6
HEATER5
THM
4
3
THM
2
1
P852
P162
P16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN CHECK
+3.3VMIP
+3.3VMIP
GND
GND
DISD0
DISD1
DISD2
DISD3
DISD4
DISD5
DISD6
DISD7
GND
ADCLKP
ADCLKN
SHDP
SHDN
SHPP
SHPN
CISSDIP
CISSDIN
CISSCKP
CISSCKN
CISSIP
CISSIN
CISCLKP
CISCLKN
GND
OUTEBX
INPCLP
CLPOB
CISA0
CISA1
CISWRT
CISRDO
LEDEBLX
VCC_24V
GND
GND
E1
E2
manuals4you.com
P16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P14
ORIP PCB
P17
+24V
INKHEAT1
+24V
INKHEAT2
DISTTH1
GND
DISTTH2
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1 ZWKUP
2
3
4 COM
5
6
CN CHECK
GND
MCTXDP
MCTXDN
MCSCKP
MCSCKN
GND
GND
MCRXDP
MCRXDN
MCSRQP
MCSRQN
ENC600P
ENC600N
PSTRGP
PSTRGN
GND
GND
PRHTXDO
PRHRXDI
MCRSV1
WKLEDX
MCLATO
SLPLED1X
SLPLED2X
POWERINTX
WAKEUPINTX
IP-RDY
PRH-RDY
GND
GND
GND
ORMC PCB
P64
(D1/2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
P181
PS7R
Controller
P10
A1/3
13 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
POWER SUPPLY
P803
(C1/1)
+38V
GND
P804
P122
PHR-2
Thermistor
E1 HDRTH1
E2 HDRTH2
1
2
P123
Head driver PCB K
13 - 14
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A40
A39
A38
A37
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
B40
B39
B38
B37
B36
B35
B34
B33
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
P3
ORIP PCB
manuals4you.com
P4
ORIP PCB
A40
A39
A38
A37
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
B40
B39
B38
B37
B36
B35
B34
B33
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
P122
P805
+38V
GND
POWER SUPPLY
P803
(C1/1)
Head driver PCB C
A2/3
13 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
POWER
SUPPLY
P803
(C1/1)
+38V
GND
P806
P122
Head driver PCB M
13 - 16
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A40
A39
A38
A37
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
B40
B39
B38
B37
B36
B35
B34
B33
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
P5
ORIP PCB
manuals4you.com
P6
ORIP PCB
A40
A39
A38
A37
A36
A35
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
B40
B39
B38
B37
B36
B35
B34
B33
B32
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
P122
P807
P123
+38V
GND
POWER
SUPPLY
P803
(C1/1)
1 HDRTH1 E1
2 HDRTH2 E2
Thermistor
Head driver PCB Y
A3/3
13 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
P562
Ink fuse
solenoid
1
2
+24V
GND
1
2
3
+5V
SIGNAL
GND
Only HC5000 is equipped
P563
Ink cover sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P552
ORMC PCB
P564
Ink open sensor
1
2
3
+5V
SIGNAL
GND
HC control
PCB
Only HC5000 is equipped
P561
R/W PCB
13 - 18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CNTCHK
RUN
STOP
RST
TXD
RXD
GND
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P551
manuals4you.com
ORMC PCB
B1/1
13 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
P812
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PWCNTX
PWFANX
PW24VX
PW38VX
PWACX
PW24CHKX
PW38CHKX
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P12
ORIP_PCB
PWRRLY
GND
( HC5000 ) ( HC5500 )
P802-5 P802-6
P802-12 P802-14
P802-3 P802-4
P802-10 P802-12
GND
+5V
GND
+24V
1
2
3
4
P7
POWER SUPPLY
P802
( HC5500 )
+24V
P802
( HC5000 )
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+38V
+38V
+38V
+38V
+38V
+38V
P51-4
P51-8
P51-2
P802-3
P51-6
P802-1
P808-6
P809-6
P51-3
P51-7
P51-1
P802-4
P51-5
P802-2
P808-5
P809-5
+38V
GND
1
2
+38V
GND
1
2
+38V
GND
1
2
P803-9
P803-3
+38V
LIVE
NEUTRAL
1
2
P810
POWER
SUPPLY
P51-3
P51-4
P807-3
P51-6
P807-1
P808-6
P809-6
P51-1
P51-2
P807-4
P51-5
P807-2
P808-5
P809-5
P803-11
P803-5
P808-2
P809-2
P804-2
P805-2
P806-2
P807-2
P808-1
P809-1
P804-1
P805-1
P806-1
P807-1
P803-7
P803-1
P803-7
P803-1
P802-13
P802-6
P802-15
P802-7
( HC5000 ) ( HC5500 )
P803-8
P803-8
P803-2
P803-2
P802-14
P802-7
1
2
1
2
P814
P806
Head driver PCB M
P802-16
P802-8
+38V
GND
1
2
+38V
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5V
GND
Head driver PCB Y
P808
Main motor
control PCB
P809
+38V
GND
+5V
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transfer motor
control PCB
P817
ILPET
1
2
3
3
2
1
2
1
P816
ILPET
P816
1
2
3
P815
MF
pape
r
feed
HC5000: C ORHDR
Suction
pump
P815
1
2
NEUTRAL 3
4
FG
5
Head driver PCB C
P811
GND
+24V
P813
HC5000: K ORHDR
P807
P803-12
P803-6
P801
LIVE
Head driver PCB K
P805
P803-10
P803-4
( HC5000 ) ( HC5500 )
P803
P804
2
1
2
1
MF door safety SW
E1
13 - 20
manuals4you.com
P62
1
2
3
4
ILCVRL 5
ILCVRR 6
7
8
ILCVRR 9
10
ILFR
11
12
13
ILFR
14
ILSB
15
16
17
ILSB
PWRRLY 18
19
20
21
GND
22
ILCVRL
driver PCB K
driver PCB C
HC5000: K ORHDR_PCB
HC5000: C ORHDR_PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6
ORMC_PCB
P802-11
P802-3
P802-9
P802-1
P802-13
P802-5
P802-10
P802-2
+24V
GND+
24V
GND
+5V
GND
+24V
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P51
P802-8
P802-9
P802-1
P802-2
P802-11
P802-14
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
+5V
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
P51
( HC5500 )
( HC5000 )
P830
driver PCB M
1
2
P826
Front door R SW
1
2
1
2
P822
1
2
P828
Scraper cover SW
P824
sfer motor
trol PCB
1
2
3
6 5 4 3 2 1
ILFR
4
3
2
1
P829
1
2
P830
ILFR
P829
1
2
P822
P825
Front door L SW
P821
motor
ol PCB
Flipper cover SW
1
2
3
P821
driver PCB Y
P823
P827
1
2
3
4
ILCVRL
ILCVRL
ILCVRR
ILCVRR
ILSB
ILSB
C1/1
13 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
ID unit ink
sensor (Y)
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
P505
5
4
3
2
1
P505
1
2
3
4
P540
ID unit ink
sensor (M)
P540
ID unit ink
sensor (C)
(HC5000 : C)
1
2
3
4
P506
4
3
2
1
P506
P545
1
2
3
4
(HC5000 : K)
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
P541
5
4
3
2
1
P541
P544
1
2
3
4
P546
ID unit ink
sensor (K)
P547
ORIP PCB
P14
(A1/3)
1
2
3
4
ID unit air open valve (K)
1
2
ID unit air open valve (C)
1
2
3
ID unit air open valve (M)
1
2
ID unit air open valve (Y)
1
2
3
CN CHECK
GND
MCTXDP
MCTXDN
MCSCKP
MCSCKN
GND
GND
MCRXDP
MCRXDN
MCSRQP
MCSRQN
ENC600P
ENC600N
PSTRGP
PSTRGN
GND
GND
PRHTXD
O
PRHRXDI
MCRSV1
WKLEDX
MCLATO
SLPLED1
SLPLED2
X
POWERI
X
WAKEUPIN
NTX
TX
IP_RDY
PRH_RD
Y
GND
GND
GND
DISTKCCNTX
KDISTFLX
GND
CDISTFLX
GND
GND
DISTMYCNTX
MDISTFLX
GND
YDISTFLX
GND
GND
KDISTSOL
+24V
CDISTSOL
+24V
MDISTSOL
+24V
YDISTSOL
+24V
HDFAN1
+24V
HDFAN2
+24V
ELVMTR1
ELVMTR2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
P64
P57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
P55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
P56
1
2
3
4
5
P53
ORMC PCB
P63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
X
P
X
P
X
P
X
Head Cooling
fan(KC)
1
2
Head Cooling
fan(MY)
1
2
Elevator motor
13 - 22
1
2
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
1
2
3
manuals4you.com
P56
P63
1
2
Pickup clutch
1
2
Registration clutch
1
2
Registration brake
1
2
Platen elevator
clutch
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
P522
FDCL
+24V
REGCL
+24V
REGBKCL
+24V
BPMVCL
+24V
DUPCL
+24V
DUPFDCL
+24V
DUPBKCL
+24V
SWBCL
+24V
DSTFAN1
+24V
DSTFAN2
+24V
SWBKP1
SWBKDIS1
SWBKP2
SWBKDIS2
P522
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ORNCL PCB
P201
(E1/1)
DUPCL
+24V
DUPFDCL
+24V
DUPBKCL
+24V
P587
+5V 1
ENCA 2
ENCB 3
ENCZ 4
GND 5
GND 6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
Switchback
clutch
1
2
Transfer motor-axis
encoder
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PFUPLIM
X
Dust fan 1
1
2
PFUPLIM
X
PFLOLIM
X
PFLOLIM
X
1
2
3
4
P584
P584
P586
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
PFUPLIMX
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
1
Re-pickup
clutch
Re-pickup
brake
Dust fan 2
This is in case of HC5000.
This Fan of HC5500 is connected to
P58 (D 2/2 area).
P531
ORMC PCB
PFCNTX
ELVLED_PWR
ELEVLEDX
PFPRESSX
PFUPAX
PFUPBX
ELEVSW
PWVR1
PFSIZESNSX
PFEXISTSNSX
PFNAEMP
PFEMP
PFLOX
DFLED
PATASNSX
TOPLED
MNTPOSSNS
REVBLTSNSX
SBSNSX
REGSNSX
A_DFSNS1
TOPSNS
BPHPSNS
BPLIMSNS
ROTCHK
PUMP
GND
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
P532
P55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
P532
P57
Switchback motor
Paper feed tray upper

safety SW
PFUPLIMX
P585
Paper feed tray lower
safety SW
D 1/2
13 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
P512
Main motor
control
P513
Main motor
power supply
P516
Transfer motor
control
P517
Transfer motor
power supply
P510
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
H+
HHvHv+
HuHu+
HwHw+
FG
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
2
3
W
V
U
1
2
3
P511
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
H+
HHvHv+
HuHu+
HwHw+
FG
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
P514
1
2
3
W
V
U
1
2
3
P509
P533
Transfer motor control

PCB
P515
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BMCLK
MBFG
MBM0
MBM1
RESET OUT
MBRDYX
MBDOUT
MBEMG
MBSCK
MBEBL
MBSDAT
GND
DUPCLK
DUPFG
DUPM0
DUPM1
RESET OUT
DUPRDYX
DUPDOUT
DUPEMG
DUPSCK
DUPEBL
DUPSDAT
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P54
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P61
ORM
P500
1-40
1-40
P52
ORPNL_PCB
P589
Ink fuse valve(C)
P588
Ink fuse valve(K)
P590
Ink fuse valve(M)
P591
Ink fuse valve(Y)
KSUPSOL
+24V
CSUPSOL
+24V
MSUPSOL
+24V
YSUPSOL
+24V
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P66
2
1
2
1
This is in case of HC5500.

These parts of HC5000 are connected to
ORCNR PCB P258.
13 - 24
manuals4you.com
P5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P54
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
EXITSNSX
FLOTSNSX
FLOUTSNSX
DUPGTSOL
WEISTBTL
SUCPUMP1
SUCPUMPCHK1
CMBFLX
CMBCNTX
WEISTNF
STOFSNSX
STOFCNTX
COUNT
COUNTCNTX
DSTFAN2
+24V
(HC5000)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
This is in case of HC5500. Dust fan 2

This Fan of HC5000 is connected to P55.
P61
(HC5500)
P59
ORMC PCB
-40
(HC5500)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
P52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
BPFAN1
BPFAN2
BPFAN3
BPFAN4
BPFAN5
BPFAN6
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
GND
BPTOPLED
BPTOPTR
INKPSNS1
INKPSNS2
INK1
INK2
NZP1
NZDIS1
NZP2
NZDIS2
NZHPSNS
WINGHP
WINGP1
WINGDIS1
WINGP2
WINGDIS2
EXITENC
+24V EXIT
EXITMTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P66
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
KSUPSOL
KPURSOL
KRSVOPSOL
KSTNKFLX
STNKKCNTX
+24V VAL
CSUPSOL
CPURSOL
CRSVOPSOL
CSTNKFLX
STNKCCNTX
+24V VAL
MSUPSOL
MPURSOL
MRSVOPSOL
MSTNKFLX
STNKMCNTX
+24V VAL
YSUPSOL
YPURSOL
YRSVOPSOL
YSTNKFLX
STNKYCNTX
GND
GND
GND
FSPSNS1
RSPSNS1
SP2P1
SP2DIS1
SP2P2
SP2DIS2
ORCNR PCB
P251
(F1/2)
(HC5000)
P59
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
(HC5500)
P60
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
BLTCALENC
EXITSNSX
FLOTSNSX
FLOUTSNSX
DUPGTSOL
WEISTBTL
SUCPUMP1
SUCPUMPCHK1
CMBFLX
CMBCNTX
KSUCSELSOL
WEISTNF
STOFSNSX
STOFCNTX
COUNT
COUNTCNTX
BPFAN1
BPFAN2
BPFAN3
BPFAN4
INKPSNS1
INKPSNS2
INK1
INK2
NZP1
NZDIS1
NZP2
NZDIS2
NZHPSNS
WINGHP
WINGP1
WINGDIS1
WINGP2
WINGDIS2
EXITMTR
EXITENC
ORCNR PCB
P252
(F1/2)
(HC5000)
P60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
KSUPSOL
KPURSOL
KRSVOPSOL
KSTNKFLX
STNKKCNTX
GND
CSUPSOL
CPURSOL
CRSVOPSOL
CSTNKFLX
STNKCCNTX
GND
MSUPSOL
MPURSOL
MRSVOPSOL
MSTNKFLX
STNKMCNTX
GND
YSUPSOL
YPURSOL
YRSVOPSOL
YSTNKFLX
STNKYCNTX
GND
ORCNR PCB
P253
(F1/2)
D 2/2
13 - 25
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
ORMC PCB
P57
(D1/2)
Multiple Feed P610

sensor
(send)
(HC5500)
ORCIS PCB
P154
(A1/1)
2
1
(HC5000)
CIS PCB
P155
3
2
1
(Paper emerge detection sensor)

P612
Top edge LED
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
Transfer unitP620
suction position
sensor
3
2
1
PFCNTX
ELVLED_PWR
ELEVLEDX
PFPRESSX
PFUPAX
PFUPBX
ELEVSW
PWVR1
PFSIZESNSX
PFEXISTSNSX
PFNAEMP
PFEMP
PFLOX
DFLED
PATASNSX
TOPLED
MNTPOSSNS
REVBLTSNSX
SBSNSX
REGSNSX
A_DFSNS1
TOPSNS
BPHPSNS
BPLIMSNS
ROTCHK
PUMP
GND
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
DFLED
VCC
GND
PATASNSX
VCC
GND
TOPLED
GND
BPLIMSNS
VCC
GND
REVBLTSNSX
VCC
GND
SBSNSX
VCC
GND
REGSNSX
VCC
GND
DFSNS
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
P201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
P206
P202
P203
P204
ORCNL_PCB
P205
P207
1
2
3
P625
3
2
1
1
2
3
3
2
1
P617
3
2
1
7
GND
6
REGSNSX
5
VCC
4
GND
3
DFSNS 2
VCC
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Multiple Feed P611

sensor
(receive)
3
2
1
13 - 26
P608
Registration
sensor
P608
Switchback
sensor
P626
3
2
1
P626
P615
Duplex belt OUT
sensor
3
2
1
manuals4you.com
P201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
P206
P202
1
2
ELVLED
1
2
ELVLED
2
1
1
2
3
4
ELEVSW
GND
P203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
P204
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
PFPRESSX
VCC
GND
PFUPAX
VCC
GND
PFUPBX
VCC
GND
ELEVSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
PP_WIDTH
VCC
GND
PP_LNGTH
VCC
GND
PP_EXIST
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VCC
PFLOX
GND
VCC
PFEMP
GND
VCC
PFNAEMP
GND
P634
Elevator LED
P631
GND
3
PFPRESSX 2
VCC
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1213
14
15
Paper feed
pressure sensor
GND
PFUPAX
VCC
3
2
1
P632
Elevator upper limit
sensor A
GND
PFUPBX
VCC
3
2
1
P633
Elevator upper limit
sensor B
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P603
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Paper width sensor
Paper size
detection sensor
Paper detection
sensor
ORCNL_PCB
Elevator lower limit

sensor
P207
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
+24V
PUMP
GND
ROTCHK
VCC
GND
BPLIMSNS
VCC
GND
BPHPSNS
VCC
TOPSNS
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
1
P613
Pressure pump
3
2
1
P623
Pressure pump
sensor
3
2
1
P624
Transfer unit lower
position sensor
P630
P630
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
GND
BPHPSNS
VCC
TOPSNS
VCC
P607
P205
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Remaining paper
volume B
Remaining paper
volume A
3
2
1
P622
Transfer unit upper
position sensor
3
2
1
P621
Top edge
sensor
E1/1
13 - 27
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(HC5000)
ORMC PCB
P58
(D2/2)
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
BLTCALENC
EXITSNSX
FLOTSNSX
FLOUTSNSX
DUPGTSOL
WEISTBTL
SUCPUMP1
SUCPUMPCHK1
CMBFLX
CMBCNTX
KSUCSELSOL
WEISTNF
STOFSNSX
STOFCNTX
COUNT
COUNTCNTX
(HC5500)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P251
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P252
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
P253
(HC5000)
ORMC PCB
P59
(D2/2)
BPFAN1
BPFAN2
BPFAN3
BPFAN4
INKPSNS1
INKPSNS2
INK1
INK2
NZP1
NZDIS1
NZP2
NZDIS2
NZHPSNS
WINGHP
WINGP1
WINGDIS1
WINGP2
WINGDIS2
EXITMTR
EXITENC
ORMC PCB
P60
(D2/2)
13 - 28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
P251
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P252
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
P253
P258
P258
(HC5500)
(HC5000)
KSUPSOL
KPURSOL
KRSVOPSOL
KSTNKFLX
STNKKCNTX
GND
CSUPSOL
CPURSOL
CRSVOPSOL
CSTNKFLX
STNKCCNTX
GND
MSUPSOL
MPURSOL
MRSVOPSOL
MSTNKFLX
STNKMCNTX
GND
YSUPSOL
YPURSOL
YRSVOPSOL
YSTNKFLX
STNKYCNTX
GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
EXITSNSX
FLOTSNSX
FLOUTSNSX
DUPGTSOL
WEISTBTL
SUCPUMP1
SUCPUMPCHK1
CMBFLX
CMBCNTX
WEISTNF
STOFSNSX
STOFCNTX
COUNT
COUNTCNTX
BPFAN1
BPFAN2
BPFAN3
BPFAN4
BPFAN5
BPFAN6
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
+24V FAN
GND
BPTOPLED
BPTOPTR
INKPSNS1
INKPSNS2
INK1
INK2
NZP1
NZDIS1
NZP2
NZDIS2
NZHPSNS
WINGHP
WINGP1
WINGDIS1
WINGP2
WINGDIS2
EXITENC
+24V EXIT
EXITMTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
KSUPSOL
+24V
KPURSOL
+24V
KRSVOPSOL
+24V
KSTNKFLX
GND
STNKKCNTX
GND
CSUPSOL
+24V
CPURSOL
+24V
CRSVOPSOL
+24V
CSTNKFLX
GND
STNKCCNTX
GND
MSUPSOL
+24V
MPURSOL
+24V
MRSVOPSOL
+24V
MSTNKFLX
GND
STNKMCNTX
GND
YSUPSOL
+24V
YPURSOL
+24V
YRSVOPSOL
+24V
YSTNKFLX
GND
STNKYCNTX
GND
ORCNR PCB
(HC5500)
KSUPSOL
KPURSOL
KRSVOPSOL
KSTNKFLX
STNKKCNTX
+24V VAL
CSUPSOL
CPURSOL
CRSVOPSOL
CSTNKFLX
STNKCCNTX
+24V VAL
MSUPSOL
MPURSOL
MRSVOPSOL
MSTNKFLX
STNKMCNTX
+24V VAL
YSUPSOL
YPURSOL
YRSVOPSOL
YSTNKFLX
STNKYCNTX
GND
GND
GND
FSPSNS1
RSPSNS1
SP2P1
SP2DIS1
SP2P2
SP2DIS2
manuals4you.com
In case of HC5500, these parts

2
P701 P701 are not for K but for C.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
KSUPSOL
+24V
KPURSOL
+24V
KRSVOPSOL
+24V
KSTNKFLX
GND
STNKKCNTX
GND
CSUPSOL
+24V
CPURSOL
+24V
CRSVOPSOL
+24V
CSTNKFLX
GND
STNKCCNTX
GND
MSUPSOL
+24V
MPURSOL
+24V
MRSVOPSOL
+24V
MSTNKFLX
GND
STNKMCNTX
GND
YSUPSOL
+24V
YPURSOL
+24V
YRSVOPSOL
+24V
YSTNKFLX
GND
STNKYCNTX
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
KSUPSOL
+24V
KPURSOL
+24V
KRSVOPSOL
+24V
KSTNKFLX
GND
STNKKCNTX
GND
K CN
P702 P702
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
P703
CSUPSOL
+24V
CPURSOL
+24V
CRSVOPSOL
+24V
CSTNKFLX
GND
STNKCCNTX
GND
P703
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSUPSOL
+24V
MPURSOL
+24V
MRSVOPSOL
+24V
MSTNKFLX
GND
STNKMCNTX
GND
M CN
P704 P704
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
Y CN
Ink fuse valve(K)
2
1
Pressure valve(K)
2
1
4
3
2
1
Air open valve (K)

P734
Ink sensor(K)
In case of HC5500, these parts

are not for C but for K.
C CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
YSUPSOL
+24V
YPURSOL
+24V
YRSVOPSOL
+24V
YSTNKFLX
GND
STNKYCNTX
GND
2
1
Ink fuse valve(C)
2
1
Pressure valve(C)
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
Air open valve (C)

P735
Ink sensor(C)
Ink fuse valve(M)

Pressure valve(M)
2
1
Air open valve (M)

4
3
2
1
P736
Ink sensor(M)
2
1
Ink fuse valve(Y)
2
1
Pressure valve(Y)
2
1
Air open valve (Y)
4
3
2
1
P737
Ink sensor(Y)
In case of HC5500, these Ink fuse valves

are not connected in this area.
F 1/2
13 - 29
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
(HC5000 is not equiped.)
P722
P723
Blower fan 1
1
2
P724
Blower fan 2
1
2
P725
Blower fan 3
1
2
P726
Blower fan 4
1
2
P741
Blower fan 5
1
2
P742
Blower fan 6
1
2
P751
BP spacer
sensor
LIM
1
2
P754
BP spacer HP
sensor
1
2
BPFAN1
+24V
BPFAN2
+24V
BPFAN3
+24V
BPFAN4
+24V
BPFAN5
+24V
BPFAN6
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GND
FSPSNS1
GND
RSPSNS1
SP2P1
SP2DIS1
SP2P2
SP2DIS2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P750
P722
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P256
P750
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ORCNR PCB
P758
BP spacer motor
2
Ink pan sensor 1

2
Ink pan sensor 2

2
Ink pan motor

2
Cleaning motor

2
Suction nozzle
sensor

4
3
2
1
GND
INKPANSNS1
+5V
GND
INKPANSNS2
+5V
INK1
INK2
NZP1
NZDIS1
NZP2
NZDIS2
GND
NZHPSNS
+5V
BPTOPLED
GND
+5V
BPTOPTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P257
HC5000 is not equipped with

this sensor.
2
Top edge sensor 2
13 - 30

manuals4you.com
STOFSNSX
GND
STOFCNTX
GND
CMBFLX
GND
CMBCNTX
GND
SUCPUMP1
GND
SUCPUMPCHK1
GND
GND
WEISTBTL
+5V
GND
WEISTNF
+5V
1
2
3
4
P705
1
2
3
4
P707
Suction chamber sensor
P717 P717
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Suction pump
SUCPUMP1
GND
SUCPUMPCHK1
GND
GND
WEISTBTL
+5V
GND
WEISTNF
+5V
1
2
3
1
2
3
P811
GN 1
+24
D 2
V
PS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
P718
P254
P718
56
1
2
3
P720
Waste ink sensor U
1
2
3
P721
Waste ink sensor L
B1/1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
P831
1
2
3
P709
Wing HP sensor
1
2
3
4
P710
1
2
P711
Exit motor
1
2
3
P712
Exit motor
encoder
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
P713
Exit sensor
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
P714
Flipper sensor
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
P715
Duplex belt IN
sensor
1
2
P716
Flipper gate
solenoid
P83
2
P83
2
1
2
3
4
Wing motor
(In case of HC5000, this counter is

connected to P254 11-14.)
P708
M1
1
2
3
4
P708
57
GND
WINGHP
+5V
WINGP1
WINGDIS1
WINGP2
WINGDIS2
EXITMTR
+24V
GND
EXITENC
+5V
GND
EXITSNSX
+5V
GND
FLCTSNSX
+5V
GND
FLOUTSNSX
+5V
DUPGTSOL
+24V
COUNT
+24V
COUNTCNTX
GND
P833
ORCNR PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
P833
P255
P831
(In case of HC5000, these parts are

connected to P255 24-33.)
1
2
3
4
Counte
r
F2/2
13 - 31
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
P813
to Power supply
P810
E1
1
2
NEUTR 3
AL
4
5
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
CN4
1
2
3
4
CN5
LIVE
FL Power supply
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
tray 1
Paper detection
sensor
tray 1
Paper size detection
sensor
tray 1
Tray volume sensor
1
tray 1
Tray volume sensor
2
tray 1
Paper width sensor
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
CN
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
tray 2
Paper detection
sensor
tray 2
Paper size detection
sensor
tray 2
Tray volume sensor
1
tray 2
Tray volume sensor
2
tray 2
Paper width sensor
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
V
OUT
GND
FL control PCB
CN
tray 1
FL feed tray Elevator
motor
tray 2
FL feed tray Elevator
motor
(FL front)
(FL rear)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
FL multi-tray 1
pickup sensor
FL feed sensor 1
FL feed sensor 2
FL feed sensor 3 (receive)
CN6
FL feed sensor 3 (send)
13 - 32
manuals4you.com
CN7
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
tray 1 Upper limit sensor
tray 2 Upper limit sensor
1
2
3
CN9
FL Transfer motor
FG sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
Transfer clutch 1
Transfer clutch 2
Transfer clutch 3
Tray 2 Pickup clutch

Tray 1 Pickup clutch
CN10
1
2
3
4
CN12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FL control PCB
tray 1
Setup confirmation switch
tray 2
Setup confirmation switch
P817
P814
118
CN14
3
2
1
2
1
P816
ILPET
1
2
3
P816
ILPET
P815
1
2
3
P815
CN13
FL left cover SW
2
1
2
1
to PRH PCB CN7

(transfer)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
CN15
MF door safety SW

(transfer)
Transfer clutch 4
FL feed sensor 4
FL transfer motor
CN16
FL multi feed tray pickup
motor
G1/2
13 - 33
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Exit tray paper detection

sensor
Paper guide base SW

(paper guide F)
Paper guide base SW

(paper guide F)
Paper guide HP sensor
Paper guide limit sensor
1
2
3
4
5
CN1
1
2
CN2
1
2
3
CN3
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper guide base SW

(paper guide R)
AF control PCB
Paper stopper pulse motor
Paper guide pulse motor
Paper stopper HP button
Paper stopper HP sensor
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
CN5
1
2
3
4
CN6
1
2
CN7
CN8
Paper guide base SW

(paper stopper)
13 - 34
manuals4you.com
CN6
to HC control PCB
CN7
AF control PCB
G2/2
13 - 35
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
13 - 36
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
manuals4you.com
Scanner
CHA PTE R 1 4 : S c a n n e r
CONTENTS
14 - 1
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Mechanism
1.RISO Scanner HS2000
1-1.Speci fica tion
14 - 2
manuals4you.com
Scanner
2.FB Unit
2-1. Orig inal Set Sec tion
Setting the original
Place the original on the stage glass and close the stage cover.
Unlike the AF unit in which the original is placed on the center of the unit, the original is
placed flat against the top corner of the stage glass.
If the original is set on both the AF unit and stage glass, the original on the AF unit is
scanned first.
The detection of the original on the FB stage glass is done by the original detection sensor.
The stage cover open status is detected by two separate sensors.
The stage cover sensor detects whether the stage cover is fully closed or not.
The stage cover angle sensor detects the stage cover at a half opened (closed) position,
and the original size is checked when this sensor is triggered.
Original size detection
The six original size detection sensors looks at the original on the stage glass and check the
original size when the stage cover angle sensor is triggered.
The combination of the detection status of these six sensors determine the original size, as
shown on the table given below.
Original
detection
sensor
1
2
4
5
Original size
detection
sensors
6
Original Size / Sensor
A5
A5R
A4R
A4
A3
B5
B4
O
O
O
B5R
O
14 - 3
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2. Orig inal Scan ning

M e c h a ni s m
The lamp carriage consists of original illuminating lamp, Mirror-1 and lamp-inverter.
The mirror carriage consists of Mirror-2 and Mirror-3.
The original image illuminated by the lamp is reflected by the Mirrors 1, 2 and 3. The reflected
image is then caught by the lens on the CCD assembly and focused on the CCD.
Cooling fan is equipped to cool down the heat created by the lamp and power supply unit.
At the start of the scanning job, the cooling fan activates.
The cooling fan stops after 180 seconds from the completion of the scanning job.
Lamp
Mirror-1
Read pulse motor
Inverter
CCD assembly
Lamp carriage
Mirror carriage
Mirror-2
Lens
CCD
Mirror-3
C a r ri a g e m o v e m e n t
The CCD assembly is fixed in its position.
The read pulse motor drives both the lamp carriage and mirror carriage. When the lamp carriage slides one certain amount, the mirror carriage slides only half of that amount. This system
is called the full-half-rate-mirror-scanning.
With this system, the distance between the original and the CCD stays the same as the read
pulse motor drives the lamp carriage and mirror carriage.
14 - 4
manuals4you.com
Scanner
2-3. Func tiona l po sitio ns of th e scan ner

The carriage HP (home position) is detected by the scanner HP sensor, and all the scanner
movement is calculated from this HP position.
(1) HP position
This is the carriage standby position. As shown on the sketch below, this is the position 20mm
to the left from the edge of the carriage HP sensor.
(2) Offset/Gain adjustment position
The Offset/Gain adjustment is equivalent to the sensitivity adjustment of the CCD.
The Offset adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the black color image.
The Gain adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the images between the black
and white in color.
The Offset/Gain adjustment is made only once on each power ON of the scanner unit.
The Offset/Gain adjustment is made in the following sequence.
1) The carriage is moved to the shading plate.
2) The lamp is turned OFF and the Offset adjustment is made.
3) The lamp is turned ON and the Gain adjustment is made. (The Offset adjustment result
shifts a little bit after the Gain adjustment is made.)
4) The lamp is turned OFF to make the Offset adjustment for the second time.
5) The carriage is returned back t the HP position.
(3) ABC (Auto Base Control)
The scanner is equipped with original background color erasing function. Therefore ABC adjustment is not performed.
(4) Shading compensation position
The shading compensation is to adjust and level out the sensitivity differences between the CCD
elements aligned side by side. As with the Offset/Gain adjustment, the shading compensation is
adjusted with black color and then white.
The shading compensation is performed for each original scanning. The adjustment is made in
following sequence.
1) With the carriage at its HP position, the lamp is turned OFF and black color calibration is
made.
2) The lamp is turned ON and the carriage is moved to the shading plate. Depending on
whether the AF or the FB is used, the white-color shading compensation is performed while
moving the carriage towards the AF or the FB scanning start position.
3) When the carriage arrives to either the AF or FB scanning start position, the actual original
image scanning action starts.
(5) Carriage fixing position
This is the position in which the carriage is fixed for the transportation purpose.
To prevent the carriage from a mechanical jam caused by turning ON the power and operating
the scanner unit before mechanically unlocking the carriage from the fixed position, a software
lock prevents the read pulse motor from activating. During the installation of the scanner unit,
after unlocking the carriage mechanically from the fixed position, test mode No.384 must be performed [selecting 0 on the test mode] to unlock the software lock.
Carriage maximum movement area
Carriage fix position
Original guide plate
HP position
Lamp
replacement position
Maximum
scanning length
Shading plate
HP sensor
6mm 2
AF scanning
position
20mm
9.5
3.5
Offset/Gains adjustment
Shading compensation (Black)
292mm
143mm
20mm
FB scanning position
Shading compensation (White)
14 - 5
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
3.AF Unit
3-1.Origi nal Set Section
Setting the original
Place the original on the original feed tray and slide the original fence against the original.
Compared to the FB unit in which the original is placed on the top edge of the stage glass,
the original is placed on the center for the AF unit.
If original is set on both the FB and AF, the original from the AF is scanned first.
The original detection on the AF unit is made by AF original detection sensor.
Two sensors, the stage cover sensor and stage cover angle sensor, looks at the stage cover
status of the FB unit. Of the two sensors, the sensor which detects whether the stage cover (AF
unit) is closed or opened is the stage cover sensor. If the stage cover sensor does not detect
the stage cover (AF unit) closed, the AF operation is disabled.
O r i g i n a l s i z e d e t e c t io n
The size of the original on the AF unit original feed tray is determined by the combination of two
AF tray sensors (sensor 1 and sensor 2) and AF tray VR sensor.
O r i g i n a l f e e d c o v e r a nd o t h e r m e c ha n i s m
Whether the original feed cover is set in position or not is checked by AF original feed cover set
switch.
A cooling fan is equipped on the AF unit to prevent heat build-up within the AF unit.
The cooling fan activates with the start of the AF scanning job.
The cooling fan deactivates 180 seconds after the scanning job is finished.
AF Tray sensor 2
AF tray sensor 1
AF tray VR sensor
AF cover set switch
Actuator of the AF original detection sensor
14 - 6
manuals4you.com
Scanner
3-2. Orig inal Path

Simplex scanning
(1)
(2)
The original is transferred to the registration roller by the pickup roller, feed roller and separation
roller.
The drive for these rollers is taken from the feed motor.
The registration sensor detects the original arriving at the registration roller.
The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against the
registration roller and makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.
The registration roller then starts its rotation and feeds the original to the transfer roller 1. The
transfer roller 1, white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller then starts the rotation and ejects
the original onto the original receiving tray.
The registration motor drives the registration roller.
The read motor drives the transfer roller 1, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller.
The original IN sensor and original OUT sensor checks the original transfer status.
The original is scanned at the white roller by the CCD located within the FB unit.
Feed roller
Registration roller
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Ejection roller
Registration sensor
Original IN sensor
Original receiving tray
Transfer roller 1
Original OUT sensor
White roller
Transfer roller 2
Registration motor
Feed motor
Read motor
14 - 7
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Duplex scanning
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Of the duplex scanning, the scanning of the first side is done the same way as the simplex scanning. Before starting the scanning of the second side of the original, the original is stopped, just
before the original escapes out from the ejection roller.
The read motor then rotates in the reverse direction to feed the original back to the registration
roller with the original flipped the other way.
With the function of the switchback flap, the original, instead of going back towards the
transfer rollers 2 and 1, it is guided directly towards the registration roller.
The registration sensor detects the original arriving to the registration roller.
The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against the
registration roller and makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.
From that point, the original takes the same path from the step (2) of the simplex scanning until
just before the original escapes out from the ejection roller.
After the second side of the original is scanned and just before the trailing edge of the original
escapes out from the ejection roller, the ejection roller stops.
The original then takes the same path back into the AF unit via the switchback flap through the
registration roller, white roller, etc., but without scanning this time and land on the original receiving tray with the original surface flipped the other way.
This last movement is necessary to eject the original onto the original receiving tray to pile
the ejected originals in the same page order as they were stacked on the original feed tray.
Registration roller
Switchback flap
Ejection roller
Registration sensor
Original receiving tray
Registration motor
14 - 8
Read motor
manuals4you.com
Scanner
3-3. Rol ler Ro tati ons

Rotation of each roller
The feed roller is driven by the feed motor.
The pickup roller is driven by the feed motor via the feed roller.
The separation roller rotates by the friction against the feed roller.
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
Feed motor
Up-and-Down movement of the pickup roller

The pickup roller makes up-and-down movement with the feed roller shaft as a pivot.
The pickup roller needs to be raised up when setting the originals on the original feed tray. For
this reason, the pickup roller is raised up when the power is turned ON or when the original feed
cover is opened and closed.
The downward movement of the pickup roller takes place when the original starts to feed. When
the last original feeds into the AF unit, the pickup roller raises up once again.
The pickup roller moves down in following manner.
A torque limiter is equipped on the feed roller shaft mounted on the arm of the pickup roller.
When the feed motor rotates, the rotation of the feed roller shaft swings the pickup roller
down on top of the original stacked on the original feed tray. After that the pickup roller
starts to rotate.
The pickup roller is raised up by rotating the feed motor in the reverse direction.
Original stopper
When the originals are stacked on the original feed tray, the leading edge of the originals rests
hitting against the original stopper.
The original stopper is locked in down position when the pickup roller is in the raised position.
In the contrary at the same time the pickup roller swings down to start the original feeding action,
the original stopper is designed to lift up to allow the originals to feed into the AF unit.
Original stopper
In the condition as shown on the photograph, with the original feed cover
opened, the original stopper is in the
lifted position.
14 - 9
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Se p a r a t i o n r o l l e r
An original is pinched between the separation roller and feed roller and pushed towards the registration roller.
The separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter to allow the roller to rotate together with
the feed roller in the normal condition when only one sheet of original is pinched between the
separation roller and feed roller.
If more than one sheet of originals happens to feed in between the separation roller and feed
roller, the separation roller is prevented from rotating by the function of the torque limiter. In this
case the separation roller stays still and acts as a stripper pad to hold the rest of the originals to
allow only the top original to feed into the AF unit.
Feed roller
Separation roller
R o t a t i o n o f t h e o t h e r r o l l e rs
The registration roller is driven by the registration motor
The transfer roller 1, white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller are all driven by the read
motor.
All these four rollers rotate when the read motor rotates in the forward direction.
When the read motor rotates in the reverse direction for the duplex scanning, one-way
clutches equipped on the rollers other than the ejection roller allows only the ejection roller
to rotate in the reverse direction. Other three rollers stay stationary.
Registration roller
Ejection roller
Transfer roller 2
White roller
Transfer roller 1
Nip solenoid
Registration motor
Read motor
Nip solenoid of the ejection roller

In order to allow easy removal of a jammed original, the nip solenoid of the ejection roller is
switched OFF to release the nip of the ejection roller when the AF unit is in standby mode.
During the second side scanning in duplex scanning, the nip solenoid is switched OFF to
release the nip of the ejection roller once the original feeds back into the AF unit. This is
because depending on the length of the original, the ejection roller may grab the leading edge
and the tail edge of one same original. Releasing the nip prevents this from happening.
14 - 10
manuals4you.com
Scanner
Disassembly
1.FB unit
1-1. Cov ers
Turn OFF the power and remove the covers listed below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Left cover
Remove 4 screws, and slide the Left cover to the left to remove.
Right cover
Remove 3 screw to detach the stage glass support on the right.
Remove 2 screws, lifting the top edge of the Right cover a little bit, and slide the cover off.
Front cover
Remove the Left and Right covers first.
Remove 4 screws to detach the Front cover.
* The 2 screws on the top are special shoulder-screws.
(4)
Rear cover
Remove the AF unit and the 2 shoulder-screws used in mounting the AF unit.
Remove the Left and Right covers first.
Remove 6 screws, push the stage cover sensor actuator down, and then slide the cover off.
* The 2 screws on the top are special shoulder-screws.
Actuator of the stage cover sensor
Shoulder-screw for AF unit mounting
Rear cover
Right cover
Left cover
Front cover
Stage glass support
14 - 11
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-2.Stag e Glass
(1)
(2)
Turn OFF the power and remove following two covers.

Stage glass support on the right.
Left cover
Remove 2 screws and lift the stage glass off the unit together with the plastic original stopper
attached.
* Caution should be paid not to break off the plastic original stopper from the stage glass.
Stage glass
Original stopper
1-3.Origi nal Dete ction Sen sor and Origi nal Size Detectio n Se nsors
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Turn OFF the power and remove the stage glass.

Remove 11 screws and detach CCD cover.
Remove 8 screws, lift the sensor cover and turn it up-side-down.
Remove the sensors by disconnecting the connectors.
CCD Cover
Sensor cover
14 - 12
manuals4you.com
Scanner
1-4. Lamp
(1)
(2)
(3)
Activate test mode No.0343 (Scanner Lamp Replacement Position Movement) and switch OFF
the power after the lamp carriage moves to the replacement position.
Remove the stage glass.
Carefully lift the clear plastic films located over the scanner lamp removal cutout on the FB
frame. Remove lamp socket mounting screws, one each from left and right.
* In mounting back the scanner lamp, make sure not to tighten the lamp socket mounting screws with
the lamp socket not firmly fit in position, or the lamp socket may hit and jam against the stay on the
FB unit when the lamp carriage slides.
(4)
(5)
(6)
Turn over the black inverter cover.

Remove 2 mounting screws of the inverter PCB. Disconnect the connector from the scanner
lamp by turning the inverter PCB around.
Remove the scanner lamp.
Inverter PCB
Black inverter cover
Lamp socket mounting screws
1-5. CC D Uni t
(1)
(2)
(3)
Switch OFF the power and remove following 2 parts.

Stage glass
CCD cover
Disconnect the 3 connectors from the CCD PCB.
Remove 3 screws and detach the CCD unit.
* Do not loosen or remove the screws which are painted red.
Remove these 3 screws
14 - 13
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
1-6.Cool ing Fan

(1)
(2)
Switch OFF the power and remove the rear cover.

Disconnect the connector of the cooling fan, remove 2 screws and detach the cooling fan from
the unit with bracket attached.
Cooling fan
1-7.Stag e Cover Sen sor and Sta ge Cover Angle Sens or

(1)
(2)
(3)

Remove 1 screw and take off the two sensors and the actuator as an assembly from the unit.
Remove each sensor from the assembly by unplugging the connector and undoing the hooks.
1-8.Read Motor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Remove the tension spring.
Disconnect the connector from the read pulse motor.
Remove 4 screws and take off the motor with the bracket attached.
* In mounting the motor back, make sure that the timing belt is correctly hooked onto the motor pulley
Tension spring
Read motor
14 - 14
manuals4you.com
Scanner
2.AF Unit
2-1. Strip per Area
Stripper unit
(1)
(2)
Open the original feed cover.

Pinch the hooks on both sides and remove the stripper unit by rotating it up.
Stripper unit
Separation roller
(1)
(2)
Remove the stripper unit.

Remove the separation roller, as an unit, by rotating it for approximately 90 decrees.
* In mounting the separation roller, make sure to attach the spring on the pins at the top and bottom.
Separation roller
Spring
14 - 15
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
2-2.Parts aroun d th e Fee d Roller

Feed roller unit
(1)
(2)

Remove 4 screws and take off the black colored cover. The bottom portion has 2 hooks.
Remove this black colored cover
(3)
Remove the feed roller unit.

1) Remove the black clip on the front and remove black colored metal from the shaft.
2) Remove the black clip on the rear and push gold colored metal out from the frame and
remove the metal from the shaft.
* The 2 metals removed are not compatible. The gold colored one is an oilless metal used on the rear.
The black colored one is used against plastic, and it is used on the front.
FRONT
REAR
Remove these two black clips
14 - 16
manuals4you.com
Scanner
Feed rollers
* Small parts used on the feed roller unit are different between the front and rear. Also the location of
the parts are complicated. It is best to work on the front first, disassembly and assembly. Then after
completing the front, disassemble and assemble the rear. While working on the front, look at the
rear as a reference, and look at the front as a reference when working on the rear.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Take off the feed roller unit from the AF main unit.
Remove two white clips from the front of the feed roller unit. Remove the arm and a pin.
Remove stopper lever from the front of the unit.
Remove the guide.
* Remove the guide from the pickup roller shaft first. Then remove the guide from the feed roller shaft.
(5)
Remove the 2 white clips holding the 2 rollers. Slide the rollers and pulleys just a little bit to
remove pin. Slide the pulleys and rollers out from the shafts.
* Black colored pulley goes back on feed roller shaft. White colored pulley goes back on the pickup
roller shaft. Do not mount these two pulleys on the wrong shaft.
Feed roller
Pickup roller
Arm
Stopper Lever
Guide
* In mounting the feed roller unit back on the AF Unit, pay caution not to damage the plastic actuator
plate of the original detection sensor, and of other fragile parts.
Stopper is positioned
above the projection from
the Original feed cover
Stopper lever
Projection from the

Original feed cover.
Stopper
Arm
Actuator of the Original
detection sensor
Arm is positioned
above the Stopper
Tip of the Stopper is on

top of the Arm
14 - 17
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
AF Original detection sensor

(1)
Remove the original detection sensor after disconnecting the connector.
FRONT
REAR
AF Original detection sensor
2-3. Parts on the Origin al Fee d Tray

(1)
(2)

Flip open the original feed tray after removing 1 screw from the original feed tray stopper.
Original feed tray stopper
AF tray sensors
AF tray VR sensor
Bottom cover of the original feed tray
(3)
Remove 4 screws and take off the bottom cover of the original feed tray.
* In mounting the bottom cover of the original feed tray, pay caution not to pinch the electrical wires.
AF tray sensors 1 & 2

(1)
Disconnect the connectors from the sensors and unhook the hooks to remove the sensors.
AF tray VR sensor
(1)
(2)
Remove 2 mounting screws and detach the VR sensor assembly.

Remove the mounting nut, disconnect the connector and remove the VR sensor
* In mounting the VR sensor, match the triangle marks on the round gear and the flat gear.
* After the VR sensor is assembled back, perform the volume adjustment of the sensor by test mode.
14 - 18
manuals4you.com
Scanner
2-4. Parts on the AF Drive Area

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Open the Original feed cover.

Remove the front cover of the AF unit by removing 2 screws.
Remove the rear cover of the AF unit by removing 3 screws.
From the PCB, disconnect 7 connectors of the wires leading to the drive area, detach the ground
wire, and free the wires from the wire saddle.
(5)
From the front of the unit, remove the solenoid spring, solenoid and lever.
* Watch out with the pin falling.
Solenoid
Lever
Solenoid spring
(6)
Remove 1 screw of the original feed cover.
(7)
Remove 7 mounting screws and detach the AF drive unit.

* When taking off the AF drive unit, the base portion tends to spring upward. To prevent this, it is best
to tape down the front portion of the AF unit onto the FB unit using strong adhesive tape.
14 - 19
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
M o t o r s a n d C o o l i n g f a n a s s e m b l y ( de t a c h i n g f r o m t h e A F u ni t )
(1)
(2)
(3)
Disconnect 1 ground wire, 1 sensor connector and 1 reusable wire harness band.
Remove 2 mounting screws.
Disconnect one connector and free the wires.
Remove the ground wire and connector
located in this area.
Remove these 2 mounting screws
Disconnect the reusable wire harness and

connector from this area.
Ejection roller
(1)
Loosen the tension on the tensioner located on the rear of the AF unit.
Tensioner
Remove the two pulleys and timing belt.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remove 1 E-ring and take off 1 pulley on the bottom. (refer to above photograph)
Free the hook on the top pulley and remove the pulley. (refer to above photograph)
Remove clip and metal.
Detach the ejection roller by removing 1 white clip and metal in the front of the unit.
Ejection roller
14 - 20
manuals4you.com
Scanner
White roller and nearby parts
(1)
Loosen the tension on the 2 tensioners on the rear of the AF unit.
Tensioners
Remove the parts on these two shafts.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Remove 2 E-rings and detach the pulleys. (refer to above photograph)

Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.
From the front of the AF unit, remove 3 metal clips, 2 gears and 2 bearings from the two shafts
shown on the photograph below. (Small gear will also come off when taking the bearing out.)
Remove parts attached onto these two shafts.
(5)
(6)
Small gear
Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.

Remove the three rollers attached together.
* Watch out not to lose the springs from both ends of the assembly.
14 - 21
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
3.
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
AF & FB Firmware Downloading

[ N o r m a l f i r m w a r e d o w n l o a d i n g m e t ho d u s i ng U S B c on ne c t i on ]
Getting Ready
(1)
(2)
(3)
Connect the controller, touch-panel, scanner and AF unit to the HC5500.

Turn ON the power of all the devices connected.
Insert one CF card in USB adopter, containing the firmware for the AF and FB unit, into any of
the USB port on the rear of the controller.
(4) Using the touch-panel, access into test mode.
From the TOP window of the touch-panel, press the Configuration button and access to the
Password Input window.
Push the CapsLock key to enable capital letter input.
Type in the 5-digit test mode access password A S T U ~ .
Push on the phrase Password input shown on the top of the screen.
Press the OK button at the bottom of the display.
AF unit firmware downloading
(5)
Input test mode No.0141 (AF Download) and press START key.
The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner unit lights in red and green color.
A message In Action is displayed on the touch-panel window.
(6) The touch-panel display will inform when the downloading is ended. Press the STOP button on
the touch-panel window when the downloading ends. Downloading takes about 2 minutes.
FB unit firmware downloading
(7)
Input test mode No.0140 (Download) and press START key.

The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner unit lights in red and green color.
A message In Action is displayed on the touch-panel window.
(8) The touch-panel display will inform when the downloading is ended. Press the STOP button on
the touch-panel window when the downloading ends. Downloading takes about 20 seconds.
Ending the firmware downloading job
(9) Disconnect the CF card adopter from the USB port of the controller.
(10) Turn OFF the power of the Scanner Unit and then turn ON the Scanner Unit power again.
(11) Confirm the downloading of the new firmware by checking the firmware version numbers on the
touch-panel display. The firmware version numbers are displayed when accessed into test
mode.
* Both the AF and FB firmware can be on the CF card at same time.
* When downloading both the AF and FB unit firmware, download the AF firmware first. Then download the
FB firmware. Make sure to turn OFF and turn ON the scanner power once the downloading is finished.
* The version number display on the touch-panel is refreshed only after the scanner unit is powered OFF and
powered ON after the downloading.
[ A n o t h e r d o w n l o a d i ng me t h o d ]
For any reason if the firmware downloading cannot be done through USB connection, there is
an alternate way to download.
The limitation on this alternate method is that only the FB unit firmware can be downloaded. AF
unit firmware downloading cannot be made by this alternate method.
(1) Copy only the FB unit firmware on CF card. Do not include any other data on the CF card.
(2) Turn OFF the scanner power. Remove the scanner rear cover and insert the CF card into the
CF card slot on the Scanner PCB.
(3) Turn ON the scanner power.
When correct FB unit firmware is copied onto the CF card, the firmware downloading starts
when the scanner power is turned ON. The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner
unit lights in RED and GREEN color.
14 - 22
manuals4you.com
Scanner
(4)
(5)
When the downloading finishes, the LED changes to a solid GREEN light.
Turn OFF the scanner power and remove the CF card from the scanner PCB. Mount back the
scanner rear cover and turn ON the scanner power to complete the procedure.
14 - 23
manuals4you.com
HC55 00
20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )
Adjustment
1 . A d j u s t m e n ts o n t h e A F U n i t
1-1.AF T ray VR Se nsor
Make this adjustment after replacing the VR sensor or when the sensor is not correctly detecting
the original size.
To check whether correct original size detection is being made or not can be checked by
accessing into test mode No.0470 (AF Original Size) from the touch-panel.
Adjustment
(1)
(2)
(3)
Open the original guides to 100mm width and activate test mode No.0452 from the touch-panel.
Then open the original guides to 297mm width and activate test mode No.0453 from the touchpanel.
To check whether correct adjustment is made or not, place a standard size original on the original feed tray and activate test mode No.0470. Correct original size will display on the touchpanel if the VR sensor is detecting the original width correctly.
1 - 2 . A F O r i g i na l I N S e n s o r
Sensitivity adjustment on the AF Original IN Sensor needs to be made after replacing the sensor
or if the sensor is giving false original jam message due to an incorrect sensitivity setting. The
error messages shown by the sensor are the following two.
R20-412 [Original jam at the Original IN Sensor]
R20-415 [Original not arriving to the Original IN Sensor]
Adjustment
(1)
(2)
The adjustment is made with no original on the original feed tray. Make sure all the covers and
tray are set correctly and the unit is operational.
Activate test mode No.0451 (AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment) from the touchpanel. The adjustment ends automatically.
1-3.Other Ad justm ents

Refer to the separate instructions sheet contained with the product for the adjustments listed below.
14 - 24
AF Unit position adjustment

Distorted image correction
Horizontal (left & right) image position adjustment
Vertical (top & bottom) image position adjustment.
manuals4you.com
Preliminary
HC5000
SPARE PARTS LIST
(VERSION: 1.1 as September 2004)
Preliminary
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
Contents
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
JIGs
Flipper Unit
Drain Ink Tank, Power Supply and Suction Pump
Standard Feed Tray
Ink Bottle Section
Covers
Duplex Transfer Unit
Side Registration Section
Vertical Transfer Section
Duplex IN Section
Exit Unit
Registration Section
Reservoir Section
Print Head Section
Maintenance Unit
BP Transfer Section
PCBs
Drive Section
System Controller PS7R
RISO Inc. Technical Services & Support

manuals4you.com
Preliminary
WWW.RISO.COM
manuals4you.com
1000
Part Number
* 033-19321-003
* 033-19322-000
* 033-19318-002
Part Name
Remark
Qty
1
1
1
INTLOCK JIG3
INTLOCK JIG4
SUPPORT STAND
* Reference Pages 1-5 to 1-7 for Jigs
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig1001 Flipper Unit
5
A
n
Fro
018-0147-1001-0
3
2
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1001
Part Number
1 033-19244-009
2 033-19245-005
FLIPPER UNIT
FLIPPER GATE
4
5
6
FL ROLLER U
FL ROLLER L
COUNTER
033-19247-008
033-19248-004
033-19301-002
Part Name
Qty
1 FW9244
1 FW9245
1
1
1
FW9247
FW9248
FW9301
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
Remark
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1002 Drain Ink Tank, Power Supply and Suction Pump
Fro
n
A
4
5
1
1
8
6
A
018-0147-1002-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1002
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
033-19225-004
033-19233-007
033-19234-003
033-19235-000
033-19236-006
033-19302-009
033-19303-005
033-19304-001
033-19316-000
Part Name
PHOTOINTERRUPT
SUCTIONCHAMBER
SUCTION PUMP UNIT
SUCTION TUBE
PUMPFILTER
POWER SUPPLY
FUSE1
FUSE2
DRAIN INK TANK
488-00054-004
Power Cable; PS7R
Qty
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
3
1
Remark
FW9225
FW9233
FW9234
FW9235
FW9236
FW9302
FW9303
FW9304
FW9316
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1003 Standard Paper Feed Tray
15
25
16
14
25
13
20
21
22
16
18
26
24
19
17
23
24
11
22
21
30
23
8
5
12
28
27
10
6
29
7
Fro
nt
1
018-0147-1003-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1003
Part Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
030-14102-107
033-12257-008
030-14113-109
030-14114-105
030-14136-001
030-14134-106
634-06030-000
612-11104-006
030-14132-006
030-51093-002
030-51023-403
444-33000-002
030-14123-007
030-14116-108
030-14115-101
030-14131-107
030-14117-007
612-12103-003
030-14126-006
030-14124-003
030-14129-005
030-14130-003
030-14119-000
030-14133-002
030-04001-108
030-14137-008
030-14138-101
030-14139-108
610-10006-006
610-10007-002
Part Name
P.-F.-T.Unit:SU
*Bottom Cover; P.-F.-T.
*Paper Feed Board
*Support Plate R; P.-F.-T.
*Support Plate F; P.-F.-T.
*Guide; Harness
*Stopper Roller
*COLLAR; 6x3
*GEAR; M0.8X18X6
*Bracket; P.-W. Potentiometer
*P.-W. Potentiometer Ass'y II
*Junction Harness; P.-F.-T.
*SENSOR; GP2A200LCS
*Fence Cover
*Guide F; P.-F.-T.
*Guide R; P.-F-.T.
*Lock Lever; Paper Guide
*Guide Shaft; Paper Guide
*GEAR; M1X16X3.2
*Slider F; Paper Guide
*Slider R; Paper Guide
*Lock A; Paper Guide
*Lock B; Paper Guide
*Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.
*Collar; Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.
*Seal ; P-Feed Tray
*Slide Sheet P.-F.-T.
Cover F; P.-F.-T. Damper
Cover R; P.-F.-T. Damper
OWH 10-2.2NLW
OWH 10-2.2NRW
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
Remark
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1004 Ink Bottle Section
1
A
1
1
4
A
B
3
C
2
8
Fro
nt
VIEW A
018-0147-1004-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19218-008
033-19219-004
033-19220-002
033-19221-009
033-19222-005
033-19223-001
033-19224-008
033-19225-004
Part Name
INK HOLDER
BOTTLE JOINT K
BOTTLE JOINT C
BOTTLE JOINT M
BOTTLE JOINT Y
INFUSE SOLENOID
IB COVER SWITCH
PHOTOINTERRUPT
Qty
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9218
FW9219
FW9220
FW9221
FW9222
FW9223
FW9224
FW9225
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1005 Covers
n
Fro
A
6
10
1
9
8
A
11
12
018-0147-1005-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1005
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part Number
033-19306-004
033-19307-000
033-19308-007
033-19309-003
033-19310-001
033-19311-008
033-19312-004
033-19313-000
033-19314-007
033-19315-003
033-19317-006
Part Name
CONTROL PANEL
TOP COVER
INK COVER
RIGHT COVER
LEFT COVER
REAR COVER
FRONT DOOR R
FRONT DOOR L
INNER COVER 1
INNER COVER 2
INNER COVER 3
SUPPORT BAR
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9295
FW9306
FW9307
FW9308
FW9309
FW9310
FW9311
FW9312
FW9313
FW9314
FW9315
FW9317
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1006 Duplex Transfer Unit

2
1
4
B
B
A
A
A
3
Fro
n
VIEW A
018-0147-1006-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1006
1
2
3
4
Part Number
033-19255-000
033-19256-007
033-19257-003
033-19258-000
Part Name
DUPLEX UNIT
DUPLEX BELT U
DUPLEX BELT L
DPX UNIT GEAR
Qty
1
1
1
2
Remark
FW9255
FW9256
FW9257
FW9258
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1007 Side Registration Section
nt
Fro
018-0147-1007-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1007
1
2
3
4
Part Number
033-19267-009
033-19268-005
033-19225-004
033-19292-003
Part Name
CCD UNIT
CCD SENSOR
PHOTOINTERRUPT
CCD AD CONV PCB
Qty
1
2
1
1
Remark
FW9267
FW9268
FW9225
FW9292
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1008 Vertical Transfer Section
A
A
B
Fro
nt
018-0147-1008-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1008
Part Number
Part Name
Remark
Qty
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1009 Duplex IN Section
5
3
5
B
nt
Fro
018-0147-1009-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1009
1
2
3
4
5
Part Number
033-19249-000
033-19250-009
033-19251-005
033-19252-001
033-19253-008
Part Name
STAR WHEEL DPX
PHOTOREFLECT B
PHOTOREFLECTOR
DPX ROLLER
NIP ROLLER
Qty
1
1
2
1
2
Remark
FW9249
FW9250
FW9251
FW9252
FW9253
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1010 Exit Unit
5
6
n
Fro
1
3
4
018-0147-1010-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1010
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19225-004
033-19237-002
033-19238-009
033-19239-005
033-19240-003
033-19241-000
033-19242-006
033-19243-002
Part Name
PHOTOINTERRUPT
EXIT UNIT
EXIT MOTOR UNIT
WING MOTOR UNIT
TIMING BELT
SPONGE ROLLER
WING FRONT
WING REAR
Qty
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9225
FW9237
FW9238
FW9239
FW9240
FW9241
FW9242
FW9243
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1011Registration Section
6
5
1
4
10
7
3
Fro
n
12
11
018-0147-1011-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part Number
033-19251-005
033-19254-004
033-19271-006
033-19272-002
033-19285-007
033-19286-003
033-19287-000
033-19288-006
033-19289-002
033-19290-000
033-19299-008
033-19300-006
Part Name
PHOTOREFLECTOR
MICROSWITCH
RESIST ROLLER L
RESIST ROLLER U
SWBACK UNIT U
SWBACK UNIT L
SWBACK DRV ROLL
SWBACK DOOR UNIT
TOP EDGE SENSOR
TOP EDGE LED
DOUBLE FEED LED
DBL FEED SENSOR
Qty
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9251
FW9254
FW9271
FW9272
FW9285
FW9286
FW9287
FW9288
FW9289
FW9290
FW9299
FW9300
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1012 Reservoir Section

Fro
n
4
8
018-0147-1012-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1012
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19209-009
033-19210-007
033-19211-003
033-19212-000
033-19214-002
033-19215-009
033-19216-005
033-19217-001
Part Name
RESERVOIR K
RESERVOIR C
RESERVOIR M
RESERVOIR Y
OVERFLOWTANK
PRESSCHAMBER
PRESSUREPUMP
PHOTOINTERRUPT
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9209
FW9210
FW9211
FW9212
FW9214
FW9215
FW9216
FW9217
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1013 Print Head Section

7
5
5
2
7
6
B
4
A
Fro
nt
018-0147-1013-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1013
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
033-19202-004
033-19203-000
033-19204-007
033-19205-003
033-19206-000
033-19207-006
033-19208-002
Part Name
PRINT HEAD
HEADDRIVERPCB
RIBBONCABLE
HEAD JOINT
ID UNIT
VALVE 1
VALVE 2
Qty
24
4
48
24
2
2
2
Remark
FW9202
FW9203
FW9204
FW9205
FW9206
FW9207
FW9208
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1014 Maintenance Unit

7
1
1
8
1
1
8
3
C
VIEW A
B
2
Fro
nt
018-0147-1014-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1014
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19225-004
033-19226-000
033-19227-007
033-19228-003
033-19229-000
033-19230-008
033-19231-004
033-19232-000
Part Name
PHOTOINTERRUPT
CLEANING UNIT
INK PAN MOTOR
CLEANING MOTOR
SUCTION HEAD
STAR WHEEL UNIT

TORQUELIMITER
Qty
4
1
1
1
24
24
1
2
Remark
FW9225
FW9226
FW9227
FW9228
FW9229
FW9230
FW9231
FW9232
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1015 BP Transfer Section
1
7
6
6
6
6
018-0147-1015-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1015
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
033-19259-006
033-19260-004
033-19261-000
033-19262-007
033-19263-003
033-19264-000
033-19225-004
Part Name
TRANSFERUNIT
TRANSFER BELT
BELT ENCODER
TRANSFER MOTOR
CLEANING ROLLER
BLOWER FAN
PHOTOINTERRUPT
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Remark
FW9259
FW9260
FW9261
FW9262
FW9263
FW9264
FW9225
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
F ig1016 _ P C B s
F ro
nt
7
3
018-0147-1016-1
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1016
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19293-000
033-19294-006
033-19296-009
033-19297-005
033-19298-001
033-19305-008
033-19277-004
033-19278-000
Part Name
ORIP PCB
ORMC PCB
MOTOR DRV PCB
ORCNL PCB
ORCNR PCB
FUSE3
DUST FAN 1
DUST FAN 2
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
Remark
FW9293
FW9294
FW9296
FW9297
FW9298
FW9305
FW9277
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1017 Drive Section

Fro
nt
2
10
9
14
13
12
15
7
8
16
17
7
1
11
018-0147-1017-0
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Part Number
033-19225-004
033-19251-005
033-19265-006
033-19266-002
033-19269-001
033-19270-000
033-19273-009
033-19274-005
033-19275-001
033-19276-008
033-19279-007
033-19280-005
033-19281-001
033-19282-008
033-19283-004
033-19284-000
033-19254-004
Part Name
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOREFLECTOR
LIFT GEAR UNIT
LIFT WORM GEAR
MAIN MOTOR
SWBACK MOTOR
RESIST CLUTCH
PICKUP CLUTCH
DPX CLUTCH
DPX DRIVE GEAR
IDLER P
TIMING BELT R-P
TIMING BELT M-R
TIMING BELT M-C
TIMING BELT C-D
TIMING BELT DPX
MICROSWITCH
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remark
FW9225
FW9251
FW9265
FW9266
FW9269
FW9270
FW9273
FW9274
FW9275
FW9276
FW9279
FW9280
FW9281
FW9282
FW9283
FW9284
FW9254
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
Fig 1018 PS7R

7
6
9
11
10
5
12
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
1018
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part Number
101-51035-006
101-52511-308
101-52517-004
490-40002-005
101-50506-005
101-50504-002
101-50505-009
101-53000-005
101-52001-008
101-52513-009
101-51036-002
101-11003-004
Part Name
USB Cable; PS7R
CD-ROM1.20;PS7R
Dongle; PS7R(G)
109P0412H358
Joint PCB; PS7R
Mainboad; PS7R
Power Supply Unit; PS7R
Power Switch Assy; PS7R
DIMM168P128MB;PS7R
HDD Unit; PS7R(G)
HDD Harness; PS7R
Bracket; HDD; PS7R
488-00054-004
Power Cable; PS7R
Remark
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Attached in MPF Tray Package
Preliminary
manuals4you.com
WWW.RISO.COM
Ver. 0.1
manuals4you.com
INDEX OF PARTS

manuals4you.com
Preliminary
WWW.RISO.COM
Fig
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
1013
1013
1013
1013
1013
1013
1013
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1004
1004
1004
1004
1004
1004
1004
1002
1004
1007
1010
1014
1015
1017
1014
1014
1014
1014
1014
1014
25
1
3
4
15
14
17
23
13
20
19
21
22
16
9
24
6
5
26
27
28
11
10
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
3
1
1
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
030-04001-108
030-14102-107
030-14113-109
030-14114-105
030-14115-101
030-14116-108
030-14117-007
030-14119-000
030-14123-007
030-14124-003
030-14126-006
030-14129-005
030-14130-003
030-14131-107
030-14132-006
030-14133-002
030-14134-106
030-14136-001
030-14137-008
030-14138-101
030-14139-108
030-51023-403
030-51093-002
033-12257-008
033-19202-004
033-19203-000
033-19204-007
033-19205-003
033-19206-000
033-19207-006
033-19208-002
033-19209-009
033-19210-007
033-19211-003
033-19212-000
033-19214-002
033-19215-009
033-19216-005
033-19217-001
033-19218-008
033-19219-004
033-19220-002
033-19221-009
033-19222-005
033-19223-001
033-19224-008
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19225-004
033-19226-000
033-19227-007
033-19228-003
033-19229-000
033-19230-008
033-19231-004
Part Name
*Seal ; P-Feed Tray
*Bottom Cover; P.-F.-T.
*Support Plate R; P.-F.-T.
*Support Plate F; P.-F.-T.
*Guide R; P.-F-.T.
*Guide F; P.-F.-T.
*Guide Shaft; Paper Guide
*Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.
*Fence Cover
*Slider R; Paper Guide
*Slider F; Paper Guide
*Lock A; Paper Guide
*Lock B; Paper Guide
*Lock Lever; Paper Guide
*Bracket; P.-W. Potentiometer
*Collar; Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.
*Stopper Roller
*Guide; Harness
*Slide Sheet P.-F.-T.
Cover F; P.-F.-T. Damper
Cover R; P.-F.-T. Damper
*Junction Harness; P.-F.-T.
*P.-W. Potentiometer Ass'y II
*Paper Feed Board
PRINT HEAD
HEADDRIVER PCB
RIBBON CABLE
HEAD JOINT
ID UNIT
VALVE 1
VALVE 2
RESERVOIR K
RESERVOIR C
RESERVOIR M
RESERVOIR Y
OVERFLOW TANK
PRESS CHAMBER
PRESSURE PUMP
PHOTOINTERRUPT
INK HOLDER
BOTTLE JOINT K
BOTTLE JOINT C
BOTTLE JOINT M
BOTTLE JOINT Y
INFUSE SOLENOID
IB COVER SWITCH
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
PHOTOINTERRUPT
CLEANING UNIT
INK PAN MOTOR
CLEANING MOTOR
SUCTION HEAD
STAR WHEEL UNIT

manuals4you.com
Preliminary
WWW.RISO.COM
Fig
1014
1002
1002
1002
1002
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1001
1001
1001
1001
1009
1009
1009
1011
1017
1009
1009
1011
1017
1006
1006
1006
1006
1015
1015
1015
1015
1015
1015
1017
1017
1007
1007
1017
1017
1011
1011
1017
1017
1017
1017
1016
1016
1017
1017
1017
1017
1017
1017
1011
1011
1011
1011
8
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
4
5
1
2
3
1
2
4
5
2
17
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
10
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
6
7
8
Part Number
033-19232-000
033-19233-007
033-19234-003
033-19235-000
033-19236-006
033-19237-002
033-19238-009
033-19239-005
033-19240-003
033-19241-000
033-19242-006
033-19243-002
033-19244-009
033-19245-005
033-19247-008
033-19248-004
033-19249-000
033-19250-009
033-19251-005
033-19251-005
033-19251-005
033-19252-001
033-19253-008
033-19254-004
033-19254-004
033-19255-000
033-19256-007
033-19257-003
033-19258-000
033-19259-006
033-19260-004
033-19261-000
033-19262-007
033-19263-003
033-19264-000
033-19265-006
033-19266-002
033-19267-009
033-19268-005
033-19269-001
033-19270-000
033-19271-006
033-19272-002
033-19273-009
033-19274-005
033-19275-001
033-19276-008
033-19277-004
033-19278-000
033-19279-007
033-19280-005
033-19281-001
033-19282-008
033-19283-004
033-19284-000
033-19285-007
033-19286-003
033-19287-000
033-19288-006
Part Name
TORQUELIMITER
SUCTION CHAMBER
SUCTION PUMP UNIT
SUCTION TUBE
PUMPFILTER
EXIT UNIT
EXIT MOTOR UNIT
WING MOTOR UNIT
TIMING BELT
SPONGE ROLLER
WING FRONT
WING REAR
FLIPPER UNIT
FLIPPER GATE
FL ROLLER U
FL ROLLER L
STAR WHEEL DPX
PHOTOREFLECT B
PHOTOREFLECTOR
PHOTOREFLECTOR
PHOTOREFLECTOR
DPX ROLLER
NIP ROLLER
MICRO SWITCH
MICRO SWITCH
DUPLEX UNIT
DUPLEX BELT U
DUPLEX BELT L
DPX UNIT GEAR
TRANSFER UNIT
TRANSFER BELT
BELT ENCODER
TRANSFER MOTOR
CLEANING ROLLER
BLOWER FAN
LIFT GEAR UNIT
LIFT WORM GEAR
CCD UNIT
CCD SENSOR
MAIN MOTOR
SWBACK MOTOR
RESIST ROLLER L
RESIST ROLLER U
RESIST CLUTCH
PICKUP CLUTCH
DPX CLUTCH
DPX DRIVE GEAR
DUST FAN 1
DUST FAN 2
IDLER P
TIMING BELT R-P
TIMING BELT M-R
TIMING BELT M-C
TIMING BELT C-D
TIMING BELT DPX
SWBACK UNIT U
SWBACK UNIT L
SWBACK DRV ROLL
SWBACK DOOR UNIT

manuals4you.com
Preliminary
WWW.RISO.COM
Fig
1011
1011
1007
1016
1016
1005
1016
1016
1016
1011
1011
1001
1002
1002
1002
1016
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1005
1002
1005
1000
1000
1000
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1018
1003
1002
1018
1018
1003
1003
1003
1003
1003
9
10
4
1
2
1
3
4
5
11
12
6
6
7
8
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
9
12
3
1
2
12
6
7
5
1
11
9
2
10
3
8
12
4
29
30
8
18
7
Part Number
033-19289-002
033-19290-000
033-19292-003
033-19293-000
033-19294-006
033-19296-009
033-19297-005
033-19298-001
033-19299-008
033-19300-006
033-19301-002
033-19302-009
033-19303-005
033-19304-001
033-19305-008
033-19306-004
033-19307-000
033-19308-007
033-19309-003
033-19310-001
033-19311-008
033-19312-004
033-19313-000
033-19314-007
033-19315-003
033-19316-000
033-19317-006
033-19318-002
033-19321-003
033-19322-000
101-11003-004
101-50504-002
101-50505-009
101-50506-005
101-51035-006
101-51036-002
101-52001-008
101-52511-308
101-52513-009
101-52517-004
101-53000-005
444-33000-002
488-00054-004
488-00054-004
490-40002-005
610-10006-006
610-10007-002
612-11104-006
612-12103-003
634-06030-000
Part Name
TOP EDGE SENSOR
TOP EDGE LED
CCD AD CONV PCB
ORIP PCB
ORMC PCB
CONTROL PANEL
MOTOR DRV PCB
ORCNL PCB
ORCNR PCB
DOUBLE FEED LED
DBL FEED SENSOR
COUNTER
POWER SUPPLY
FUSE1
FUSE2
FUSE3
TOP COVER
INK COVER
RIGHT COVER
LEFT COVER
REAR COVER
FRONT DOOR R
FRONT DOOR L
INNER COVER 1
INNER COVER 2
INNER COVER 3
DRAIN INK TANK
SUPPORT BAR
SUPPORT STAND
INTLOCK JIG3
INTLOCK JIG4
Bracket; HDD; PS7R
Mainboad; PS7R
Power Supply Unit; PS7R
Joint PCB; PS7R
USB Cable; PS7R
HDD Harness; PS7R
DIMM168P128MB;PS7R
CD-ROM1.20;PS7R
HDD Unit; PS7R(G)
Dongle; PS7R(G)
Power Switch Assy; PS7R
*SENSOR; GP2A200LCS
Power Cable; PS7R
Power Cable; PS7R
109P0412H358
OWH 10-2.2NLW
OWH 10-2.2NRW
*GEAR; M0.8X18X6
*GEAR; M1X16X3.2
*COLLAR; 6x3

manuals4you.com
Preliminary
WWW.RISO.COM

14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual - Desbloqueado

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual - Desbloqueado

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Front Cover

Copyright: 2006 Riso Kagaku Corporation

RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)

1.Removal of covers ..........................................................................................2

First paper feed section

1.Standard paper feed tray mechanism.............................................................2

3.Remaining paper volume detection mechanism ............................................ 7

Multi-tray paper feed section

1.Machine configuration .................................................................................... 2

1-2.Removal of paper width VR (potentiometer) ....................................11

Second paper feed section

1.Mechanism of the second paper feed section ................................................2

21.Switchback drive roller ............................................................................... 47

Ink supply passages

1.Mechanism of ink supply passages................................................................ 2

7-2. <Removing ID solenoid valve > ......................................................41

1.Causes of main printing problems and corrective measures..........................2

Paper receiving section

1.Basic mechanism ........................................................................................... 2

Controller & power supply unit

1-2.Test Mode Menu List for HS2000 Scanner ......................................37

1.Overview of panel ...........................................................................................2

PCBs and Schematic diagrams

1.RISO Scanner HS2000...................................................................................2

3-1.Original Set Section ........................................................................... 6

CHAPTER 1: Maintenance Notes

20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

[ Replacement of the Lithium Battery ]

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION <Technical Training Section>

Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.

Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

Wire harness connector

Press the center, firmly.

20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

1-2.Speci al p reca ution s fo r c olor ink jet pri nters

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION <Technical Training Section>

20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

1-3.Other precauti ons for insp ectio n an d main tenan ce

Precautions for electrical work

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION <Technical Training Section>

interrupt type (U-shaped)

Magnetic sensor types

2-1. List of general tools

Shaft length, etc.

20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Shaft length, etc.

5 mm, 5.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm, 13 mm, adjustable

150 mm, 300 mm

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION <Technical Training Section>

2-2. List of speci al to ols for servicin g HC5500

HEAD ANGLE JIG

Transfer unit support jig

Interlock switch jig

Jig 2 : Center photo (1 pc) - left hand door removed.

Jig 3 & 4 : Bottom photo for - inner cover removed.

Printer unit lifting jig

Image adjustment utility software:

20 06/9 (Rev 2.1 )

Notebook PC (commercially available)

A4 size flatbed scanner (commercially available)

USB 2.0 cables: 2 types of cables (commercially available)

Cleaning wipes (commercially available)